
Insights from recent episode analysis
Audience Interest
Podcast Focus
Publishing Consistency
Platform Reach
Insights are generated by CastFox AI using publicly available data, episode content, and proprietary models.
Total monthly reach
Estimated from 3 chart positions in 3 markets.
By chart position
- 🇬🇷GR · Places & Travel#4710K to 30K
- 🇳🇿NZ · Places & Travel#154500 to 3K
- 🇨🇿CZ · Places & Travel#159500 to 3K
- Per-Episode Audience
Est. listeners per new episode within ~30 days
5.5K to 18K🎙 Weekly cadence·110 episodes·Last published 5mo ago - Monthly Reach
Unique listeners across all episodes (30 days)
11K to 36K🇬🇷83%🇳🇿8%🇨🇿8% - Active Followers
Loyal subscribers who consistently listen
3.3K to 11K
Market Insights
Platform Distribution
Reach across major podcast platforms, updated hourly
Total Followers
—
Total Plays
—
Total Reviews
—
* Data sourced directly from platform APIs and aggregated hourly across all major podcast directories.
On the show
Recent episodes
Alchemical History And Beautiful Architecture: Prague With Lisa M Lilly
Nov 20, 2025
Unknown duration
Blood, Wine, And Sacrifice: Folk Horror Inspired By England’s Biodynamic Vineyards With J.F. Penn And Natalie MacLean
Oct 28, 2025
Unknown duration
Mexico’s Day Of The Dead With Luisa Navarro
Oct 16, 2025
Unknown duration
Egypt Beyond the Pyramids And Glimpsing The Future In History With Sean McLachlan
Sep 25, 2025
Unknown duration
Facing Fears And Finding Resilience In Midlife: Long-Distance Walking With Zoe Langley-Wathen
Aug 28, 2025
Unknown duration
Social Links & Contact
Official channels & resources
Official Website
Login
RSS Feed
Login
| Date | Episode | Description | Length | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 11/20/25 | ![]() Alchemical History And Beautiful Architecture: Prague With Lisa M Lilly | What draws a mystery writer from Chicago to the cobblestone streets and alchemical history of Prague? How can a city’s mystical atmosphere inspire a novel, and what happens when grief follows you to one of Europe’s most beautiful destinations? Lisa M. Lilly shares how Prague captured her imagination, weaving the city’s gothic romance and ancient legends into her latest detective novel. From the astronomical clock that’s been marking time since 1410 to the legendary golem still said to rest in a synagogue, discover how this enchanting city became both a setting for fiction and a place of personal reflection. Lisa M. Lilly writes detective novels and supernatural thrillers, and also the author of Writing as a Second Career: Books for Writers. Her latest book, The Skeptical Man, features Prague in the Czech Republic How Prague’s architecture and eerie beauty immediately captivated a Chicago-based writer The city’s rich alchemical history and the famous golem legend, from medieval mysticism to modern AI parallels Navigating grief while traveling after losing a close friend Rooftop dining experiences and local Czech specialties, from monastery beer gardens to traditional duck restaurants Books about Prague including Wolf on a String, Prague the Mystical City, and more You can find Lisa at LisaLilly.com You can also take a day trip from Prague to Kutna Hora where you can find Sedlec Ossuary, or The Bone Church, which inspired my thriller, Crypt of Bone. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello Travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Lisa M. Lilly. Hi Lisa. Lisa: Hi. It’s so good to see you, and thank you for having me on the podcast. I’m really excited. Jo: Oh yeah, it’s going to be fun today. Just a little introduction. Lisa writes detective novels and supernatural thrillers, and also the author of Writing as a Second Career: Books for Writers. Her latest book, The Skeptical Man, features Prague in the Czech Republic, which we are talking about today. So Lisa, you are in America. Why were you drawn to visit Prague and research the city for this book? Lisa: It happened the other way around in a way. Two years ago, I went to Prague by way of Krakow because that was the main city we were going to. My travel companion and I went because my grandparents were originally from that area, came to the United States in the early 1920s or so. And I had never been. And so my friend Steve said, “Well, I’ve always wanted to see Prague, but let’s wrap that in too.” And I more or less just said, “Okay, yeah, that sounds good.” And from the second I saw the city, we took a train there from Paris, because we also went to Paris. I just saw the architecture and we came into Old Town. And I thought, “Oh, I’m going to want to come back here. This is a beautiful city.” And as we walked around, I was very intrigued by the history of alchemy in Prague and we did not get to the Alchemist Museum. That was on my list to go to next time. But I started thinking about it. All these story ideas – I’m very motivated by place and I had not even been sure I was going to write another book in the series right then. I was thinking of taking a break and all these story ideas started coming to mind and the more places we saw, the more I’d think, “Oh, this would be a great scene. This would be a great place to set something.” I think Prague is so beautiful and kind of eerie in some places that it just evokes so many ideas. St Charles Bridge and Prague Castle Photo by JFPenn Jo: Yeah, I think it’s interesting. Well, first of all, you said Krakow and you got the train from Paris. I mean, obviously Krakow’s closer. You could have got the train. Lisa: Well, we went Paris to Prague, Prague to Krakow. Jo: Oh, okay. Yeah, because it’s really – for people who might not know, you know, the Czech Republic is really right in the center of Europe, well connected with Germany, Austria, Poland, Slovakia. So, and the trains. And this always surprises me in America, because I’ve been over to the US a lot and the trains are terrible. Whereas in Europe, you could just get everywhere by train, right? So I love that you arrived by train as an American. Lisa: Well, it turned out for us, it wasn’t the best way to go because we had worked with this travel agent who specialized in trains because we thought, “Oh, trains would be great. We’d always heard this about Europe.” And it was in terms of connectivity, but she didn’t think to tell us we were doing this almost four-week trip, so we had tons of bags. We each had two big rolling bags, two smaller bags. And we were picturing – I know you’ve taken the Amtrak where you get the compartments and you could stow your bags above and check your bags. So we’re lugging all these bags and there’s nowhere to put them because — Jo: We all have backpacks! Lisa: Yeah, exactly. And people are just looking at us like, “What? What are you doing?” And there’s not a porter and we didn’t… so I would say to people, yeah, be prepared. I enjoyed the trip, and I talked to some people from Prague to Krakow. One of my favorite parts of the trip was talking to people in the compartment who were telling me – who were Polish and were telling me about all these traditions, and I’m asking them questions. It was wonderful. But yeah, don’t take eight bags. And don’t… yeah, do it if you’ve got like one bag and a backpack and know your stops. We got off on the wrong stop. We didn’t know there were two Dresden stops. So we’re out and we’re like, “Why can we not find this connection? We need to get to Prague.” But people were so helpful. I can’t tell you how many people offered to help me with a bag or like block the train door when they were going to close it on us because very serious in Germany about the train times or help me find… I just went up to someone and said, “I don’t know how to get the train to Prague” and they just happened to speak English and were taking that train and said, “Okay, follow, follow us.” Very patient. Very nice people. Just wonderful. Jo: Oh yeah. Well it sounds like you had an adventure in getting there. Lisa: It was. We flew the next time. Jo: Yeah. Okay, so let’s come back. So you said the moment you kind of saw the city and the architecture was all amazing. What were some of the highlights, like your favorite parts of the city? Lisa: Yeah. I loved, you know, this is very touristy, but I love the Charles Bridge because there’s just so much going on there. We walked through during the day and at night there are singers, we saw dancers. We saw a couple dressed up as a bride and groom doing a whole song and dance thing together, vendors. And of course I thought, “What a great place for a chase scene, a foot chase scene,” which ended up in my book. So I loved that. I loved the Old Town Square, the whole Old Town neighborhood. I really enjoyed… We went to see the – I’m sure you’ve seen it – the astronomical clock, which plays I think every half hour. And you can see all these figures coming out. And I think it’s the… Jo: I just wrote this down. It’s the from 1410, the world’s oldest working astronomical clock. Lisa: Yeah. It’s… and you see people just standing there watching, which is how we found it. We had trouble finding it because we came to the square in a direction where the way the buildings were and the churches, you couldn’t actually see it and finally saw all these people in this narrow area that’s along the side. That’s something else I love too, though, just the streets and how you could wander and you’d end up behind the buildings and come out another place. In Chicago where I live, we’re on a grid, so almost everything is square blocks, which is great for navigating but not as intriguing for walking around. So I love the cobblestone streets. I love the Prague Castle. I went there a number of times and we don’t have castles here either, so it’s very… that’s like a proper castle. Jo: Oh yeah. We should say, if you stand on St. Charles Bridge and look out, it sort of dominates the skyline there, doesn’t it? Lisa: It is what you think of as a castle and beautiful to see at night. And that reminds me just the river itself, the Vltava River. I found so peaceful. I spent a lot of time sitting by the river and reading and just watching it sparkle. And in any weather, just, I think it might be the prettiest river I’ve seen. The water seems so clear and it’s very tranquil. It’s also very shallow. I found out, so perhaps that’s why it looks so pretty. I don’t know. But the boat tours can’t go very far because they run into the bottom of the river. They just can’t keep going. Jo: You went this year as well, did you? Lisa: Yes. I went two years ago and went back this year and did a number of boat trips on it. Jo: I was there in 2015, so a decade ago. I don’t remember the river being low, but then I was there in the winter. And also this summer has been one of the driest. Lisa: Yes, I didn’t think about that. They were telling us as the river was low, and they did show us the different times that had flooded. We took one with a small boat where they could go into, I don’t know the right word, but the sort of offshoots of the river and would show us where the flooding had been and where the river level was at different points and that. Yeah, I didn’t think about that. It was very low when we went. Jo: And you’ve been both in the summer, both times? Lisa: Both in the summer in mid-May through mid-June. Just beautiful weather both times. We did a lot of rooftop dining, which you could see the whole city, and you could see the Prague Castle. And it’s particularly beautiful at night when the sun sets and it outlines the castle. Jo: Yeah, it’s very kind of gothic romance. But I was there in the winter, so we went for New Year and you don’t sit by the river reading in the winter. It is freezing. It’s proper furry hoods and boots kind of weather. But also you can eat outside, but there’s lots of heaters and things, so it’s very well set up for winter. Like a lot of people go at winter for the Christmas markets and that kind of thing. Lisa: Oh, I bet the Christmas market is… is it very big? Is it really something to see? Jo: Yeah, it’s something. Well that, yeah, it’s the square and all the little places, but again, quite touristy. But Prague’s also well known for its beer and general nightlife. Lisa: Oh yes. It’s funny, the other amazing thing was the monastery. I loved, you go upstairs and you see the cabinets of curiosity where the emperor had collected all these things that seemed very amazing and exotic from foreign lands. And then you see the notes and it’s like a fossil of some kind of fish that we know today. This is not a big deal, but people… they couldn’t travel the way you could now, and I love that. And they all these books that you can’t go into the area. But I loved seeing all the books and they kept saying to us, “Oh, you have to go. The monks make this wonderful beer, and you have to go to the beer garden.” I can’t tell you how many people told us that, and neither Steve nor I like beer. So we kept being like, “Well that sounds, that sounds wonderful.” And yeah, so many signs for beer. So apparently, if you like it, good place to try a lot of beer. Jo: It is. It’s definitely a beer capital of the world. So I mean, I guess one of the areas of the city is the Jewish quarter. I don’t know if you had a look around there. What about the Jewish Quarter? Lisa: We did get… the time that we went, there had been some incidents, they were limiting a lot of access, so we were only able to drive in and look at the main synagogue from the outside and we could see the gates to the cemetery. I would have really liked to go in. And our guide mostly was telling us about how much it has changed. But she told us some of the history. You probably know the story of the golem of Prague. She told us that story. There’s a number of versions. So the one that she told us was at the time the Emperor Rudolf II. This was like, I want to say 1500s. I hope I’ve got that right. He was very into alchemy and magic, and at the same time there was so much anti-Jewish sentiment trying to either drive the Jews out of Prague, or sometimes kill Jewish people, and yet he and the rabbi had something of a relationship. But the rabbi created the golem which was made of clay and brought it to life to help protect the people in the neighborhood. And the version, the story she told us was it could only act based on instruction. So by itself it just would stand there. And he gave it instructions, but it came the Sabbath and he forgot to tell it to stop. And it went on a rampage killing rampage, and he finally had to stop it at the end of the day and like not kill it, but deactivated it, I guess we’d say. And they say it’s still in the synagogue. That it’s still there. And the funny thing, I had heard the story from a friend who was writing a book that included it, that talked about it as the first robot. The idea of it only acts on instructions, and now our guide said it’s sort of like AI. It only does what you tell it to, but you have to be careful how you instruct it and what you tell it to do. Jo: That’s so interesting. I actually like that because the story goes that it’s sort of partly to do with Kabbalah, Jewish mysticism. And you put, he put letters, the rabbi put letters onto the golem. And that’s the thing that brought it to life and so it’s words that actually brought it to life, that this text is on it, this holy text. And so I kind of like that with the AI stuff because it’s words that are activating it. But, well, I went a decade ago and went into the cemetery, and I think it’s really interesting because it’s an area that’s obviously been affected by war, and Hitler didn’t destroy that area to keep it as “a museum for an extinct race.” That’s why it was preserved. And I mean, that in itself is just awful in many ways. And yet that cemetery there because it, as you say, it was a ghetto and the people were hemmed in, they, that goes sort of 10 deep and there’s so many gravestones in there and people put stones on in remembrance. Jewish Cemetery Prague Photo by JFPenn And so if people listening, if at some point we’re at another point in history where you can visit that cemetery, it’s an incredibly moving place. And quite different because it’s very, I guess dark. And then the Spanish synagogue, which you said you were on the outside, but the inside of the Spanish synagogue also sometimes called the Golden Synagogue because it’s just incredibly decorated and beautiful. Spanish Synagogue Prague Photo by JFPenn So yeah, I mean that Jewish quarter is fantastic. But yeah, the time in history that we are recording this, it’s a difficult time again. Which in itself is so… Lisa: Heartbreaking and devastating that so long later and the same things are still happening. She was telling us she would get invited to events there and had to have someone come out and vouch for her and show her ID and let her in because there’s so concerned, understandably, about terrorists coming into the synagogue. We did get to go to two other cemeteries, I’m going to say it wrong, but Vinohrady and Vyšehrad cemeteries and that was, well, I know you’ll understand this. One of the highlights of the trip for me in the sense of the beauty and seeing these gravestones, we don’t do too many of the above the ground gravestones in the US anymore. It’s all flat. But seeing like family names and this history of the family, and I was struck by so many people put their professions on the headstone, which is another thing that we don’t do here. Or at least I haven’t seen it much. And it really got me thinking about… I mean feeling connected in a way to, we see these stories of people so long after they’re gone. And the names, I grew up in a neighborhood, lots of immigrants, lots of Polish immigrants, lots of Bohemian immigrants, and so many of the names were, I’m like, “Oh, that’s the name, last name of this friend of mine in grade school.” And many of them were names I knew. Now were they related to the people I knew, maybe, probably not, maybe distantly, but it gave me that sense of great connection with history and with here we are across an ocean. And that sense of being part of the human family and especially in a time when everyone feels so divided it felt very peaceful and very connected and not as sad as I thought you would think, “Oh, this is sad. You’re looking at all these people who are gone.” But somehow it felt like having a place in that history. Jo: Yeah. That’s interesting. And yeah, I obviously, I find graveyards wonderful places to think about how short life is, and so we better make the most of it — memento mori. But you did mention in our emails that a friend of yours died while you were traveling and so you were also facing grief on your visit and thinking about her. How do you think travel almost helps with grief? Lisa: For me, it was in a way the perspective of feeling that larger connected sense and that life. The finiteness of life having, of course, we all know that. But I was getting this news about my friend who we had expected she had had a surgery that there was an expected recovery. And I’d seen her a number of times before I left and was sending her photos. She loved travel photos. She always was like, “Send me more, send me more.” And then they found other problems and she was gone very quickly just in a couple weeks. And some of that news I was getting while we were in the cemetery that the type of news where you look and say, “This is not good. Like this is probably, I’m not going to see her again.” And it was really sad because I could not then be there at the time and couldn’t be there for the wake and be there with the family. And at the same time, I would think, “Well, I know Julie. She loved travel. She loved hearing about travel, like she wouldn’t want me to spend this time, all of it, just feeling sad.” Of course, I felt sad and was grieving, but it was a reminder that and this is the only time I have, and this is the time to enjoy this or experience it, like don’t miss the experience I’m in because I’m also grieving and feeling sad that trying to maintain both at the same time. One of your podcasts helped me because I was feeling very sad and then I was feeling not guilty, but almost like, “Well, but I’m here. Like I’m missing it. And I shouldn’t be dwelling on this, but how can I not?” And I listened. I think it was your first one when you restarted the podcast and your guest said something about the difference between vacation and travel and that travel is not always fun. And it is not always, you don’t always have a great time, like you look forward and think, “Oh, everything’s going to be fantastic.” And it’s not, it’s sometimes challenging, and I think she was talking about other things, but she said, “There is that value. “You still have the value. Even if it is challenging, you are experiencing something and when you come back, you’ll have experienced this journey.” And it doesn’t all have to be so much fun and wonderful that it is still a valuable trip and not just. Helped me. It put it in perspective that I am still having this experience and I want to be present in it, even though I’m also having these feelings and this sadness and loss. Jo: No, I love that. I think that’s really great and something for us all to keep remembering as well. And perhaps even a city like Prague and many in Krakow is another great example, of cities that have suffered in many ways. Obviously we have war in Europe at the moment and so it’s not everything is wonderful all the time anyway. Lisa: Right, exactly. I kept telling myself that, I’m like, “Well, if I was home, I would likewise, I would be feeling sad and, yeah, life is not wonderful all the time.” Yeah, there are many wonderful things in it. And that that also, my friend who passed, she was really great at focusing on the wonderful things in life. We had a tradition every year of going to this steak dinner after volunteering at our law school. And for weeks before, she’d say, “Oh my God, I can’t wait to that dinner. Like, they have such great food. Let’s get this as an appetizer, and oh, so-and-so will be there and tell us stories.” And then a month after, she’d say, “Wasn’t that a great time? Like, didn’t we have, remember this thing.” And so I thought about that a lot too. Like she had lots of ups and downs, but she chose to think and remember and anticipate, and I thought “That’s what I need to do. Like think about, oh, these were the great parts of the trip. This is what I really enjoyed.” Jo: I think that’s really interesting and almost you are honoring her by enjoying the time that you had there and yet, I wonder how many, as I was talking to someone recently who was like, “Oh, I really just want to go to this particular place.” And I’m like — “Well, why don’t you make a plan to do it because we’re not getting any younger, and you don’t know when something might happen like it did to your friend, or you don’t know when just things change.” And so I’m like, “Well, you just make a plan, and you save up the money. You book a ticket. We’re very lucky to live in a world where you are going to be able to get to most of the places that people want to get to.” So do you think sometimes we find it easier to honor other people than honoring ourselves? Like giving ourselves that kind of grace? Lisa: Yeah. I do, I feel like it’s almost giving, it’s like this person outside of you giving you that permission or that reminder. And especially for me, I’m someone who tends toward anxiety, which is all about thinking about what could go wrong. And I often deal with it by thinking of friends who think very differently than I do. And I think so now I will think, “Well, how would Julie approach this?” Or I have other friends who will think, “How would this person think about this?” And it helps because. You know, and why can’t I just tell myself to do it? I don’t know. But it works better when I think of that other person. And maybe it is what you said, it’s like someone else giving you permission and saying, “Hey, it’s okay. Like you can let go of. Oh my God, I’ve got to be sure. I know I’m prepared for everything that might go wrong or everything that might happen,” which is, you know, when travel, I always have a lot of anxiety going up to travel because I’m like, “Did I do this? Did I get that?” And then I’ll say, “You cannot prepare for everything. That’s part of it.” Jo: Something else, most people are lovely and they will want to help you. Like wherever you are in the world generally, people are just nice and they want to help you. Lisa: Yeah, I really have found that. I mean, of course here and there, you meet someone who’s not, which is also true at home. But yeah, for most people, for all that, people will say to me, “Well, do they like tourists there?” I’m like, “I don’t, I mean, people seem very nice. They seem glad that we’re there, and if they don’t like us, they’re hiding it really well.” Jo: I mean, it’s a tourist destination, right? It’s a tourist industry. Lisa: Yeah. It’s part of what they do. I actually found in Prague particularly, people are, yes, very friendly and seem very, either they’re really, they seem actually really happy at their jobs. So maybe working conditions are better there. And it also might be that they do appreciate this is part of the way, this is especially the Old Town area, it’s a lot of it is tourists and so it’s how people are making their living. Jo: For sure. Well, just, I guess coming back on the city in terms of the literary side of things, there’s obviously the Franz Kafka Museum is one of the top places. Any thoughts on the literary side? Lisa: Yeah, you see Kafka everywhere. Everywhere. And I have to confess, we did not go to the museum. Not that I dislike Kafka, but he’s not my first choice for reading. But yeah, there is so much. I read a book before I went this time in between the two trips that a guide that I work with both times recommended and it’s called Wolf on a String. So I wrote down the author and, let me look here. Benjamin Black and it is set in that time at the Emperor Rudolf II. And it is about this kind of amateur alchemist or someone who pretends to be an alchemist, but it has so much history and a lot of it is in the Prague Castle. So I was very excited to go there and my guide was pointing out, “Oh, this is where the small, they called them houses, but it was basically a room that was bordered on the outside and this is where they stayed. And this is what was called the Golden Row or the Golden Alley. And here’s why.” And that was really exciting. She took me to, took us to a place called The Alchemist, which borders on a courtyard where a very famous alchemist. Last name was Kelly. Lived in a tower and served the king. So everywhere. If you read anything about Prague odds are you’re going to be able to go there and find that place and still find traces of it. The place we went had alchemy symbols all over the wall, so you could go and trace that. And I love that so much of history is still there. When a historical novel you would read, you can go and visit. This is, again, probably not as much of a novelty to people who live in Europe. But here there’s so many things are just. It’s old if a building’s a hundred years old, and there I’m seeing these things from the 1300s. Jo: Yeah. And many of them very well preserved as well. I think, you know, there are a lot of them there. But it’s funny, I mean, like you say, Chicago, I remember the first time I went to Chicago, gosh, in the nineties, and I just, I love the skyscrapers and you can go on architecture tour of modern architecture. It’s just a very different view, isn’t it? You can see beauty of a different kind. Whereas I feel, you know, here we feel like — We live in a museum here in Europe. Lisa: Yes. That’s how it feels when I visit. So I kind of feel better that you say that too. Oh, because always think do, do people look at us and be like, “What? When, why are you so enthralled with this?” Jo: I find it beautiful, you know, I live in Bath where we’ve got like 2000 year old Roman baths down the road, so. Lisa: Yeah. And that point about beauty, I think that is what I love traveling, is I, yeah. One of the reasons I love Chicago is I love the architecture. I love the buildings. I love that we have a river, and I’ll take boat tours, architectural boat tours, and just see what else I learn. There’s always more buildings going up, but I go somewhere like Prague and it’s a very different architecture. It’s in some ways. There’s more continuity because much of it is still standing and more is built, but it’s built along the same lines and you have the cobblestone streets and it’s a totally different kind of beauty. But both places, I look around and think, “Oh, I’m so lucky to be here. I’m so lucky to see this.” Paris, same thing. I feel like so many cities have beautiful architecture. And I have to say in the US, that is not necessarily true. Most cities I go to having grown up where I did, I look around and I’m like, “Wait, what? This is the city. Where are the, where are the amazing buildings?” Jo: That’s true. That’s true. But just coming back, so earlier you said you weren’t so much into the beer, but — What food and drink you did enjoy since you said you were eating outside? Lisa: Yeah. My travel partner and I, we tend to plan trips around where we’re going to eat. We will make these restaurant reservations. So we went to, it’s called Miru. It is only open two months of the year on the rooftop of the Four Seasons Hotel. And last time we were there, we missed it. And this time we were able to go, and it is, they have maybe four or five tables only, and it’s one of these tasting menus. So each course is very small and very beautiful, and they have a drink paired with each, so wine at one point, sake, which I admit I could only have a sip of. And I was like, “Okay, that’s all for that.” But it’s at night. So you have the beautiful view of the castle and each dish is, you know, it might be salmon, but it’s salmon with a little bit of caviar and some tuna foam and something else. All very elaborate and fancy so that if you just want an experience for a night, it’s wonderful. This is also touristy, but there is a steak house there that is some of the best steak I ever had. It’s called George Prime, and ironically, the steak is from the Midwest in the United States. But it’s, it was, it’s something about the way they make it. I don’t know. Excellent. And we did two other rooftop restaurants. One is called Coda on the roof of the Aria Hotel and everything is music themed. The food is very good. Like I had a farm raised chicken that was wonderful. But it’s also just to be up there outside. And if you get a plate, every plate has a different drawing of a different musician on it. And the menu is music themed, so a little bit touristy, but but it is that’s good. Very fun. And then one, really good local place. Krčma U Fleku, I think, is it? It’s known for its duck. So if you Google duck and Prague and mostly locals there, like we heard mostly Czech being spoken, if you like duck, wonderful duck and wonderful atmosphere. It reminded me, again, as a kid, I went to a number of, if there was a party, it would be in a banquet and often in a Bohemian banquet hall. And I walked in and I’m like, “Oh, these are the furnishings that I grew up with. This is like being at my aunts and uncle’s houses only stepped up fancy and really, really good food there.” So if you like Bohemian food or Polish food or Czech, that’s a great place to go. I think duck is definitely… Jo: Duck is the thing for that region. Lisa: Yeah, really good. Jo: Yeah, that’s great. That’s fantastic. So this is the Books and Travel show. You mentioned Wolf on a String. Are there other books that you would recommend that are about or set in Prague or the area? Jo: Yeah, for research, so between the trips, when I decided to set something in Prague, I got a book called Prague, the Mystical City. It was written in 1970. It goes through 1983. I forget the publication date, but it covers the city 1907 to 1983 and I, it’s at least 10 years old, but it really gives you that feel of Prague. It talks a lot about the history of alchemy and magic and how alchemy worked into science, how much the alchemists were the basis of so many scientific and chemistry advances later. And it really gives you that feel for Prague if you want to read nonfiction. Interestingly, AI hallucinated for me, other books by the same author, and I was like, “Oh my God, that is a great book.” And I went hunting and hunting and I even asked like a librarian at the local university and she’s like, “Yeah, I think it made this up.” But that’s how I found this one. I was like, “Okay.” And the other book I just happened to read, I don’t know if you read the All Souls Trilogy. It started with A Discovery of Witches, so the third… Jo: Deborah Harkness. Lisa: Right. Deborah Harkness. And this book, they go back, I don’t think this is too much of a spoiler. I’m not going to tell any plot things, but they go back in time and they’re in Prague in the same time period. Somehow I kept running into this same time period with the Emperor Rudolf. And there is a golem in it and it is, she meets a number of these historical figures. So if you are interested in like supernatural books, I would read the first two first, but it was very neat and I just happened to read it maybe six months before coming back to Prague. So I love that one as well. And of course, Wolf on a String, I will say Wolf on a String. It has a mystery. So I like that. It is a bit bleak, a little bit bleak for me. So I persisted because I wanted to read about the city. And it is an interesting story. But, if you want something more uplifting, maybe, maybe not, maybe not that, maybe not. But if you’re good with a lot of darkness, then go with it. Jo: And we should say as we record this is not out yet, but The Secret of Secrets by Dan Brown is supposedly set opens in Prague. So we shall, I shall be reading that when it comes out. Lisa: I am so excited about that. You had mentioned that in the email and somehow I didn’t know that until you said it. And yeah, I cannot wait to get that. I love his books anyway. And now to read it in Prague, that will be wonderful. Jo: And so your book, The Skeptical Man also has some scenes set there. But tell us a bit more about that. Because it’s also across the US as well, isn’t it? Lisa: Yes, most of it is in the US. I had never, this is the seventh book in my mystery series. I had never taken the characters outside of the United States and I was going to take a bit of a break because the sixth book was kind of a big thing that a mystery was solved that had been running. And taking this trip in the back of my mind, I always had this idea about a magician as the victim, as the murder victim. A magician who also debunks psychics a little bit like there was a real magician who did that. The Amazing Randi and I used a little bit of his life as a model. So when I went to Prague, I thought, “Oh, how interesting it would be if some of the people that are suspects are somehow connected to like a psychic.” I didn’t decide was it going to be a genuine psychic or someone who was a little bit of a little bit of a little scammy. And something about being in Prague, I started thinking, “Oh, what what if there was a whole network that was based here and that played into this magician’s death.” He had crossed paths with these people and it. It really inspired me. So in the story, the detective QC Davis is asked to try to solve this murder by a friend. She’s a lawyer, she’s a friend who’s a judge, and it’s her husband who has been killed. And they wonder like, is it someone he does this debunking of psychics? Is it somebody that he exposed that came after him, or of course there are other suspects as well in other parts of his life. And the Prague part, I just had such fun with, oh, the character’s going to get out of Chicago mostly she’s in Chicago, she’s going to get out and go somewhere else. And how would that be for her as not a world traveler? She has a friend who does a lot of world travel, so you know, it’s her taking her along and being like, “Hey, this’ll be fine. We’ll do this.” Jo: Oh, cool. Oh, well I’m glad you got to weave it in. Where can people find you and your books online? Lisa: You can find my fiction and nonfiction and my podcast, which is about Buffy the Vampire Slayer and story, at lisalilly.com Jo: Fantastic. Thanks so much for your time, Lisa. That was great. Lisa: Thank you. It was great to be on with you. The post Alchemical History And Beautiful Architecture: Prague With Lisa M Lilly appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 10/28/25 | ![]() Blood, Wine, And Sacrifice: Folk Horror Inspired By England’s Biodynamic Vineyards With J.F. Penn And Natalie MacLean | What would you sacrifice for the perfect vintage? Can ancient pagan rituals and biodynamic winemaking create something truly extraordinary—or terrifying? In this conversation from the Unreserved Wine Talk podcast with Natalie Maclean, award-winning author J.F. Penn discusses the inspiration for her folk horror novel Blood Vintage, set in the vineyards of Somerset, England. We explore the dark side of viticulture, from poisonous plants and blood sacrifices to the hard realities of small-scale winemaking and the mysterious practices of biodynamic agriculture. J.F. Penn is the award-winning, New York Times and USA Today bestselling author of thrillers, dark fantasy, crime, horror, short stories, and travel memoir. Jo lives in Bath, England and enjoys a nice G&T. New Zealand wine memories. Pinot Noir tours in South Otago, including Mount Difficulty and Peregrine Vineyard, paired with wild venison and legendary Bluff oysters The birth of Blood Vintage. How a tour of Woodchester Valley vineyard, frost candles, and a note in the ancient Domesday Book sparked a dark story English wine’s climate change renaissance. How warming temperatures are making England’s sparkling wines competitive with Champagne. Inside biodynamic winemaking, inspired by a visit to Limeburn Hill Vineyard, Chew Magna, Somerset. From burying cow horns to dynamisation rituals and creating a self-contained ecosystem The dangers and romance of viticulture, and for more on this, check out the interview with Caro Feely, The Taste of Place. Folk horror and the ‘terroir’ of terror. Exploring the question at the heart of the book: What would you sacrifice to create (or taste) the perfect vintage? You can find Blood Vintage on all platforms in all formats now. This discussion was first broadcast across two episodes on Unreserved Wine Talk with Natalie Maclean in Oct 2024 [Blending biodynamics and suspense; Wine and folklore]. You can also watch the full interview on video. Transcript of the interview Natalie: Jo (J.F.) Penn is an award-winning New York Times and USA Today bestselling author of horror, thrillers, dark fantasy, crime, and travel memoir, as well as short stories. She’s also an award-winning podcaster. Her podcast is amazing, by the way—The Creative Penn. I listen to it every week, and you should too, if you have any interest in books or reading. She has a Master’s in Theology from the University of Oxford, and her latest novel is called Blood Vintage. It’s a folk horror story set in an English vineyard. I just finished reading it and it’s wonderful, Jo. You are joining us now from your home in Bath, which is nestled in the beautiful countryside of Somerset, England, about a hundred miles west of London. Welcome, Jo. I’m so glad you’re here with us. Jo: Oh, I’m so excited, Natalie. An excuse to drink wine with a friend! New Zealand Wine Experiences Natalie: Before we dive into your book, tell us about the Pinot Noir tours and festivals in the South Otago region that you attended while you were living in New Zealand. Jo: I lived in New Zealand for six years, from 2000 to 2006. It was one of those mid-twenties “go backpacking, fall in love, stay, get married, get divorced, get remarried” stories. You understand? Natalie: Oh wow, you were busy! Jo: Yes, exactly. But I did a Pinot Noir tour in South Otago, and it is quite a famous region for the Pinot Noir grape. I wanted to tell you about two particular vineyards. One is called Mount Difficulty, which is a wonderful name in that region because the mountains—the Remarkables—are really high and it’s a pretty hardcore walking region, skiing region in the winter. And the other one is called Peregrine Vineyard. It’s a beautiful region for the nature, but Peregrine have created this incredible architecture. The roof of the winery is shaped like the wings of a peregrine falcon, and I particularly remember that tour. For people who don’t know, it’s out of Queenstown in the very southeast of New Zealand. So it’s really far south. Gets very cold in the winter, but highly recommended. And you are the best at pairing, but I was going to pair it with New Zealand wild venison, which is something you get a lot of around there. Have you tasted the New Zealand Pinots? Natalie: Oh, I love them. New Zealand is better known for Sauvignon Blanc, but I think the Pinot Noirs are even more spectacular. They’ve got this nervy, edgy acidity that I love. It’s almost like the wine vibrates in your glass, and it’s so food-friendly because acidity is to wine what salt is to food. It brings forward flavor. Gorgeous wines, absolutely. Jo: Since you mentioned the Sauvignon Blanc, I also wanted to recommend a very specific New Zealand oyster as a pairing with that, which is the Bluff oyster. And I think you like oysters, right? Natalie: I write about them, yeah. It’s the one thing I can’t get past—it’s a texture thing. But anyway. Jo: Okay, for people who love oysters who are listening, I love oysters. I’ve eaten oysters all over the world, and the Bluff oyster in New Zealand has a very short winter season, but it is incredible to me. It is the best, and I have a vivid memory of drinking a Sauvignon Blanc with a Bluff oyster—maybe a whole dozen oysters—on Lake Wakatipu in the winter sun. So I highly recommend that pairing as well, and it’s very hard to get them anywhere else in the world. Bluff oysters New Zealand Photo by JFPenn Natalie: Oh wow. I’ll have to make a note of that. My husband likes oysters, so we’ll do that. I love that. Great evocative image there that carries through with your book. Introducing Blood Vintage Natalie: So let’s set the stage for your book, Blood Vintage. You did a serious amount of research into biodynamic winemaking and winemaking generally. Before we talk about that, maybe share the overview of the book story with us, please. Jo: This is the back of the book. Blood Vintage is a special edition, so I shall read it for you: The perfect vintage requires the darkest sacrifice. In the rolling hills of Somerset, England, an ancient evil ripens alongside the grapes of Standing Stones Cellars. Rebecca Langford never expected her architectural career to lead to the secluded rural village of Windbridge Hollow. But after a violent clash with eco-activists, she flees the chaos of London, desperate for a new start. She seeks refuge at Standing Stone Cellars, a vineyard renowned for its award-winning wines and mysterious history, nestled in the shadow of ancient oaks and standing stones that have watched over the land for millennia. But this vineyard is no sanctuary. From the primal fires of Beltane to the chilling shadow of Samhain, Rebecca finds herself ensnared in an ancient cycle of sacrifice and rebirth. The disappearance of her fellow workers, amidst evidence of blood rites, forces her to confront a horrifying truth: Standing Stone’s exceptional vintage is nourished by more than just sunlight and soil. As the veil between worlds grows thin, Rebecca must make an impossible choice: embrace the dark legacy of the vineyard and secure her place amongst its guardians, or risk becoming the next offering to the insatiable horned god that demands his due. Blood Vintage is an atmospheric descent into folk horror where the line between sacred and profane blurs with each sip of wine. Lose yourself in a world where pagan ritual and modern ambitions collide, and discover the terrible price of belonging in a place where the very earth demands blood.” Natalie: Ooh, I love that. That is such a great description that really captures it—so atmospheric, so dark and brooding, and yet, bonus for us who love wine, wine is running right through it, woven into it. Wine Pairings for the Book Natalie: Before we dive into that, I’m itching to get there. You selected a wine to pair with your book, as have I. So let’s hear about yours first. What is it? Jo: Yes, the blood vintage itself would be the Samhain wine from Limeburn Hill Vineyard. We’re going to come back to that, but that’s really hard to get. So I’ve gone with the Pinot Rosé from Woodchester Valley, which is where the original idea came from. I love a rosé, and we’ll obviously talk about where this has come from. I have my glass ready. This has been chilled. Woodchester Valley, Pinot Rosé—and I read about it, it’s 100% Pinot Précoce, the early Pinot Noir. Natalie: Oh, lovely. I love a rosé. I’ve chosen a more brooding, darker wine for you and your book. This is from Italy because we just don’t get many English wines here in Canada. But this one, the label has a woman and her hair is in flames because fire is a metaphor, but also the sun. Stars are all around her. It comes from the Donna Fugata winery in Italy, which means “fugitive woman” or “woman on the run,” which I think Rebecca is a little bit—from her architectural career and she’s escaping out to the countryside with the vineyards. Anyway, lots of metaphors, but I love the labels on this. So let’s have a sip to get going here. Cheers! Jo: Oh, you have a goblet there! Natalie: Yes, my special glass. I bought this 20 years ago. I was in Prague with a friend of mine. It was winter, and I saw these glasses. I drank a lot more red wine at the time, and I was like, this is perfect, I love these. And this is one of those times where, you know, I’m backpacking—do I really want to take glass anywhere? But we had such a lovely trip, and these memories of drinking together are important. So that’s the story of the glass. I know it’s not perfect for rosé, we’re not going to get technical here. Natalie: But for those who want to know, an ideal glass is clear and has a big enough bowl so that you can swirl it. But I love the goblet. Very atmospheric, very apt. Very blood vintage! Jo: Very gothic. That’s lovely. Natalie: Okay, tell us what drew you to this story in the first place. Where were you? Oh wait, I haven’t had a sip yet. Okay, yes. Jo: Oh, it’s really tasty. It’s very strawberry. You are much better at these tasting notes than I am, but I can definitely taste strawberries. Natalie: Strawberries, absolutely. That is the essence of a good, fresh rosé. It makes your mouth water. It’s like fresh berries, sunshine, and the opposite of the mood of your book. Although your book is not a downer, it’s just very gripping and thrilling. The Origin Story at Woodchester Valley Natalie: So tell us more about where this idea came to you. Jo: Yes, Woodchester Valley is a small vineyard. Most of the vineyards in England are smaller, although they’re getting bought up as many of these things do. But this is a small one, and the Cotswolds is in the southwest of England. It’s an area of outstanding natural beauty, which is a distinction of certain areas, and you would absolutely recognize it. It’s the kind of chocolate-box England with the green rolling hills—lots of green because it does rain—but also sunnier. There are lots of stone buildings, cows wandering around. It’s pastoral, but also enough hills. Woodchester Valley Vineyard, Stroud, England. July 2024 Photo by JFPenn I went to Woodchester Valley with my dad and my stepmom. My husband drove, so my dad and my stepmom and I drank, and we went to the vineyard. It was July, so the grapes were tiny little green bits—they weren’t full yet. Excuse my language, which is not perfect. Natalie: That’s okay. You’re a fiction writer, not a wine writer. So that’s all good. Jo: I describe it better in writing than in spoken words. But anyway, we went there for a wine tasting. And one of the first things they said was this area of vines was south-facing and it was beautiful. And they told us about the frost candles—the bougies, I think they’re called—where in the winter, they get these beeswax candles that are very good for the environment. They put them in amongst the vines to stop the frost and to stop them killing the bud break, I think it’s called. And I was like, oh my goodness. In my mind I could see the frost candles and I had some story going off in my brain. So that was one little thing. And then we walked past the crushing equipment and the bottling thing where they do the pétillant naturel, I think it is, and they turn the bottles. And I was like, oh, that could explode. Jo: And then they told us about this ancient part of the vineyard that they own where we couldn’t visit. And I was like, ooh, I’ve got to know about that. And it turns out—this is owned by a female vineyard owner, Fiona—she found a mention of this area in the Domesday Book. If you don’t know, it’s an 11th-century document that was essentially a tax record so they could tax people on land. And there’s a vineyard in this area from the 11th century. And so I was like, oh my goodness. And then of course, the Romans brought vines to this area. So in my mind I was like, there has to be some ancient ritual in this place. That’s where it came from. Natalie: Oh, that’s marvelous. And you were already painting a picture with all those visuals and the mystery, the history, everything. The Rise of English Wines Natalie: So say a little bit more before we continue about the rise of English wines. Of course, climate change means a lot of marginal wine-growing regions are getting warmer and therefore it’s easier to ripen grapes. As I said, we rarely get them here in Canada yet. Hopefully we will in the future. But how large is the industry? What’s going on? Jo: Yeah, what’s going on? Basically, as you mentioned, climate change. They told us this in the Woodchester tour—that the climate here now in the south of England is the same as the Champagne-growing region in France. So it’s English sparkling wines that are winning the awards, and in fact, in blind tastings, they’re often beating out some of those French sparklings. And what’s also interesting is French vineyards are buying up land and vineyards here in England because as climate change happens, they’re looking for new vineyards. But I did look up the numbers. It’s 8 to 10 million bottles out of the UK and around 800 tiny vineyards. And I looked up Canada, so you are 60 to 70 million bottles. So we are like a sixth of the Canadian output, but obviously you’ve got a much, much bigger country. Natalie: We do, yes. Jo: But compared to New Zealand, obviously New Zealand is a tiny country and has a huge wine industry, and it’s a lot bigger than both Canada and England. So I’m hoping that over time, one of the benefits of climate change might mean more English wine. But now if you go to English pubs, wine bars, you can buy English wine, it’s in the supermarkets. So I hope that you can get some over there. Natalie: That’d be great. And I’ve heard they’re even planting vineyards in Scotland these days. Jo: Yes, there’s one, a biodynamic vineyard in Wales as well, near where I am. Jo: But just to come back to the Romans, because I think this is really interesting for people and why the spirit of the land is so important here—the Romans brought vines here between 43 AD and 400 AD, 1,600-2,000 years ago. And in fact, where I live in Bath, it used to be called Aquae Sulis. We have a 2,000-year-old Roman bath in the center of my city. So the land where I stand and where these vines are and where the book is set have this ancient history that’s now coming back to life. Natalie: Yeah. All the ancient relics being discovered and buried in some of these vineyards and so on. The Performance of The Bacchae Natalie: So back to your story at Woodchester Valley. They mentioned you couldn’t go in that part of the vineyard, which of course immediately sparked curiosity and probably the desire to go in that vineyard. You said it also reminded you of a performance of The Bacchae. Tell us about that. What’s the connection? Jo: Yeah, so that night—and of course my dad and me and my stepmom, we drank a few of the wines, we tasted in a proper way and no spitting—that night I remembered, it’s funny how these memories come back to you. I remembered a performance of The Bacchae, which is an ancient Greek tragedy, again, many thousands of years old. And in it, Bacchus—Greek god of wine and fertility and all these kind of wonderful things—and in it, the worshipers of Bacchus in a ritual, they go mad essentially, and they rip apart a man instead of a deer. And this kind of gave me another thought about these sort of pagan rituals that go on around wine. And again, in our Western society, we have Christianity and Judaism, both of which use wine in religious ritual. So using wine in religious ritual as a sacrament is normal for most people. But in terms of taking it further into where you are on a different plane of consciousness, I just thought this was super interesting. Also, the fertility stuff and the vines and wild nature. I love wild nature. I think it’s fascinating. You’ve been in these vineyards all over the place, and it’s the wild sections that I find really interesting because they might be all manicured in places, and then there’s these kind of bits that are fascinating. And it’s a perfect symbol. Natalie: For the balance in life between restraint and thinking, and the wildness, the fierceness of nature and the body—the mind versus the body. All the metaphors are working for you in this one. That’s fantastic. And where were you watching that play? It was back when you were a high school student, right? Jo: Yes. And I think that’s why it’s funny when these memories emerge, and there’s a kind of human brain thing, isn’t it? You think about something and it sparks something else. Yeah, I studied Greek, ancient Greek and Latin and classical civilization when I was 14 to 16. And then I went on and did theology, and reading ancient Greek was very useful. But we went to see this performance at an actual replica of a Roman amphitheater, and it was performed in ancient Greek. And I still remember it very vividly. It was at another school, and it’s one of those occasions where you think if I was watching it now, I’d be very cynical and I’d be like, that’s a bit crap, like school kids doing a performance. But in my mind and in my memory, it was so powerful to see what happened in this ceremony. And so it really stuck in my mind. The Dangers of Winemaking Jo: And I have another podcast called Books and Travel, and I interviewed a vintner, Caro from Chateau Feely in France, and she was telling me about all the different ways that you can get injured and die in a vineyard. And that kind of came into my head as well, that all these things mush together when you are a writer and they pop out at different times and one thing sparks another. Natalie: And wine itself is all about the smell, and smell is tied to memory. It’s going to touch off like a spark point, bringing you right back to a place or a time. It’s very powerful. Okay, you just said she was talking about all the ways to die, so wine lovers also have grim imaginations, especially if we’ve got a bad bottle or something. But tell us about all the ways you discussed with Carly about the ways you could die in a vineyard, so we know what to watch out for on our next trip to a winery. Jo: I think she was talking about how people—it was the idea of blood. You can get cut on quite a lot of these equipment, pruning things. And the machines that go through the vineyard, if you use them, and the shot—the glass. Even the glass and shattering of glass, the bottles. Sparkling wine can explode in the cellar. And in fact, that was one of my rewrites—the exploding of the wine that gets turned in the riddling rack, I think it’s called, isn’t it? Natalie: Yeah, it is. Jo: Which is cool. And then in those wine barrel rooms, one of those could slip, and some of those are super heavy barrels. You could definitely get crushed under one. Natalie: And people have been known to fall into vats and not drown, but actually asphyxiate because it’s all CO2, and it’s quite deadly to be around a winery. I never thought about it that way, but you’re right. And the bottles, they can explode because they’re under pressure. The bubbles create the pressure. It’s 90 pounds per square inch—the equal of city bus tires—and it’s going under a second fermentation, adding more and more pressure under that glass. So if that’s not solid, you get exploding bottles for sure. Jo: Yeah. And it’s very interesting because obviously I’m an author and I sit at my desk and I don’t have much that can kill me in my day job. But I just love researching all this. And I think one of the things that really came home to me in doing this research and going to vineyards was it’s such hard work. It’s seriously hard work. There’s this romance about, “Oh, when I get rich I’ll just have a vineyard or whatever.” And it’s so much work. And then also so much investment in all the equipment and all the things you need. And I think that really impressed upon me how difficult it was, but also how tired these people must be during the harvest time and all that. And yes, be careful out there in your vineyard. Natalie: Absolutely. And we share a personal trainer, so this is just bringing to mind the hard physical work of a vineyard. I always thought you could design a workout program around wine, so you’d have abs of stainless steel. Jo: I’ve got a bit of a workout here on my arm. That’s biceps, right? Natalie: Thanks, Dan! Discovering Limeburn Hill Biodynamic Vineyard Natalie: But so you live an hour’s drive away from one of England’s few biodynamic vineyards. Tell us about that. Jo: So this is really special. Limeburn Hill Vineyard, biodynamic, and it is certified. And I know you’ve had someone on the show to talk about biodynamics quite recently. In fact, I was listening to that earlier. Limeburn Hill Biodynamic Vineyard June 2024 Photo by JFPenn But essentially this is in the Chew Magna area near me. It’s again limestone. The Romans were working in that area. So again, very ancient land. It has 3,000 vines, hand-planted. It’s run by a couple, Robin Snowden and Georgina Harvey, and I went and spent a day there. I did a course on biodynamic wine growing, and it was full of wine people. And then I was like, “I’m writing a novel.” And Robin was very patient with me, especially when I said, “Oh, where do you bury the bones?” He was like, “Okay, I’ll show you.” The Wines Named After Celtic Festivals Jo: But I think what’s—first of all, their wines are pétillant naturel, I think that’s it. It’s a lightly fizzy wine, fermented in the bottle. And their wines, they have three wines named after those festivals: Beltane, Lammas, and Samhain. So these are Celtic festivals. And so I saw, and one’s a white, one’s an orange rosé, and one is the red—the Samhain, the winter wine, which I think is Pinot Noir. Limeburn Hill vineyard wines Photo from Instagram @laffinage.co.uk And so I went there and I saw these wines and that gave me ideas. But then also they explained what biodynamics is and the Rudolf Steiner method of really just the holistic view of the vineyard as a contained ecosystem. And they were taking this very seriously. So they had wild bees because it’s all the natural yeast in the area. There’s no extra stuff they do. They have these little sheep that run around eating things—lamb mowers. Wildflowers. And I was just super impressed by, again, how much work this is, but also the ecosystem of the land. It was beautiful. It was so beautiful, a wonderful day. And again, the sort of romantic idea, but he demonstrated the biodynamization, they call it, which is a stirring thing where they stir for a minute in one direction and then the other direction. And he had the books out with all the sun and the moon and the planting and the energies that go into it. And this was all just fascinating to me. That is Limeburn Hill Vineyard, and they do tours and courses and things. Again, their wine is very hard to get. It’s served at a lot of independent restaurants, cafés, and things like that. But they’re fascinating. And I should say there was no sacrifice. Natalie: Yeah, I was going to say— Jo: No blood sacrifice, no “You can’t go into that part of the vineyard, that’s where our former tasting-room staff members are buried.” Natalie: Right! Jo: But they did honor the land. They had an area which was a kind of sacred area, a sacred grove. And obviously there is the place where they bury the horns, and there are some preparations with skulls and things. So there’s just some weird stuff going on in biodynamics. But fascinating. Understanding Biodynamic Preparations Natalie: Yeah, absolutely. So just say a little bit more, if you remember it from your course—they bury the bull’s horns and the skulls and put things in them? Jo: Yes. So I do remember, Preparation 500 is the cow horn. So each of these preparations are made from animal parts—stomachs, bladders, intestines, skulls. And then you fill them with manure or certain plants like yarrow, chamomile, different things. And that should be growing on your land as well. So it’s all a contained ecosystem. And then you basically bury the horns in the winter, or the skulls you put in a wet place, like under some running water. And then after a certain amount of time, it gives you some stuff like compost, and then you put that in the dynamization and you turn it into a tea, and then you spray it on either the roots or the leaves or whatever you need. Biodynamic preparation area, Limeburn Hill vineyard, June 2024 They also use quartz. And if anyone listening is like, “Oh, she’s butchering this,” what’s so fascinating is you might think, oh, that is just weird, strange stuff. But when you think about the vineyard as an ecosystem and the real terroir, the sense of place that they’re trying to put into every single drop of the wine, why would you bring in something from the outside? And then the natural way of making these sprays and these treatments. And Robin was saying very much that you go out and you get to know the vine, and you look at it and you’re like, okay, this needs some more moisture, or this needs some more whatever. And then you use the preparation that will go with what the land needs. And it can take a long time to get the land back up to what it should be. In fact, he said there were no worms in the soil when they started. Natalie: Wow, so it’s dead, the vineyard— Jo: The microbial life was just dead. Natalie: Yeah. Jo: Exactly. And it took them several years, although I think he said it was quicker than expected, until the earth is just chock-full of worms. It’s like the vines had to go to rehab and get off their drugs—their fungicides and pesticides. Natalie: Had to detox. Yes, that’s the thing. Jo: And they planted that vineyard, so I guess they got the vines and put them there. But I just thought that was fascinating because the idea of the land itself is what I’m so fascinated with—how we feed the land to make the land then feed us. And this is something that just really interests me. Tasting Biodynamic Wines Natalie: Absolutely. And for whatever you believe with the astrological signs and some of the aspects of biodynamics, I think it can’t be faulted overall because it means that those who engage in those practices really have to pay attention, as you say, to the land. They really have to look at each vine almost individually and say, what does this need? And the more closely you pay attention to vines and winemaking, the better your wine will be, as opposed to mass harvests and mass spraying. Some vineyards that are not even organic, which is a step down from biodynamics, are sprayed 25 times or more over the course of just one vintage. I’m all for biodynamics. Jo: I did want to ask you on this because I did taste—I did some tasting, I was driving, so I did spit—and it was very unusual. It was a very unusual wine. And of course every single bottle is different, not just every vintage is different. And given you are a better taster than me, how would you describe the difference between a biodynamic-tasting wine and the wine I’ve got here, the Woodchester, which is not? Natalie: So you have regular wines, and then you have organic, you have biodynamic. Everything that organic wines are, biodynamic must be, plus there’s not going to be as many sulfites—preservatives—in organic or biodynamic as regular wines. But I think we exaggerate just how sensitive we might be. It’s only about 5% of the population that are really sensitive to sulfites, and a glass of orange juice on average has more sulfites than a whole bottle of wine. So one major difference will be the sulfite content. But apart from that, I think in a blind tasting, I’m not sure that I could say that’s a biodynamic and that’s not—unless I was comparing a really mass-commercial wine that’s made like breakfast cereal. But then they’re going to be at two very different price points, and you’d have to control for all the factors. You’d have to have the same grape, the same region, and compare this vineyard wine biodynamic to that one that is not. But I doubt that I could really differentiate them, other than I would hope the biodynamic—they can be funky and a little weird. Jo: Yes, funky is a great word. Natalie: Sometimes. And then you start to veer into another category that’s not defined at all, at least legally—natural and raw wines, which are not the same, just like all stallions are horses, but not all horses are stallions. I can pick out sometimes more obviously what is a natural wine because it will have no, zero preservatives, and sometimes they can get quite funky. Jo: Yeah. I do remember it being interesting or funky, like you say. I think you have to be very open to new things to try. It’s not, “Oh, here’s my favorite rosé,” or “Here’s my bottle of Prosecco on a Saturday night” or whatever. That’s not that kind of wine. Recommended Reading on Biodynamics Jo: But I did also want to mention a book called Voodoo Vintners by Katherine Cole, which is about Oregon’s biodynamic vineyards. And I used that heavily in my research, and again, fascinating. And the Demeter USA is the certification board. It’s incredible how high the standard is. There’s a lot of places using biodynamics, but they’re not certified because it’s such a high standard. I just encourage people, because again, I’m not a taster like you, a super taster, but to try these different wines. It is very interesting and supports the vineyard, which again, it is very hard to have a business as a small vineyard. Natalie: I think it is. They’re generally small family farms, and there’s no economy of scale. There’s a few big conglomerates in each country. But the other thing is that they say on average, organic viticulture costs you 15% more, and then biodynamic another 15% on top of that because you can’t resort to pesticides, fungicides, and insecticides. Yeah, it is definitely worth seeking them out. Wine Tourism Opportunities Jo: Also, I was going to say on this, both these vineyards—so Limeburn Hill does courses, they do weekends, they do hen dos and stuff like that, but Woodchester has accommodation as well, so you can stay there actually in the vineyard. And so I think that’s really nice, and I enjoy that. I can spend more money in a vineyard by doing activities. So I think that’s actually something to consider. It’s not just—you don’t have to just go and do a tasting. You can actually do tours or stay places. So yeah, I enjoy that. Natalie: Absolutely. Wine travel is just burgeoning because, as you say, you can taste the wine, but often there’ll be a restaurant attached to the winery or restaurants locally that’ll do wine and food pairings for you. There’s all sorts of things to do from spas to ballooning to biking to things for the kids—not the wine, but— Jo: No, start your kids’ tolerance early. Natalie: I did not mean that seriously! What Surprised You Most in Your Research? Natalie: Okay, so that’s really interesting. So what was the most surprising thing that you learned about biodynamics or winemaking or wine itself while you were writing the book? Jo: Again, I think I’ll come back to how hard people are working. And how badly wrong it can go. I think when I wrote the scene about the frost in the vineyard, I really understood as I was researching that this can destroy a huge proportion of a crop. That there are things that can go horribly wrong that can just destroy the whole thing. And I know that can happen with other farmers, but often other farmers have other crops going on, and these vineyards, they really only have the one. And so it was incredible to me how on a knife edge and how you have to look after them. Or it might be a swarm of insects, or it might be something—a flood. There’s so many things. So yeah, that was interesting to me. And also, again, how much variability. I think as someone who enjoys wine but has perhaps just taken it for granted—I can just go and get a bottle of rosé or whatever—and then you see the variability between the areas. So again, these vineyards are about an hour and a half apart in a car. So in the big scheme of things, they’re not that far away, but they’re really very different. So again, that idea of terroir really came home to me. But I certainly am taking viticulture a lot more seriously now than I did before. And I hope in the book, it’s not a book for viticulture people, it’s the setting. But I do care very much about my research. Natalie: No, you do it so well. But you are right. People have that dreamy vision of owning a vineyard, but really it’s fancied-up farming. It’s hard work, calloused hands and sunburnt and all the rest of it. It’s not just what is portrayed on wine labels and wine advertising. It really is grassroots hard work. The Social Aspect of Wine Jo: Yeah. The passion of it is incredible, but also it makes you think a lot more about what wine is. And I know you talk about this, that there’s a lot of myths and there’s a lot of bad stuff that goes on and a lot of amazing stuff. But at the end of the day, it’s like having a glass of wine with a friend or as part of a group or your family. My family are drinkers, so wine plays a big part. And in fact, Woodchester is just down the road, so we do get wine from there. And that’s what it’s about. It’s about the times we have with wine for most of us whose job it isn’t. But I think that’s what it comes down to really. Natalie: Absolutely. It’s the drink of conversation. It’s meant to be consumed slowly. It’s why we don’t serve wine in shooter glasses and just knock it back. Although sometimes maybe you feel in the mood for that, but really it is about communion and joining people together over conversation. Exploring the Concept of Terroir Natalie: You’ve mentioned terroir a few times, and in the version that I had, I counted 17 mentions. So what does terroir mean to you? You’ve said sense of place—maybe you can expand on that. Jo: It’s a unique sense of place based on the geography, but also what’s under the earth. So I learned a lot about the limestone that this area is on and how that affects the soil. I didn’t know anything about soil before this. The weather—so the rain, what happens with the sun, what direction the slopes are on. You don’t buy a piece of land without considering where you are planting the grapes and what you feed the soil, obviously. And I loved it—Limeburn, they just let the wildflowers grow. And by the third season of wildflowers, they had some ridiculous number, like 40 different types of wildflowers growing in amongst the vines that these little sheep were going around and eating and then pooing, and that was the whole thing. Ouesson sheep at Limeburn Hill vineyard, June 2024 And you say in your book, Wine Witch on Fire—your wonderful memoir—that terroir is like a writer’s voice. And I love that as a metaphor because it’s distinctive, it’s personal. If you know a writer and you get to know their voice, then it’s, yeah, this book, Blood Vintage, it’s a J.F. Penn book. And if you like it, you’ll like my other books because that’s my voice. And terroir, it’s just fascinating to me. And super tasters like yourself can tell where a wine is from and maybe even what fields and what particular types of grapes, and that’s just incredible. Terroir and Terror Jo: But also terroir sounds a bit like terror. And I did look this up. They are not from the same etymology. It’s terra as in earth for terroir, and for terror, it’s from terrere, which is “frightened.” But they sound pretty similar. Natalie: Yes. And you’ve been able to weave them in so nicely together in the book. I always thought that because we talk about sometimes in the wine world, “terroirists,” which always sounds like “terrorists.” What are these people doing, making deadly Cabernet or whatever? There’s no real hard and fast definition, but they often are deep into the land and they make tiny bits of wine or amounts of wine. Sometimes we call them “garagistes,” which started in France because they have their winemaking facilities in their garage because their amounts were so small. So it’s more sort of a wine warrior status—I am really a purist when it comes to terroir. Nothing should interfere with it. There should be no intervention, although you have to get the grapes to ferment, so there has to be a little bit done. Jo: That’s quite funny because I did say to Robin at Limeburn Hill, “So where do you get all your cow horns? Because I don’t see any cows.” And he did say, “We do have to order those from the biodynamic store.” But everything else, they had the patches of yarrow growing and chamomile and all the different herbs and all the different plants were all growing there. And so they tried very much to keep everything within the ecosystem. And then even they do make a spirit from the grapes, the final press or something like that, the skins. So they use everything they can. It’s a real commitment to this thing. The Sensual Nature of Wine Writing Natalie: It absolutely is. Again, I’ve said this a few times, but your writing is so sensual. You could easily be a wine writer, and beyond the whole string of grapes and descriptors, it’s very evocative. How did you really dig down to get all of that? Or is it just part of your toolkit? You’re such a sensual, visual writer. Jo: I do take a lot of photos, so I have a lot of photos from those vineyards. But I also do a lot of visual research online. And also I mine sites like yours for words to describe stuff, because I have not been in a vineyard at dawn when the frost comes. And I do feel like that scene, I spent a lot of time on that scene because I was like, this is so important. And also I do think there is a magic, and Rebecca, the main character, has just arrived from London where she doesn’t even see the stars because of the lights of the big city. And she’s there, it’s the middle of the night, they’ve rung a bell like “We have to save the buds.” So they’re putting out these candles and she’s looking up and there’s the stars. And I was like, I have to capture this. And so I spent a lot of time—there’s a lot of images online of vineyards with frost candles, and they did show me some at Limeburn Hill. And so I think for me it’s very much about research and then it’s about point of view and taking it further. But at the end of the day, it is fiction. And of course some people were like, “It is not romantic at all to put out the frost candles because everyone’s crazy and it has to be done quickly and it’s scary.” And I do romanticize it. But I do think the sensuality is, as you say, the sensory detail of the writing in a vineyard in particular is so important because people like yourself as well—you’re taste people, you’re smell people, you’re sight people. And so that’s, I guess, what I’m trying to write. Natalie: Absolutely, and you did. And back to those candles, some other wineries use windmills, but just raising the temperature even one to two degrees can save vines when it’s that marginal and the frost has come. So it is very much like that. But the windmill wouldn’t have been as evocative. Jo: No, that’s true. Yeah, that’s mechanical and machine-like. Natalie: But yeah, the bougies, I can imagine the smoke and everything else. It reminds me of that movie, A Walk in the Clouds with Keanu Reeves. I’m probably mucking that up as well, but they were talking about the vineyard catching on fire. Jo: I do have some fire in the book! Natalie: Yes, you do. Absolutely. Fire’s a good metaphor too in the book. Inspiration from Drops of God Natalie: And another inspiration was the television show Drops of God, which is based on a book of the same name. Is that a show or a book that you would suggest we read as wine lovers? Jo: Oh, you have to watch it. Maybe if you are a wine person it’s not as good, but as a non-wine person, I was like, it was amazing. So basically also, it’s French-Japanese, so it’s partly in French, partly in Japanese. And essentially this wine critic—someone like yourself who’s been writing about wine for a long time—has a huge wine cellar and has collected wine their whole life. And it’s very prestigious and it’s worth millions, this wine cellar. And there are two people, so there’s his daughter and then his student, his kind of apprentice. And they have to do a competition. So there are five bottles and they’re allowed one taste, and then they can come back a week later and have one more taste, and then they write the name of the wine, the year, the vintage, all that. And then whoever wins three out of five wins the whole collection. But each week they’re flying around the world, looking at all the vineyards, trying to work out—they’re tasting the soil, they’re examining all the crops to try and work out what the hell this wine is. And of course, they’re all really obscure, and then they have to get the year as well. So it’s a fascinating sort of wine mystery. But at its heart it’s also about family and about culture shock and about just those things that wine can smooth over. So the Japanese and the French vineyards is really interesting. So yeah, Drops of God. It is fantastic. Absolutely recommend it. Natalie: I haven’t seen it yet, so I’ll have to put that on my playlist. It’s beautiful as well. Jo: It’s Apple TV, so it is beautiful. Natalie: Excellent. Oh yeah, they’re always shot beautifully. Understanding Folk Horror Natalie: And another inspiration, of course, is folklore itself, because I wasn’t familiar with folk horror. Maybe you can tell us a bit more of the folklore aspects of the book. Jo: Yeah, so folklore is more the traditional beliefs and rituals and little superstitious things that happen around a certain area. So again, it’s all terroir-based and it’s rooted in the community. It’s rooted in the physical location. So for example, here in the Southwest and in fact in England, we have May Day bank holiday, which is the 1st of May, which is a Beltane fertility festival. And children dance around maypoles with ribbons. And maypoles are just these very large phallic symbols, let’s say, where beautiful young ladies are meant to dance around them with ribbons—obviously fertility symbols. There’s a lot of bonfires. People jump over bonfires. And then we have Morris dancing, which is a sort of folk dancing where people dress up. And I put this dark Morris dancing troupe into my book where they wear crow feathers and black hats, and they wear slashed black makeup. And sometimes they’re hitting—they hit sticks together. Sometimes blackthorn logs, which have spiritual meanings, or sometimes Brussels sprouts. Natalie: The vegetable? Jo: Yes, the vegetable! They hit together sticks full of Brussels sprouts and they fall around. It’s very weird to do with the vegetable. Yes, it’s very odd. And every single Morris dancing area has different rituals and different things. Ancient Symbols in Modern Britain Jo: We also have the Green Man, which is a face of, again, a fertility god covered in vine leaves or other leaves, oak leaves. And it’s in a lot of our cathedrals, so thousand-year-old medieval cathedrals have the Green Man in Christian places—the fertility symbols. And then the horned god, the Wild Hunt, because we have a lot of stag hunting back in the olden times here. So I think it’s really interesting. But I was looking up where you live in Ottawa, right? So one of your folklore stories is about the Wendigo, the spirit of cannibalism. Did you know about that? Natalie: No! My God, I hope my neighbors aren’t practicing that, but it’s interesting. Jo: Yeah, it’s very interesting. The Wendigo from the First Nations people—it often comes from the older indigenous peoples. There’s also the Loup-garou, the French-Canadian werewolf, which is also in your area. So if people are interested, these stories, they’re so ancient and they emerge in modern culture. So even that Limeburn Hill names their wines after pagan festivals that are still celebrated by neo-pagans or just reflected. Samhain is the 31st of October, it’s Halloween, so the veil is thin. It’s the time for winter to come in. The dead are honored. This happens in every culture. It’s just they’re called different things. But yeah, folklore is fascinating. And because it’s so specific to place, again, I wanted to bring that in and again, the terroir. Natalie: Yeah, absolutely. And of course you live in Bath, which is where Mary Shelley wrote Frankenstein, so your city has a horror pedigree. So what is folk horror? Because I think yours was the first horror book I read, and I think of slasher movies like Friday the 13th, very gory. But what is folk horror? Defining Folk Horror Jo: Oh, I’m thrilled that you read it because a lot of people say, “I don’t read horror, so I’m not going to read that.” It’s like people saying, “I don’t like Chardonnay, so I’m not going to drink that wine.” Natalie: Open your minds, people! Jo: Not all Chardonnays are alike. Natalie: Yes! Jo: But yeah. Yes. But it’s the idea of folk horror. So again, we mentioned folklore, and then horror is so wide, it’s a very wide genre. So I’m more of a supernatural horror type of person. It’s a lot more about suspense and slow burn kind of feeling. You are in this really quite eerie situation. And is that a blood sacrifice, or is that something normal in this area? That kind of thing. It’s this feeling out of place. It’s an outsider coming into an isolated community feeling, “I don’t know if this is right or not”—the pagan festivals, the wine, all of that. But to me, the horror that I also bring to it, and this is an interesting question: Is it worth giving a human life? So is it worth sacrificing a human life to the land? The human life is so short and this land lives so much longer than us and produces something so wonderful. So the blood vintage is so wonderful. Is it worth the sacrifice to make art? Basically. And this comes up across human history—is it worth sacrifice to make art? And this is what I come back to in horror. And perhaps the real horror is sometimes we might say yes. Natalie: If it’s Domaine de la Romanée-Conti, the famous Pinot Noir from Burgundy, I’ll kill anybody to get it! So I love that. But we also as artists, writers, whatever, give up a lot of our lives to create what we do. We’re perhaps not out there as much as other people and so on. So there is a little small death, sacrifice going on with if you want to create anything decent. But yeah, no, that’s a great question. I’ll be thinking about that over the weekend: Is it worth it? The Heart of the Story Jo: Well, I think that to me, the real horror and the question at the heart of the book is: What will she choose? Because you’re basically offered being part of this community. She doesn’t have a community, she doesn’t have a family, and she’s offered a part of this wonderful vineyard with these amazing things going on. And a lot of it is amazing, right? It is just wonderful. And then it’s what will I give to be part of this? And what will I give to make this wine? Or what will I give to drink this wine? Like you said, sometimes this feeling—this isn’t wine, but I went to see the Queen’s diamonds in Buckingham Palace years ago, and I never—I’ve got a little diamond on my ring, but I never understood why people did what they did for diamonds, never understood it. And then I went to Buckingham Palace and I stood in front of one of her collections of diamonds and I was like, “Oh my goodness, I want that. I would do anything to have that diamond.” And I just felt that need. I want that. And I tried to put that in the book, the sort of addiction. I know it’s a very difficult topic in the wine world, but what will we do for that one more taste? Natalie: Absolutely. Absolutely. People chase all their lives after certain tastes, and it’s why they get suckered into buying fake bottles for hundreds of thousands of dollars. They’ll do anything because they actually just want that, especially the first taste—to recall your first evocative taste. Yeah, absolutely. Jo: Yeah. I think it’s very strong. And I also didn’t really understand the collectors. Drops of God is very good on why people collect wine and why they appreciate that. But it’s also, again, we came back to earlier, why do you drink wine with a friend or whatever? And perhaps it’s the experience that we are looking for rather than that taste. It might be taste, again, for people like yourself who are super tasters, but for me it’s, I want that experience again. And of course you never can capture it again. Natalie: That’s what makes us fools till the end. We keep chasing after it. Jo: Oh, it’s just one more glass, one more taste away. Natalie: I’m still enjoying this wine, by the way. Jo: Excellent, excellent. I can’t even tell the level on that goblet. Very discreet. Poisonous Plants in the Vineyard Natalie: You also mentioned several poisonous plants at the Standing Stone Cellars property, including hemlock, henbane, monkshood, and nightshade. And one character says that the land needs them to feed the soils and grow the vines, and that the monkshood alkaloids seep deep into the soil, creating the slight bitterness that adds to the complexity. Nightshade contributes a deep, almost smoky note to the red. I love that idea. Did you make that up, or is that based on viticultural science? Jo: The fact that you have to ask me is awesome because you know all this stuff. As far as I know, I made it up because I needed some poisonous plants for another particular occasion in the book. And so I thought, but I think—as I said about the wildflowers at Limeburn Hill and the yarrow, the patches of yarrow and all the things they had growing to be part of it—why wouldn’t you do that in some way? And those herbs like hemlock and henbane, they’re used in small amounts. Poisons are used in small amounts to bring people, again, to a different level of consciousness. I guess you could say that about alcohol as well. In smaller doses it’s effective, and in larger doses it can be difficult. But that’s where I got the idea from. If you’re going to plant yarrow, why wouldn’t you plant henbane or nightshade? So I don’t know. Have you heard of people using the darker plants? Natalie: I have not. The most popular one is over in Australia. They have eucalyptus plants, which have a very strong oil, and you can taste the eucalyptus, the minty green, kind of in a pleasant way in some of their Cabernets or Shiraz. But I haven’t heard of the poisonous plants. So that would definitely take a darker turn of mind, I think. Jo: I loved it. But I think the idea of the flowers and things growing is that some of the whatever’s in the nutrients go into the soil, right? And then the vines pick things up from the soil. So it wouldn’t necessarily be the poison in the wine, but I can’t see why that wouldn’t be a technically possible thing. So maybe there’s a listener who would love to tell us. Natalie: Absolutely, absolutely. And that’s why they have the cover crops and all that. You want to encourage—the more diversity of plants you have, the more rich and diverse your soil will be microbially, and the more different insects and species. There’s a winery in Quebec that has like a hundred thousand different plants and insects and bees because they planted so much as an experiment, and they have this sort of wild nature all around it. It all definitely contributes for sure. Architecture and Vineyard Design Jo: Yeah. Actually Rebecca, the character in the book, I have her as an architect, and one of the reasons was because I wanted to redesign the vineyard to bring in more of this stuff. So we see these vertical walls, vertical plantings, and I thought that would be awesome on the side of a winery where you could, in the tasting room or something, there’d be actually crops up the side and change the water courses. And so I was really interested in how the plans for the vineyard would work. And of course in the book I have a labyrinth planting, which I think is very unlikely, but I thought that was quite cool. Natalie: Yeah, no, there is a winery that has a labyrinth. But also I’m just working on a piece right now on wine and architecture, and the Antinori Winery in Tuscany, Italy has something like—it’s 11 hectares, I get acres and hectares mixed up—but the vines are growing on the roof and sides, the Sangiovese, so it looks like it’s wrapped in this green cloak and the winery’s rising up out of the land itself. So it’s really cool. Jo: That is wonderful. I love architecture. I’ve got architects in so many of my books. I think in another life I would’ve been an architect. Natalie: Yes, you have so many passions. That’s what makes you a great writer. You pursue them. And I was impressed with just how much you dove into the winemaking and even in our exchanges leading up to this, beyond the book itself. So that’s what keeps you going. The Most Difficult Part of Writing Natalie: What was the most difficult part of writing this book? Jo: I did love the research, but it got really difficult. And in fact, the biggest change I had to make was the description of the grapes at the different times of year. I had to even change when the book started. I had it originally starting in February, and my beta reader said, “You can’t have frost candles before bud break. That doesn’t make sense.” So I had to change that. But it was really interesting and difficult to try and do all of that research and get it right. But also with biodynamics, I was having to try and work out, what kind of moon do you need on what kind of fruit day? And what day of the month would this be? And then what would the grapes look like? And then what? So there was a whole year I had to map out—the viticulture year, the pagan year, the biodynamic year. There was a lot of trying to get things right. And again, I have to apologize in advance. I’m bound to have got something wrong, but I really did try. Natalie: That’s okay. That’s hard. Between that and the whole architecture thing, you’re ready to open your own winery. Jo: Oh, when I’m rich, I’ll just open one. Natalie: Oh, that’s right. Sit back on your beautiful veranda in your white flowy dress and your Chardonnay. Jo: Absolutely! Final Questions Natalie: Alright. Wow, time just flew here, Jo. Let me round up with a few last questions. If you could share a bottle of wine with any person in the world, who would that be and which bottle would you open with them? A Meeting with Carl Jung Jo: I am very much inspired by the Swiss psychologist Carl Jung. So I studied psychology of religion, and his work has inspired my fiction. So Stone of Fire and Crypt of Bone have a lot of Jung in them. But also my nonfiction book, Writing the Shadow, which is about tapping into the shadow, the dark side. And there’s a heck of a lot of shadow in the wine industry. You and I will have to— Natalie: Oh yes, we’ll get into it. Yep. Jo: We’ll talk about that. But yes, so Carl Jung—obviously now dead—but he wrote about wine as a metaphor for transformation of base into gold. That was one of his many things. Natalie: I did know that. Jo: The repressed self. Okay. Yeah, the repressed self. A lot about mythology, a lot about folklore. But I was like, what do you drink with Carl Jung? So I actually had a look. Where I would want to do it is he has a tower. He did a lot of stone carving, again architecture, at his tower in Bollingen on Lake Zurich. So I looked for some wine in that region, and there’s a wine called Chasselas. Maybe, you know, is that right? Natalie: I wouldn’t dare correct your pronunciation after all we’ve been through, even for wine terms. Yes, Chasselas. But it is the Swiss grape. I think it’s a bright white. Jo: Yes. So it’s a white wine. And I would put that with a cheese platter, maybe raclette, which is the melted cheese that you have in that region. And I would ask him, because I’m turning 50 next year and I feel like I would like to ask him about the challenges of midlife. He had a bit of a breakdown and he wrote this thing called The Red Book, and I’ve got a copy. It’s this huge oversized book. And he did paintings and he just wrote journals and he was just deep in midlife crisis. And so I love that. I think it’s really interesting. We think of him in academia, but he was just very—I want to use the word sensual, and I don’t mean sexual—he was just deeply in life. So yeah, Carl Jung. There you go. Could have a session while you’re at it. Natalie: That sounds great. I love that. And as we wrap up, is there anything that we haven’t covered that you’d like to mention? Encouraging Wine Exploration Jo: I think I would encourage people—I’ve listened to a few of your episodes and people are so good at describing wine. And as someone who is just a normal wine person, I think I’d really encourage people to try different kinds of wine without being scared of it. And I feel like sometimes when normal people like me listen to wonderful writers like yourself about wines, we feel maybe a bit stupid in a way. “Oh, I can’t try that,” or “I can’t taste that.” But what I’ve discovered, I think, by visiting these smaller vineyards is just try some stuff that’s a bit out of your comfort zone. And it might be super, super interesting, like the orange wine. I’d never tried these sort of volcanic orange wines. And even if you can’t describe them very well, it doesn’t matter. I think supporting the vineyards, supporting the viticulture industry is just as important as supporting the authors and the artists and the writers out there. And it’s a difficult time for everyone, and hopefully we can all support each other. But yeah, I absolutely loved writing this book. I love delving into the wine industry, and I appreciate all of you a lot more. Natalie: Great. And my advice would be parallel to yours: Try something outside your reading genre, like folk horror. I was pleasantly surprised. It was like the funky Chardonnay I had never tried before. It was great. I loved it. It expanded my horizons. Where can people best get in touch with you, Jo? Jo: Yes, so jfpenn.com/bloodvintage is the book. Since you’re listening to a podcast, if you want to write, The Creative Penn podcast—Penn with a double N. And Instagram at jfpennauthor. You can find lots of photos that also go with the book, including those vineyards, which I hope people will check out. Natalie: That sounds like a lot of fun. Great, Jo, this has been fantastic. I loved it. I can’t believe how fast the time went, but thank you. Next time it has to be over a glass of wine in person. Maybe in the part of the vineyard where we’re not allowed to go because it just rebels that way. Jo: Thanks so much for having me, Natalie. That was great. Natalie: All right. I raised my glass to you. Cheers! Jo: Cheers! J.F. Penn with Blood Vintage The post Blood, Wine, And Sacrifice: Folk Horror Inspired By England’s Biodynamic Vineyards With J.F. Penn And Natalie MacLean appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 10/16/25 | ![]() Mexico’s Day Of The Dead With Luisa Navarro | Why is Mexico’s Day of the Dead such a beautiful way to remember our loved ones who have died? What are the elements that go into the altar? How can tourists respectfully experience the tradition? In this fascinating conversation, Luisa Navarro, founder of Mexico in My Pocket and author of Mexico’s Day of the Dead: A Celebration of Life through Stories and Photos, shares her personal journey from rejecting her Mexican heritage to celebrating it, while revealing the true beauty and meaning behind one of Mexico’s most misunderstood traditions. Luisa Navarro is the founder and CEO of Mexico in My Pocket, and the author of Mexico’s Day of the Dead: A Celebration of Life through Stories and Photos. Luisa’s childhood struggle with being Mexican American and how she transformed from rejecting her culture to becoming its passionate advocate The true meaning behind Día de los Muertos, its indigenous Aztec origins, and how it differs completely from Halloween The significance of ofrendas (altars), including sugar skulls, pan de muerto, marigolds, and photographs of deceased loved ones How different days honor different types of deaths Traditional foods like pan de muerto, café de olla, and how families share meals with both the living and the dead How to respectfully experience Day of the Dead celebrations in Mexico while avoiding appropriation and understanding the difference between authentic traditions and commercialized parades You can find Luisa at MexicoInMyPocket.com and Mexico’s Day of the Dead book here. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello, travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Luisa Navarro. Hi Luisa. Luisa: Hi. It’s so wonderful to be here with you today. Jo: Great to meet you. Now, just a quick introduction. Luisa is the founder and CEO of Mexico in My Pocket, and the author of Mexico’s Day of the Dead: A Celebration of Life through Stories and Photos, which is fantastic. So first up, just tell us a bit more about you and your Mexican heritage and how you bring that into your life and your business in Brooklyn. Luisa: Yes, of course. So I was actually born in Dallas, Texas. I am Mexican American. My mom is from Tila, which is Northern Mexico, and my dad is from Michoacán, which is more central and it’s actually where Día de los Muertos is very much celebrated. Growing up in Dallas, I struggled originally with my identity a lot being Mexican American — because what happened was I went to school and I only spoke Spanish because Spanish was my first language. My mom insisted that all four of her kids learn Spanish first before going to school. And then when we were in school, we all struggled to make friends because we only spoke Spanish. The teachers would criticize my mom, but my mom insisted that we would be perfectly fine and that we would learn English eventually, and she was right. And so eventually I became bilingual. And during that time, at a very young age, I discovered young kids were saying horrible things about Mexicans and I didn’t know how to handle that. I realized, wait, I think I’m Mexican. And so long story short, I didn’t want to be Mexican at a very young age. I was about four or five years old. I have these memories very vividly. And so I came home to my mom in Dallas and I said, I’m no longer Luisa, I’m now Hannah. I think I said Hana, my mom always says I pronounced it very interestingly, but I was like, I’m Hana. And I will not respond if you don’t call me Hana. Yeah, I mean, it’s very sad. But luckily, luckily, luckily, thank God my mom and my grandmothers all came to my rescue and they were like, no, these kids are wrong, and here’s why, and here’s why being Mexican is incredible. And so luckily for me, I did a 180. I very much embraced my culture. I became a journalist. And during that journey as a journalist, I noticed that these negative types of stories continued to happen. But instead of getting upset with people, I never really blamed the kids who said these things because I realized they were being taught this by their parents. As you get older, you realize this is being learned. And so when I became a journalist, I realized that the media was always covering us in a very negative light. And being American is amazing because we have mainstream media here. We have the power to tell stories, but unfortunately I have seen as a Mexican American, a lot of those stories that are told about Mexico in the US are negative. I wanted to do something positive. So as a journalist, I started a side project called Mexico in My Pocket and it was a blog. And on that blog I would share very positive stories about Mexico and our culture, and — I slowly started to learn more about my heritage and I became very passionate about it. And I started that blog in 2015. So it’s been 10 years now. So basically my journalism career brought me to New York City. I went to Columbia Journalism School and then eventually I got out of the news and I started my own company called Mexico in My Pocket, where we sell beautiful handcrafted items from all over Mexico. And I have the privilege of telling the story of how these products are made, and the stories of our culture. Jo: I think that’s wonderful. It’s really interesting to hear about how that felt for you as a child. But of course, you’ve chosen one really interesting topic, Day of the Dead, which in itself many people struggle with negative stereotypes around Day of the Dead. So let’s just start with sort of basics. What is Day of the Dead? When is it? And why did you choose this topic? Because you could have chosen lots of different ones. Luisa: I could have chosen so many different topics. And the irony is that when I was little, I also very much struggled with the fear of death. And I actually don’t think I really loved Day of the Dead as a child because my mom would decorate with skeletons during that time of year. And I feared it and I was like, this is terrifying. I don’t want to talk about death. My biggest fear was my parents dying. But the reason that I decided to write a book about Day of the Dead, and for those of you who don’t know what Day of the Dead is, is once a year. It’s a Mexican tradition, it’s rooted in Mexico. Once a year we come together and we honor our loved ones who have died. And I think it’s the most incredible holiday. I think that everyone around the world should take time to once a year, honor their loved ones who have died. You know, we celebrate our moms once a year. We celebrate our dads once a year. We celebrate love. Once a year, we should be celebrating our loved ones who have died. And I think that Mexico is the true emblem and symbol and example for us to honor the dead once a year. And they’ve set an incredible example for us not to fear death, but to take control of it the most that we can and to celebrate our loved ones who have died and not forget them. And so the reason I wrote this book, there’s a lot of reasons, but one of the reasons was just like the reason I started my blog. I felt like — I did not see an accurate or beautiful representation of what Day of the Dead is, and I felt like I wanted something to preserve these traditions so that I could pass it down to the future generations, including my son. Because I worried that being Mexican American, I am the first generation to live here, but I’m so proud to be Mexican and I never want to lose sight of that. And I want my son to also know about his heritage, his ancestry, his traditions. And so I wrote this book for the future generations so that they could learn and always celebrate these traditions, no matter how far removed they are from their origin, from their ancestry’s origin country. Another reason I wrote the book was — There is a lot of confusion and misunderstanding when it comes to Day of the Dead. So I have a gift shop in Carroll Gardens in Brooklyn, and people would come into our store and they would see the altar that I build in the store. And they would ask us if we were celebrating the devil. And I was like, okay. We need a book because I want to clarify just how beautiful Day of the Dead is. And I think the name Day of the Dead, I think anything associated with death can be very off-putting because I think just like me as a child fearing death. I think a lot of people fear death and I think they don’t want to talk about it. And so that inspired me to write this book and to shed light on how I think Mexico is doing an incredible job at basically honoring our loved ones who have died. And if you’ve experienced death, I think you can relate to this, that it is very painful, not just because the person died, but you feel like you’re not allowed to talk about them anymore. And Day of the Dead is a time where you can come together once a year and talk about your loved ones who have died without having to worry about anyone judging you. And I think it’s so beautiful. Jo: You mentioned your son there and I noticed in the book, which is a beautiful book, both the words and obviously the images, it is really beautiful and colorful. And there are children in the book, and this is another thing that I think some people get hung up on, like we should only talk about death if we’re adults or whatever. But Mexican tradition seems to bring in the children a lot more. Perhaps you could comment on that, like how is it so natural that everyone in the family is included? Luisa: I mean, everyone in the family is included because on Day of the Dead, we’re honoring our family members. And so it’s also a wonderful opportunity to educate your children on their ancestors and on their loved ones who have died. And quite frankly, one of the things that was most moving to me when I traveled to Oaxaca that I didn’t know about was an altar that honored babies. And so there’s room for everyone, like death affects everyone. It affects all ages. It affects different scenarios as we know. You know, I saw an altar where a woman was 35 years old. I’m 35 now. And she lost her baby and she died as well in giving birth. And so they honored her and her child on this altar, and I think that’s so beautiful because her story was not forgotten in spite of such a tragic situation. And I think that Mexico does a really beautiful job of that. Jo: So let’s come to the altar that you mentioned. What goes on the altar? What types of things might people put on the altar and what is the aim of it? Luisa: Yeah, so that’s actually another reason I wrote the book. So the altar has so many elements. I don’t even think we have time to get into every single one because quite frankly, I wrote a whole chapter on it and I even had questions about how to build a traditional altar because there’s so much tradition and history that is involved in it. We place the sugar skulls with people’s names to honor the sweetness of life, but also to honor and remember the specific person who died. We use pan de muerto, which is a specific type of Day of the Dead bread that only happens, that is only made once a year and it is made with anise and orange peels and orange blossom water. It also honors the sweetness of life, but then they decorate it with crossbones on top to honor the dead. So what I would say is that from all of these elements, it’s really coming together and honoring and celebrating and really showing that Mexicans don’t fear death, but they respect it and they choose to accept it. I think they choose to accept it. But one of the most important things that goes on an altar are the photographs of our loved ones, of our ancestors. And so that’s why I believe we include everyone. We include our children, and we show them and we teach them, and we tell them about their great grandparents and we tell them about their grandparents. It’s a wonderful time of year to finally share your family stories, and so that’s why I think everyone around the world should be celebrating Day of the Dead. Or doing it in their own way. Once a year, having a dinner at home and talking about their loved ones who have died. I don’t think we should not talk about this. And that’s why I love being Mexican. I’m Mexican, and I’m American, but being Mexican is incredible because of Día de los Muertos. Jo: I have some follow up questions there. So the first thing is the skull. You mentioned the sugar skulls. I wanted to show you and the people on the video. So this is the one I keep here with the butterflies, but they obviously, it’s not to be put on an altar, but it’s kind of, I like to keep it there and I bought it in the US. My sugar skull puchased in Austin Texas Luisa: You can put that on an altar actually. Yeah. You can put that on an altar. It’s beautiful. It’s hand painted. It’s clay. Yeah. That’s stunning. I love that. Jo: Yeah, so I kind of have it in my own way, not as part of your tradition, but as part of my own sort of eclectic tradition. But so tell us more about the skulls and the skeletons. Because you mentioned, and the point is that they are, the sugar skulls are more colorful, aren’t they? Because people think black and white and kind of that depressing thing. Tell us about the colorful sugar skulls Luisa: Yeah. It’s funny that you mentioned that. So I talk about this in the book. I talk about the colors of Day of the Dead actually. And that’s exactly why we chose the turquoise and the orange color. The orange, obviously is representative of the marigolds, which we use marigolds because of the scent and the color, because we believe that the scent and the color attracts the spirits to visit us once a year. So we place them on the altar and we sprinkle petals of them to lead the dead back to us, the spirits back to us to visit us once a year. But you mentioned the skulls and the skulls. What people might not realize is that it’s thanks to indigenous traditions and thanks to the indigenous people that Day of the Dead exists in Mexico. So the origins of Day of the Dead stem from the God of Death known as Mictlantecuhtli. And yes, that is a mouthful, but it’s important that we know his name, that we celebrate him, and that we honor the roots of this indigenous tradition. It was only blended until the Spanish arrived, thanks to Catholicism. But, I want to highlight him specifically because he was the god of death and he was depicted with a skeletal face. And so you were interested in why skeletons and I actually in my own research was very interested in why on earth Mexicans are obsessed with skeletons. It’s all thanks to him. So the Aztecs, once a year in the summer actually would celebrate him in his festival. And they would make tamales and they would burn copal. And some of these traditions we can see in modern day Día de los Muertos celebrations. These traditions didn’t evolve until the Spanish arrived, and they imposed Catholic religion on the indigenous people and eventually, there was a syncretism that happened, a natural syncretism. And the tradition moved from the summer because the Aztecs refused to get rid of their honoring of the god of death. And they would secretly kind of continue. And eventually it was moved to All Souls Day and All Saints Day. And so that’s the modern day celebration that we know today, and that’s why altars have crosses and Virgen de Guadalupe. And there’s a blending of indigenous traditions with Catholicism. So yeah, that’s why we have the skeleton. It’s thanks to that god and it’s thanks to the Aztecs and the indigenous traditions. Jo: Yeah. And I think, I mean obviously in many traditions there’s portrayals of death, but it’s never so colorful. And I think that’s what’s so lovely about the skeletons and the face painting and the beautiful pictures you have in the book. But also just to come back on the Day of the Dead, I was really interested. I didn’t know. And in your book you list, it’s not just one day. There’s actually different days for different types of people who died. Luisa: Yeah, that’s correct. So, traditionally it starts on the evening of October 31st. It’s not Halloween, it has nothing to do with Halloween. And then it’s November 1st when the kids arrive, and then November 2nd when the adults arrive. But the thing is that people don’t realize is that all over Mexico, there are different traditions. So in some parts they believe that it depends on where you are in Mexico and how they celebrate. But that’s like pretty much the basics, right? But yes, there are other days, I do have it in the book actually. So October 27th is the day to remember pets. October 28th is for the tragic deaths, including those who died from violence or suicide. And then October 29th is for the drowning. And the one I really like is October 30th, because it’s a day for those who have been forgotten or who don’t have a family member to remember them. But yes, there are different days to honor different people. People really like the day to remember their pets, which is October 27th. Which I love too. And like that’s the thing is like, I just feel like I’m just so proud to be Mexican and I’m so proud of these traditions and I really just want to shed light on them and shed light on the beauty of them and quell some of that misunderstanding that we’re celebrating the devil because that has nothing to do with that at all. In fact, I think more people, if they learned about Day of the Dead, they’d be inspired to host a dinner themselves and to maybe talk about their loved ones who have died and put their pictures up and maybe make their favorite meals. In my opinion, it is the most beautiful holiday in the entire world. So I’m very, very proud of it. Jo: Again, coming back to the altar, so you mentioned the pan de muerto. So do you eat that? Do people actually eat pan de muerto or is that an offering food? Luisa: We do eat it. So there’s two things there. So one, you’re right when we put it on the altar. Actually this is a great question. So there’s two schools of thought here. You can buy it in the bakery. So think of it like a sweet treat that’s once a year, kind of like, I’m sure you know this, but in the United States once a year, pumpkin spice is huge, right? So it’s like everyone wants their pumpkin spice. The difference is, is that this is rooted in tradition. So once a year in Mexico, the bakeries make and you can go and buy it, and it’s the most delicious thing in the world. And the one thing that most people don’t realize is there’s actually tons of different types of pan de muerto, and in my book, I do cover the different types because we visited different villages and how they make it. And there’s a beautiful pan de muerto that almost looks like embroidery. And it’s actually all made of flour. They’re like these flour, they’re actual flowers like floral. It looks like embroidery. And that type of bread is from Oaxaca. But it’s a sweet treat that you can eat once a year and we do put it on the altar. When I put it on my altar, I do not eat it after. But it, if you put it on the altar, it is meant for the dead. And so what a lot of people say, depending on where you travel in Mexico, but they say they put it on the altar and then after the dead have already had their chance, like let’s say they come November 1st or November 2nd and they’ve gotten their chance to eat the bread, then they will eat it and enjoy it. But what some people say who have eaten it and enjoyed it is they say that it’s lost its taste. Because the dead already had it. So I personally do not eat the bread if I put it on the altar. But some people do, some people do eat the bread after and enjoy it with their family during the celebrations, but it’s not until after the dead have arrived. So yeah. Jo: They’ve got to have their bit first. Luisa: Yeah. It’s all fascinating, right? And it’s like, I love, that’s the thing is it’s nuanced. It’s very nuanced. Jo: Yeah, and everyone has their own thing, but you’ve got some other recipes in the book I think as well. What are the other food and drinks that are associated with that time? Luisa: Yeah, we do. I’m very, very happy because we asked people to collaborate because something my dad has always emphasized is that I’m very privileged as a Mexican American to be able to travel between Mexico and the United States, and I can’t agree more. And so, recognizing that there will be people who will never have the chance or the opportunity to travel to Mexico to celebrate these holidays, I wanted to make sure that we included recipes in the book so that people could celebrate no matter where they live. So we have a recipe for sugar skulls in the book. We have a recipe, well, it’s a tutorial, a DIY tutorial to make papel picado, which are these gorgeous Mexican tissue paper flags, tissue paper garlands that we use to celebrate and honor the fragility of death. And they’re really gorgeous. I’m sure you’ve seen them. If you go to a Mexican restaurant, you’ve seen them. But we also use them during Day of the Dead to honor our loved ones. And they all have little motifs. So you’ll often, for Day of the Dead, you’ll see them decorated with skulls and skeletons. And then we have something called pan de muerto negro, and this is a specific type of pan de muerto, but it’s black sugar made from burnt corn husks, so corn husks, which we use to wrap our tamales in. And this recipe is beautiful because it represents the ashes of the dead. I found that it doesn’t taste that different from the traditional sugar one. I thought it would taste different for me. It didn’t taste different. But it is really fun and it is really beautiful. So it’s got a black color with the crossbones and traditional. But yeah, we had Fany Gerson who I absolutely adore. She is the owner of La Newyorkina here in New York City and she provided that recipe for us. Jo: That’s great. And then what about drinking? Is there any alcohol involved or is it a non-drinking event or is there special drinks that people have? Luisa: So the rule of thumb there, or when alcohol is involved, like it would be, let’s say my great-grandfather loved a specific type of beer, right? So I would put that on the altar for him so that when he arrives he can have that specific alcohol that he loved in life. But yes, you can, for example, if you’re having a dinner. Of course you can have a drink, you can have, I mean, Mexico is the land of tequila, mezcal, and we also have other delicious drinks like café de olla, which is a cinnamon type coffee that is made in a pot. That’s why it’s called café de olla. It’s so delicious. So yeah, basically you would drink the beverages that your loved ones really enjoyed. It could even be a Mexican Coca-Cola. I mean, I love Coca-Cola. I love specifically Mexican Coca-Cola. It’s made with a different type of sugar. And yeah, so those would be the beverages. Jo: And then I wanted to circle back to the religion element. Because the majority of Mexican people are at least nominally Catholic. And so when people come to the altar, are there prayers, Catholic prayers that you would say for the dead, or is the Catholicism kind of completely different? Do you pray at the altar or is it more of a memorial? Luisa: I would say it’s more of a memorial. That isn’t to say that you can’t pray at the altar. You can obviously pray, but yeah, it is a blending of Catholic and indigenous traditions because Mexico was colonized by the Spanish. They brought Catholicism and so you will find crosses. In fact, the top of the altar, traditionally if it’s a seven tier altar, should have a saint at the top. So I typically put La Virgen de Guadalupe, which every Mexican person will know. She is basically the patron saint of all of Mexico. She’s the Virgin Mary of Mexico. And my grandmother revered her, so I always put La Virgen de Guadalupe at the top of my altar. So yeah, you will definitely see a blending of Catholicism with these traditions for sure. Jo: And if you go to church over that period, do they have a special service? Luisa: Yes, of course, because since it’s celebrated on All Saints Day and All Souls Day, so if you went to All Saints Day and All Souls Day, you would, yes, you would go to church for that. I haven’t seen Day of the Dead altars in the Catholic Church. But you will see them outside, like all over Mexico. Jo: So you’ve mentioned a couple of places, you mentioned Oaxaca and some other places. But if people want to visit, so I mean, I’m really interested as a tourist. Are there places that tourists can go to? You know, not in a weird way, but people who are interested in the cultural elements, who want to come and have a look. Are there places where tourists can visit for Day of the Dead? Luisa: Yeah, a hundred percent. There’s definitely ways to do it. One of the things there, there’s lots of ways to do it. I would say one of the best ways is to go to Mexico City, because it is a large city and there’s celebrations all over. If you wanted to go to the cemeteries, I would recommend making a personal connection with someone before you go. Not just like visiting without having some type of connection or some type of invitation. Whenever I go, it’s because I’ve made some type of connection and have been invited. And to be honest, like I went because I was documenting it for the book, but I don’t necessarily just go to go like I wanted to learn more. I will say be mindful if you visit the cemeteries that you are a tourist, sadly, some people will take advantage and get drunk and act inappropriate. One of the things that I learned is that the face paint that it, they’re dressed as La Catrina, and that’s a whole other topic, but it’s the sugar skull face paint that you see. It’s not appropriate to go to the cemeteries with that. So it’s something to be mindful of as a tourist that those are separate traditions. So if you’re going to the cemetery to be very mindful that you’re in a cemetery, you will see music. It depends on the cemetery. That’s the other thing. And it depends on the location. So for example, in Michoacán, when I visited Michoacán, I found that it was a lot more quiet. It wasn’t somber, but the families were gathered and they might have been drinking a beer, but they were gathered more as like, I wouldn’t say it was this rambunctious party. Now there’s other cemeteries where I have heard and I chose not to go. But I have heard that there are concerts happening, like full blown concerts. So yeah, I mean, it does depend, but at the end of the day, I think you need to be mindful that you are a tourist and to do your research and talk to people before you decide to go. Just like if you go into someone’s home, right? You’re going to be respectful. If you go into someone’s home, like if someone asks you to take your shoes off when you go into someone’s home, you respect that and you honor that, and you’re visiting, right? So it’s the same when you go for Day of the Dead, is just have these conversations, be mindful, ask what’s appropriate, and trust your gut. You know, I think you’ll know too if you’re like something feels like you’re being, you know, you’re trespassing or that type of thing. Jo: Yeah. And are there processions and you know more, you see that in the movies and stuff? Does that happen too? Luisa: It does. And I have to say that so originally the only, it has become very commercialized, I have to say. The only reason the parade happens in Mexico City now is because of the James Bond movie. That’s not like a centuries old tradition. So people think that that’s like some centuries old tradition. That’s not true. It’s actually Day of the Dead has become extremely popular because of movies like Coco as we know. And so now there are parades, but you know what, like those are for the tourists and I think it’s great. If you want to go and celebrate and see, a lot of Mexican artisans participate in those parades, which makes me really happy. So you get to see like their actual craft and artwork, and I think it’s a wonderful way to go and celebrate if you’d like, and do the face paint. Like in that scenario, the face paint is totally fine, just know what you’re wearing. And I talk about that in the book, but there’s a whole section on who La Catrina is. And why that originated. But that is what the face paint is. I think the problem with the face paint is that people don’t know what they’re wearing, so they don’t know the history of her. Jo: And I wonder if those processions and like the Bond movie is part of, you know, you’ve started by saying, somebody said, are you celebrating the devil? And I wonder if there’s a confusion with the Carnival / Mardi Gras / voodoo, sort of the skeleton from Voodoo who comes out the ground, and then there’s processions and things. Do you think that may have got mixed up in people’s heads? Luisa: I think yeah, of course. I think there is a confusion between Halloween and Day of the Dead, but — Day of the Dead is not Halloween at all and it’s not voodoo at all. And I think that because of the skeleton imagery that it can get mixed up and confused if people don’t read about the origins. And that’s one thing I will say, people ask me all the time if they can celebrate Day of the Dead, and I mean, death is universal. It affects all of us. Of course, you can celebrate Day of the Dead, but it’s just like know exactly what you are celebrating and know about the history and research and read about Mictlantecuhtli and the God of death and the Aztec traditions, and how that skeleton imagery evolved into our modern day traditions. So it’s about educating yourself at the end of the day. And look, I’m Mexican American, but I also had to educate myself on these traditions and learn about them. Jo: So this is the Books and Travel podcast, so do you have any other books that you would recommend about Day of the Dead or Mexico in general? Luisa: Of course. So my favorite book that I read throughout this process, I read lots of books and articles and information, but my specific favorite one was called The Skeleton at the Feast. And I feel like they really got into the history of Day of the Dead. And so I recommend that book if you want to check it out and learn more about the history of Day of the Dead. Jo: Brilliant. And just show us your book one more time on the video because it’s so beautiful. It’s just fantastic. So where can people find the book and everything you do online? Luisa: Yeah, of course. So the book is available wherever all books are sold. So you can find it at Amazon, you can find it at Barnes and Noble Target, bookshop.org, which supports independent bookstores, people from my community love shopping there. And you can find me at mexicoinmypocket.com at Mexico in My Pocket, all over social media. Jo: Brilliant. Thanks so much for your time, Luisa. That was great. This transcript has been edited for clarity and readability while maintaining the authentic conversation between Jo Penn and Luisa Navarro about Mexico’s Day of the Dead traditions. The post Mexico’s Day Of The Dead With Luisa Navarro appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 9/25/25 | ![]() Egypt Beyond the Pyramids And Glimpsing The Future In History With Sean McLachlan | What’s it really like to be an archaeologist in the Middle East? How can modern travelers experience Egypt beyond the pyramids and tourist traps? What will survive from our digital age when future archaeologists dig through our ruins, and how does studying ancient civilizations change the way you see the world today? Canadian ex-archaeologist and award-winning author Sean McLachlan shares insights from 25 years of full-time writing and decades of travel through Egypt, Morocco, and the Middle East. Sean McLachlan is a Canadian ex-archaeologist and the multi-award-winning author of history, travel, and fiction. His books include The Masked Man of Cairo Historical Detective series, the Moroccan Mysteries, and post-apocalyptic sci-fi series, Toxic World. Sean’s previous archaeology career in the Middle East and Eastern Europe, including dangerous moments The reality of archaeological fieldwork vs. Hollywood portrayals, from Roman bath games to 3000-year-old fingerprints His Masked Man of Cairo detective series set in 1919 Egypt during the independence movement Hidden gems in Egypt beyond ancient sites: Islamic Cairo, desert oases, Coptic monasteries, and the new museums Practical travel advice for Egypt and the Middle East, including cultural sensitivity and safety tips His post-apocalyptic fiction and thoughts on what will survive from our civilization for future archaeologists You can find Sean at SeanMcLachlan.net and his books here on Amazon. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello Travelers. I’m Joanna Penn, and today I’m here with Sean McLachlan. Hi Sean. Sean: Hey, Joanna. Jo: It’s great to have you on the show. Just a little introduction. Sean is a Canadian ex-archaeologist and the multi-award-winning author of history, travel, and fiction. His books include The Masked Man of Cairo Historical Detective series, the Moroccan Mysteries, and post-apocalyptic sci-fi series, Toxic World. Wow, lots there. Sean, you were just telling me how long you’ve been a full-time author? Sean: It’s my 25th anniversary this year as a matter of fact. Jo: That is just incredible. But before we get into that, tell us about your previous career in archaeology, because obviously I’m fascinated with it. Lots of people are. What is the reality of the archaeologist’s job? Are you really like Indiana Jones?! Sean: Well, not quite Indiana Jones. I worked for about 10 years in the Middle East and Eastern Europe, got a master’s degree. And it’s an amazing job actually. There’s a lot of meticulous excavation and fieldwork, surveying, a lot of lab work, and it is a lot of fun. I ended up shifting out of it because I didn’t like the academic side of it too much – the fighting for office space and funding and the petty backstabbing that you see in so many university departments. I really liked the fun stuff, which was the actual fieldwork. And as far as being Indiana Jones, well I never got shot at when I was in the field. I did get shot at by accident once when I was hiking in Arizona, but that’s a different story. And the only real danger was once there was a Palestinian Viper on the site when we were working in Tel Gezer in Israel, Which is this really nasty snake that the venom can kill you in 20 minutes. But we were working near a kibbutz and one of the kibbutz members had a tractor and ran it over. So that was the end of that problem. Jo: But just sort of coming back on, you said you didn’t like the academic side but you did enjoy the dig work and the lab work. So in my head, I know what dig work looks like from the movies, obviously. What did you do in the labs and — What time period were you working on? Sean: Well, I worked in several different time periods. The biggest site I worked at was Tel Gezer, which was an old archaeological site in Israel. And a tell is basically an artificial mound where people will build a settlement usually on high ground. And then people will build on those foundations and people will build. And after several thousand years, you end up with an artificial hill, which is all just archaeological deposits and you get this a lot throughout the Middle East and they’re called Tell, which is Arabic for Hill. And we were digging through that. And the main thing we were doing in those field seasons was we were working through an Egyptian governor’s palace when the Egyptians conquered the Levant. And so we found some nice hieroglyphics and all that. And also the city gate, which was commissioned by King Solomon. It’s actually mentioned in the Old Testament. So we’re working on that. And that was actually the second time I got in danger in archaeology, both at the same site because we had these things to either side of the gate called casemate walls, where you had an inner wall and an outer wall, and then a storage room in the center. And so we were digging down through the deposits to find all the stuff that was inside and somebody was working on the other side of the wall, and I’m about eight feet down. And this guy had found a big rock and he thought it was just a deposit. It was too big to move, so he was slamming at it with a sledgehammer, but what he didn’t realize, it was part of the wall. So I’m eight feet down with this not very stable wall above me of these giant stones, and suddenly it starts going boom, boom. Jo: Buried alive! Sean: Fastest I ever moved! I teleported out of that pit. I was just, one moment I’m in there and the other moment I’m about 10 feet away screaming my head off. Jo: And one of the tells I’ve been to is Megiddo, which is the biblical Armageddon. Sean: Megiddo is amazing. Jo: What got me into writing the types of things that we both write is The Source by James Michener, which of course is based on that. Sean: Well, I never worked at Megiddo. Michener’s book was amazing though. I read that in university and it was well worth reading. I actually read it in Bulgaria when I was on another excavation, and this was an interesting site because — One of the exciting things about archaeology is you never know what you’re going to find — and this site was on really high hill at this sharp turn of the Struma River, which runs through Bulgaria, down to Thessaloniki on the Greek coast. We’d seen some Roman deposits come out of there. So we thought we were going to get a Roman village or a villa on top of this high ground. So we start digging down and the first thing we come to is ash. And we keep digging. We get more and more ash and we’re getting all like black hands and everything is poofing up everywhere and we’re sneezing black. It’s terrible. And we went through about eight feet of this stuff and we asked around, and we found out that that had been a beacon from the Balkan Wars from 1912, because they were worried the Turks were going to come up the river valley and attack. And so this was to signal. So we got through that and then we found the Roman site. But it wasn’t a villa, it was several graves. So we excavated those and we looked down further to see if we’d find more graves. And in the end, actually, we found a very well preserved Bronze Age village. So we went through a good 3000 years of habitation from 1912 all the way back to 1500 BC. Jo: Wow. Sean: So that was a lot of fun. Jo: That is the romance of archaeology, right? That everybody thinks about. And then of course we both put that kind of stuff in our books now. But let’s talk about that because I wondered if you see things differently. I think when I went to Megiddo, I was kind of seeing the layers of story. You travel a lot and you also research these different areas of history. How do you look below the surface of what is there to find those stories underneath? Sean: Well, one of the interesting things about archaeological sites is thinking about the people that were there. I was at the Baths of Caracalla in Rome, these giant Roman baths, just a few weeks ago. And my favorite part, you’re going through these giant vaulted rooms. They’re still preserved 2000 years later, tile floors. Interesting little drains that are still there, like the drains are still there, so well preserved. But on this sort of marble seat next to one of the pools, somebody had carved the board for an old Roman board game. So these people were sitting there enjoying the caldarium. It’s all steamy and warm, and they’re playing a board game while they got their feet in the pool. I love that, those little details are always the best. And when often you see, when you pick up pieces of pottery where the potter has altered it a bit, just smooth things out, you’ll find their fingerprints or her fingerprints on there. So you got a 3000 year old fingerprint. Jo: I guess then you’re thinking about like who they were. It was really what you were just saying about the ash. That’s really interesting to me because the ash almost has no story because something was burnt there. But what you were saying gave it historical context and it loops back. Sean: Yeah. You’re right. And it looped back to the present day because I was there in ’93 just after the fall of communism. And the new government, which was democratic with a small D, was making it very clear to the Turkish minority that they might be better off moving back to Turkey. And so there was that whole tension. So while that was going on in town, we’re up there seeing the remnants of the last time those two sides had a war. Jo: Yeah, yeah. The historical perspective is so interesting. So one of the places you go a lot is to Egypt and you’ve got this Masked Man of Cairo series, and a lot of us do think, and on this show I’ve talked, we’ve talked about ancient Egypt, but you are writing about a different time period there. So tell us about that time period and what people might think differently. Tell us more about your interest in more modern Egypt Sean: I decided to do my series set in 1919 right after World War I. And that was when the first wave of the independence movement started in Egypt. During World War I, the British Empire basically took over. They had already had a lot of influence in Egypt, but it was still technically an Ottoman Province. But when Britain and the Ottoman Empire found themselves on opposite sides of the war, they took the mask off and named Egypt as a protectorate. And then they brought in a lot of people for the Egyptian expeditionary force to work as laborers on the Western front, which was very hard on the people that had to go. And one of the ways they calmed down the Egyptian people was to say that they would have a seat at the table after the war to discuss independence. Well that didn’t actually happen. So the Egyptians took the British at their word and said, well, no, we need to be in Versailles. And the British said, no. And then that kicked off the whole independence movement. So I found that to be very interesting time period to set it in. And in a lot of my books, I explore colonialism. So I have three main characters in this series. One is Sir Augustus, who’s a World War I veteran. He’s a masked man because he’s lost half of his face. He has one of those masks that the French artists made – they would look at an old photograph of the person and make a mask that looked like their face, which sort of worked and sort of looked very disturbing. And he hates Europe, wants to live in Egypt, disapproves of colonialism, but is constantly benefiting from it. Then I have Mustafa who is Nubian and that’s an interesting minority. They’re a very large minority in Egypt, but they’ve had to deal with a lot of racism at the hands of the Egyptians. And of course this being 1919, he experiences racism at the hands of the British too. But he’s also an archaeologist and Egyptologist. So he is very pro independence, but relies on European institutions for his career. So you got all these tricky problems. And then we have Faisal, who’s a street kid who’s based on a lot of the street kids I’ve met in my neighborhood in Bab al-Luq in downtown Cairo, who doesn’t care about independence, he just wants his next meal. So that’s an interesting trio and I wanted to have the historical background moving along in the background as they’re solving mysteries. Jo: I mean you mentioned where you live in Cairo. If people want to see things in Egypt or in Cairo itself that are more from that period or from other periods that are not just ancient Egypt, like — What are some of the places that you would recommend visiting? Sean: Oh, it’s endless. I first went to Egypt in ’91 after I was working on a dig in Cyprus for the same reason everybody else did. I wanted to see the pyramids and the Sphinx and Karnak and all that, and I love that. But the more I kept going back, the more I discovered how much else there is. And there’s an amazing number of beautiful mosques there, most of which foreigners are allowed in as long as you behave yourself and dress appropriately. There’s a lot of old medieval architecture. The old areas, what you call Islamic Cairo, although most of it of course is Islamic, is fascinating. You can walk around these old labyrinthine streets, and there is a thousand year old fountain and there was an 800 year old mosque and you go around. And then there’s all the bazaars and all the smells and sights of that. As far as things specifically from the early 20th century, not so much because it was sort of this transition period. But when I’ve read accounts from that era and when I’ve wandered around the back streets of Cairo, there’s a lot that you can still recognize. I mean, of course everyone’s got cell phones and lights and all that, but the pace of life, a lot of the clothing, a lot of the way that people still interact, the traditional crafts, they’re all still there. So that makes it very easy to research. I always tell my readers it’s inspiration made easy. I just go off to these places. Jo: Just walking around. I mean, you mentioned the mosques there, obviously you said there are so many. Is there one particular mosque that sticks out in your mind as particularly interesting or beautiful? Sean: My personal favorite is the Mosque of Ibn Tulun, which is from about 800 AD, one of the oldest mosques in Cairo. And it’s based on the mosque in Samarra, in Iraq. And instead of having the stairs on the inside, it has the stairs on the outside. So you go up these winding stairs and you end up looking over this beautiful view of Cairo, and right next to it is the Gayer Anderson Museum. It was this old house from the early 20th century that was built in the Islamic style, but it was actually owned by a western professor. And you can tour that and see his art collection, see all the interior. There’s several old stately homes that you can tour the interior. I also went up the mosque of Samarra in Iraq, and that was terrifying because I’m acrophobic and there’s no railing for the external staircase. So you’re going up and up and up and the staircase gets narrower and narrower and narrower. And I get right up to the top and I have this photo taking a photo of my boot on the step and there’s no more space. And the same size of my boot is the bus that we came in all the way down at the bottom. Jo: Oh. And that turns my stomach even just thinking about it. Sean: Yeah. I have a fear of heights. But I had to go up it. I would’ve kicked myself for the rest of my life if I didn’t go up it, so I went up it. Jo: That is interesting. I have, like, I do feel sick around heights and the last place I tried was Cologne Cathedral, and I tried to climb up the spire and about halfway up I just was like, I literally can’t, and then I had to sit on my bum and go down the stairs on my bum all the way down again. So, yeah, I don’t think I’ll try that, but that sounds interesting. And you mentioned a museum there, and again, there’s loads of museums. And now things have changed a bit, haven’t they? Like when I was there, I guess it was like 25 years ago, the Museum of Antiquities was still the old one, like in town. And that’s now moved. Have you been to that amazing new Antiquities museum? Sean: Yeah, there’s actually a couple of new museums. The museum at Tahrir Square is still there, but they’ve taken a lot of the good stuff out, including King Tutankhamun. But the new Egyptian museum on the Giza Plateau right next to the pyramids is fantastic. It is huge. I spent I think eight hours there in total, and I still didn’t get a proper look at it. I have to go back the next time I’m there. Amazing architecture. And the front hall is this series of steps with all these statues and sarcophagi. And then you get up to the museum proper where you go through the different periods as in a normal museum. It is truly stunning. And then there’s a Museum of Egyptian Civilization, which is a smaller, sort of more bespoke museum that goes through all the periods, but also has a lot of modern stuff, including the different ethnic groups. There’s a section about the Nubian and a section about the Bedouin, Upper Egypt, Lower Egypt, the delta. So that’s all well worth seeing too. I got to see that with some Egyptian friends. Their daughter who was nine at the time, gave me the tour, so that was interesting. It’s always fun to follow a child through a museum the way they dart around and make associations that you wouldn’t think of. Jo: Yeah, they get bored quite quickly. But I go quite quickly through museums and I stop when I’m like, that’s the thing I want to spend more time with. Because I imagine, I mean, it was pretty overwhelming when I was there, but I imagine now, like you said, if you spent eight hours there, that’s a lot. Sean: I’m a museum junkie. I can do it. Jo: Yeah, you can do it. But I mean, a lot of people come into Cairo and do the pyramids and then leave, go down the Nile, up the Nile and do other bits quite quickly. If people are in Cairo for even a couple of days, are there things they should see? Sean: I would highly suggest Khan el-Khalili, which is the old market, which has been around for about a thousand years, and that is well worth seeing. And when you’re in there, it’s very packed and there’s all these stalls and some of it’s tourist kitsch, but some of it is things for Egyptians to buy, but it’s easy to get overwhelmed by all the spices and everything you’re seeing, but also look up because you’ll see all these old windows and these lovely arches and stuff. There’s people living up there too, you know, people peeking down, looking at you. So it’s well worth looking around there. And also just relax, go to some of the cafes. The cafes are open for everybody. I’ve noticed a lot of foreigners are sort of hesitant about going to Egyptian cafes, but it’s never a problem. And I mean, Egyptian women go to cafes too, so they’re open for everybody and it’s a very relaxed cafe culture. The Egyptians are very Mediterranean that way. So it’s well worth going to the cafes and getting a tea or a coffee and just watching the world go by. In my neighborhood in Bab al-Luq, which is down in the central part of old downtown, which has a lot of old 19th and early 20th century buildings during the big boom that they were having back then, there’s some lovely old shaded pedestrian roads where they’re just lined with cafes. It’s very relaxing. Jo: Yeah. And I guess most people, in fact, I wouldn’t associate the word relaxing with Cairo. I remember the traffic being particularly difficult and I guess also sometimes the heat, depending on what time of the year. Cultural stereotypes, I think make people afraid. And the media in fact, and of course there have been issues, there always are issues in every country, but people may think religious fundamentalism, there are potential issues. So what, how can you help people be more relaxed? Like how should they behave to make the most of it? Sean: It’s easier because I’m a man, let’s just put that out there. Women traveling with men will not have any problems at all. My wife’s been there a bunch of times, has never had a problem. Women traveling together tends to be okay. Just no mini skirts and halter tops. I mean, you’re in a Muslim country. I mean, I don’t wear shorts when I’m there. I always wear long pants, just get some light khaki pants or something. And it’s getting more accepted than it used to be, but it’s still not a good idea. And you can’t go into a mosque dressed that way. Religious fundamentalism, the current junta of generals has done a very good job of crushing the Muslim Brotherhood, so there haven’t been any terrorist attacks for quite some time. That said, you will occasionally meet people that you don’t get a very good vibe off of. Although that happens to me all the time. It’s sad to say, but I will not get into a taxi with an openly religious taxi driver because they always try to overcharge me. Jo: Interesting. It’s tourist tax. You know there is a level of tourist tax that should be allowed, I think in any place. But you are more of a regular. I mean, I guess the other thing is the street hawkers, some of whom are often children as well in some places. And that can be overwhelming. Like you feel like you should be buying something or giving money, and then as soon as you do, there are lots more. Is that still? Sean: That is a problem. They’ve cleared them out a little bit, but see, I don’t mind the people who go around at night around the cafes trying to sell whatever it is they’re trying to sell. Because a lot of these kids, they’re not homeless, but they’re very poor. They’re probably living eight to a room. And everybody has to have a little job to supplement the income. And if it’s something I would reasonably want to buy, then I buy it. I don’t mind. What I don’t like is the tourist hustlers who are like pushing you, like, oh, come to my shop. No, no, because then if you go to the shop, you’re doomed. They’re going to pressure you and pressure you and pressure you. And you just have to learn to say no and mean it. And one of the tactics that they sometimes use is if you’re refusing, you say, no, no, sorry, I’m just not interested in say, what? Are you racist? No, I’m not. No, I’m not racist. I just don’t want your plastic bust of Nefertiti. Jo: Yeah, I think it’s especially at the tourist sites, I remember the, I think it was the Temple of Hatshepsut. And gosh, there were so many there. But there the coaches offload and I guess it’s a good spot. But be aware that that’s going to happen and just watch out for it. Sean: And there’s no real way to avoid it. The more you go, the more comfortable you get. And the less they come after you, they realize, they sense it. One thing that you do have to watch out for, and this isn’t happening in the new museum, but happens in the old Egyptian museum in Tahrir, is you’ll be taking photos or a video and some guy will come up to you, flash an ID in Arabic and say, I work for the museum. You’re not allowed to take photos, you don’t have permission. You have to give me 400 pounds. These guys are just hustlers. And what they’re flashing is not their museum ID. It’s actually their national ID. Jo: Yeah, that’s a good one. I mean, a lot of the cathedrals in Europe, you do have to pay like an extra fee to take photos, but you do that at the front desk when you get your ticket, basically. I would also say like, I traveled as an independent woman, but I went with a group, so I think this is easy enough, like there are millions of different groups you can join traveling in Egypt. So I guess also — What are some other areas of Egypt that you find interesting that, again, are often overlooked in the rest of the country? Sean: Oh, well, all of them, but that’s not a very good answer, is it? Well, obviously Upper Egypt, Karnak, Aswan, Luxor, all that, but a lot of people go there. One of my favorite places is the Western desert and the oases in the Western desert. I have a whole book set in Bahariya, which is a very isolated oasis out in the middle of nowhere, way out past Cairo. You get on a bus and you drive and drive and drive and drive and drive. And there’s some amazing stretches of desert out there. I went camping. Beautiful star filled nights where the sky felt like it was about 12 feet above your head. So many stars. You can’t even recognize the constellations, but amazing geography there, geology there where the wind will scour the rock into all these weird shapes. And there’s a White Desert, which is all this gypsum. And then there’s a Black Desert, which is all volcanic stuff. And so that was really, really interesting. And there’s some archaeological sites in Bahariya as well. It’s a very different culture because they’re Bedouin who’ve settled and they settled hundreds of years ago. So they’re not Bedouin, they’re not Nile Valley folk, they’re Bahariya. And the Faiyum is another more accessible oasis. It’s on a branch of the Nile, about three hours southwest of Cairo, and that has this lovely lake and there’s a large stretch of cultivated land there. And then you can go out in the desert, go see some old archaeological sites there and these amazing sand dunes. And I’m actually putting them in the next book that’s coming out in August. My characters go there to solve a murder. And you can see what the locals call ‘sand whales,’ which are fossilized whales from when the whole area was an inland sea. And what’s interesting about these whales is you might’ve heard how whales were originally land animals that became amphibious and then went into the sea. Well, these fossils are old enough that you can still see vestigial hind legs on them and their front legs turned into fins. It’s amazing. Jo: That’s very cool. You can find archaeology everywhere. Sean: Yes. There’s still regions I haven’t seen. There’s all these Coptic monasteries in the Red Sea area that I want to go to. I’ve been to the ones in Wadi Natrun, which is another road trip well worth doing. You can see monasteries that have been functioning since the fifth century. Jo: The Coptics are fascinating. I still remember the first time I was in Jerusalem on the roof of the Holy Sepulchre and the Ethiopian Coptics there have a little shrine on the roof. They’re poor but close to the shrine. Sean: That’s Jerusalem. Jerusalem’s an electric place. I love that. Jo: Well that’s a whole other episode. Sean: I haven’t been in years either. Jo: No, I haven’t either. But yes, let’s just come onto an angle I wanted to tackle since you also write post-apocalyptic books. And I think this is so interesting because you are mainly historical and ex-archaeology and you think about this and I wondered — What do you think we will leave in the historical record from our era? Because it feels to me like we are so interested and we write about these times that are quite ancient. And as you mentioned, even like the 1919, when you are writing like there isn’t necessarily that much from then. So what do you think about what will last? Sean: Well, that’s a good, a lot of plastic. But other than that, that’s a good question. I mean, all this electronic data that’s gone very early, a lot of my very early writings is gone. Jo: Disappeared. Sean: You’re not launching this into space?! Jo: Maybe, but no, we should. I mean, even our books, our books rot. I mean the books that last, this is what’s interesting. The books that last are usually made of, I guess there’s papyrus in Egypt, but like vellum or more organic matter, I guess. Sean: There’s a great book called The World Without Us by Alan Weisman, I think is the author, The World Without Us. And he looks at the theory, what would happen if all humans disappeared tomorrow, how much would be around? And so he looks at a lot of older sort of modern ruins. He goes to the Green Line in Cyprus. Back in, I think it was ’72 or ’73, the Turks invaded Cyprus because they were having a fight with the Greek national party that wanted to join with Greece, there was a division that cut right through Nicosia and a couple other cities. And so there was this green line between the Turkish North and the Greek Cypriot South. And there’s a strip there that has just been sitting there for 50 years and he got to visit it. He had to get visas from both sides and have guards go with him and everything, but what he was surprised was how much was gone, like so much had just fallen apart. Things that you don’t think about like tires because tires dry out. And so there were cars there that he went to a gasoline station that had a stack of tires that all that was left were the rims. Like everything else had just shredded. There was just this sort of black dust and the heap around. That sort of thing. A lot of the buildings had simply fallen in, even though they were solidly enough made back in the sixties or the fifties or whenever they had been built, because they just been sitting around for 50 years. Because he went in the 2010s. They had all fallen apart. Jo: Yeah. And you wonder whether the like the Burj Khalifa for example, or the Shard in London, do they end up crumbling? Because like in London and in Egypt and Cairo, there are these buildings that are a thousand years old or you are excavating things that are much, much older. Are these things going to last or are we just not building like that anymore or making things? I think we don’t really build to last though. Sean: I give you a good example. I’m here in Oxford University doing research right now and I’m in the Bodleian Library, lovely library. It’s 600 years old, the oldest parts and they’re still solid and I can sit in there and work and everything is fine. My wife is at the astrophysics department in a building that was built in the mid fifties. Jo: Oh, they’re so ugly around there, aren’t they? Sean: Brutalism! How can you put brutalist architecture in the middle of Oxford? I know it’s criminal. And the concrete’s already beginning to decay because it’s not fully waterproof — in England! Jo: Which is crazy. I was at Mansfield College, which is right near that science area and yeah, it’s reasonable looking and has a nice chapel, but yeah, I mean, it’s completely different in different colleges and different time periods. But I mean, Oxford itself is a sort of time capsule, isn’t it? Sean: Oh, sure. And I love that about it. I went to high table in Christ Church once, and the person who was sponsoring me to get in, because I’m not an Oxonian, therefore I just can’t go to these things. Jo: Well, they wouldn’t let me in there! Sean: She took me down the side passage that led to the kitchen and there was this huge slab of an open table. And I look at that, I’m like, that looks old. And she says, this might be the oldest thing in Oxford. Because it was just, it was obviously old growth and it was obviously medieval because it was just this big slab with legs. And the top was literally this thick and it was shiny because it was so old, but there’s all these deep carved scratches in it and everything. And this table had been serving the university for literally centuries and it will outlast the astrophysics department and it’ll outlast our books. It’s also just too heavy to move, so it’s just going to stay there. Jo: Interesting. When you write your post-apocalyptic books, are you thinking about this view of history or casting your mind into a future where it goes horribly wrong? Sean: Well, what I do with Toxic World is I decided, as much as I like zombies and all that, I didn’t want to use zombies or a plague or a meteor because I felt that was kind of a cop out. What happens in my scenario is there’s resource depletion and overpopulation, and then World War III kicks off and a lot of things crumble, and then people start building up, and then there’s more wars and the countries fragment into city states, and there’s more wars and more degradation and et cetera. There’s some nukes go off just for chuckles and there’s a bio war, so a bunch of animals go extinct and everything just slowly decays to the point where there’s only one town left called New City. And it’s not really a city. It only has 3000 people in it. And they barely are able to keep the lights on. And there’s ravaging hordes out there and toxic wasteland. And sad to say, I think that that’s much more of a likely scenario that might actually, if we’re not careful, that might actually be how it goes down. Jo: Except overpopulation? I think now we are basically dying off by not having children? Sean: Well, some sections of the world and some sections still are growing. So it’s sort of a trade off. There are predictions that the rise in population’s going to level out. Whether it does or not, we shall see. Jo: We should see, but I do find this interesting because as you say, like, let’s go back to that pile of ash that you were excavating again, evidence of war, and going back to Tel Megiddo in Israel, same thing. Evidence of cities razed and destroyed and the next city built on top of it, and then the next city, and on and on. And just these levels and levels. I mean, that is history, but what you are also writing is, that’s also the future. I guess are we just stuck in these cycles? Sean: There’ll be decline and then people will rise up. I mean, you’re seeing certainly Europe’s, I would say Europe is definitely in decline on a number of levels. China seems to be booming. How viable that is in the long term is hard to say. I mean, they only really started this communist capitalist experiment 30 years ago. So it’s way too early to say what’s going to happen. Some people say the United States is in decline. I’m not so sure they are. They’re certainly undergoing a fundamental change. Where that’s going to end up, I have no idea. But I wouldn’t write off the United States quite yet. But all empires die and the American Empire will die. The Chinese empire will die. And the next one, the Canadian Empire. Jo: When we have it. The glorious days, the Canadian Empire. When was that? Sean: It’s coming next! Jo: Well, it’s so funny because I agree with you obviously being British and feeling like we live past the end of empire, so the end of the British Empire was a while ago now, you know, not in our lifetime. And like you’re in Oxford. I’m in Bath. We live in this kind of nice museum of Europe. The whole continent is like a museum. And then you go to America and I agree with you. I think America’s still got that sort of pushing forward energy. And then what I like doing though, as a British person is going to Portugal because I feel like their empire died before the British Empire. And so I see the future of Britain in Portugal, which let’s face, it’s got a great quality of life. And it’s got some lovely parts about it, but a lot of people don’t realize how big an empire Portugal once had. Sean: Oh, it was vast. Jo: Huge. And there’s a podcast called Hardcore History, and Dan Carlin, the host, has a book The End is Always Near, which is about this collapse of civilizations. I guess you talked about decline, but is there anything else, like if we think about traveling to places. Because I didn’t go to New Orleans before the big hurricane. Sean: So I haven’t been since. Jo: Oh, you haven’t been since, okay. So I have been since, but I remember being invited to go visit someone and I said, ‘oh no, I’ll do that another time.’ And then obviously Katrina happened and you know, all of that. But are there places where you visit and it’s like, okay — Are there are places that we need to see because things are going to change and they might disappear? Sean: I’m more aware of that ever since ISIS. Because when I was much younger in the mid nineties, I traveled to Syria before the Civil War and spent a couple months there. Wonderful. Had a great time. Saw Palmyra, saw a lot of that. I also did some journalism in Iraq between, in this a peaceful period between the surge and the rise of ISIS. And there was this sort of a lull for about a year and a half, and I got in right then. And so I saw a lot of sites there. So I saw a lot of places that ISIS wiped off the map. I also saw several Christian communities near the border of Syria that became ISIS territory. And so the people I met and the towns I saw, well, they just don’t exist anymore. So yeah, that made me very aware. I had always been aware because I was an archaeologist, when you are working on a city and nobody knows what it was called or any of the people who lived there, it changes your perception a little bit. But when it was people I actually met and places I actually saw myself, and then they got wiped off the map, that really brought it home to me. Everything’s fragile and there’s nasty people in the world. Jo: Or just natural disasters. Things that happen. My Map of Shadows and my Mapwalker series has this split world. And on the other side of the map are all the places that got pushed out of our maps because like you mentioned, Iraq for example, someone drew it on a map and there it was, all these places, those lines don’t necessarily exist and they change and that also shifts people. But it is super interesting to think what might go. Sean: But things endure too, which is something that I’ve always found interesting. I mean, Iraq, the name is Uruk. The old city state from 3000 BC. There is a, since you’ve lived in London, I suppose, there’s a road called Houndsditch, and they were doing some excavations there. The Museum of London. And they found that it was a ditch outside the old Roman wall, and they found a bunch of dog skeletons in it. It’s where they dumped their dead dogs. And that ditch later got paved over, turned into a road that got named Houndsditch. You talk to people in Houndsditch, they have no idea why it’s called Houndsditch. But that name got preserved and passed through three different languages to make it to our present day. So some things will endure, and I think that people interactions, the more I read history, people don’t change a huge amount. I mean, culturally there’s shifts, but what we want out of life and how we interact with friends and family, I don’t think they’re vastly different. And so I think some things remain the same. Jo: Yeah, we still want to sit on the edge of that bath and play a game. Sean: Exactly. I can just totally see these people with their feet in the water and they’re playing a game. I love that. Jo: That’d be me. Although I might have a book rather than play a game, but well, let’s just come back, we could talk all day actually, I think about all this kind of stuff, but I am interested just in an attitude to travel. So you obviously, you travel a lot. You’re a relaxed type of guy. You’ve got a lot of experience traveling and then people might be listening and like, well, how do I do that? What’s your overarching tip for people who want to travel but maybe just struggle? Sean: Slow down, see less for longer. I mean, I understand that not everyone can go off for two months a year to Cairo like I can, but find a place you like and just hang out. I’m very lucky that I’m married to a woman that likes to travel that way. Because so many people want, it’s like, oh, they have a whole checklist of things I have to see. I need to see a dozen things. That drives me insane. Just stresses me out. I’d rather stay home and work, but slow down. Have a second coffee at a cafe in Tahrir Square or go for a walk at night or in Alexandria just sit by the seaside and look out. That sort of thing. And try to meet people. I often travel alone, especially if I’m going to crazier places. I’m planning a trip to Algeria for probably November, and I’m going to go alone, because if you’re alone, you’re going to meet more people and that’s a lot of fun. And you can do this as a woman in the Middle East, you’re just going to be meeting women. And what’s been fun is I’ve traveled, like with my wife, but with other women beforehand, we’d travel in the Middle East together and then she’d go off with ladies and I’d go off with the guys and we’d come back at the end of the evening and we’d have had completely different experiences. And so we’d just compare notes. So that was kind of fun. So it’s very doable, and as a woman, solo traveler is, if you keep your head about you, it’s not going to be any more dangerous than London. Perhaps less dangerous than London. London’s maybe not the best one to compare it to, but less dangerous than St. Louis. How about we put it like that? There’s very little street crime in Cairo. There’s just hassling in Cairo. And so I would just say go for it. Relax, spend more time, talk to the locals and just have a good time. And people tend to be fairly laid back the more you can. You more, you reach out and try to understand and try to speak the local language, that helps too. I did a project in Harar, which is an old medieval walled city in eastern Ethiopia, and they have their own language, Harari, which is only spoken in this little walled city. And this city is not really a city. It’s about 50,000 people. And I remember the first time I managed to make a coherent sentence in Harari. Everyone just flipped out. There weren’t very many more after that, but the fact that I tried enough to actually make a sentence in Harari and don’t ask me to repeat it because it’s long since gone, being able to do that, that really helps. People are just generally curious about one another. And people want to meet, especially in more remote areas because they don’t get to meet very many foreigners. And we’re trained with this idea that the world’s hostile and you watch the news and everyone’s blowing each other up. But mostly people just want to relax and enjoy their life and have a good time and just like anybody else. And you get them on that level and everything’s generally okay. Jo: Fantastic. Right, so this is the Books and Travel podcast. What are a few books that you recommend around the topics we’ve discussed today? Sean: One crazy book that I just read recently is Walking The Nile by Levison Wood. Have you read that? Jo: Oh yeah. Sean: Total Mad Dogs and Englishman type book. This guy decides to walk the length of the Nile. And he doesn’t start at Lake Victoria. He starts in Rwanda. Good job. And that’s very well written and very interesting. It has a bit of the sort of dashing British adventurer ignoring local politics. He’s very much that. But it is well written and it is a lot of fun to read. And I was just in the Oxfam shop near my house, and I picked up this, which is an excellent classic book on Morocco, Morocco That Was by Walter Harris. He was a correspondent for the Times around the turn of the century. So he wrote several books. And Walter Harris traveled all through Morocco in the teens, in the twenties, just my era. And described a lot of the old kasbahs and meeting the Sultan and the old bandits that used to be around there, but also a lot of cultural mores and customs that are still around today. So that’s a lot of fun. Jo: Fantastic. And then just tell us a bit about your books if people want to try them. Sean: Oh, I was just at a book fair here in Oxford and sold almost all the copies of my books. But I do have, this is book five. I sold book one through four. This is for the Masked Man of Cairo series. This is the case of the Asphyxiated Alexandrian. This is where they go up to Alexandria searching for Alexander’s tomb, which of course has been long since lost. Sir Augustus has to go because one of his old war buddies gets murdered. And so he has to go find it. I don’t have anything from the Toxic World or Moroccan mysteries because those all sold out. But I do have a copy of a standalone I did based in modern Tangier called The Last Hotel Room. And this I wrote right after the Syrian civil War kicked off and there was always a small Syrian community in Tangier in Northern Morocco. And what the King of Morocco decided to do was allow Syrians in without a visa. So suddenly there was this huge influx, but he didn’t give them citizenship or residency, so they couldn’t go to school. The kids couldn’t go to school, the parents couldn’t work. I mean, they weren’t getting bombed, but they were stuck in this sort of limbo and they couldn’t get to Europe. Not at that moment. They started going later. And I was watching this influx. And so I wrote a book about some of the Syrian refugee kids that I met, and a portion of the last hotel room goes to a charity there. There’s a few charities I like to support for kids in the Middle East. Because there’s a lot of need. It’s pretty rough. Jo: Interesting. You have books about so many things. Where can people find you and your books online? Sean: Well, I’m at seanmclachlan.net. And I’m on all the socials at WriterSean, on Instagram, my Facebook author page. And I just started a Pinterest account, so I’m putting up things on Pinterest as well and Amazon, of course. Jo: Well, brilliant. Thank you so much for your time, Sean. Sean: Thank you. It’s been a lot of fun. This transcript has been edited for clarity and readability while maintaining the authentic conversation between Jo Penn and Sean McLachlan about archaeology, Egypt, Morocco, travel, and writing. The post Egypt Beyond the Pyramids And Glimpsing The Future In History With Sean McLachlan appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 8/28/25 | ![]() Facing Fears And Finding Resilience In Midlife: Long-Distance Walking With Zoe Langley-Wathen | Have you ever considered a radical change to mark a new chapter in your life? What fears hold you back from taking on a huge challenge, like walking for weeks on your own? Zoe Langley-Wathen talks about conquering her fears on the 630-mile South West Coast Path, and how it led to an even bigger goal: to walk the entire coastline of Great Britain. Zoe is the author of 630 Miles Braver: Midlifing on the South West Coast Path. She’s also a Fellow of the Royal Geographical Society, an award-winning teacher, and host of the HeadRightOut podcast. Why Zoe chose the South West Coast Path to mark a rite of passage into midlife The beautiful highlights and the brutal, challenging aspects of the 630-mile trail Overcoming fears of walking and wild camping solo Practical advice on training, managing physical pain, and preparing for a long walk How the experience built lasting resilience and changed her life trajectory Zoe’s next epic adventure with her husband: walking the 7,300-mile coastline of Great Britain You can find Zoe at HeadRightOut.com You can find my tips on long-distance multi-day solo walking in my book, Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways, and more pilgrimage resources here. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello Travellers, I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Zoe Langley-Wathen. Welcome, Zoe. Zoe: Hi Jo, thank you for having me. Jo: It’s great to have you on the show. Zoe is the author of 630 Miles Braver: Mid-life-ing on the South West Coast Path. She’s also a Fellow of the Royal Geographical Society, an award-winning teacher, and host of the HeadRightOut podcast. Where is the South West Coast Path, how long is it, and why did you decide to walk it for a significant birthday? Zoe: Thank you for having me on. The clue is in the title, 630 Miles Braver. The path is 630 miles long, or 1,014 kilometres. It starts at Minehead on the south-west tip of England and travels all the way down to the toe of Cornwall, where you’ll find Land’s End. It then continues along the coast of Cornwall, Devon, and Dorset, finishing at Poole Harbour, the second largest natural harbour in the world. For people who need to locate it geographically, Minehead is about 60 miles or an hour and three-quarters south-west of Bristol. As for why I did it, it was to mark a rite of passage into midlife. Around 2010, I had a moment of what felt like divine intervention in a bookshop in Wells, Somerset. I walked in and there was a book on a shelf, and I swear there was a shaft of light shining on it: the South West Coast Path Handbook. I had been searching for a path for a long time to mark this rite of passage. I’d considered Kilimanjaro or the Inca Trail to Machu Picchu, but none of them resonated. This one just clicked, because I had wanted to do it for about 15 years but never thought myself capable. I thought only gritty, athletic, strong people did the South West Coast Path, not me. I just didn’t think I was enough in any capacity. Suddenly, it was like a lightbulb had been switched on. I grabbed the book, paid for it, and thought, ‘Right, I’m going to do this. I don’t know how, but I’ll figure it out.’ And I did sort out figure it out along the way. Jo: You said you were ‘searching for a path for a long time,’ which is a really interesting phrase. You’d considered more iconic places, but felt a sense of calling to this one. I feel like I had that for the Camino de Santiago for a really long time. What do you think it is in us as humans that makes us search for a path? Zoe: That’s an interesting question. I’m not sure it’s necessarily a path that is calling us, but rather a need to make sense of our lives. Turning 40 or 50 is a pivot point in our lives where we might need to re-identify with ourselves. For a long time, I had been ‘mum’ and ‘teacher,’ completely immersed in work. For me, it was about challenging myself to do something I didn’t think I was capable of something out of the ordinary. I also wanted to fundraise to make it serve a purpose. But really, whether I was conscious of it or not, I was searching for another side of myself—a stronger version of me. Jo: It seems at midlife we often want to make a change. With a long walk that takes weeks, you have to plan for a literal pivot in your life, like taking a whole summer off. Is the scale of that commitment part of the appeal? It takes, what a month, to six weeks to walk it? Zoe: It took me 48 days to do it. I knew I was going to be scared ’cause I was scared. I was definitely fearful. By announcing it at the school where I was working, to friends and family, and even in assemblies, I created accountability. There was no backing out. I knew it was a challenge that felt out of reach, and I think that’s what I was looking for. Taking a week off work feels less momentous than a challenge that is going to take six or seven weeks, and doing it solo. I discovered I was carrying a lot of fears in my rucksack that I perhaps didn’t realise I had. These paths have a way of exposing all sorts of hangups and interesting thoughts, but they also help you sort things out. It can be problems or creative ideas; it was certainly magical for that. Jo: You can deny your problems and escape yourself for a week, but not for six or seven weeks, and all the challenges along the way. Let’s circle back to challenge. Let’s start with what were some of the most beautiful and memorable sections, and I guess we should say that as we record this in 2025, the film version of The Salt Path is out, which is set along the same coastal path and the book by Raynor Winn. You can certainly see some of these amazing sections. What were some of the most beautiful and memorable sections for you? Zoe: There are so many on the South West Coast Path, it’s really hard to choose. But I lived in Dorset for 30 years, so I have to say the Jurassic Coast, which is about 96 miles from Exmouth to Poole, is absolutely beautiful. [I walked part of this from Lyme Regis to Seaton.] The geology, the stunning scenery, the rollercoaster paths… they challenge you to your core, but they are absolutely, exquisitely beautiful. It’s hard to believe that nature has produced something so fabulous. I also really connected with the ruggedness of North Devon and Cornwall, particularly around Bude in North Cornwall and Zennor, which is down towards Land’s End. The quaintness of the cottages, the interest of the architecture, the churches… there’s a church on a beach, the Church of St. Winwaloe at Gunwalloe, also known as the Church of the Cove. That absolutely blew me away because it’s so tucked away in the most remote place. I love architecture, but I love nature as well. One more place that blew me away was the Minack Theatre, which is near Porthcurno. It was built by a lady named Rowena Cade and her gardener, starting in the 1930s. She worked on it for about 50 years until she died in the 1980s. I should say that I don’t like heights, and climbing down the narrow, steep steps carrying a full pack scared me, but it still wowed me. It left me in awe how somebody could dedicate their whole life to something that is now such an iconic feature of the Cornish landscape. Anyone performing there is performing with the backdrop of the sea behind them. Jo: Just to be clear, everyone, it’s on the coast at the edge of the coast, right? So you’re looking out to sea. Obviously it’s called the Coast Path, are you within sight of the sea the entire time? Zoe: I’d like to say yes, but no. I mean, mostly you are. Mostly, so wherever possible they try and keep the path as close to the sea as they can. But obviously for erosion reasons, that’s not always possible and safety reasons. Sometimes they have to reroute you inland. So yeah, there are moments – well, I say moments, miles – there will be miles through woodland and estates where it takes you into kind of very leafy green areas where you do not see the sea maybe for a whole day. But generally you do see the sea. And to be honest, if you don’t see the sea. Sometimes you are – well, generally you’re going to find things that are of great interest anyway. So whether it’s plants, whether it’s wildlife, buildings. One of those stretches, there was another church actually, within the first couple of days, a little church called Culbone and it’s in a valley. You just wander down into the dip through the woods. Lots of little holloways and brick built bridges from the Victorian times. But then you get down to this church and it’s a tiny church and I think it housed a leper colony many, many years ago. But it’s just very olde worlde. You would love it, Jo. The tombs and the gravestones that are covered in all the lichens and the mosses. It paints a very antiquated picture and it is beautiful. Just a nice energy there. Jo: For people who don’t really know England, there are some stereotypes, obviously. I guess the weather would be one thing, but also perhaps people think, ‘oh, it’s all quaint,’ so what are the more stormy aspects or the bits where it’s just like, okay, this is actually wild? Because some of that coast was famous for pirates and rocks. It’s not a gentle coastline really, is it? It can be quite violent with weather and waves. Zoe: Very far from it. Violent, brutal, challenging. Steep steps are built generally by volunteers, so very often they might not be of a standard height, so do be prepared for some steps to be even thigh height. So it is almost like climbing up them. That’s where walking poles come in handy. I found that having a pair of walking poles meant that I could lean on something. It takes the pressure off your knees. They say it takes up to 25% of the strain off your knees, but particularly useful when you’re going down steps like that. A lot of cliff paths that maybe have eroded, not to the point where they’re collapsing into the sea, but say for example, steps, again, if they have eroded away, you might end up with a slope that you have to descend that in wet weather would be quite sticky and actually quite nice to get down. But in dry weather, that creates a sort of gravelly slip. So, yeah, be careful of that. Cows – there’s a lot of people who might not like cows and you will come up against cows from time to time. But yeah, bad weather. My goodness. I mean, I had shocking weather in Cornwall and upon High Cliff, which is the highest point of the Southwest Coast Path. And I didn’t heed the advice of locals. I would say always take the advice of locals, but I didn’t on that day and I ended up hunkering down on the top of High Cliff thinking, what the hell have I got myself into? I just had my hood up and poles dug into the hill and just wanting to be transported, teleported off the hill. I did actually spot some locals and asked if I could walk back down with them because the wind was buffeting me at 40, at least 40, if not 50 miles an hour. It was so strong and it just didn’t feel safe to be up there at that point. So, yes, do keep an eye on the weather reports as well, and ask locals for knowledge if you’re unsure. Jo: I think that’s really important because some of the amazing sections in lovely weather are all wonderful. And then, like you say, over six weeks, seven weeks, there’s always going to be issues with the weather. I mean, this is England. Zoe: It can’t be helped. And actually that creates a whole new experience for you as well, and one that – People get grumpy about the rain, but actually when you are already out in it, you just accept it and it helps you to build more resilience — and just think, well, actually, I know it’s a cliche, but they say there’s no such thing as bad weather, only bad gear. And so if you’re wearing the right gear, actually you can get through it. And you generally find there’s trail angels out there. There’s people who are so kind and if they see that you are a drowned rat will very often take you in and say, come on, come and have a cup of tea, dry off for a bit. It’s quite interesting how many times that happened. Or you just go and hole up in a cafe because actually you are never that far away. It’s not like you are in such a remote place that you are never too far away from civilisation. So there are cafes, there are shops, there are people pretty much most days. You’ll just have quite a few miles in between where you don’t see people, which is nice. I like that solitude too. Jo: That’s a really good point, is that this is not a wilderness walk. So even though it’s a long walk, it’s certainly not away from civilisation in any way. And there are pros and cons with that. As you say, you can get a coffee or an ice cream or something, but what are there sections? Because this happened to me on the Camino, it was like, oh my goodness. The industry here is a little much like this is a bit much, and sometimes Devon, Cornwall, these places can be pretty touristy. Any places where you’re like, grab an ice cream and move on as fast as possible because they’re a bit too touristy? Zoe: Most of the big towns, to be honest, the big seaside towns, I felt like that. Torquay for example, I mean, Torquay in my head, I had this romantic memory of how wonderful it was because we used to holiday there when I was a child and I was really looking forward to walking through Torquay again. But actually when I got there, it was a bit – sorry to any listeners who are from Torquay – but it just felt a bit sad and unloved and even though it was summer, and I don’t think we even grabbed an ice cream there. We just plowed on through there. There was another place, I forget the name of it now, but probably North Cornwall and there’s a beach where people can park on the beach if they want to. And it looked really lovely coming down from the cliffs into the town. But as we walked through. I say we, because I think I was walking with somebody that day, but as we were walking through, I felt like an alien. I felt like we were being stared at because, carrying this big rucksack and I wasn’t dressed in the usual kind of flip-flops and shorts and bikini top that everybody else was wearing. And so, yeah, that didn’t feel so welcoming. But then the majority of places, I have to say, the majority of places did. But yeah, just be prepared to move on through the bigger places and make yourself feel comfortable in the more natural landscape. That’s definitely my tip. Jo: Coming back to some of the challenges, so you’ve mentioned fear and obviously the title of the book has braver in it, so you’re tackling some of these fears. But one of the big ones is of course going solo. So I’ve done solo walking, but I have not solo wild camped, which I know was a big challenge for you and something that you wanted to face, but it’s not necessary, so people listening, it’s not necessary to wild camp on the Southwest Coast Path. There are places you can stay or go in groups obviously, but — In terms of some of the challenges that you faced and being a woman walking solo, tell us about that. Zoe: So the very first fear that I had was walking on my own. And I talk about this when I go and do talks with groups because particularly guys, they don’t realize that as a woman growing up, we’ve always had somebody to walk with because you don’t let children go and walk on their own, particularly girls. When I was a teenager, I always had friends with me. In my twenties I had a partner or a husband. Then late twenties, thirties, I had a child. So I always had somebody with me when I was walking and I felt almost ashamed to say that I had got to 40, and apart from going to the shops on my own, or maybe going round the park – I don’t even think I’d probably done that. I don’t think I had ever actively chosen to go on a walk on my own. So in itself, that is quite a big thing for a lot of women feeling uncomfortable. I’ve spoken to women about this. They’ve said to me, I can’t do it. I feel uncomfortable. I feel naked. I feel like people will be watching me. And so that’s a real big thing that I now try and promote to try and shelve, to try and put it to one side and just gain some of that power back, to go and enjoy the outdoors on your own. So there was that, there was obviously wild camping on my own. Camping was a little bit of an issue, but I felt okay once I was in a campsite and I was surrounded by other people, but it took me 35 days to actually pluck up the courage to wild camp on my own. And I think by then it was almost needs must. I haven’t got a choice. I was just plunked in that situation, I couldn’t go any further and I ended up pitching myself between a five bar gate and a kissing gate next to a footpath. In fact, that is the front cover of the book. So I am just squeezed in there like a tent sandwich, but again, I think I felt comfortable because I was surrounded by a boundary. I think it was that safety of the boundary. But once I had done it, oh my goodness. If I could just say about this experience I had that night. I felt very nervous about camping out there on my own for the first time, but I was woken in the night by that telltale tingle of needing the toilet in the middle of the night, which happens to most of us. Particularly, you know, 50 plus. But anyway, so I put it off, I thought about all the things that could happen or who might be out there and how would I feel, and I just got myself worked up into a real tizzy. In the end, after risk assessing for what seemed like hours about what could happen, I finally unzipped the tent and I gasped. I just remember that feeling inside me of going, oh my goodness, this is the most beautiful thing I’ve ever seen. The sky was full of so many stars. I had never seen that amount of stars. You know, when there’s no streetlights, no cars around, and it’s a clear night. And yeah, I just promised myself in that moment, I would never, ever pass up the chance to walk and wild camp solo ever again and have a wild wee in the middle of the night. Jo: Wild weeing is a thing! I think that was the turning point for you. Zoe: Definitely. Jo: And then you also do write about physical pain as part of the experience. I also felt that on my pilgrimages, blisters, all of that kind of thing. But you do do a lot of walking and you’ve done a lot of walking, so — What would be your tips for people who want to try and reduce their pain? Zoe: I’m going to just put this out there. I still get blisters. It doesn’t seem to matter what I do. I still get some walks where I get blisters, some walks where I don’t. So I think a lot of it is about combination. So combination of socks, having the right boots, making sure your feet fit in the boots properly. And I actually went for a fitting yesterday for new boots and they gave me some really sound advice about making sure your toes have got plenty of room, so if obviously it’s too tight, you’re going to be getting blisters. Lessening the weight of the rucksack is a big thing because more weight on your back means more weight on your feet. But something else I didn’t realize is that less weight on your feet – so lighter boots can really help with less blisters as well. Keeping your feet as dry as possible, so making sure you’ve always got a spare pair of socks in the top of your pack that’s easily accessible. So when you stop at lunchtime, take your socks off, let your feet air, dry them out. Foot powder if you’ve got some like Daktarin type powders. Something just to kind of keep them dry. And I would then say also, ease into the walk. Don’t try and walk too many miles too soon, because the last walk I did, I was fine for three or four days, and then the moment I started thinking I was falling behind and I started pushing to do more miles, I cranked it up too high and started doing 18, 19, 20 miles. And then boom, the blisters came. And that was during that first heat wave we had. I was going over Dartmoor and it was just way too hot because my feet were sweating and I was doing too many miles. So, yeah, ease into it gently. Keep your feet as dry as possible, lessen the weight of your pack and take ibuprofen. That’s the other key tip, if you are able to take ibuprofen, make sure that you take a couple before you go to bed at night because you will get heel pain, you will get foot pain from that constant pounding, and the ibuprofen is just magic, just takes the pain away and lets you sleep. Jo: Don’t underestimate some painkillers and maybe half a shandy or something as well before bed, but sleeping. Also some people might have in their mind like a coastal path, along a cliff, but you have mentioned the rollercoasters, like the hill climbs are some of the steepest, aren’t they? So talk a bit about that. Should people be doing hill climb training before such a walk? Zoe: It’s definitely worthwhile. And if you build it up gradually as well. So weight carrying in your rucksack and climbing hills or walking hills, not physically climbing, but ascending hills without that weight in your rucksack is going to make a huge difference. So I would say build up weight in your pack. I’ve got an iron that I carry with me when I’m training. It’s for an Aga and it’s got extra plates, hot plates that are obviously cold that fit on the bottom. So if I want to add an extra kilo, I put an extra hot plate. Jo: And then if you want to iron something, amazing?! Zoe: Well, you know, yes. But it’s instant weight in my bag without me having to rush around, filling it with bits and bobs. But yeah, certainly make sure that you do your weight training. Anything over a day is also going to change the dynamic. So if you could go out just for an overnighter somewhere would really help too. And other exercise. I mean, it’s not just about walking, it’s overall physical strength and stamina. So I practice yoga every day, just 20 minutes. It’s nothing mammoth, it doesn’t take too much out of my day, but 20 minutes every day and I’m finding that really gives me the upper body strength as well as the flexibility and the stretches that I need. If I’ve been doing walks and when it means when I’m on a walk, it’s almost like that muscle memory. My body and my head remember the stretches that I need to do to make it feel good in my thighs, in my calves, in my hip flexors. Because when we are sat down a lot, which as writers, we tend to be sat quite a bit, hip flexors and glutes tend to struggle a bit. Jo: Muscles atrophy unless you use them. I love that. And I think you are really right about saying you must do a multiday. Don’t go off and do a six week without doing – I did a five day, that was my first smaller walk, the Pilgrims Way and then the St. Cuthbert’s Way, which were five and six days I think, and then did the Camino. Because like you say, when you are overnight, there are just other things that you need and that you don’t really understand unless you do an overnight. And it’s definitely scary but as you say, it’s one of the best things. And you mentioned resilience there and just the self-development. But let’s fast forward to you now because it’s what, a decade ago? Zoe: It’s 14 years since I did the walk. And it took me four years and four months to write the book. And I would actually say that that was a whole adventure in itself. So when you think I could have – how many times I could have walked the Southwest Coast Path? I mean, okay. I might have had sore knees, but yeah, there were definitely some real mental ups and downs in the journey of writing the book. Jo: It’s got a lot of heart in it. I really appreciate that about it. I think it’s really honest. And just a lovely book about that, but as we said, you have done a lot more walking since then and you are actually planning what is, for some people – in fact, for me it seems quite an extreme walk. So tell us what you are planning to do. So we are recording this in mid 2025. Tell us what your plan is for your next big walk? Zoe: So last year Mike came to me. Mike is my husband. He came to me and he said, ‘Zoe, if we don’t go off and do this walk soon, I might never get the chance to go.’ And I gulped because we have both always wanted to walk the coastline of mainland Great Britain. But I could have quite happily waited another couple of years because I’ve got another two books I want to write in the Miles series, which are some of the other walks that I’ve done. But so I dug my heels in. I hoped he’d forget about it, and then he came back to me again. He said, come on, we really need to start organizing this walk. I should say here. So there’s 19 years difference between Mike and I. So I’ve just turned 54. Mike’s just turned 73, and yeah, rightly so. He’s concerned that either his body or his mind is going to let him down, and he’s not going to get the opportunity to do this wonderful thing that we’ve both always wanted to do. So I will say I am happy with it. Now, it doesn’t mean I’m not apprehensive. I’m still nervous about certain aspects of the walk, but we are both excited and we’re both in the mode of getting the house ready so we can rent the house out. We anticipate it’s going to take two years. Jo: Two years. Everyone’s like, what, two years?! Zoe: Two years, yes. But 7,300 miles. Mike is on two brand new hips. He has tested them out on the Camino last year, and it worked well for him, which is good. So we are taking off. It’s not going to be a race. It’s going to be eight to 10, 12 miles a day. It’ll be eight miles a day round Scotland, 12 miles a day round England and Wales, and eight miles a day for the Southwest Coast Path, which we’re saving until last, because that was the very first path that I walked, which is obviously what the book is about. It’s also where I met Mike. Jo: So 7,300 miles. So if people don’t understand Great Britain, because of course we talk about England, we talk about UK, just if people aren’t from here, just explain that. Zoe: So it’s Great Britain, mainland. It includes England, Scotland, and Wales, not Northern Ireland. So it’s England, Scotland, Wales, and we are not taking any ferries. So we will be walking, we’re starting on the western edge of Poole Harbor at the end of the Southwest Coast Path. And instead of taking the ferry across, we’re walking around Poole Harbor, which is about 35 miles. So we anticipate that’ll take two and a half to three days. We are then heading anti-clockwise, so going east towards Brighton and then up the east coast. We’re going towards London, over Tower Bridge, back down the Thames again, and then up the east coast for the winter. So beast from the east maybe. Who knows? Jo: And when will you hit Scotland? Zoe: So we’re going to hit Scotland at the end of March next year, beginning of April. So there is method in our madness for doing the East coast in the winter. It’s so that we do the east coast of Scotland in the summer, where it will be less midge. And then we will be coming down the western side, the western highlands during the winter. So a bit tricky perhaps, but yeah, we shall see. Hopefully it won’t be too snowy for us. Jo: So then, everyone’s like, but — What on earth do you pack for two years of walking? Is it just – do you change, you getting things sent at different times or are you going to buy different stuff along the way because you don’t want to be carrying winter stuff when it’s the summer and all that? Zoe: So we’ll probably start off with winter gear because we take off on the 4th of October. That’s our starting date. We’re obviously walking into the latter part of the autumn and winter. We will have a bag each of spare kit for the summer stashed somewhere. We haven’t yet figured out exactly where that’s going to be. We’ve got an offer from two or three different people. But yeah, so there will be kit at points where we can say to people, look, we really need, I don’t know, a warmer sleeping bag or, I’m too hot in these trousers. Can you send me my summer weight trousers? So they will be with somebody, they’ll post them on to us. And we also have an arrangement with one of the shops as well. So as we run out, not run out, as we wear out of things, they will send us new kit to whatever destination we’re at at that point, we can find somewhere just slightly ahead of us on the trail. People, I’ve spoken to quite a lot of people in recent months who are saying, oh, well, we’d be quite happy to come out and meet you, or we’ll help you, or you can come and have a shower at ours. So those are the sorts of people that I’ll be contacting ahead of time saying, actually, do you mind if we have a little package sent to you? Jo: Because that seems huge. How are you a different person from the woman who set off on the first walk who basically couldn’t even do much, to where you are now? Zoe: It’s absolutely intense when I think about it now. I mean, that was only supposed to be a one-off walk to mark my rite of passage into middle age. And it turned out to be a whole new trajectory. And I just went on walking each year, facing new challenges because I think I realized that in having a focus, in having a challenge, in being in the outdoors, particularly in my own space with my own thoughts and my own ideas to kind of mull over, I was becoming a more resilient version of me. When I’ve been off, even when I’ve been off on a sort of 5, 6, 7 day walk – I did one just a couple of months ago – I come back and I find that that resilience has topped up. You don’t just do a walk like that and then say, yay, I’m more resilient, and that’s it. You stay more resilient for the rest of your life. It needs to be maintained and it needs topping up. So I find that a big walk will last me two or three months. It boosts my confidence. I get imposter syndrome quite a bit. I don’t – some people don’t like to call it that, but yeah, definitely a belief in myself wavers quite a bit throughout the year, and then I go off on a walk and suddenly I feel like I can face the world. So there’s all sorts of things that come into play there, but resilience is the biggest thing and I guess that’s why I do it, but we just love being outside as well and appreciating nature and seeing the things that you wouldn’t normally see when you’re driving. And although I am an introvert, I still love to meet the people on these walks because if you are out walking, you’re generally meeting other people who have a similar frame of mind to you because you’re both out in the countryside walking. So we tend to meet some amazing people and some of those people are best friends now. Jo: If people want to follow you and Mike virtually, not physically, are you sharing this along the way? Zoe: Yeah, we will be. So we’re called One Coast Any Age – a Head Right Out Adventure. Head Write Out is my little brand, my baby that has been going since 2019. So they can go to headrightout.com and find more details there. We’re on Instagram and Facebook at Head Right Out. We’re just keeping it simple. We’re walking in aid of Dorset and Somerset Air Ambulance as well. So there’s information on the page if people feel like they want to go and have a look at more about what they do. Jo: Fantastic. Right. Well this is the Books and Travel podcast. What are a few books that you recommend either about the Southwest Coast Path or long distance walking in general? Zoe: Do you know this had to be one of the hardest things that I needed to think about because if you could see my bookcase, it’s absolutely full of adventure memoirs and walking. And so I’ve really had to kind of finely tune this. The number one, I know it’s been said before on your podcast, but it has to be The Salt Path by Raynor Winn, because that was the book that triggered my realization that I had a story to tell. I really connected with Raynor’s story. So connected with me on so many levels. And then my book number two, also by Raynor Winn would have to be Landlines. That’s not – this one is not about the Southwest Coast Path. This one is about walking long distances around the country. So starting from Cape Wrath and working their way down through the country. And again, it’s the beauty and the connection with these long distance paths and the humour in it as well. Have you read Landlines? Jo: Yes. Zoe: I found some really gentle humor in there that I really appreciated about other walkers and their view about them walking and who they were. Anyway, I won’t spoil it for anybody. Wild by Cheryl Strayed. I know that’s also another one that you’ve had, and I was trying to think of different books. I do have some different books to recommend, but those are my top three. So, Wild by Cheryl Strayed, I definitely resonated with the rawness and the honesty in Cheryl’s book. I think I understood the healing that she experienced while walking long distances. I experienced grief when I was walking the Southwest Coast Path, and so I definitely felt that. Ursula Martin is my number four. One Woman Walks Europe. Ursula, I should say is a friend of mine, but I have read One Woman Walks Wales, which was her first book and her second book was One Woman Walks Europe and just the intensity, the almost incomprehensible nature of walking for years from Ukraine back across the whole of Europe to Tierra del Fuego and then on up to Wales, and it happened to end up through the COVID years as well. So it’s how she navigated being told that she had to go home, lock your doors and go home and don’t, when she is actually essentially homeless because she’s transient, she’s a traveler, she’s walking, where does she go? So that brought lots of thoughts up about how you manage as a long, long-distance walker. And my number five, I’m actually sneaking in two here because I’m just finishing Simon Armitage. Walking Home. He’s mentioned in The Salt Path, and I realized I’d never actually read a book by Simon Armitage, which I felt really ashamed about. So I read it and I’ve been really enjoying it. I’m on the last chapter, so that’s quite funny in places. He’s walking home along the Pennine Way as this troubadour who is reciting poetry in village halls and pubs and homes and having money donated to him. But yeah, that’s a good one. But my last book I read before that was Windswept by Annabel Abbs. Have you read this one? Jo: I’ve got it. I’ve actually got it on my list. Zoe: Yes, yes. I love it. I just really enjoyed the exploration and the research that she had taken the time to delve into with each of the women that she writes about. So there’s Nan Shepherd who is an author back from the thirties who wrote The Living Mountain about the Cairngorms. She talks about Daphne du Maurier and her friend Clara Vyvyan, I think, who again, they are women who of their time wouldn’t normally be going off doing long distance walks. But they show the appreciation for being out in nature and what it gives them. Simone de Beauvoir, who was known as a staunch feminist and partner to Jean-Paul Sartre. And yet she also, there’s this side of her that not a lot of people knew about how she really connected with the outdoors, but was going out for like nine, 10 hours a day sometimes just to collect her thoughts and think out what was going on in her head. And that’s really kind of how I feel about walking. There’s a quote I jotted down about that. De Beauvoir came up with: “I was walking and the world seemed to open up before me, no longer enclosed or narrow.” And it’s just like, yes, my world feels so small and our comfort zones – my comfort zone tends to shrink so much if I haven’t been doing things like this. And then when I go on a long distance walk, it just opens up before me. I just love that quote. Jo: Brilliant. Well just remind people one more time where they can find you and your book and everything you do online. Zoe: So it’s headrightout.com. Head Right Out on all the socials and the book is available at Amazon, but it’s also available wide so you can go into any independent bookshop – and we both do that – and ask for 630 Miles Braver. Please support the independents. Jo: Brilliant. Well thanks so much for your time, Zoe. That was great. Zoe: Jo, this has been an absolute pleasure. Thank you so much. The post Facing Fears And Finding Resilience In Midlife: Long-Distance Walking With Zoe Langley-Wathen appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 8/14/25 | ![]() Writing Partition: Merryn Glover on History, Home, and the Hill Stations Of India | How does a childhood spent in the Himalayas of Nepal and India shape a life and a love for the mountains of Scotland? How can fiction help us understand the complex, painful history of India’s Partition? I discuss all this and more with the award-winning author, Merryn Glover. Merryn’s nomadic “third culture kid” upbringing with missionary parents in Nepal and India The experience of attending an international boarding school in a North Indian hill station. The history of Indian Hill Stations like Mussoorie, from their origins in the British Raj to modern-day holiday destinations. Weaving the complex history of India’s Independence and Partition into her novel, A House Called Askival. The perspective of writing about India as both an insider to the international community and an outsider to the wider culture. How her childhood in the Himalayas influenced her love for her current home in the mountains of Scotland. Recommended travel books You can find Merryn at MerrynGlover.com Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello Travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Merryn Glover, who is an award-winning author of fiction, nature writing, plays, and short stories. Welcome, Merryn. Merryn: Hi there. Thank you for having me. Jo: It’s great to have you on. You were born in Kathmandu and brought up in Nepal, India, and Pakistan. You have an Australian passport and call Scotland home after living there for over 30 years. Tell us more about that. How did travel form such a backdrop to your life? Merryn: Essentially, because my parents were working in South Asia, that’s how I came to be born and brought up there. It very much was my life. Up until I was 18 and moved back to Australia to go to university, my father estimated that we’d probably moved 60 times. Some of those moves were backwards and forwards to the same locations or the same house, but it was very itinerant. In a lot of those locations, I didn’t necessarily have my own bedroom; it might be the curtained-off end of a living room, or I was often sharing with my big brother. It was very nomadic and it was just the life that we had. As a child, of course, you don’t think your life is unusual. It’s just the life that you have, and it’s only later on that you realize it is quite different to most people, particularly once I was back at university in Australia. Jo: What did your parents do that you traveled so much? Merryn: They were missionaries, in the old language, if you like, which tends to bring people out in hives. They were working in linguistics, literacy, and Bible translation, primarily amongst one of the language groups in Nepal, but ultimately in quite a lot of locations in India and Pakistan as well. They were working a lot with local churches, local Christians, and in a lot of training, enabling them in their own literacy and linguistic work. Jo: It’s incredible how much travel there is involved in that. When you remember being a kid, given you were moving around so much… I went to school in Malawi, in Africa for a while, and I don’t really remember it being different, as you said. How did you feel? Did you feel different? Did you go to random schools? How was that experience? Merryn: It was very varied. For the first seven years of my childhood, my parents spent a lot of time in a village in the hills of Nepal, and my mother homeschooled us when we were there. She was a qualified primary school teacher, so that obviously helped. She taught my brother and myself out on the veranda of the home that we lived in, in the village, for only a couple of hours every morning. After that, we were pretty free to roam and play. When we were in places like Kathmandu, there were often small, mission-run schools that we attended, and you had quite an international mix of kids at those schools. Then when I was nine, I followed my brother to a boarding school in North India, in the mountains, and I was there till I was 18. Interestingly, although boarding school means that you are away from your parents (and a lot of the time you are, and you’re dealing with homesickness and that sense of displacement), for some of the time, one or both of them were based where the school was, and we were day scholars. On the other hand, being there for nine years, it became a place of continuity and consistency. It became like an extended family and a community, which I’m still incredibly close to. I’m still really close to those friends and a lot of the staff. It is this most extraordinary and very international community of people that I got to know through that school. Jo: How interesting that you’re still close to them. And then you said you went back to Australia when you were 18. Did you just think everyone was so boring and provincial, or were you just wanting to be normal? Merryn: We were based in Melbourne when I went back to university, and Melbourne is a very metropolitan city. For my parents’ leave, every three or four years, we would go back to Australia for anything from a few months to about 18 months when my dad was completing his PhD in Canberra. Through the National University, there was accommodation for international students, and we were actually accommodated there. That was great for me because there were all these kids from Africa and India and so on running around in a big shared back garden. The primary school I went to in Canberra was in the area where all the embassies are, so again, it was relatively international by Australian standards. But arriving back for university at age 18, university is a good time to make a transition because you’ve got a slightly more diverse mix of people. You’ve got mature age students and a fair international mix because that’s what Melbourne is like. You have people with varying degrees of relationship to Australia because of their own family heritage. Some of them more recently moved, some of them their families have been in Australia for generations, but they still have a strong Greek identity or whatever else it might be. I was still probably one of the people with the weirdest accent. People thought I was American, which is partly because of the school I went to in India; there was a strong American influence in weird ways. It was an American-Indian accent mix; I don’t think any American would’ve owned it. Then some people thought I was Irish. But at university, partly because of the course I did – drama, dance, and English – being different was quite cool at that stage. People just thought it was fascinating and wanted to find out more about it. In contrast, friends I know who made that transition back to their parents’ country when they were 13 or 14 had a really hard time because that’s when you don’t want to be different. That’s when you really want to fit in and look and sound like everybody else. That is a really difficult time to change. So, for me, it was a good time to transition. Jo: I’m really interested in this because my mum brought us back from Malawi when I was going into senior school, so I was about 11 or 12. As you were saying, 13 is a difficult time. For people listening who are thinking, “I want to travel with kids,” or “I want to go live somewhere else”… Looking back, I’m grateful for my time away; it was all positive in my mind. Do you look back and think it was all amazing, or were there things that stick out in your mind as a terrible challenge? What can we do to encourage people to live somewhere else with children? Merryn: I look back and I’m very thankful for most of it. I think most of it was an extraordinary privilege. Boarding school is a very mixed experience wherever you are, and that’s something that I explore in the book we’ll be talking about later, as quite a bit of it is set in a fictionalized version of the boarding school I went to. Although there were lots of things I loved about the school and I still love that community of friends that I’m very close to, just being away from your own family for that length of time when you’re still growing up is never going to be ideal. But to encourage people, yes, it’s a wonderful thing to give children, if you can: the experience of other places and other cultures. It’s very different now. When I was a teenager in India — I was born in 1969 — there was no internet. The only way you could keep up with fashion or music was when friends went back to America or Europe for their holidays and came back with cassette tapes or new clothes. There was a much greater gulf between my experience and that of my peers back in Australia, which in many ways, I was quite thankful for. I wasn’t brought up around television, and my life was much more about the context and the culture I was in, and the extraordinary beautiful places I lived in. Whereas today, kids are not cut off wherever you take them. You’ve got the internet and access to their home culture, and they can speak easily to their grandparents or friends. In a sense, that’s almost a threat because it can prevent you from really embracing the place you go to if you’re too connected to home. I sometimes feel sorry for people that travel these days because there might be this pressure to share everything on social media. Maybe we don’t give ourselves the opportunity to really soak up the place we’re in, to absorb it, enjoy it, and relate to the people you’re meeting on the ground, rather than being so constantly connected to everybody back home. There are real pros and cons now. But I would definitely say to families that it’s a really rich experience. I’ve been interested in listening to this podcast in particular, where you’ve talked to people about the ‘third culture kid’ experience and people bringing up their own children in other cultures. There is now a huge amount of resource to help families navigate that in ways that support their young people. In the world today, more than ever, we need to listen to and learn from one another. The best way we can do that is to get to know people who might otherwise seem different. Once we have proximity and closeness to people—and often that means physical closeness, actually meeting somebody and chatting over a chai—we realize our shared humanity is much more powerful than anything that divides us. Jo: Absolutely. And being in someone else’s country, when it’s not yours, means you have to be respectful and think about what’s important in that culture. I think that helps you appreciate that culture differently. Merryn: Yes, I think that’s a really important attitude for people to embrace. We should be careful not to treat other people’s countries like our playground—that because we’ve paid for a flight and a visa, we’re somehow entitled to use it like a theme park. It is their home, their country, their culture. It can’t be reduced to a few stereotypes and cliches. There will be complexity, and it’s really important to learn how to be a good guest. Don’t always try to beat people down to the cheapest price, and don’t necessarily wear things that might be appropriate in our own context. Just do a little bit of homework to find out what is acceptable and courteous in that context, and it will really pay dividends in terms of people being glad to welcome you and looking after you well. Jo: Let’s get into the book. Your novel, A House Called Askival, is set in an Indian Hill station. Tell us about what a Hill Station is, and about Mussoorie? Merryn: Yes, sure. I’d probably say, A House Called Askival. Askival is actually the highest mountain on the Scottish Hebridean island of Rùm. It’s a Viking word; there’s Askival, Hallival and Haskeval, which sounds like something out of Lord of the Rings, but they are the names of mountains on the island of Rùm. You might wonder why there is a house called Askival in a story set in a North Indian Hill station, and that is partly because of the nature of what hill stations are. They are towns, generally up in the mountains, that were set up pretty much during the time of the British Raj by the British to provide an escape from the heat and disease of the plains in the summer. They were summer resorts they would go to, particularly the Memsahibs and the children. They were also locations for military cantonments and convalescent hospitals. A lot of boarding schools were gradually established there. There was an idea that if young girls were brought up in the heat of the tropics, it would negatively affect their development. There had been a time when children were sent back to England or Scotland for schooling from a very young age, and we know Rudyard Kipling was absolutely miserable being sent back to England. But gradually, they thought if the boarding schools were up in the cool of the hills, this would not negatively affect these ‘delicate flowers’. So a lot of boarding schools were established up in the hills. The most famous hill station people might know is Shimla in India. That is because the Viceroy would move his entire government from Delhi up to Shimla for the summer months because it was so hot to function in Delhi. Because of that, Shimla was a place where people had to behave because it was official and the government was there. Whereas the Hill Station that my book is set in, Mussoorie, which is where I went to school, was the party town. It developed a reputation for being a bit loose because the Viceroy wasn’t there. People didn’t have to behave, and they didn’t. There were lots of fancy hotels and balls and ice rinks and malls and bandstands. It was very much ‘the season’, like we hear about the season in London. In these hill stations, they would have their summer season. People would be promenading up and down the mall, and it was the place to be seen. Jo: We should clarify, when you said ‘the mall’, did you mean a street that people would walk along or a shopping complex? Because Americans might be thinking of massive shopping complexes! Merryn: No, it’s the street that people would walk along. It’s an English term, I guess, like The Mall that goes down to the Queen’s house, to the palace. Jo: I’ve seen on TV that the hill stations are very green. Were there tea plantations at some of them as well? Merryn: Some of them definitely. Darjeeling is another quite famous hill station and it had tea plantations. A lot of the ones further south in India had tea plantations as well. Mussoorie didn’t; they were very forested. They were often very well known for hunting, so that was another big pursuit in the days of the Raj, because of these forests. Mussoorie, where I lived and my book is set, recently featured on an episode of Race Across the World. So if anybody wants to see it, you can catch it there. Mussoorie was called ‘Queen of the Hills’ because it was beautiful. It’s actually two sister hill stations, Mussoorie and Landour. Landour was originally named after a Welsh place, Llanddowror. It was a military cantonment and it still has quite tight protections around planning permission and cutting down trees, so it’s still very wooded and beautiful and not overbuilt, which is quite a mercy. The reason the house in my novel is called Askival is because of this tradition in the hill stations. As these colonial bungalows were built by the Raj, they would name them nostalgically after home. The first and oldest house in Mussoorie is called Mullingar, named after a place in Ireland because it was built by Captain Frederick Young, an Irish military man. The school that I went to was called Woodstock, not named after the rock festival in the US, but after a novel by Sir Walter Scott. In fact, there are several houses in Mussoorie named after Sir Walter Scott novels. This is what people did. Once the Americans started to build their places, there would be American names for their houses as well. So in my novel, the house Askival was built by a Scottish Army captain from the island of Rùm in the days of the Raj. His house is right at the top of the ridge, so he names it after the highest mountain on his island home, following that same pattern. Jo: The book spans 70 years of history through three generations. British people in general may know about Indian history, but it’s complicated. There are elements of the British Raj, which you’ve mentioned, and the religious and cultural conflicts that have happened since. How did you weave those elements of Indian history into your story, and how do they affect the sense of place? Merryn: It’s very much the context of my novel. It spans 70 years, pretty much from India’s independence and partition from Pakistan to a contemporary timeframe, but with throwbacks to the freedom movement in India. There are characters in the novel who have links and relationships with different aspects of that freedom movement. Although the central family in the novel is American, the father, James, his best friend is a South Indian Christian, Paul Verghese, and Paul’s parents worked closely with Mahatma Gandhi in the freedom movement. It was often by using characters and their stories that I was able to weave in elements of the actual history. One thing that really interested me is that Mahatma Gandhi used to hold these prayer meetings all around India, trying not just to move the nation towards independence, but also to hold it together. He was utterly heartbroken that partition happened. He was very pluralist and universalist in the way he tried to hold everyone together. I found out that he held one of his prayer meetings in Mussoorie. A Sikh man I knew, who went to my school many years before, had been at that prayer meeting. It was lovely to be able to hear his memories of it, and that prayer meeting is now in my novel, attended by my characters. The story goes into the buildup towards independence. This hill station, Mussoorie, is in many ways on the fringes of what happened. But some of the troubles that were going on, mainly in the Punjab and through to Delhi, and of course in parts of the new Pakistan, spilled over into locations like Mussoorie. You had refugees, people rendered homeless who needed safe places to stay. In the story, my American family’s cook is Muslim and needs to leave because it has become unsafe. The Muslims in the bazaar of Mussoorie—a lot of the merchants were Muslim—were coming under attack and felt the need to leave for Pakistan. The cook is in the process of trying to leave, and the family are helping him when a tragedy strikes, which is a major trigger for the action of the novel. I was really interested to speak to people who had been in Mussoorie at the time and to realize that although it was geographically removed, it was affected by the troubles. Some of the missionaries from Mussoorie traveled down into the refugee camps on the plains to support the medical work happening there, working with Indian colleagues. It was really interesting to be able to read people’s letters and diaries and hear their memories. When I was working on the novel, it was a while ago, and there were still quite a few people who had firsthand memories of that time. Of course, there are fewer and fewer people now with those firsthand memories. It was a process of doing that historical research and then working out how that could be woven into the lives of my characters. Jo: For people listening — You’ve mentioned independence and partition. Could you briefly explain them? Merryn: Sure. Prior to British colonization, there was no single country called India. There were multiple different regions and rulers of the Indian subcontinent. At the time the East India Company arrived in the early 1600s, the Mughal Empire was dominant, although within that there were some small, independent Hindu princely kingdoms. Gradually, over the time of the British, the Mughal Empire declined. In 1858, control of the whole region was taken over by the British government. That was the beginning of what we now call the British Raj. What triggered the British government taking over control was what has been called the Indian Mutiny or the First War of Independence, which was a rising up of the Indian soldiers, the sepoys, against their British overlords. So you had these ongoing pushes for independence from the British. By the time they finally managed to secure that in 1947, there were a lot of difficulties within the populations in terms of securing sufficient rights and freedoms for the different ethnic and religious communities. There was particular concern amongst many Muslims that, as a numeric minority, their needs and interests would not be protected by the Hindu majority in a free India. That was the push of the Muslim League to have their own separate country, and that was the cause of Partition. At the time, you had India as the central country, and then the Islamic state of Pakistan, which was West Pakistan and East Pakistan (which subsequently became Bangladesh). Partition caused a mass migration. I think it is still considered the biggest mass migration in recorded history, with probably 14 million people attempting to get to the other side. There was no law that they had to do that; there was no legal requirement that Muslims had to live in Pakistan and that Sikhs and Hindus had to live in India. But there had been so much conflict and a sense that now we have this country of our own, the land should belong to the people of this religion. It caused an enormous outbreak of violence, with probably 2 million people killed. It was this incredible tearing apart of these countries, which in many ways has remained unresolved. Jo: Even a few weeks ago they were threatening nuclear war with each other again. Merryn: Yes, and the actual dividing line in Kashmir has never been really agreed, and Kashmir continues to be a place of ongoing tension. The reality is that more Muslims stayed in India than ever moved to Pakistan. There is still a large Muslim minority within India. India remains a very diverse country in terms of ethnic and religious groups, but it currently has a strongly Hindu government with a strongly Hindu nationalist agenda, which continues to exacerbate some of those tensions. Those religious and ethnic tensions were always a part of the Indian story, but they were undoubtedly exacerbated and probably exploited by the British in order to undermine a united freedom movement. It’s a lot of those themes that I’m interested to explore in the novel. Jo: I heard someone describe India as being more like Europe, in that all these different ethnic groups, languages, and peoples who fought each other for generations are all supposedly grouped under one country name. And the other thing about partition, as you said, was this time of upheaval; we often think of refugees going in one direction, but this was people going in opposite directions at the same time. Coming to the obvious fact that you are not Indian or Pakistani — How does being an outsider—which I think gives a different perspective—affect your point of view? Merryn: That’s a really interesting question. I suppose to some degree, I am not an outsider to a lot of the material because the core family in the book is a missionary family within India. That whole subculture is central to the story, and I’m exploring a lot of those themes. Having been part of that international community, where some of my closest friends and roommates came from all these different backgrounds, in some senses I’m writing from an insider experience. But I recognize that I am obviously not of the ethnicity or the religion of many of the characters within the novel. It does give me a different perspective. There’s no such thing as a neutral perspective, so I own that. I own the fact that I come from my own worldview and understanding, while seeking very much to listen to and learn from all the different perspectives I set out in the story. I’m also clear that I’m not attempting to represent an entire people group or religion. These are characters, each with their distinctives. It’s a whole set of enmeshed stories. A book about Partition written by somebody born and brought up in India who is Indian by ethnicity will be a very different perspective. But I guess what is unique about the perspective I’ve brought is that it is a story grown out of a very international mix of people, a subculture within India. Another section is set in 1984 when Indira Gandhi was assassinated by her Sikh bodyguards. That’s another thread in the Partition story, in a way, because there was a strong movement for an independent Sikh state called Khalistan in what is now Punjab. The Sikh thread is important in terms of those tensions. After Indira Gandhi’s assassination, there was a big backlash of rioting and violence against the Sikh community, which many people understood as a reopening of the wounds from 1947. That experience in 1984 happened when I was back in Australia, but all my school friends were there, in Delhi, when it all broke out. There are scenes in the novel that happened on a bus stopped by mobs, and that actually happened to my school friends. What that does is it takes a group of kids who are just being kids—they’re not looking at each other in those different categories—and suddenly the significance of those categories, and what it means to have a turban on your head, becomes a matter of life and death. So my perspective, the particular angle I bring, is from within this very mixed international community trying to come to terms with these bigger tensions. The questions are around: Can we live together in peace even though we are so different? How do we reconcile from wounds of the past? I think sometimes these small microcosms, these small international communities that emerge, can help answer some of those questions. Jo: Coming full circle, you now live in Scotland and have written other books. I believe you have written a novel, A Stone in the Sky, set in the Cairngorms mountains, and also The Hidden Fires, which is non-fiction about the same mountains. How does this mountain life now echo back to your childhood? And is Scotland now home? Merryn: Yes, the main thing my three published books have in common is mountains. I love mountains, which makes sense having been born in the Himalayas and gone to school there, living at altitude for most of my growing-up years. One of the things I explore in The Hidden Fires, the non-fiction book, is a response to a book called The Living Mountain by Nan Shepherd, an Aberdeenshire author. Her book is about the Cairngorms and her love for them, and I was invited to write a response. In my book, I acknowledge that when I first came to Scotland and people took me hillwalking, I had a major superiority complex. I was like, “You call these mountains?” because I’d been to the Himalayas, the highest and most iconic mountain range in the world. For me, learning to get to know the Cairngorms was a slow-burn love story of coming to see how extraordinary, beautiful, and precious they are. In actual fact, at one time they were as high as the Himalayas, but they are so old that they have been worn down over time. All that’s left is this granite core, and in all those nooks and crannies, there is an extraordinary richness of beauty. 25% of the UK’s endangered species live in the Cairngorms National Park, which is where I live. It’s a really precious, threatened, and beautiful environment. I’ve loved discovering them. The Cairngorms are often described as ‘a slice of the Arctic in the UK’ because when you’re up there, the conditions, wildlife, and flora and fauna are like the Arctic tundra. In the winter, you can get winds of 100-plus miles an hour whipping over them, and people die. People don’t realize that it is an extremely dangerous environment in the winter. You can get incredible whiteouts and there are real steep cliffs and drops. It’s one of the world’s high-class climbing places because of its challenging winter and summer climbing conditions. I’m not a climber, I should say. I’m just a happy hill walker. For me, it was this discovery that actually this is an extraordinary mountain range. It is very different to the Himalayas, but very beautiful. I love being in mountains. I love that sense of height and perspective that they give you, the sense of beauty and wonder. You can have both the sense of being small in this vastness, but also the sense of how special it is to receive that, to be present to it, to be alive to it. That is something that has gone with me everywhere I’ve been. Jo: I love that feeling of insignificance. I get it in historical places, like in Gothic cathedrals. I feel it anywhere where you realize that your life is really tiny, and it helps put everything into perspective. You feel grateful for that moment. Against these mountains, as you say, which are so old, we just can’t appreciate the span of time or space as little humans. Some people don’t like that feeling, but it feels like that is something that you recognize as well. Merryn: For me, it is both a feeling of being quite small in the vastness of it all, but that doesn’t mean your life doesn’t matter. It’s that extraordinary paradox: although the universe is vast and time is vast and we are just a blink of an eye in it, each and every one of us is precious. I remember somebody once talking about how when a newborn baby is born, we often talk about it as a miracle. This person said, “And when did you stop being a miracle?” You never did. I think it was Einstein who said you either treat the world like nothing is a miracle or everything is a miracle, and I’m in the second camp. The sense that actually everything, including each and every person, is extraordinary, special, and a one-off. Each moment we get to be here is a one-off. Particularly in mountain spaces or, as you say, cathedrals—and those Gothic cathedrals are often designed to give you a sense of the outdoors, ironically. The sense of height, the heavens, vast trees, skies, and stars—in a strange way, you’re inside, but they’re lifting you out. I find it’s the bringing together of the vastness and the preciousness of the fact that you exist, that you’re here, and that you do matter. Jo: Fantastic. This is the Books and Travel podcast, so apart from your own books — What are a few books you recommend that resonate with what we’ve talked about today? Merryn: Yes, obviously, I’m a great lover of India books and things about the subcontinent. The most famous one that also covers that history of independence and partition is Salman Rushdie’s Midnight’s Children. I actually read it when I had Hepatitis E in Kathmandu, which was a very strange state of mind to be in, but I just think it’s extraordinary. There’s a novel about partition by the Indian author Khushwant Singh called Train to Pakistan, which is very much that insider perspective. Kiran Desai’s book, The Inheritance of Loss, won the Booker Prize. Her mother, Anita Desai, is another extraordinary writer. That’s set in Darjeeling, so it’s another hill station story. William Dalrymple has written lots of brilliant books about India. City of Djinns is his book about Delhi, also The Age of Kali, and then a whole series about the Mughal Empire and the East India Company. He’s one of the most eminent historians on India. And if you want to know more about the Cairngorms, then Nan Shepherd’s book, The Living Mountain, has sometimes been hailed as the greatest work of nature writing in the UK. It’s very short, only 30,000 words, but you can return to it time and again and find something new. It is a small masterpiece. Jo: Brilliant. Where can people find you and your books online? Merryn: My website is www.merrynglover.com. You can find me there. I’m on various bits of social media, but they’re not my favourite places to be. On my website, you can always find a way to email me, and I do always reply. I love hearing from people. Jo: Brilliant. Well, thanks so much for your time, Merryn. That was great. Merryn: Thank you, Joanna. Great to chat. The post Writing Partition: Merryn Glover on History, Home, and the Hill Stations Of India appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 8/7/25 | ![]() British Pilgrimage: On This Holy Island With Oliver Smith | What makes a place sacred, and can you find spiritual transformation without traveling thousands of miles? Why do ordinary English villages and Scottish islands continue to draw seekers from around the world? Award-winning travel writer Oliver Smith talks about British pilgrimage sites from Lindisfarne to Iona, and Walsingham to Glastonbury, and how these ancient places still draw even secular pilgrims today. Oliver Smith is a multi award-winning travel writer and author of The Atlas of Abandoned Places, and On This Holy Island: A Modern Pilgrimage Across Britain. The double lives of pilgrimage places, and how ordinary locations can offer transcendent experiences Lindisfarne’s tidal causeway The tension between commercial tourism and genuine spiritual seeking at sacred sites Iona’s remote Scottish island setting and the challenging journey required to reach it Walsingham’s remarkable history from medieval powerhouse to modern multicultural pilgrimage destination Why Glastonbury might be Britain’s best pilgrimage The philosophy of traveling deeper not further, and finding extraordinary meaning in familiar places You can find Oli at OliverSmithTravel.com You can find more Pilgrimage Resources here, as well as my book, Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello Travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Oliver Smith. Hi Oli. Oli: Hello, how are you doing? Jo: Oh, it’s great to have you on the show. Just a little introduction. Oli is a multi award-winning travel writer and author of The Atlas of Abandoned Places, and On This Holy Island: A Modern Pilgrimage Across Britain, which we are talking about today. It’s a fantastic book. Now, Oli, I wanted to get straight into it. So you say in the book, although you’ve traveled all over the world, you say quote from the book, “What interested me now were those places that promised a kind of travel beyond what could be charted on an ink or pixel map.” So I wondered if you could start with that, because you’ve been to all these tick list travel places. What about those that are these soulful journeys? Oli: I guess what really interests me is that a lot of these places that feature in the book, they sort of live double lives, you know? If I pick one at random, or one near where you are in the country. If we think about Glastonbury for example, it’s fascinating because people go there with such huge expectation. For some people it’s a place that unlocks other worlds to them. The tor might be a portal to some world of the fairies or some world of Arthurian legend, or it might be something to do with Joseph of Arimathea. Jesus Christ walking in Somerset and that old legend, you know, so much is invested in it. Yet at the same time, Glastonbury is a place where if you go to the high street, there’s a Boots. There is a pub selling the usual repertoire of lagers and warm beers and Nobby’s Nuts behind the bar, you know, these places. I think all of them, to some degree in the book, they are ordinary, mundane places that people live in and people pass by every day. But then they offer, they promise a kind of an extra level, which is detectable to some people and isn’t to others. So it is that kind of duality. I think what really interested me when I was writing this book. Jo: Yeah, and I guess, well it’s almost a bigger question because when you look at your career as a travel writer and you mentioned their expectation, which I think is a fantastic word for so much of travel, you could pick any of the tick list places in the world and say, well, you know, that would be amazing. And then perhaps it’s not. I always think of Venice because I went to Venice one winter and it flooded and it stank and it was meant to be amazing, but it wasn’t. So I did really just wonder like — Why write a pilgrimage book when you have traveled so many wonderful places? Oli: I think one thing that can be said about all the places I’ve visited in this book is that there are places where you learn an awful lot about humanity and the human condition. People often gravitate to pilgrimage places at these kind of weightless moments of their lives when they’re sort of on a hinge. Perhaps they’ve lost someone who is dear to them. Perhaps they’ve been made redundant. Perhaps they’re looking for direction, they’re going through a rite of passage. But they are often people who are quick to tell you their story. They’re quick to open their heart. And I found myself getting in such deep and involving and fascinating conversations with people. I think my pilgrimage book is possibly a little bit different to a lot of the other ones that are out there. It’s not really about me. I’m more of a kind of witness perhaps. I wouldn’t go as far as to say that these places didn’t have some magic that I felt on some level. But I think it is primarily about looking at these 12 places, sort of different characters as well as being character places – they are rich in characters themselves. So yeah, I think you will have the best conversations if you go to wherever it might be. Walsingham on a pilgrimage day, or Stonehenge solstice or whatever it might be. Jo: Well one of the places that you went is Lindisfarne and I love that you slept in the rescue box. Now I’ve walked across the sands. It was one of the highlights of the St. Cuthbert’s Way. I had just a wonderful time. Tell us about the crossing to Lindisfarne Oli: I think what makes Lindisfarne really interesting is its geography. That tidal element to Lindisfarne is something that’s not entirely unique, because you also get it at St. Michael’s Mount. You also get it at a couple of Holy Islands in the Severn Estuary, I think as well. But on that scale, the idea of taking a walk of three miles across a path that twice a day is completely submerged, is quite a wonderful thing. And I wrote in the book that I think that path has many lessons. The idea that you only have a finite amount of time. The idea that you need to make the best of that time, that’s something that’s instructive for life on a much bigger level. But I think probably what’s more interesting is the element of vulnerability there. You know, the idea that you are walking across the sea and the sea will be coming back for you very shortly, and you run the risk every time you step onto that path. And it’s fascinating how there’s this sort of perpetual drumbeat through the summer of stories of people getting stuck on the causeway. It can be someone who often has got some quite flashy car and they think they can go straight through it. And then they go in the drink sort of halfway across. It’s also quite often people who are from countries where there aren’t tides. So people from central Europe, even the Mediterranean, you know, people sort of drive halfway across the causeway and they think it’s a car parking space, and they go for a little wander and they come back and the sea’s risen again. And suddenly their car is steering wheel deep in water. But there’s so much biblical symbology in that, you know, the idea of the floods, the idea of the seas parting for Moses. I think all of that kind of echoes very slightly around the Lindisfarne Causeway, both the tarmac road and the Pilgrims Way. I think all those things are important. I mean, I guess the other thing to say is the start of it all, Saint Aidan chose Lindisfarne because of this tidal rhythm. Because there’s these hours where the island is closed off from the world and the monks there would be in their solitude. They would be praying. And then there are those hours where the door opens in a way and they can go out into the world. They can spread the word. So it’s not an accident that the monastery is situated there. I think the one thing that is absolutely extraordinary about Lindisfarne that just doesn’t get spoken about enough is that almost every weekend or every other weekend in summer. Maybe that’s a bit too much. Maybe every other weekend or once a month, something like that, a car will go under in the causeway and these people will be in the car. The water will be going up, they’ll be calling the RNLI, they’ll probably be in a panic. RNLI will turn up in their lifeboat and then they’ll fish them out and they’ll go back to the sea houses and their car will be absolutely kaput. And there’s even a cottage industry. There’s a little garage by the causeway that seems to – I mean, it seemed to me that their business was essentially going out there, picking up the car and dragging it back. But in living memory, there’s no record of anyone ever having drowned. You see how fast that water moves and you see how dangerous it can be. And you can see how clueless people are. And there were a few people who did sort of weigh it over in their minds and say to me, well, there is, that is almost miraculous. The fact that nobody has ever come a cropper there in living memory, or even, I think even longer than that. I think there was sort of a muttering of something happened a hundred years ago. But it’s quite extraordinary how that’s the case. Jo: So I gotta come back to the box. Because we can picture this in our mind. So just explain what the walk looks like and what is the box and the poles and everything. Walker on the sands crossing away from Lindisfarne Photo by JFPenn Oli: Sure, sure. Sorry, I got carried away there. So you go across the causeway and say you’re going out at low tide, it sort of looks almost like a little bit of a desert. And then you’ve got the two routes, the Pilgrims Way, which is the walking path, which sort of goes in a straight line, and then the metal causeway, which is for cars. And on both of them you find these shelters. On the Pilgrims Way, it almost looks a bit like a tree house without a tree as it were. This sort of rickety, kind of slightly precarious platform on stilts that’s designed that, if you get caught by the tide, you can rush up there and you can wait it out. But on the metal causeway where the cars are, I think just by the deepest point, but just by the point where people tend to get stuck, they’ve essentially put what looks like what looks like a garden shed on stilts. And that hovers by quite a deep channel. So it is this really weird thing that looks like someone’s sort of taken their garden shed from B&Q or from Homebase or wherever, and they’ve propped it on four concrete legs and stuck it sort of up in the sky. Almost like the umpire at Wimbledon or something. Do you know what I mean? And if you go in there, you actually realize it’s a bit more sturdy than that. It’s actually built bespoke by the council, by Northumberland council, I think it was. And it’s quite cozy in there, but I went up there because I thought the most interesting thing about Lindisfarne for me was that betweenness, that sort of being halfway between being an island. Not an island, being a tidal island. And that kind of act of the water, severing it, cutting it off, and then retreating and it’s like this umbilical cord that kind of gets cut and then reattaches every – so, I mean, reattaches, it’s not particularly good metaphor, you know what I mean? But yeah, I sat out there for however long it was, eight hours or something. I was really careful to make sure no one spotted me so they didn’t try and rescue me. But when you are up there, it is quite a kind of, you know, you’re at this gateway to a holy island. And Lindisfarne in high peak season is so crazy busy. But if you’re there, you know, in the middle. Kind of in the causeway on the gatehouse as it were. It’s just total silence, total peace, beautiful views and just seals kind of swimming up and down the channel. And you maybe there more than in the village. You get a sense of what it might’ve been for Cuthbert, for Aidan, for those saints who are so important to the story of Lindisfarne. Jo: When I walked over, I heard this sound and I was like, what is that sound? And it was the seals singing, which apparently happens sometimes. And then of course it’s a bird sanctuary as well. So it is incredibly beautiful. But you mentioned earlier about the duality of these places, and you did mention there that the village is really busy, and this is one of the interesting things about pilgrimage in general. There is an industry and I guess there always was, you know, Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales. Obviously there’s always been an industry and I found that really hard, walking into the village with my wet boots and everything and my backpack and I was like, this is, and everyone looks at you weird because they’ve come off a coach. How was that, with many of the places you visited, the industry versus the spirituality side? Oli: I think you’ve hit the nail on the head there. Because you said it was always there. I think it was always there. The commercial side of life is almost impossible to escape in pilgrimage locations. I mean, one example I often talk about is if you go to the square that marks the finishing line of the Camino and you see these people gathering there. And they’re often in extremely heightened states and some of them are almost euphoric. And it’s this extremely kind of beautiful, poignant moment. And then there’s the cathedral, which is obviously extraordinary itself, but then parked between the pilgrims and the cathedral. There’s often one of those little sightseeing road trains. Do you know the one that’s sort of like halfway between a bus and a train and there’s someone on a loudspeaker and maybe it plays a little song and it might even have a smiley face on the front of it, but that’s standing between the pilgrims and the cathedral and is just evidence for me of just how people will spy a buck in places where people spiritually gravitate. And that’s always been the way I think. I think it also applies to lots of things. It applies to souvenirs, trinkets, pilgrims’ badges, whatever it might be, rosary beads, these, I think these are the original gift shops in a way. You know, when pilgrims go somewhere and they want something to take the magic of that destination back with them. But it also applies in terms of the commercial side of things. I think it is to do with, I mean, you said the Canterbury Tales, like, I think pilgrimage for many people is about boozing and about going out. And if you hear about those stories of Shikoku Japan, where pilgrimage for many people is just sort of a pretext to go out there and just live the high life and kind of see the world a bit and have some fun. That’s one strand of it. I’m not saying that’s definitive for many people. It is a really lofty endeavor. And for a lot of people, I think these two things kind of mingle, sometimes comfortably, sometimes not so comfortably. But yeah, I think the commercial side of things, bathos, these things will always be there, I think. These places they promise escape and transcendence on one level, but then on another level, totally fail to deliver that. And I think it’s worth being honest about that. Jo: I think so too. And again, it comes back to what you said about expectation. And in fact, the only place I sort of found that solitude and nature was on the St. Cuthbert’s Way because it’s so remote, in terms of the walk, whereas then arriving at Lindisfarne. But I wanted to ask you about somewhere else, which is Iona, because I haven’t been, and part of me is kind of scared because of these expectations. So you say in the book “More than anywhere I traveled for this book, Iona seemed a place that prompted wild infatuations. Dreams drifted northward to settle on this little Scottish island.” So tell us about Iona. Oli: I think here again, it’s to do with geography. I mean, I think the fact is for most people in Great Britain, Iona will almost certainly be a long way away from where you live unless you happen to live on the island of Mull or Oban or wherever it might be. It’s somewhere that through our modern eyes is at one removed from the rest of the world. You know, it’s an island off an island off an island. If you count Great Britain as well. It’s at the edge of, it’s the edge of the Ross of Mull. It’s also kind of quite, it has a different feel to the Isle of Mull, which it neighbors and which is the route there. It’s geologically different. It looks kind of different. And the way it’s regarded by many people is, you know, this is one of the first Christian outposts in Great Britain, happening around the same time as Canterbury emerges and that it’s at the wild edge of the world. You know, that this kind of little perch on the cusp of the Atlantic, which is kind of untrue in terms of history. Because Iona was actually very well connected. It was close to Ireland in those times. The way of getting around was not by land, but by sea. And it was on a kind of fairly established network of sea roads. But I mean, yeah, that doesn’t stop the fact that it’s sort of seen as a sort of wilderness pilgrimage in many ways to, and there is no way getting there is easy. You will have to get a ferry or you have to get to Oban for a start, which could be umpteen train connections through riding the West Highland line through beautiful glens, a ferry to Mull, another wild road across Mull, which is kind of only just very slightly wider than your car, possibly narrower. And then you get to a ferry, another ferry port. Then you get a lot. So by the time you got there, whether you like it or not, you’ve made a kind of pilgrimage of one sort. So I think that those are some of the reasons why, I mean of, and of course it’s hugely historically significant. It’s where Saint Columba, one of those early Christian saints of the British Isles established his monastery, in whatever it was, the seventh century I think it was. It’s at the very beginning of the story. It has the same elements as many pilgrimage sites across Britain, which is they were destroyed by reformations of one kind or another. And so that, you know, the ruins are often part of it. And some people might find that kind of disappointing. Perhaps people from a Roman Catholic background might go there and see things being smashed to rubble, but I think perhaps in England we’re a bit more conditioned to find some kind of poetry in that, when we think of Tintern Abbey or Glastonbury Abbey or great monasteries like Rievaulx and Fountains and places like that. They almost have their own kind of majesty in decay. And there’s an element of that I think about Iona. When you get there and you just sort of see these kind of slightly weathered. Pieced back together, Christian crosses. There is certainly some, yeah, there’s something stirring about all those things, I think. Jo: And I guess one of the other things about it is where it is, physically as you said, so for people listening who don’t know the geography sort of very northwest. Realistically, you’ve got a lot of weather arriving, so, and you, I think you were there for a week, right? How was the weather? How was that wildness around it? Oli: Yeah, I mean it’s one of those places that you go and you can go and stand on a west facing cliff and you’ll have the kind of entire Atlantic blowing up down your face and you sort of almost get this kind of facelift from quite how intense it is. And that’s hugely stimulating. And some people in the community there, of community with a big C that religious community in Iona Abbey today, someone said that’s almost like an image of God, this kind of sea, which is all powerful, which is vast and unknowable and it has that kind of element of the divine, of the almighty about it, I’d say. That’s certainly part of it. And then the origin story of Iona, of St. Columba coming from Ireland. Sailing in this tiny little coracle across these insanely wild seas. These are kind of real, Channel Five trawler program seas where they’re just flinging around boats and it’s all rags of white surf. It’s not something we’re used to if you live near the English Channel or the North Sea or even the Irish Sea, they’re not quite on the same scale. I think all those things are part of Iona’s appeal, you know? I mean, it is a hugely historically significant place. There’s no two ways about it. Jo: I like that kind of, we can’t control the weather and we can’t control God, and we’re sort of trying to find that in that place. I also want to ask you about Walsingham because there was a point in history when it was a super, super famous place. And I would bet that many people listening, probably most people listening to this, have never heard of Walsingham. So you say it’s unique in Britain in being a tiny village, shouldering the weight of its holy past. Tell us about that. Oli: Yeah, I mean it’s a little village in Norfolk, which is sort of, I mean it’d be wrong to say Norfolk is remote in the context of England, but it’s a little bit more out the way. It’s kind of this bit of part of this bit of land that sticks out into the sea that incorporates a few, a couple of other counties as well. And it’s kind of a bit of a holiday heartland as well. Some lovely beaches there. And has a lot of very, very pretty kind of villages with flint, these kind of flint on the facade that makes all the houses kind of quite sparkly and lovely in a way. But it’s fascinating that sort of in the midst of this kind of quite quintessentially English, slightly Miss Marple-esque landscape. There’s a lovely little village, which at the dawn of the, well, no, actually, was it 1061 something? There was an apparition of the Virgin Mary before a Saxon noblewoman. That’s a long time before other sites of other more famous sites of Marian apparitions, like Lourdes, like Fatima, like Medjugorje in Bosnia. This is a good several centuries before all of those. And yeah, the fact is that this tiny little village was one of the kind of major pilgrimage sites of Christendom. It was ranked alongside Canterbury, and kind of only a few pegs below Rome, Santiago, it was mentioned in the same breath as Jerusalem by some people that, you know, people would go to this little village, that there would be royal pilgrimages there, kings would be going there. And then suddenly, the English reformation happens. And this little place experiences the same fate as all the pilgrimage destinations in England at that time. These monasteries are all taken apart, smashed to bits. The icons, the shrines, are destroyed. Suddenly this sort of sleepy village goes back to being sleepy again for another 400 years or so. And it was only at the dawn of the 20th century, where the local vicar, Alfred Hope Patten. He decided to kind of resurrect it in a small way. And so when you go to Walsingham today, it’s a place that kind of, you know. Its sanctity is originally medieval. Originally about a thousand years ago there was this Marian apparition, but then you go there and everything looks like something from the start of the 20th century. The church sort of looks almost a bit like a kind of early BBC building or something. And the shrine is conspicuously quite new and shiny and is only, you know, only less than a hundred years old. And that this place has sort of had this sort of second life after its sort of renaissance at the start of the 20th century. I mean, the counterpoint now is that obviously with the decline of church going that fewer and fewer people are going there. I mean, in the 1930s, there were special trains laid on from London, taking people there. Right through the 20th century, coach loads of people would go from their home parish on pilgrimage there. And now those numbers are dwindling. COVID dealt a big blow to the place. And now it’s just sort of quietly kind of ticking along. The really fascinating thing for me about Walsingham is how it is, you know, almost, I mean, like you said, a lot of English people will not have heard of this place. And even people in Norfolk will probably not have heard of this place. But if you go there, you will find like large numbers of Latin American people who happen to be working in London, you’ll find huge numbers of Tamil people, from Birmingham or from the Midlands, even from London, who, I mean, the biggest pilgrimage to this place now is the Tamil pilgrimage. Where these fields fill up with cars and this place that’s in the middle of Norfolk. It’s in the middle of kind of Brexit land and a large majority of people, they’re kind of white, Anglo-Saxon people. And then suddenly there’s this very highly diverse and really quite wonderful little village in the middle of it all. I think that’s something quite lovely. Jo: And I wonder, because you said it looks quite modern and you also mentioned there the decline in church going, but actually there is a renaissance in pilgrimage. And people do like visiting. I mean, I’m not a Christian and I’ve done several pilgrimages and I feel an attraction to the ruins and the great cathedrals and these things. I haven’t been to Walsingham, I’m not attracted to it because maybe it’s too modern. Do you think that’s maybe one of the reasons it hasn’t come back like some of the other places? Oli: Yeah, hugely. I think that’s really interesting. How some pilgrimage places will speak to people of kind of less certain faith and others don’t. I mean, someone asked me the other day for a piece they were writing what I consider to be Britain’s foremost pilgrimage destination now. The classic answer would’ve been Canterbury. Or indeed, Walsingham would’ve been a candidate for a lot of British history. And then, you know, Lindisfarne is also important, but I think even though it’s kind of second tier in the kind of more historical stakes, I think Glastonbury is the biggest pilgrimage destination now in Britain. Just because it means so many different things to different people. It is of importance to Anglican and Catholic communities. But it also brings in neopagan new age people. It brings in people who are looking for some kind of nebulous idea of nationhood as well. Those Arthurian legends that somehow this place has a kind of seed of an origin story about Britain embedded within it. But also, I mean, I think there’s a logistical argument that the biggest gathering in Britain, the Glastonbury festival, which happens just a few miles down the road and a few days ago. I mean, that’s a pilgrimage for many people. If you look deep. If you kind of look a little bit more closely, you can see that those, some of those things, things like the pyramid stage, that was kind of an energy center. And there are pilgrimage elements to the Glastonbury Festival today. So, I mean, yeah, I mean, Walsingham, it doesn’t have that ancient kind of draw of Iona, it doesn’t have the wilderness feel of Lindisfarne. It’s not got an enormous cathedral at the end of it, like Canterbury. And accordingly, while pilgrimage is in renaissance in many ways, it’s being left behind to some extent. I think, relative to those other places. Jo: So I wanted to also ask you, so you have almost a call to action at the end of the book about “finding Jerusalem in our own backyard to travel deeper, not further to break through the crust of the familiar to find the fantastical.” So I think this is really important and you do mention changes in attitude to travel perhaps with climate change and things being a bit different now. So how can we do that though? How can we travel deeper, not further and see things differently? Oli: That’s a very good question. I think the way I saw things differently in this book is sort of being in the right place at the right time. If I kind of give an example of that, I mean, every time I, well, not every time. Because sometimes you take the M4, but a lot of times when you go on holiday to Devon and Cornwall, you drive down the A303 and there’s that horrible sort of choke point near Amesbury and traffic’s crawling really slowly and it’s really annoying. And you look out the window and you’re like, oh, there’s Stonehenge. And you’re like, oh, hi Stonehenge. Then you sort of push on down the road and then you don’t think about it again. Or you might go there on a school trip or something like that. We might kind of go with your family and walk past the barrier. And you’re like, oh, this is very interesting. I think that had been my attitude to Stonehenge until I started reading about its modern history as a place of gathering at Solstice about the free festivals and visited there on one Summer Solstice event. And you see that its history for many people is not abstract. That it is a kind of, it is not a heap of old stones. It’s a temple for many people. And the historical sources suggest that people can to a large extent make it what they want it to be. And they do. And the lack of a dogma, the lack of a creed about that place means that you are free to kind of complete the picture yourself. And I didn’t know, I mean, maybe was a bit too young to know about the free festivals of the seventies. The Battle of the Beanfield where Stonehenge was sort of closed off to the outside world because of the parties that were going on there. And I didn’t realize that it was kind of reinvented, rediscovered as a shrine about 40, 50 years ago and now it’s just sort of ticking along, but you can still get a sense of those people for whom it was a kind of, it was a sort of. They were holy stones. And that had never crossed my mind until I’d been to some solstice. That I’d read the sources around it. And I think, yeah, that’s part of it. Just learning more, speaking to more people. Waiting until the tourist tour buses have thinned, and when the sun started going down, perhaps, or whatever it might be. Those are often the moments when you start to see a little bit more clearly the magic that some of these places possess and were chosen for in the first instance. Jo: Fantastic. Well, this is the Books and Travel podcast. What are some of the books you recommend about pilgrimage or British travel? Oli: Okay. Yeah, probably if I was to pick one book about British travel of the last 10 years that kind of opened my eyes a bit more widely. It’s probably not particularly original answer, but probably the The Book of Trespass. I think that’s just a fantastic book that, you know, so much of kind of landscape writing and nature writing is so polite and so deferential and just something that turns that on its head. I really like it. I think it was really fantastic and so much fun. It was a really great book. So I really enjoyed that. In terms of pilgrimage writing, I really, I’ve not quite finished it yet, but I really enjoyed Holy Places: How Pilgrimage Changed the World by Kathryn Hurlock, I think I like it because it’s very kind of clear-eyed and sees through an awful lot of the kind of cloud of mystery around these places to just sort through historical facts. That’s a really fun one. British kind of landscape books. I mean, I would say probably my, those kind, you know, I think probably every writer has a few kind of holy texts of their own. And probably, again, it’s not hugely original, but for me it’s As I Walked Out One Midsummer Morning, which obviously only has like a few pages of England before it starts hightailing over to Spain. But that kind of landscape around the Slad Valley and I guess not very far from you. Really. Jo: We should say that’s Laurie Lee if people don’t know. Oli: Yes, of course. That’s another really, that kind of is writing about a place where, you know. It kind of almost jumps out the page at you really, and you feel that you’re there in some ways. I really love that kind of classic British travel writing that came out of the kind of seventies and eighties, those are maybe not quite as fashionable now, the kind of Bruce Chatwin and Patrick Leigh Fermor and all that stuff, but that’s what really kind of inspired me when I was young. And I know that there, there’s a lot of those kind of books are kind of quite flawed in many ways and a lot of stuff is made up. Jo: Oh, we are all flawed. Oli: We are all flawed. But yeah, those guys get away with it because they could do it so brilliantly and make it feel so real. But yeah, those books are all hugely important to me. I think you can often tell quite how important a book is by how well thumbed it is. But for me, I’m just looking up on my shelf now and I think the most battered book up there is Wind, Sand and Stars by Saint-Exupéry. That’s like another really kind of sacred text for me. Sorry, I rattled on. Jo: Oh no. We love books. That’s why we’re here. Where can people find you and your books online? Oli: My website is oliversmithtravel.com. And my social media handles are OliSmithTravel on Instagram and Twitter. Jo: Brilliant. Well thanks so much for your time, Oli. That was great. Oli: Thank you. Thanks for having me. Thanks for reading the book. The post British Pilgrimage: On This Holy Island With Oliver Smith appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 7/24/25 | ![]() Touching History: The Ancient Craft Of Stonemasonry With Andrew Ziminski | What is it like to work on ancient English churches, cathedrals and stone monuments? How does stone, a symbol of permanence, change over centuries? In this interview, I explore the craft of stonemasonry with church conservator Andrew Ziminski. Andrew Ziminski is a stonemason and church conservator with decades of experience working on some of the greatest cathedrals and churches in Britain. He’s also the author of The Stonemason: A History of Building Britain and Church Going: A Stone Mason’s Guide to the Churches of the British Isles. The ancient craft of stonemasonry and how the tools have remained unchanged for millennia How stone is damaged over time by settlement, weather, and even the metal used to build with The defining features of Gothic architecture, a movement focused on light and colour, not darkness Why the “Green Man” carvings in churches are Christian symbols of resurrection, not pagan figures How ancient churches can feel imbued with the atmosphere of centuries of human experience You can find Andrew at MinervaConservation.com. You can find my articles and photos of Gothic Cathedrals here. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello Travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Andrew Ziminski. Hi Andy. Andy: Hello, Jo. Jo: Yes, absolutely. So just a little introduction. Andrew is a stonemason and church conservator with decades of experience working on some of the greatest cathedrals and churches in Britain. He’s also the author of The Stonemason: A History of Building Britain and Church Going: A Stone Mason’s Guide to the Churches of the British Isles. I’m a fan and I have the books right here if you are watching the video. I love them. So thank you so much for coming on today, Andy, I want to get straight into it because — Part of why I love churches and cathedrals is this sense of timelessness, of being small against the backdrop of history. How does it feel for you when you are working on these ancient buildings, doing this ancient craft? Andy: Well, in theory, I should be getting bored of it, I mean, I’ve been doing it so long, but anything but. My interest seems to grow with every project that we work on. We pretty much only work on ancient churches, medieval bridges, and the odd castle every now and again. There’s always something new to discover, be it a particularly local school of carvers or a type of medieval graffiti that I see carved into the piers of a particular church. There are so many regional variations in the British Isles, in terms of architecture and materials and the approach of the people who built these places, that I’m always sniffing them out. And as I understand more, it makes me want to understand even more, if that doesn’t sound too crazy. I think the day I’ll stop nosing around these places will be my last one on the planet. Jo: Well hopefully not falling off some spire. Didn’t you work on Salisbury Spire? Andy: Yeah, I started my training at Salisbury. I went to a local stonemasonry college because our part of England, the Southwest, is renowned for its building stones. There used to be a very excellent stonemasonry college at Weymouth on the coast in Dorset. From there I went up to the top of the tower, not the spire, but the tower, which is the square section that supports the octagonal base of the spire which is 404 feet tall and the tallest medieval structure in Europe that’s still in its original condition. It’s pretty amazing. Jo: It is. Salisbury is amazing. And you mentioned ancient churches, so some people listening might be in places where they don’t have such ancient architecture as we have. What timeframe are you talking about when you say ancient churches? Andy: The oldest church I’ve worked on is in Bradford-on-Avon in Wiltshire, again in the Southwest. That was built around the year 1000, and anything from then onwards really. I tend to switch off with Victorian churches because I’m not really that interested in them. Victorian churches in the UK are generally Victorian interpretations of earlier medieval forms, and I think I might as well just study the medieval form and not the Victorian fakes. Even though their craftwork is excellent. Very often in the churches that we work on, we’re very close to the city of Bath, as you know, it is absolutely groaning with Roman ruins. It’s not unusual to see Roman material that the Anglo-Saxons reused in their walls or as part of their altars. I’ve done lots of work in the Roman baths in Bath, so I’d say the earliest structure I’ve worked on is the West Kennet Long Barrow, which was built about 3000 BC and has its own postcode. So I’ve worked on a building that’s 5000 years old, and that was quite incredible. Jo: It is incredible. And just again, coming back to this ancient craft, because the stonemasonry is also ancient. Obviously the people who built these things were stonemasons. How did you decide to get into this, because most people don’t go into stonemasonry? It’s not a growing profession. It’s so fascinating that you chose this direction. Andy: Well, a number of factors came into play. My father came here as a refugee during the war. The only options for him as a job were going down the coal mine or working as a stonemason in a granite quarry. We used to go to Scotland and I liked the permanency of the things he made. He was Polish and he’d say, “Son, this will last for a million years,” and they probably will, because they’re built of granite. So I quite liked the permanency of that from a young age. And I’ve always had a deep interest in history. I thought, how can I draw together the worlds of craft and history? Going down the path I knew a little about from my father seemed like a good way. And 35 – 40 years on, I haven’t looked back. Jo: I do find it fascinating. I went and did a weekend of stone carving and so I did actually use some of the tools and boy, my body hurt! What about the physicality of what you do? This is hard material. Is it very physical or is a lot of what you do now with chemicals or how does the job work? Andy: I’m a conservator first and foremost, and what that means is that my aim is to keep as much of the original as possible. It’s like dentistry, I guess. If there’s a cavity, and the stone around the cavity or the rot is okay, I will fill it using a lime mortar, which is a very ancient technique that the Romans used. You can’t lift a quarter-of-a-ton-sized piece of stone, you’ve got to use kit. Many people are surprised when I’m on site and my colleagues, half of them are women. Very often I find that women make better stonemasons than some of my more gung-ho male colleagues who just want to bust their backs and destroy their bodies by lifting things they shouldn’t lift. The tools that we use are unchanged since Roman times or even ancient Egyptian times. The head of my dummy is made of nylon, but the ancient Egyptians used mallets made of palm trees turned on a lathe. So, the materials might be different, but the tools, the form of the tools, the approach, and the mindset are exactly the same. The way I would approach cutting a block of stone is not in any way different to someone who was cutting a limestone block for the Great Pyramid, or in the Roman Baths in Bath, or in the Colosseum, or at Notre Dame. This is a sort of brilliant handing on of the baton over the generations that goes unnoticed, and I like that about craft skills. Jo: Are young people coming into it? Is there another generation? Because I feel like that kind of craftsmanship – Are we losing this kind of craftsmanship or is it still here? Andy: No, there’s stonemasons in every hedge round here because it’s a stony area. The local stonemasonry college in Bath is really good. There’s no shortage of youngsters coming through at all. It’s different in other parts of the country where there isn’t such a strong tradition. But certainly around here in Southwest Britain, Southern Britain, and in London, there are lots of stonemasons. But there are other crafts that are suffering from a demise in interest, mainly because people don’t know that these jobs exist, and I think that’s a big problem. I spent all last week at the Chalke Valley History Festival, educating young people that it’s possible to earn a living that’s good for your soul, good for your body, and good for society by undertaking a traditional craft, be that a stonemason, an oak carpenter, or a stone slater. All church roofs need stone slaters, and that’s an area where there is a real shortage. If you want to become a millionaire in years, become a church stone slater. Jo: But then, you love the stone now, I guess. Andy: Yeah, I mean, ’cause our business is tiny, there’s just eight of us and we just go from job to job. We’ve had to become generalists so we can carve pretty much anything. We could rebuild any vault we could repair a hole in a wall and plaster it up. We’ve got a broad range of skills, but we’re not specific and in the craft of ow masonry. There are lots of different areas you can be, you can focus on being a letter cutter, for example, and just do headstones or memorials or you could be a sculptor, of some sort. Or you could be what they call a Banker Mason. You’re just in a workshop making components to be fitted into a church or a fixer mason. But we sort of have to do all of that. So we’re a bit slower than the people who choose to specifically focus on one of those types of tasks. Jo: I’m also interested because when I was attracted to this whole area and Gothic cathedrals, it was this sense of things lasting. We think of stone as something that doesn’t change, and it’s used as a metaphor for unchanging and unyielding, and yet your very job is fixing stone. What changes and damages stone over time? What are you fixing? Andy: Settlement within the structure is very often a problem. When these buildings were put up, say a Norman church or cathedral in the th century, because they hadn’t quite got the engineering right, they would tend to settle around the central tower. So you get lots of cracks and settlements in the arches. A Norman arch adjacent to a tower, which is semi-circular like a Roman arch, will very often have settled and there’ll be some deflection in the arch, and it’s details like that that always need maintaining. Different stones erode in different ways in different parts of the country. They’ve historically been subject to acid rain, and in limestones, that causes a particular problem externally, but the core of the stone will very often be in good condition. So that will be repaired, as I mentioned earlier, with lime mortars, or we’ll just do some dentistry and cut out the rot, replacing it with a new piece of stone. Some stones in this part of the world are very good and some are rubbish. The Anglo-Saxon Church at Bradford-on-Avon has been there since the year and there’s no new stone in it at all. It’s because the Anglo-Saxons had the pick of the quarry. They knew where the best stone was. This is something I’ve noticed: very often Anglo-Saxon churches will be of bigger blocks than their later additions and be of a better quality of stone. They’re still there and hanging around. So as I say, they had the pick of the stone and it’s gonna be larger and of better quality. Very often Victorian stonework is a bit rubbish and the way that the Victorians chose to build. If we’re looking at a reproduction Gothic Victorian church, the Victorians wouldn’t have built in the gothic style from an engineering perspective. You have some squared off stones on the inside and the outside, and it would all be tied together in a rubble core so the whole building was, the walls were all unified, but with the Victorians, they would clad a rubble core with stonework and use cast iron cramps to reach into the core of the building and the cast iron corrodes ’cause it’s type of iron and that causes all sorts of problems. So Victorian church generally aren’t that well built. Jo: I did visit the Salisbury Stonemason’s yard and they talked about that. And how, the metal, basically, like you said about dentistry, you think that that discoloration and the kind of almost rotting, but you mentioned the stone in Bradford-on-Avon. What is quality when it comes to stone? Andy: I think what might’ve helped Bradford is it is in a pretty rural area, whereas Bath is an urban area. It’s a very similar type of stone in Bath, but a slightly less durable stone was selected because the Anglo-Saxons and the Normans had the pick of what was available. What tends to happen in Bath is that the coal that was extracted from the Somerset coal fields was a very high sulfur coal, and everyone was burning that in their grates. Consequently, all the buildings were covered in a sort of sulfation blackened crust, and that weakens the outside of the stone. With the Saxon Church of Bradford-on-Avon, I think a simplicity in materials has also helped it. The masons who turned up to build this wonderful little building literally extracted the stone from the quarry face that’s still there behind them. They put up this stone structure with stone blocks, but they didn’t use a cement mortar or a lime mortar; they just used clay from the local riverbed to glue the stones together. When we opened up one of the corners where there was a bit of movement, you could just smell the river from a thousand years ago. It was just incredible. So we just knocked it up in a bucket and put it back in. But I’ve noticed that like on the bridges around Bradford on Avon, there’s two medieval bridges and we’ve worked on both of them extensively, and they were constructed in the same way. So when they were sinking the piers, the central sections that the arches spring from, they would sink them down into the riverbed and of course the river bed’s clay, and there’s just tons of clay coming up, so they would just use that to glue together the stones. So all these incredible 13th century bridges and the adjacent tithe barn. It’s astonishing, isn’t it? Jo: It’s beautiful. Andy: It’s just old stone and clay, you know, simplicity and it’ll be there for another thousand years, won’t it? Jo: I want to come back to Gothic because you mentioned the Gothic, and I love a Gothic cathedral. For people who might not know, many of my listeners are also book people and Gothic literature is dark and quite different, whereas gothic architecture is more about light and airiness and height. Could you talk about what are the hallmarks of Gothic and some of the places that you’ve worked on? Andy: I think giving that form of literature the name Gothic is a bit of a misnomer. The Gothic [architectural] movement is all about light and color. Norman churches are these tall, dark churches that had tiny windows and thick walls. The Gothic movement was all about getting the light, which was the actual essence of God itself, into the church. So they wanted to flood the altar and the church itself with light. Consequently, you get much bigger pointed windows, and windows with a branch network within them to hold the glass, that’s called tracery. Medieval churches would’ve been highly colored, they would’ve been lit by candles. It would’ve been an incredibly sensory experience to visit one of these places. So I really don’t get the whole gothic movement at all, really. It’s just completely wrong. Jo: Yeah, it is a little weird, and I feel that people get gothic architecture wrong because they think of The Hunchback of Notre Dame, for example, and the darkness and all that. But again, that’s not Notre Dame inside and the architectural thing. Where have you worked on in terms of Gothic Cathedrals? Andy: I trained at Salisbury Cathedral and spent a few enjoyable years there learning the ropes. I’ve worked at Wells Cathedral in Somerset. Jo: Maybe you could just tell people about the scissor arches at Wells, because that’s a very special kind of architecture, isn’t it? Andy: Yes. What tended to happen with Norman churches is they borrowed Roman architectural forms and tried to make them taller. As they got taller and the Gothic system was introduced, there was a desire for Gothic buildings that were built on a Norman core to go even taller. At Wells, they started to build a central tower. So you look down the main part of the body of the church, that’s called the nave, and you’ve got wings coming off the arms of the cross, if you like. They’re called transcepts and the most sacred part, as I’m sure your listeners know, is at the east end, and that’s where all the chapels are and the altars and all that. As it went up and they put a lead spire on the top, it just started to sink back down. This deflection I was talking about earlier on the side. The side arches adjacent to the tower, which we quite often have to repair, all started to split and come apart. The thing was about to collapse. The master mason at that time, a chap called William Joy, came up with this very practical solution of introducing these scissor arches. They’re called scissor arches because they look like a pair of open scissors placed one on top of the other with the loop in the central section. That loop, where you would put your fingers, takes all the strain from all the surrounding stresses. Scissor arch behind altar, Wells Cathedral Photo by JFPenn Jo: It’s beautiful. I mean, you said there it was architecturally functional, but it’s beautiful. Andy: Oh, it’s completely mad. And Wells is so great because of the carving inside. It’s got this Great West Front, which is the greatest West Front in Britain, and it’s full of incredible carving that’s survived since the 1220s-1240s. Wells Cathedral west front Photo by JFPenn The actual carving inside is just as astonishing. It’s a tour de force of the medieval sculptor’s art, this form of leaf called stiff leaf. It’s a composite form, not a real leaf. You can date any church on the basis of the stiff leaf. The stuff at Wells is the best in the country by a mile. Did you see the toothache? It’s kind of all these sort of strange cartoonlike carvings of people with toothache holding their mouth open like this. Jo: There is a lot of comedy in some of these churches that you think, how did they get away with that? I did a carving of a Green Man. JFPenn’s Green Man with petunias Could you explain why we have things like a Green Man in a Christian place? Andy: Funny enough, I have been carving a Green Man all this week at the Chalke history festival. The Green Man seems a pretty uncompromisingly pagan figure, but Gothic stone carving is full of foliate forms. Doesn’t matter where you go in the country, as long as the stone is carvable between 1220s and Reformation, sticking a face in these foliate forms seems a rational thing to do. Stonemasons would just carve and carve and carve. These faces are not the faces of saints or pagan figures. It just indicates the abundance of nature, but it’s about rebirth, regeneration, and most importantly, resurrection. So, these characters are uncompromisingly Christian in my view. I don’t think they’re a hangover from the pre-Christian days because you don’t see an Anglo-Saxon or Norman Green Man. It just appears with all this wonderfully vital carving that you see in places like Wells. They’re a really good form in ceiling bosses. Where you have a stone roof vault, to lock all the stones together at the top, you need a really massive, circular feature called a roof boss. Decorating that with a green man is a very obvious thing to do. You’ve got to decorate it with something, and there are only so many lives of the saints you can portray, so the Green Man is very, very common. Jo: I did also want to ask you, because in Churchgoing, talking about the more spiritual element, you said, “Atmosphere should have its own entry in this book, it’s usually been as tangible a presence as anything else.” What kinds of those experiences have you had and why do non-religious people love these places and feel something in these places? Andy: It’s such a personal thing, isn’t it? I go into a church at six in the morning in the middle of winter. It’ll be cold and frosty, and the heating won’t be on, but the sun will be coming up and will radiate through the east window. These first glimpses of the day will light up the motes that are floating around in the church, and you can’t not be moved by these places. I refer to the walls of a church as like an old-fashioned night storage heater that slowly releases the births, the deaths, the coming together, the tragedy, the pathos of life that’s taken place since these places first went up seven or eight hundred years ago. I don’t have a particular faith, but I know there’s something else going on. Jo: It’s interesting you say “like the storage heater,” and I feel too that when there is emotion in a place, it sort of becomes imbued with it and you can perhaps sense some of that emotion. What’s interesting is some places you go and you really do feel something, and other churches, you know, there’s this idea of dead churches. There are some that clearly had worship in them but do feel dead. And other ones you go in and you are like, “Oh yeah,” like Wells just has such a feeling in it. Then you go in somewhere else, like St. Paul’s Cathedral in London, and I don’t feel anything there. Why do you think we feel things in some places and not others? Andy: I’m completely with you about St. Paul’s. It’s weird, isn’t it? I worked there for a while and it was very interesting. The guy who was teaching me was the master carver there, and he’d been there since he was a boy. His education was rebuilding Christopher Wren’s City of London churches after the Second World War. He would send me off every lunchtime to go and look at a different church, and I found more of that vibe going on in the churches really than the cathedral. That said, you’ve got to pay to get into Westminster Abbey, which I find so appalling. But Westminster Abbey, talking about atmosphere, it’s in the middle of busy London and it’s just the most atmospheric of all. It’s not a cathedral, it’s a Royal Peculiar, which means it’s the church of the Monarch. I’ve shivered a few times in there over the years when I’ve managed to blag my way in for nothing through the gift shop. Jo: How interesting. I mean, that really has a lot of famous burials, and I’ve got some photos there of these skeletons. There’s some really good sculpture there. But it is interesting, and you are not religious, you’re not a Christian? Andy: I am a bit, but not really. Jo: It’s interesting how we feel that in stone. So, we are almost out of time. Apart from your own books — What are a few books you might recommend that feature stonemasonry or architecture? Andy: Everyone on the planet has to read A Month in the Country by J.L. Carr. It’s a novella about two First World War veterans, one working as an archaeologist and the other is a wall painting restorer, working together in a church. It’s the most wonderful short read that really fills in a lot of spaces if you’re trying to understand what our medieval churches are about. To understand old churches now, they’re a machine of sacredness that was designed before the Reformation. There’s a really brilliant book by a chap called Eamon Duffy, and it’s called The Stripping of the Altars. It’s very entertaining, and every page is a winner. I also recommend Country Church Monuments. And King of Dust by Alex Woodcock is a lovely book. It’s very specific to Cornwall, but it’s thoroughly recommended if you want to understand the weirdness of the area. And this one, Old Parish Life: A Guide for the Curious. It’s just wonderful. This chap has been spending his whole life raiding old parish accounts. Tell me when to stop and I’ll read you a random thing. It’ll be worth it. Jo: Go … stop! Andy: Burial before the reformation. In 1556, there was a payment to Phelps, the tinker for the mending of the corpse bell of 12 shillings. Jo: That’s awesome, I love a corpse bell! Where can people find you and your books online? Andy: My Church Going book is selling really well and it’s available in all good bookshops, I imagine. I guess you can get anything from anywhere, can’t you? Jo: Brilliant. Well, thank you so much for your time, Andy. That was great. Andy: Thanks, Jo. The post Touching History: The Ancient Craft Of Stonemasonry With Andrew Ziminski appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 7/10/25 | ![]() Fearless Roots: Travel, Grief, And Resilience With Becky Doughty | What does it mean to come from everywhere and nowhere at the same time? How can travel shape our sense of self, and how do we find our way home when faced with unexpected grief abroad? In this episode, I talk with author Becky Doughty about her traveling childhood as a missionary kid, a life-changing trip to Tuscany that resonated with grief, and how traveling alone helped her become more resilient. Becky writes heartfelt and wholesome, contemporary commercial fiction and Christian fiction, including the Autumn Lake and the Tuscan Romance series. Growing up as a missionary kid in West Papua Being adopted, from “nowhere, anywhere, and everywhere.” How a dream trip to Tuscany turned into a journey of grief after the sudden death of her father. Turning a traumatic travel memory into a heartfelt romance Overcoming the fear of traveling and why embracing the moment is more important than worrying about what might go wrong. Becky’s solo backpacking trip to run the Dublin marathon and how it stripped away everything except her own inner strength. You can find Becky at BeckyDoughty.com Jo: Hello Travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Becky Doughty. Hi Becky. Becky: Hi Jo. How are you? Jo: I’m good. It’s great to have you on the show. For a little introduction, Becky writes heartfelt and wholesome, contemporary commercial fiction and Christian fiction, including the Autumn Lake and the Tuscan Romance series. We have lots to talk about today, but as a starter — How did travel play a part in your childhood? Becky: Well, I always say I’m a missionary kid in recovery because travel made me fearless. Being a kid that traveled all around the world, I never really had a place that was home base. Even though we didn’t live in a lot of different countries, we did primarily live in Indonesia. My dad was an airplane mechanic and pilot, and he oversaw most of the hangar operations at our base camp in what is now West Papua. For me, travel was just a way of life. We traveled back and forth to the States, which was home, and I traveled to school. I was a boarding student in high school and we traveled all on our own, with no parents. It was two days of travel, and we had to get to the right place during our stopover. Travel was just a part of life and it made me a fearless, “I’m just going to do whatever I want to do” kind of person. But the flip side is that it also leaves you feeling a little bit, not unrooted, but wondering where to put your roots down. Especially since we were always told that America was home, in particular where our grandparents lived. But it never felt like home because we were always only visiting. That’s a big part of why I write stories about people finding their place. I’ve always written stories and escaped into other people’s lives for that reason. Jo: It’s fascinating that you were told where home is whilst living elsewhere. Because you are living there, in West Papua or PNG as it was, with a very different culture, climate, and religions. I worked in mining for a while, so I know that sort of ‘Wild West’ idea of what was going on in PNG, and of course, there were wars and everything. So that’s very different. To be told, “Your home is in America, you belong in America,” must have been very strange. What age were you? What were your formative years? Becky: My parents went to the mission field with three kids under three. My older brother and I are adopted, not biologically related, and then the next two siblings came along naturally. My sister and I are only eight months apart. So when they went to the mission field, my brother was around three, I was one, and my sister was younger. I lived away until my senior year of high school. We came back periodically. At the beginning, it was every four years. Then, as they realized how isolating that was for some people, it changed. I think now furloughs are closer to every two years. Jo: And of course, no internet. International phoning was really hard. A very different world. Becky: Completely different. We had to travel to phone home to our grandparents. Once a year, we would travel into the capital, Jayapura, and make a very short call at the embassy. Our main mode of communication was cassette tapes. We would record and send them, and it could take four to six weeks, or even two months, to arrive. Our grandparents would record these long cassette tapes with Grandpa reading stories and singing songs, saying things like, “Here’s a song that reminds me of Becky.” We had these wonderful treasures because communication was so difficult. Jo: Do you still have them? Becky: I don’t have them anymore. My mom has a few things from back then, but those are some of the memories that we just lost. One of the issues we had was that we often had to pack up and leave everything behind. You get used to taking only what you can put in your suitcase, and with the idea that we were just going ‘home’ to see the grandparents, a lot of stuff that we should have kept wasn’t. My mom has kept all of her prayer letters and has compiled them in a book, so that’s cool because we get to see the journey through those letters. When we came back to Indonesia, we would often pack a crate and have it shipped by sea. By the time it arrived, it would often have holes cut in the side and things taken from it. So even when we sent stuff ahead, things were often missing. We never knew quite what we would get at the other end. We started shipping things in 55-gallon drums that you could seal, which were harder to break into, but you can cut the lock on one of those. It was always a free-for-all; you never knew what was going to meet you. Jo: A far cry from Amazon next-day delivery! I want to come back to something you mentioned. You were adopted, and I was reading on your website that you say — “I am adopted. It’s pretty cool. I come from nowhere, anywhere and everywhere.” This fascinated me, because I don’t think I’ve ever read a description of being adopted in terms of sense of place before. That really caught my eye. Why did you choose those words to describe it that way? Becky: That’s a really good question. I’ve had to really think about this and how to answer it succinctly. One of the things I struggled with growing up was a sense of belonging. It’s not because my parents were problematic; they were wonderful parents. I am a success story as far as winning the lottery with parents through adoption. But I still always felt that there’s something of me out there somewhere. If I could find my people and my place, I would know where I came from, and that would give me a better sense of where I’m going. Because I have such a deep connection to the people in my life—my adopted family, my husband of 37 years, our grown kids and five grandkids—I have a very stable life in terms of people. But because of the travel and never really having that sense of place, I always thought it would be cool to find out that I’m from some random place and get there and find a bunch of people who look and act just like me. According to my birth records, I have both Japanese and Spanish in me, which you’d never know. But wouldn’t it be cool to go to Japan and find where I started from? So a sense of place is almost more important to me because I already have a sense of people. Ironically, there’s a funny twist. We’ve been living in California for most of our marriage, but we moved to Indiana, which is in the middle of the Midwest. We ended up living on the exact same street, just four houses up from where my husband grew up. For my husband, Kevin, coming back to his street has been like coming home. There’s a little bit of me that gets to live vicariously through him regarding where home is. But I think I’ll always be searching for where home is. I am a believer, and that is actually one of the few things that has kept me grounded. The reason I came back for my senior year of high school was because I got kicked out of school. I really struggled with authority, especially not being able to question it. It was a very conservative boarding school for missionary kids. If you questioned anything, you were the troublemaker. That really played a lot into my feelings of “Why am I here? I don’t fit here.” I was told, “This is how Christians act and behave,” but that’s not the way I believe. That set me as an adult in this direction of searching. I walked away from my faith for a long time in my thirties, and then at the end of that journey, I realized that’s the only thing I can really depend on because people are just people. This goes back to that idea of place. The older I get, the more I feel like maybe I’ll just keep traveling while I’m here and wait for that feeling of home for Heaven. Jo: That’s really interesting. I have heard many people of faith say they will go home to God or Jesus. Let’s stick with different places because you have your Tuscan romance, ‘All The Way to Heaven’. Everyone loves Tuscany. Tell us about the trip that inspired the book. Since a sense of place is so important to you, what places from that time still stick in your mind? Becky: A friend of mine and I had “Go to Tuscany” on our bucket list because we were massive fans of ‘Under the Tuscan Sun’. Ironically, it was the movie that we loved so much. I always read books first, but this was one that I didn’t, because I didn’t know it was based on a book until after watching the movie. My husband, bless his heart, hates flying, but I grew up on little tiny puddle jumpers and never thought of flying as something to be afraid of. So, he stayed home with the kids. We wanted to go to a few places that were a little less chaotic, especially since we were going in October, during the harvest and tourist season. We started our trip in Lucca, which is a medieval walled city. It was a perfect introduction to Tuscany because it felt like what you see in the movies without being super touristy. One of the coolest things about Lucca was the walls that circle the city, which have a walking and bike trail on top. You could rent a bike for the day and go all the way around the city, pulling off for gelato, stopping at the little merchant market, or popping into the square. It was a fully immersive, self-guided tour of this wonderful little town. The first morning we were there, we woke up to the sounds of a woman singing Puccini under our window. And Lucca is actually the birthplace of Giacomo Puccini. It just felt like it was straight out of a movie. Then we went to Siena and were a couple of months late for the Palio, the crazy horse races. But we discovered that there are little neighbourhood competitions that go on year-round. At one point, around 10 or 11 at night, we heard a group of people coming up the street singing at the top of their lungs. We went running down from our fifth-floor balcony—stairs only—and joined the back of the group and walked with them down to the Piazza del Campo. There was another group coming from the other end, and they were launching good-natured taunts at each other. We just got to sit there and experience it and have celebratory drinks with everyone. It just felt like we were part of this much bigger picture. Our goal was to go from Tuscany down to the Amalfi coast and then back up to Rome to go home. We headed down to Sorrento, settled in, and the next day we went to Naples, saw the museum and the secret room. We went back to Sorrento and took a day trip to Capri, which was beautiful. The next day we were supposed to go to Positano and Amalfi, but I got a call from home that my dad had had a stroke. I got to speak to him, and he said, “Don’t come home. I’m going to be okay.” But everything had changed. When he had a second stroke, we knew we had to go home. We headed back to Rome the next morning and were able to get a plane that afternoon to Paris. We had a six or seven-hour layover, so we overnighted in the airport. I got a call in Paris asking if it would be okay with me if they took him off life support because he was otherwise gone. Because of my belief in Heaven, I was comforted by the fact that I will see him again. I didn’t need him to wait for me; he was already gone. Needless to say, I got home and Italy got shelved. Everything that happened there was put on hold, and it was full-on into processing grief, taking care of my mom, and gathering family. It was just pretty brutal. Jo: That’s fascinating, because some people never go anywhere because they’re afraid of something happening while they’re gone. And then there’s your experience, where one of the worst things did happen while you were away, and you dealt with it. But now, whenever you think back to that trip, that grief is the overwhelming memory. So, I’m interested — How did you write a romance about an area that resonates with that grief? And do you have any thoughts for people who are afraid to travel because of that kind of fear? Becky: Ironically, my friend is quite a bit older than I am, and her father was in ill health. We had talked about what would happen if we got the call about her dad. She had said, “I’ve said my goodbyes to him, we won’t come home.” We never imagined it would be my dad; he was only 67. When I came home, everything got put away. I rarely even spoke about Italy to anyone. Then, seven years later, almost to the day—two days shy of the seventh anniversary of Dad’s death—I was woken up hearing that same woman singing Puccini outside my window. I lay there for a minute thinking, “Where am I?” I could hear her voice just echoing, even after I woke up. I thought, maybe this is Dad saying, “Let’s go revisit this place that had these wonderful memories for you that turned sour because of me.” Of course, I projected all of that into it, but that’s how it felt. So I pulled stuff out and started going through it. It was so hard for me to see the good in it while also remembering how every little moment felt once I learned what had happened with Dad. I finally said, “I need to look through this stuff and pull out these memories as though they’re somebody else’s,” to give myself that distance. I created a character who was completely different from me, a different person who went to all these places and sort of told me about them. It was a very natural progression; my creative mind put this together. It became her story, and I decided to write it. It wasn’t a conscious decision to conquer anything; there’s a lot of guilt when you’re away. There’s always that regret. But I think living with regret is one of the worst things we can do in life. It keeps us trapped where we are rather than moving forward. Bringing this book to life was a way to honor the trip and the memory, but it’s also a way to honor my dad. At the back of the book, I have an author’s note that tells a brief version of this story. Sometimes we have to let time pass, but other times, I think we have to face things. I’m a bit of a warrior, so I want to face the demons and the hard things. But even if we face them, we have to give ourselves grace and space, a place where we can withdraw if we need to. The book is not at all about someone losing a father. It is a romance about a girl who plans a trip to surprise the guy she’s dating, finds out he’s already married, and ends up going by herself. To me, that’s another element of facing your demons—facing them alone. Jo: I never get the audio guide in museums. I don’t want to be told what to pay attention to. I want to be the one drawn to something first. Becky: Bad things happen no matter where we are. If we’re going to have regrets, I would rather regret missing being at the right place for a bad thing than regret not experiencing good things. Jo: Ninety-five percent of all the traveling I’ve done has had a positive net effect. Bad things have happened, but they have not taken away from the overall importance of the travel. Becky: Yes, absolutely. In the year 2000, during what I call my “running years,” I decided I wanted to run one marathon in my life. And if I was going to run a marathon, I wanted to make it a good one. So I ran the Dublin marathon. There were monumental weather issues—flooding all over England, Scotland, and Ireland. I flew into London and backpacked up through Leicester. A friend and I then drove up through the Yorkshire Dales, stayed with friends of hers, and then went into the Lake District. We were at Derwentwater, and the lakes were overflowing the docks. It was crazy. Then I crossed over from Cairnryan to Northern Ireland and stayed in Belfast. Had I known anything about what was going on in Belfast in the year 2000, oh my gosh. At the youth hostel I stayed at, the windows were shot out and boarded up. They said they weren’t replacing them until it was over because they were tired of replacing them. Waking up at 11 o’clock with gunshots outside was just crazy. Jo: We should say it’s not like that anymore. The Troubles have passed! Becky: Oh my gosh, no, it’s wonderful now. Leaving Scotland, I was back by myself, backpacking down to Dublin, staying in youth hostels. I ran the marathon, and it was raining the whole time. My sister, who lived in Sweden, had planned to come over but had to have surgery. I ran this epic race by myself. The start and finish line was a mile from the youth hostel. I walked there, crossed the finish line, walked back, and just cried for an hour in the showers. It was a complete release of endorphins with no one to share it with. It was one of the most traumatic experiences of my life. It was like having everything stripped away. I ended up leaving a day early and heading down to Wicklow and Glendalough, just hanging out at St. Kevin’s monastery and its ruins, walking and processing all by myself. Then I had to go down to Rosslare to take the ferry back across to Wales. The storms had kicked up again, and I got the last ferry across. I got into Pembroke, made it to Swansea, and found the train tracks had been flooded out. They were shutting everything down, and I had to be back at Heathrow the next day. I just thought, “I’m not going to make it. I just want to go home to my people.” It was utter chaos. By the time I made it home, it really was a stripping down of everything—all my plans, all my expectations. Everything that I thought would happen, happened, but in a different version. I realized I have no control. The only thing I can control is the people I love and what’s inside of me—what I give to the world, what I put out there. To me, that’s what self-control is. It’s not putting limitations on myself; it’s me determining what I put out there. When we go on these trips, I can either be afraid that something bad will happen, or I can embrace the moment that I’m in. You just never know. You don’t know what you’re missing out on if you don’t go. Jo: Well we are almost out of time, but this is the Books and Travel show. What are a few books that you love and recommend? Becky: Of course, Frances Mayes’ ‘Under the Tuscan Sun‘. I think everybody should read that. It’s actually a memoir and very different from the movie. We talked a little bit about grief, and one of the authors I really love is Caitlin Doughty. She’s written several books on death, and ‘Smoke Gets in Your Eyes’ is another take on it. To me, understanding and embracing death is a good way to process grief. We also talked about the idea of home. My husband and I have always made a home by planting a garden; it’s the first thing we do wherever we end up. I also have a morbid fascination with poisonous plants, but this is a beautiful book called ‘The Complete Language of Flowers’. The art in it is just wonderful. A lot of my books are a little ‘gardeny’ anyway. I’m a hobby herbalist, so I have a lot of herbal and home remedy books, and my garden is also my medicine chest. And of course, then my books. Jo: Yes, absolutely. Where can people find you and your books online? Becky: I am an author and an audiobook narrator. You can find my books at beckydoughty.com. I narrate most of my own books, but I also narrate for many others—I have over 200 audiobooks out there. You can find my books and audiobooks on Amazon, Audible, and Apple. Just look up my name, Becky Doughty. Jo: Brilliant. Well thanks so much for your time, Becky. That was great. Becky: Thank you, Jo. The post Fearless Roots: Travel, Grief, And Resilience With Becky Doughty appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 6/26/25 | ![]() Traveling By Cruise Ship With Wendy Neugent | Have you ever wondered what it’s really like to live and work on a cruise ship? Is it all glamour and exotic locations, or is there a hidden, more challenging side to life at sea? How do you cope with being away from family for months at a time, and what strange events unfold on these floating cities? In this episode, former cruise ship entertainer Wendy Nugent talks about her journeys and how they inspired her mystery novels. If you like episodes about the sea/books, check out episode 1 where I talk about my tallship journey from Fiji to Vanuatu, Sailing around the world with Tom Dymond; Tallship sailing in Galveston, Texas, and Sailing the Pacific with Nadine Slavinski. Wendy spent a decade as part of an award-winning magic act performing on cruise ships all over the world. She traveled from Alaska to Venezuela, Bermuda to Tahiti, and many exotic ports of call in between. Now, Wendy uses her insider knowledge of cruise ship life to write entertaining cozy mystery books set on cruise ships. Wendy’s journey from a theater graduate to performing on ships around the globe The highs and lows of life at sea, from incredible shore excursions to the challenges of being away from family The strict social hierarchy and unique culture on board, with crew members from many different nations The weird and wonderful things that happen on cruises—from ship fires to rescuing refugees—that inspire her mystery novels Practical tips for potential cruisers on choosing the right itinerary and ship size for their travel style How to make a tiny, temporary cabin feel like home, especially when your cabin mate is a performing parrot Recommended books You can find Wendy at WendyNeugent.com. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello, travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Wendy Neugent. Hi Wendy. Wendy: Hi Jo. It’s so nice to get to talk to you. Jo: I’m excited about this. Just a little introduction. Wendy spent a decade as part of an award-winning magic act performing on cruise ships all over the world. She traveled from Alaska to Venezuela, Bermuda to Tahiti, and many exotic ports of call in between. Now, Wendy uses her insider knowledge of cruise ship life to write entertaining cozy mystery books set on cruise ships. I think you’ve got one there as well, haven’t you? One of your books. Wendy: Yeah, Murder Takes a Bow. Jo: Fantastic. So this is going to be really interesting. To start off, just tell us — How did you come to work on cruise ships in the first place? Why did you want to be part of that kind of life? Wendy: I have a degree in theater, so I had a background in entertaining, but I was actually working at Colonial Williamsburg as a costumed tour guide straight out of college. I had moved there from upstate New York and was excited to be someplace a little warmer. I met someone who was working on cruise ships and they ended up hooking me up with a job working as a youth counselor. So that was my first contract. It was just three and four-day cruises, really quick. It was on the former Disney ship, the Premier Cruises. I ended up working my way up to being part of a review show where I had a section where I would hold up big dance cards and dance around on stage and do silly things like that. 9 And then over the years, I worked into having this magic act with my then-partner and traveled the world. It was a really fun way when I was young and in my twenties and early thirties to get paid pretty well to live on ships and travel the world. So I have no regrets about it. It was a great experience and I really enjoyed it. I don’t know if I’d want to do it now at this point in my life, but when you’re young and you don’t have any commitments, it’s a really fun way to get to see the world. Jo: And why did you stop working on cruise ships? Wendy: I stopped because I was five months pregnant! Jo: I was going to say, there must be a family in there! Wendy: Yeah. So that last contract was pretty rough because I was dealing with morning sickness and performing and getting bigger and everything. My last contract ended when I was five months pregnant. And I was definitely done at that point. You get burnt out from all of the travel and constantly being on the go and in a different port every day. It’s a lot. So 10 years was good and I really enjoyed it, but I was definitely ready to leave when I was done. Jo: Yeah. Well, but it’s interesting because of course you’ve written this series of books set on cruise ships, so there’s definitely this thing in you that is still kind of holding onto that life. So let’s first start with — What are some of the most amazing things, the highlights that you can remember, that you were like, yes, this is the best job in the world? Wendy: Oh, definitely. I mean, I hiked to a waterfall in Venezuela with all of the entertainers on board. It was epic. You got done with this out in the middle of Venezuela and you’re thinking, what life am I living? This is incredible. And when I was in Tahiti, Jean-Michel Cousteau was there and he was leading tours in Fatu Hiva, which is one of the Marquesan islands. I mean, you’re thinking, how is this even possible that I’m getting to do this? Tahiti was definitely a high point and I was incredibly lucky because I was on the Paul Gauguin, which is a very small cruise line. And a beautiful ship. Very, very high-end cruises, where they had a lot of educational talks and things like that going on. I lucked out because I was only there for a few weeks, but over that time, the run that I was on, they were going up and they did a special run up into the Marquesas, which are really remote islands that you wouldn’t get to. It would be very difficult if you weren’t on a ship to be able to go to all of these different islands and get to see these places. So Hiva Oa and Fatu Hiva and all these places that are amazing. And because you’re part of a ship, they’re bringing on dance groups and cultural events and things like that. So it was an incredible experience. Jo: Those things just sound amazing. You did mention a small cruise boat and I’m really interested in this. I have never been on a cruise. I have been on a tall ship, as a passenger on a tour ship, but not like a cruise cruise. When you say a small cruise ship, what sizes are we talking here? Wendy: I think that this had about 300 passengers. I’ve been on cruise ships that had 1,500 passengers up to 3,000. So, when we would do a performance, we might have 1,200 or 1,500 people in the audience at a time. So there are some pretty large ships. The smaller ships are pretty unique and there are not very many of them, and they tend to be more expensive because they’re going into very unique ports and things like that. But when I got to do those, they were always my favorite for sure. Jo: And then again, you said the high points there sounded like they were on the shore leave instead of on the boat. So were there any moments when you were out on the ships that you were like, this is amazing? Or did you just never have the time to kind of stand at the bow doing the Titanic thing? Wendy: No, I definitely did that. Because I was on ships during that time period when Titanic was a thing. It was really fun and — I think the most fun part of working on a cruise ship is that everybody’s there together. So I was really lucky because I was working as an entertainer, and when you’re doing that, you just do your shows. I didn’t have to do any crew duties. I was on the passenger manifest. So it’s a pretty good life compared to the crew. You have a decent cabin, you have your own private cabin, you’re not stacked in bunk beds like the crew might be. Because it’s a very, almost a military kind of background of the way that ships work. There’s very much a hierarchy. You have your crew members that live down in the below decks and they’re having to wear uniforms all the time. They’re very restricted in what they can do during the day, and they work a lot of hours. And then, above crew, you have staff members. The staff members are more the ones that are running the games and, when I was working as a youth counselor, I was on staff. So you have more privileges, but you’re still like a uniform-wearing person that lives in a crew area. And then when you’re an entertainer, and I guess the officers, you know, the officers rule everyone, passengers and crew. As an entertainer, there aren’t very many of you on board. Even if you have a cast, it will usually be a few people that are singers and dancers that perform. And then there’ll be a few entertainers like I was, where you have your own act and you’re traveling ship to ship to ship, doing your performance. And when you’re doing that, you generally are on as a passenger, you’re on that passenger manifest. So other than performing, I got to read all the time. I got to sit out on the deck in Alaska and watch the eagles fly by and watch the sea otters drift past the ship. So it was a pretty good gig for the time. But the best part of that is that you meet people from all over the world — — and you have friends. Because you’re away from your family, you’re away from all your friends and you’re only there maybe for two months or six months. So you bond really quickly because you don’t have anybody else and you’re there for Christmas and you’re there for your birthday. You get kind of relationships that you might not ever have in day-to-day life working just a normal job. So that’s the most fun. Like my favorite memories are sitting out on the back deck and you’re getting to hang out with the comedians and all of these really funny, entertaining people that are super interesting. And generally the people that work on cruise ships tend to be kind of unique because it’s not a normal thing to do, so they tend to be really fun and funny. The people are what make it so much fun. Jo: It’s kind of crazy. I mean, you are a writer now and I’m obviously a writer and — I’m an introvert, and the thought of all those people is way too much! Now, as a writer, you do spend time alone, so are you an extrovert or how did you deal with all that? Wendy: No, I’m definitely an introvert and that was the most challenging part because if I left my cabin after I’d had my show, everyone recognized me and it would get exhausting. You would get the same jokes over and over again. Because I was doing a magic show, I had people come up and literally a man lift my shirt up to see why I got cut in half. I mean, the boundary crossing was kind of crazy. So it would get exhausting. The good thing is you would do a contract and then you’d go home for a few months and you could rest. The other thing is that when you were on the ship, you had your cabin, you could kind of find little places, or you would come out in the evenings when everybody else was doing something else. Or when you get into port, you would go off. Because you didn’t need to do the touristy things after the first week. You could go find a little place where no one was and kind of build your own little private world within that. And I always looked forward to if my show was at the end of the cruise, because then I would have just kind of quiet the whole time. Because it did wear me out. It definitely did. Jo: Yeah, it’s very interesting. Well, let’s talk about some of the challenges. I mean, I guess there, you said you had a decent cabin, so that implies that some of them were pretty bad. What are some of the biggest challenges of the cruise life? Wendy: Well, it’s definitely the fact that you are away from everybody and you can be away from your family for every holiday. My grandma passed away a couple of years ago and I got all of her pictures and I’m going through organizing all of her pictures and I’m like all these family events and I’m not in any of them because I wasn’t there for anything. So that’s kind of challenging that you’re missing out on when someone had a baby or Christmas and people’s birthdays and you just miss all that kind of stuff. So that makes it difficult. My husband’s always laughing at me because if something happened in the nineties, I’m like, I didn’t watch the TV show. I didn’t see that. I’m like, yeah, it’s like all brand new to me because I just missed like a decade. Back then, I didn’t have a cell phone. I didn’t have any internet. Like if I had to send an email, I would find like an internet cafe someplace and go send an email.But it was very, like, I used payphones and quarters to be able to call people or a card. So you didn’t have the same kind of ease that you would have now where you could just FaceTime your family and be a part of things. So that was definitely difficult. And that was part of me, because I’m close to my family and so I had a hard time with that part. But at the same time, I’m glad I did it when I was young. In Alaska, I got to go up through Perseverance Trail and I also saw people that were on ships that were finally able to afford to go on these incredible cruises and they weren’t able to do those things because their knees were bothering them or they were on oxygen or something. So I just tried to always be grateful that I was able to do this while I was young and healthy and see the world. b Jo: Yeah. But then I guess a lot of people listening are not going to work as entertainers on the cruise ship! I mentioned the introvert thing, but I also have this sense of it being really constrained. Where I would, if, say it’s really bad weather and you’re stuck in your cabin, whether or not you are feeling sick or whatever. The thought of not being able to get off and just walk away is something that brings up — not fear, exactly, but a sort of concern. I don’t necessarily want to do that. So what would you say to people who have those feelings around cruise ships? Wendy: So, my husband kind of was like that when we met. He was like, oh boy, I bet I’m going to get stuck on a cruise someday, aren’t I? And he did. We went, I took a group of my readers in January and he came along and we had a great time. We had a balcony cabin, which I think helped because we could sit outside and just watch Cuba go by and things like that. And it was fun. And he had a better time than he expected. I don’t know if it would be like his number one way of traveling again, but he did enjoy it. And I think that there are certain itineraries that would just be very difficult to do if you were just trying to, like Alaska for example. There are all these little tiny islands on the inside passage. It is possible to book ferries and maneuver your way up through there. But it’s just, it’s definitely more challenging to do something like that. Tahiti, the same thing. You’ve got all of these little islands and so you know, it’s an eight-hour flight from the west coast. I’m on the East coast, so it was like a 30-hour flight for me to get there. You could figure out ways to go to all of those different islands, but it would be expensive. It would be exhausting to try to navigate all of the travel arrangements and things like that. So it’s just, certain destinations I think make sense. Some people just love to cruise. Two of my best friends, like that’s their way they travel. If they go someplace, they go on a cruise. And that’s great. But if you just love it, like going to the Caribbean or going to the Mediterranean is super fun because just like the experience of being on the ship is part of it for those people. They want to go to Bingo, they want to go on the biggest ship that has some kind of a water slide and things like that. But you can also find some really interesting itineraries that would maybe go someplace that, like if you wanted to travel in Asia, that is an interesting place to go, but it can be very difficult to maneuver your visas and not being able to read the signs and things. And so you could kind of get a taste of it by going on a cruise. They go all over the place. It’s not just like the big beach destination. So it depends. I think like a Canada-New England cruise, that was spectacular. And I got to go to, started in Boston and it went up into Bar Harbor, Maine. And I got to go to Prince Edward Island and see the Anne of Green Gables house. And I went to Quebec City and I went to Montreal and that was really cool. And while you could do that, you can’t drive to all those places, so you’d have to do driving and ferries and cross borders, and it just makes it super simple. You unpack, once you wake up in the morning, you get off the ship in whatever destination you’re in, and then you move on to the next place. Jo: Hmm. Well I was thinking about that because I did this tall ship journey from Fiji to Vanuatu and as you said, Fiji is islands, Vanuatu is lots of islands. And so we were stopping at different islands. But it’s funny because I don’t think of that as a cruise. I was on watch, you know, I was still a passenger, but I was on watch duty and there were only, it must have been 20 people maybe. What would be the difference between passage on a tall ship and a cruise? Is there a point at which a journey on a ship becomes a cruise? Wendy: So I know there are like river cruises and things that are small. My parents are actually going on a cruise in July up, they’re doing a New England cruise and it’s just got a couple hundred passengers. But I think that that’s kind of the difference. When you start to have a hundred, 200 people, it’s going to be more considered a cruise. And I think one of the benefits would be if you have seasick issues, a larger ship. They just don’t move around the same way. Like you may feel the movement, but it’s not going to knock you around quite the same way as a smaller one. The smaller the ship is, the more you’re going to start to feel. And I think the modern, especially the modern ships, they’ve got all sorts of things to try to keep people so it almost feels like you’re just in a hotel walking down the hallway. So I’ve been on some small ones where you walk down the hallway and you like hit, you know, as you were going down, because you were just getting rocked back and forth. On, especially like the Bermuda crossing, crossing the Atlantic to Bermuda. That one I would wake up in the morning and my back would hurt, and my neck would hurt from like holding onto the bed all night because it was bouncing us around. So that wasn’t my favorite run. But it was kind of fun because once we got to Bermuda, we’d be there for three or four days, which usually you’d be there for a few hours to a port. So, yeah, because you could just really enjoy the port. Jo: Yeah, so I think you are right about thinking about the itinerary, perhaps before, I guess the itinerary and a budget before picking a boat or something because then you can really think about that aspect of it. I think I would do a smaller one. Like we did some walking in Norway and of course Norway is the same, just lots and lots of fjords and so I did actually look into that. Well, you’ve encouraged me, but I did want to ask you, because of course you write these cruise ship mysteries, so you must have also been inspired by some weird and unusual things. So, I mean, you mentioned that the sort of military hierarchy that must come into it somehow, but — What are some of the other things you’ve woven into your fiction that is unusual about cruising? Wendy: So, I was on a cruise ship that, they were parking the boat at the dock and they didn’t do a very good job and they rammed into the dock and it hit so hard that it literally crushed the side of the boat. Like you could have put a Volkswagen bus in the dent on the side of the boat. I was onboard a shipboard fire on a Cunard ship once. I was in Montreal on that Canada-New England cruise I was telling you about and we had a wave of flu that came through the ship and they ended up quarantining us and we were quarantined for a week. It made national news. So yeah, there’s definitely some interesting things that have happened. And when you’re on, I was on probably eight or 10 different cruise lines over the years. So there’s always going to be something that happens. I was there during when the Cuban refugee crisis was happening on one ship and we picked up Cuban refugees that were trapped. They were floating on just like this raft that you’re not quite sure how it’s holding them up. And they didn’t have any water and they didn’t have any food. And everybody’s at like a sail away party and they’re all dancing and music and then you look down and you see that kind of human tragedy and waited with them until the Coast Guard came and picked them up. So, there are some incredible things that have happened. When I was in Tahiti, I had an accident on stage and I fell and got a concussion. And that makes its way into one of the stories where the sleuth has a concussion and then, how is she going to navigate being on board and having this, because while you have a doctor on the ship, it’s not the same as what it would happen if you were having that here where they would rush you to the emergency room and do all sorts of tests. So it’s definitely a different experience. I’ve seen people get airlifted off with a helicopter that they had some kind of a medical event. So those kinds of things that you see happen and you’re, you know, that’s definitely the start of a story right there. When I was back on ships, I had the idea for the series, but publishing was different back then and I was off on a ship. I didn’t even have access to anything to even know how, you know what to do or anything. So I waited until my kids were a little older and then the world had changed and the way publishing had worked had changed, and it was much more attainable to be able to get the information on how to do all that. Jo: Well, the one show I do watch is Dr. Odyssey on Disney. Have you seen that show? Wendy: No, I haven’t. I actually took my TV out to put my bookshelf up. Jo: Well, so I don’t normally watch cruise ship stuff, but you mentioned the doctor there, and it’s about the medical team. I like medical dramas. And this is kind of medical dramas on a cruise ship. And so, but it’s so funny because of course, bigger drama than concussion. Like someone needs some kind of surgery in a storm and things like this. Wendy: Well, and a lot of people that go on cruises are older and so you’re more apt to have medical issues or they’re doing something that younger people wouldn’t do at home, like they’re on a jet ski or something and they end up hurting themselves and they’ve got to come back to the ship and they’ve got a broken leg or a broken arm or something. So it happens. They’ve got a pretty incredible setup. And you know, Olivia, my character, she ends up down there all the time because she’s always petted something she shouldn’t pet or doing something she shouldn’t do and ends up in some kind of a jam where she needs her doctor to help her. Jo: Yeah. Well, one of my many obsessions is this idea of home. And I wondered, like you mentioned there are all these contracts and then you’re moving from boat to boat. So you would arrive on a new cruise ship and you are like, okay, I am here for, let’s say, you said two to six months. How do you make your cabin into somewhere that you can bear to live for that amount of time? How do you make a little sense of home in that place? Wendy: So one of the things that I was really lucky because I had a magic show is that I ended up getting pets that could come with me. So I was really unique compared to other people. So Olivia, in my book, she has a parrot that is part of her show and he is based on a parrot that I had that would do the act with me. So having him with me, that just made traveling… Now it made the travel much more difficult having to get permits to get in and out of countries, have to have a vet that you have inspect before you leave, and then a vet that inspects when you come back, that has to come to the ship before you can get the bird off the ship. Half the time they wouldn’t even know what type of bird it was and you’re paying them $500 to come to the ship on a Sunday morning. But always having a pet, because I’m an animal lover. I have a cat, Abraham Lincoln, that is my buddy. So, you know, for me not having a pet was difficult. So those first couple of contracts before I did that, having him, that made a world of difference and being able to travel with him made it much more like home. But it’s still, you’ve got your little cramped cabin. I mean, because every cabin is small. Unless you’re going on in a suite, you’re not. And that’s not if you work on a ship, you’re not going to have that. So, you take some of the things that make it feel like home for you, but you can’t have candles. You can’t cook in your room. There are many things that would make it easier. So you spend a lot of time meeting at the buffet and it just kind of is what it is. But that was the hard part for me. Now the good part is you get done with a six-month contract and I would have two or three months where I wouldn’t work and I would just be able to be home. So bigger doses. Jo: Are there animals on cruise ships? You think of the ship’s cat, for example. Are there animals or is it usually animal-free? Wendy: Captain Kate, she used to work as a captain on Celebrity and she traveled with her Sphynx cat who recently passed away. 146 But it’s pretty unusual if it’s not. Usually it’s an entertainer if there’s an animal on board. You can bring a service animal on board if you have a service dog. And they have like a grass area for them to be able to go potty and things like that. But that’s really, it’s very unusual to be able to have an animal and if no entertainers have one, there wouldn’t be any onboard. Jo: Ah, okay. No, that is really interesting. I guess people get to see animals and birds when they’re traveling. Wendy: When I would go to St. Thomas, there were parrots that I would visit there. I went to see monkeys. I had like everywhere I went, that was kind of my favorite thing to do. Like go to Mexico, I knew that if I went to Xel-Há I could go see the monkeys. So I’d spend the day visiting my monkeys. Jo: Well and I guess like you mentioned, the itinerary, some of those, like the Galapagos for example, people go on it to see the creatures and things, and I guess there’s scuba diving. I guess I’ve been on some bigger scuba diving liveaboards where there are more people and stuff like that. Wendy: Really, the Paul Gauguin in Tahiti, you could literally go snorkeling or scuba diving right off the back of the ship. The back of the ship came down like a garage door kind of thing and it could turn into a dock and you could go right off the ship. And then, yeah, you’d be there and there’d be incredible fish and dolphins swimming right by you. I remember being out in Alaska and standing watching as we were pulling into Juneau and this huge whale just breached. And you think how huge those ships are. I mean, they’re like a floating hotel. You have 3,000 people, but then there’s 1,500 crew to keep that whole thing running. And the whale breaches and the entire ship just rocks from the whale. Jo: That’s so cool. Wendy: It is very cool. Jo: I’ve definitely learned this from our chat is that, decide what you want to see and do and then find a cruise that matches that. 159 Because I mean, my husband knows someone who likes heavy metal music, and there’s a tour, like a cruise ship that is for metalheads, and I’m like, I can’t think of anything worse really than a cruise ship full of like heavy metal music all the time. Wendy: I was on, I worked on a cruise once where they had a nudist cruise charter ship. And they’re like, you have the option if you would like. And we’re like, no, thank you. Jo: Well actually, that’s what this Dr. Odyssey does too, on the show. Every week is a different theme. So like, they might have gambling week and that kind of thing, and there are people listening like, why don’t you know about this? I’m like, it’s just something I haven’t done. But the other thing that’s interesting to me is you mentioned that it’s like this floating city and there’s crew. You’ve said at one point, in your pitch to me, with crew members from 60-plus nations. When you think about that, all these different cultures, obviously people, different religions, there’s, and there’s political stuff going on that presumably makes people kind of hate each other in some way, and then they have to do this kind of service culture. Right? How does the culture of the cruise ship work when people come from so many different places? Or is it just like it is cruise ship culture where you don’t do all the other stuff? Wendy: I definitely think that that is part of it, is that when you’re on the ship, there are just expectations that you are going to be kind to everyone. 166 You’re going to be in service to everyone, whether they’re crew, staff. That’s, you want to make everybody’s experience pleasant because you are living in this tiny little place together. But there are like, a lot of times the officers, they will all be like all Greek or all Turkish or all British. And so I think that some of that is because the cultures are very different. A lot of the officers have military backgrounds and they’re very strict, very regimented in the way things are. 171 It’s not always, you know, not everyone that comes up has been in the military, but it is pretty common, especially for the navigation officers and the ones, that’s how they’ve learned how to drive these huge ships and things like that. But like you would be on one ship and it would just literally be everybody there would be Greek and then you’d go on a different ship and all the officers would be Turkish and they don’t necessarily go back and forth. But it was, I mean, for me, I loved it. I made friends with, there was a girl that worked in the casino that was from the Ukraine, and I got to learn about what her life was like back home and why she was, what it meant to her to be able to come on the ship. The money she was able to make as a crew member, she was able to send back to her family. She was able to use that money to be able to build a better life for herself. A lot of the people, they have young children and their parents might be raising their children while they’re on a contract and their contracts can be long, they can be nine months or a year, and they may do two or three of those. But when they’re done, they’re able to buy a home or they’re able to do things in their country because the money, while it may not be like for us working as a cabin steward, it may not, you feel like, I can’t believe the hours they’re working for how much money they’re making, but for Indonesia or for a country like that, that money can go a lot further when they take it back home. So there are some definite benefits depending on where you are. For the entertainers, it’s one of the best-paying gigs that you can get without doing something like a casino in Vegas or Atlantic City or something like that. Jo: Yeah. And as you say, if it’s like, and obviously all those officers, they have to get their experience and maybe they’ve been in the navies or whatever, but then that also helps because I guess the discipline of the crew and the staff has to be, well, this is the ship. It’s not your country. No, it’s not your religion over here or whatever. It’s like, this is our ship and we all have to play the game, I guess, for a certain period, and then you can leave. Wendy: Right. And they’re really good about like making, like they would have in the crew mess, there would be Indonesian food and Filipino food and, so that they have some of that at least a few times a week where it would feel like home to them where they would have things that they could bring. Because the different crew members work in all the different departments. So I think everybody’s in the same boat, literally. So everybody wants to make that home for everybody else too. So, yeah, there’s definitely culture more than like, yeah, everyone brings their own history and their own interests and things like that when they come, but I think everybody kind of comes together and then you are a Celebrity or you are a Princess, and that’s kind of your identity, that you know you’re very proud of the ship that you’re working on. Jo: Oh, wait, wait. When you said you are a Celebrity or you are a Princess? That’s the cruise line? Wendy: The cruise line. Sorry. Yes. The cruise line. Jo: It’s not like I can pretend to be a princess. Wendy: I mean, you could. That’s the other thing. If you go on a cruise, you are never going to see anybody again. So you can be whoever you want to be. Jo: I don’t know. Don’t people love it so much? And they’re like, oh, I’ll see you this time next year. Wendy: Definitely. I mean, the people who love cruising, they love cruising, and they’ll find the cruise line that like fits them because there are different, each cruise line will have a different clientele that kind of navigates to them with age and you know how much it costs to do that, or the types of itineraries they go to. And so yeah, there are people who are like, they’re part of the Celebrity club. They go on just Celebrity ships and they’ve been on 27 cruises over the years, and then there are people who, you know, they’ve gone on one and they’re like, that’s just not for me. 193 It depends on what you’re interested in. Like, I’m not a gambler. You know, going into the bars and things like that wasn’t that interesting for me. So I enjoyed it. Working on it. It’s not necessarily the way I would travel all the time for vacations. Jo: Well, maybe some people listening can leave us some comments about their favorite cruise lines. I’m certainly interested. Okay. So, this is the Books and Travel podcast. So apart from your own books obviously — What are a few books that you would recommend around cruising and boats? Wendy: So if you’re looking to like pick itineraries, Lonely Planet has some wonderful books that are like a Caribbean itinerary or going to Alaska that you can kind of get some information about what those ports are and it’ll help you to pick. I definitely would like to go to Ketchikan and so I want to look for one that has that because our Sitka or whatever your interest is. So for just guides, those are interesting ones. And they tend to be kind of surface level for the different ports because you’re usually only there for a day. But it can kind of give you an idea of like, I’m only going to be in Juneau for six hours. What should I do while I’m there? So they’re kind of interesting. As far as fiction, if you’re a mystery lover like I am, Mary and Carol Higgins Clark wrote a very light, very fluffy mystery called The Santa Cruise. That’s very silly. And it’s like after Christmas and all of these Santas are on this ship. It’s goofy and silly, but if you’re just looking for something light and fun, that is a fun one. And then what I read a lot when I was working on ships is not necessarily cruise related, but I love James Michener. He had a lot of books that like, if you want to know about the formations of the shells in French Polynesia, like he is your guy. And so I would feel like I really knew the places from his book and when I got there, I had the history of it. I had so much information from his books. I just think they’re amazing. And I had plenty of time on ships to read one of his, you know. Door stops. Jo: Yes. Serious doorstop books. James Michener. I’m thinking, and actually, when you go on a cruise, I guess if you take a physical book, I mean, a lot of people now read on their phone or a device, a Kobo or whatever. Wendy: I didn’t have, there were no eBooks. So yeah, the ships usually have a library. So you can usually get some books on ships. They sometimes will sell some in the gift shop. And then, for me there, I would go into port and I would just load up books and then the next week I would take them off and get the next round of books when I would hit the States and could go to a bookstore. Jo: That’s so funny. You reminded me then, when I was backpacking as well in the late nineties and 2000, and you’d carry a book to the next place and then you’d take it to like a book swap. And basically it was whatever was there. I remember reading in Australia in the Outback, there was this only this one book about giant spiders invading a site, and I was like, I shouldn’t be reading this in Australia! Wendy: I mean like every library everywhere. If they had a, if they had like a book exchange or a, because I couldn’t, I couldn’t get a library card because I’d only be there for a few weeks. But usually they would have like a little book sale at the front or something like that. And I would bring my books and donate and then I would buy my next stack of books. Jo: That is awesome. Where can people find you and your books online? Wendy: My books are available wide. They’re available in all the major bookstores. You can get them on Amazon, Barnes & Noble, Kobo, wherever you read books. I also have a website, wendyneugentbooks.com. If you want to come and see me there, I’ve got pictures from back when I worked on ships, and I’ve got a free travel guide for cruises. If you’re interested in getting some more information about like packing and those kinds of things, you can get that there. Jo: Brilliant. And show us the book one more time. So down backwards. There you go. Murder Takes a Bow. Looks great. If you want a cruise ship mystery. There you go. So thanks so much for your time, Wendy. That was great. Wendy: Oh, thanks Jo. It was really a pleasure to be here. The post Traveling By Cruise Ship With Wendy Neugent appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
Want analysis for the episodes below?Free for Pro Submit a request, we'll have your selected episodes analyzed within an hour. Free, at no cost to you, for Pro users. | |||||||||
| 6/12/25 | ![]() To The End Of The Earth: Walking Spain’s Camino de Santiago With Bradley Chermside | How can a physical journey trigger profound inner change? What draws a non-religious person to undertake a Catholic pilgrimage? What happens when you encounter both the best and worst versions of yourself on the same path? Bradley Chermside, international best-selling author, entertainer, and host of the El Camino de Santiago Podcast shares his transformative journey. You can also find my memoir, Pilgrimage, and lots of pilgrimage and Camino resources here. Bradley Chermside is an international bestselling author, copywriter and multi-award winning singer and entertainer. He’s the host of the El Camino de Santiago Podcast, and today we’re talking about his book,The Only Way is West: A Once in a Lifetime , 500 Mile Adventure Walking Spain’s Camino de Santiago. Life before the Camino and why walk a pilgrimage if you’re not a Christian Spiritual and personal influences Highlights of the Camino, and the challenges along the way Meeting people, walking together and alone Balancing life after Camino — and why Bradley continues to walk the routes Recommended books You can find Brad at BradleyChermside.com and also on the El Camino de Santiago Pilgrims Podcast. I was also on Bradley’s Camino podcast talking about my own Camino experience here. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello, travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Bradley Chermside. Hi, Brad. Brad: Hello. Jo: Hello. So just a little introduction. Brad is an international best-selling author, copywriter, and multi-award-winning singer and entertainer. He’s the host of the El Camino de Santiago podcast, and today we’re talking about his book, The Only Way Is West: A Once-in-a-Lifetime 500-Mile Adventure Walking Spain’s Camino de Santiago. And on the video, Brad’s just showing the book there, it is fantastic. So we’re going to jump straight into it. I wanted to pick out this quote from the book. You talk about, “A meaningless, empty existence, exacerbated by the Monday morning blues.” Why was pilgrimage the answer? Take us back. What was life going on in your life at that time and why was pilgrimage your answer? Brad: Well, exactly what you just described there was a meaningless existence. I knew it had a limit on it. I knew it wasn’t a sustainable way of living. Jo: What was it though? We’re dying to know. Brad: I don’t really need to go into details! but it was just doing what you do as a youngster. You’re experimenting with different things, and it wasn’t really fulfilling in any way. And the work I was doing at the time wasn’t fulfilling either, even though I was making a good living out of it. And I thought, you know what? There’s got to be a drastic change here, and I’d read two books about the Camino during the time. The Camino by Shirley MacLaine, which is mad. I was like, “Whoa, I wouldn’t mind some of these crazy things happening.” These really vivid lucid dreams and hallucinations in her dreams and stuff. And also The Pilgrimage by Paulo Coelho, which is one of my favorites. Jo: And I read that one. That was my one. Very different books. Brad: Oh yeah, definitely. And again, a bit woo-woo, as they say. But I’m into woo-woo so it was definitely preaching to the converted. And I thought, you know what? And anyway, I bumped into a friend of mine in London, just by chance, a serendipitous event, and they said to me, “You should… I’ve been trying to get in contact with you. You should walk the Camino.” And this person was never ever present on social media, literally disappeared off the earth. And I just bumped into them on the wrong train on the London Underground. So I got onto the wrong train on the London Underground and I was like, “This is a sign.” I decided to go and walk it, and the massive change was exactly what I needed. It was a chance to look back at the life I was leaving and realize that it was going down a dead end and that changes were needed. Jo: So what year was this? Brad: This would have been 2015. Jo: Oh, okay. So as we speak now, like a decade ago. And so, how old were you approximately at the time? Brad: 2015, so going back I would’ve been 36. Jo: That’s really interesting. So I do think that in that mid-30s, I also at that point, I was working as a business consultant, and I was like, “What is the point?” And I wasn’t living quite the high life that it sounds like you were, but it was also a similar, “What am I doing with my life?” I think there’s probably something that starts to hit at mid-30s when that happens. Brad: Yeah, I think it comes at different points for everybody, doesn’t it? But you just know, like, you’ve got to make a big decision. And it was very, very necessary. Jo: So you read those two books, but you… as far as I know, you’re not a Christian, right? Brad: No, no, I’m not, no. Jo: So how did you go from… I mean, obviously you read those two books, but something was drawing you, and you said you’re a fan of woo-woo. What in your background prompted you to want to go on what is essentially a Catholic pilgrimage to change your life? Like, you could’ve gone to India and done meditation or something, but you chose this. Brad: Yeah, it’s a very good question because I have done stuff like that. I’ve spent time with Hare Krishnas. I’ve chanted with them and stayed in a Buddhist silent retreat, which for me is a really big challenge. The silent retreat was in Hertfordshire in the UK. And I’ve always been spiritually curious. I’ve also worked in a church, worked for a church. You know, this was part of my journey, like, where is my spiritual destination? Where’s my spiritual home? Still haven’t found it, if I’m being honest. But that is all part of the journey so I’m always open to religion, always open to spirituality. And I just knew that this was a place where it was a kind of a bastion of European spirituality. And my brother is super spiritual. He’s older than me but he’s super spiritual and he’s been an influence definitely. He’s a Christian, actually. Jo: Okay, so there was something there. Brad: Yeah, yeah. And he was shoving Bibles under my nose as a kid, and I’d pick it up. It never really resonated with me personally. But always aware, always open, always, and I knew this was just a place where I’d probably meet like-minded seekers. Jo: Yeah, and I use that word too, seekers. Brad: Mm-hmm. Jo: And I think that’s, I guess, what I’d say to people listening, if you’re not religious, you can still be a seeker, like a spiritual person. Which Camino route did you walk at that time and what were the most beautiful parts, the highlights? Brad: The Camino Francés, which is the kind of official starting point, is in France at the foot of the Pyrenees, Saint-Jean Pied de Port. And you cross the Pyrenees, then you walk all the way to Santiago de Compostela across the whole of northern Spain. I went on to the Atlantic and finished in Finisterra, which is the supposed end of the Earth until the Americas were discovered. So I love that idea. And that’s where the Camino Francés trail, the official trail, goes from. You can jump on and off any point along that trail. There’s not like a gate that opens up and closes until you get to the end. You could just get on there and walk it. And the first day is stunning. It’s a really tough walk. It’s up and over the Pyrenees. There’s a stop along the way in a place called Orisson. That’s a really good stopping point. I went all the way over and all the way down on the first day, 27 kilometers, but the views are incredible. It’s like you’ve walked through the gates of heaven and you’re up in the clouds and you’re above the clouds and you see the serrated mountainous skyline and the jagged peaks poking through the clouds. It’s unfathomable to the mind. You never think that such natural beauty exists. And also, another beautiful part would be Santiago to Finisterra. That’s an official start of another Camino, which is the Camino Fisterra. You get another Compostela when you get to Finisterra as well. And me and my wife did that again last year, March 2024. It’s four days walking, three days if you really want to give it some. But wow, I mean, that is something else. Forest all the way, pine forest, walking alongside… I just got goosebumps saying it. And the energy, the energy, oh my Lord — There’s something in the air there between Santiago and Finisterra that I guess you could call it a higher vibration, a supreme energy, a purer energy — I don’t know what it is, but you go there and your whole soul just breathes a sigh of relief when it gets there. Jo: Is it a lot less busy? Because one of the issues, I guess depending on the time of year, but the main Camino routes and the Francés particularly can be very, very busy, and that last 100 kilometers is particularly busy because that is the one that a lot of people only do the last 100 kilometers. So is that separate one on to Finisterra, is it a lot emptier? Brad: I guess it depends on what time of the year you do it, but it definitely has less people than the main Camino routes. I don’t know the official statistics. I know the two most common routes are the Camino Portuguese, which would be in second place, and the Camino Francés. So where the Camino Finisterra ranks on that, I don’t know, but there’s definitely less people. It’s a harder walk, so that’s why there’s less people as well. It’s not an easy walk by any stretch of the imagination. Jo: Is it more mountains again? Brad: There’s a lot of ups and downs. There’s a Spanish guy I met along the way and he described it as, “Bing bong, bing bong, bing bong.” But it’s not just the fact that there’s lots of ups and downs, but it’s like you go really vertical up and down. I found myself doing zigzags to get down because it was so steep. Jo: Okay, because of the knees. That’s the thing, it’s the downwards on the knees, right? Brad: Yeah, it’s a stretch, but it’s a challenge, but beautiful and just the scent of pine forest everywhere and then you kind of get to the last day and you’re walking alongside the beach and there’s all these lovely places to stop off and eat seafood. And I don’t know what it is about Finisterra but because it’s the supposed end of the world. Again, I’ve just got goosebumps. My hairs are standing on end here. When you get there, it’s just like, oh my God, it’s quite emotional when you get there. Me and my wife just kind of got there and we were like, “Oh my God, this is just something else.” Jo: And your wife is Catholic, right? Brad: She is, yeah. She’s a very, very devout Catholic girl, my wife. Jo: Yeah. So it’s interesting that you both have a different experience of what is spiritual, but if you both find that place so important, that’s really interesting that you feel that way. But winding it back to your original Camino — What were the hardest parts of the journey? —when you didn’t know anything about any of this stuff and presumably hadn’t done a walk that long either because it’s like six weeks, isn’t it? Brad: Yeah, I mean, I did it in 29 days. I was going great guns. But I’ve got experience like running marathons and triathlons and stuff like that. But I will say even though I’ve done marathons and triathlons, nothing can prepare your body for walking day in, day out those lengths of kilometers. That was definitely the hardest part, adjusting to the physical challenge. They say that the Camino is kind of split into three different challenges or three different areas of growth, where the first is the physical and then it’s the mental. The middle part of the Camino Francés is quite tough because there’s a stretch of about 200 kilometers or so between the cities of Burgos and León, and it’s called the Meseta which is like the breadbasket of Spain. So it’s very mind-numbing terrain, there’s long stretches where there’s no cafes or bars. It’s just you and your thoughts walking alone with the hot sun beating down on you. Very, very tough mentally. Physically as well, but mentally, I’d say it’s harder. And then you get to the last part where it’s more the spiritual awakening supposedly. That doesn’t happen for everybody and you shouldn’t ever put pressure on yourself for that to happen, you just get on walking. But there are also the mental challenges, like you alluded to, Jo, is the fanfare around the last 100 kilometers. I’ve had some kind of hate mail about this from people saying that I wrote in my book that they’re a ‘plastic pilgrim’ because they only walked 100 kilometers. But that isn’t what I wrote. I wrote that you do encounter more plastic pilgrims along the 100 kilometer mark, because it’s where you get all clapping, all dancing, school groups, tours, people with a flag in the air being followed, singing, dancing, people that are up until 1:00 in the morning in the hostels, singing and clapping. It’s a real challenge because you’ve walked so far, and you’re so tired, and then these people are just, they’re not walking so far, it’s just a party to them. Fair enough, but I kind of defined a plastic pilgrim as someone who didn’t really respect the ethos of the Camino and fellow pilgrims. And they happen to appear around the 100 kilometer mark. So you have to shift your perspective a little bit and not be so judgmental. And I was definitely guilty of that. Jo: Oh, me too. I was just thinking there, I was judgmental of, at the time, of the people who weren’t carrying their own stuff. Brad: Me too, I’m ashamed to say. Yeah. Jo: Yeah. And now, looking back, I’m like — “Look, there shouldn’t be any shame in however you do the Camino, and it’s your Camino your way.” But at the time, I remember one particular point, and I was like, these older people who I’d seen at the place we were staying that morning, they’d left – I’d left really early with my pack on, all my stuff, and they just whizzed past me later in the day with just tiny day packs on. They were like, “Oh, hi again.” And by then I was like, [sigh]. And that day, I remember thinking, “Yeah, you don’t carry your own stuff.” This judgmental voice in my head. But like you said, one of the challenges is coming up against your own issues, right? Brad: Absolutely, yeah. And I think that’s the point where I was definitely guilty of being a pilgrim snob, no doubt about that. And I look back and I’m a little bit ashamed of myself really. But at the end of the day, everyone’s pilgrimage is different and because you’re doing so much physical exercise, there’s a lot of cortisol coursing through your veins as well. So your stress hormones are at the peak as well. So you have to forgive yourself a little bit for that. Because when you step back you’re like, “Okay, there was no need to think like that.” And you’re only souring your own experience as well, being like that. Jo: Yeah. Again, all of this, it’s meant to be a challenge and there are different levels of the challenge. What about some of the more emotional things? You do at one point talk about crying and you also talked about a rumor of some spiritual ley lines among the Camino paths. So tell us more about that sort of emotional and spiritual side? Brad: Yeah, it’s hard to define it or explain it, really. Because first of all, alluding to those ley lines, again, a bit woo-woo, but I’m reading from the Britannica website here, these are not my words. I’m not this articulate, okay? So, “Ley lines, invisible lines that, according to new age thinkers, join significant landmarks across the world. They believe them to hold sacred powers.” So, this is the theory behind it. I can tell you from experience that they say that believers will say that there are ley lines that run across the whole of the Camino Frances, supposedly in the ground, I guess. I don’t know where they are. And they’re also say that the Milky Way runs directly above it as well. So there’s supposedly this explosion of spiritual energy. And I guess lots of people have spiritual energy blocks, and it helps to really open that up. And I guess when that happens, there’s an explosion of emotions as well. And with lots of things going, there were different challenges mentally, professionally, emotionally in my family at the time that I was going through. So it was like, “Why am I crying?” I don’t know. You don’t know why you’re crying, you just do. It just happens. And there’s also just the great natural beauty that’s all around you. You’re walking through vines, like red wine vines, and mountains on the sky. Everything’s just so beautiful. And you’re meeting people from all over the world, lovely people. And on the pilgrimage, I often think, like, you sometimes encounter the worst version of yourself. You’re also meeting people at their best version of themselves as well, because they’re open, they’re traveling, they’ve released themselves from the shackles of the nine-to-five. And so, just that great mixture, that cocktail of beautiful energy just opens up something, I think. And I guess whether the ley lines are a result of that, or whether they cause that, who knows? Who knows? But I can tell you there’s a special energy on that Camino, and there’s something beautiful going on there. And maybe the ley lines are the culprit. Jo: Yeah, it’s interesting. I like that you said there, “Whether it’s the cause of it or because of it.” Because I also feel that when people of either faith and belief, when you worship in a particular place, this is true anywhere in the world with any religion, it’s not specifically Christian, there are places where people have worshiped over the years. That might be a pagan place. And there is energy that you can sense there if you are open to it. And I agree, I think there’s places like that along the Camino. What’s interesting, of course, is the Cathedral of Santiago de Compostela, which is really like, a thousand years old and full of all these relics, and a very holy place for Catholics. I didn’t get that sense in there. I don’t know. What do you think about the difference between the sort of more humble senses, and the really grand places of worship? Brad: So it’s really interesting you say that, because the word I take from that is energy. And even though I don’t consider myself a Christian, I love to go into churches, because I love the energy in the churches. Yeah, I love the divine, spiritual, purer energy where people go there and they emit and they transmit beautiful energy. And I think that’s why it’s such a good place. And when you go to a place like the cathedral in Santiago, it’s more of a tourist site these days. So maybe the energy’s different and people aren’t really in there to worship, are they? They’re there to take pictures. Jo: I was, to be fair. Brad: And understandably. It’s a stunning cathedral. There’s no doubt about it. It’s beautiful inside and out. And that special energy, I have actually felt more in the city of Santiago, in the squares, there’s the place outside, Praza Obradoiro. That’s my very poor attempt at Gallego there, which is the national language of Galicia, the local dialect. Or, actually it’s a language, to be honest. It’s not a dialect, it’s a language. And in Praza Obradoiro, I love the energy there, because that’s when you see all the pilgrims turn up and finish, and they’re all so jubilant and celebrating. Again, it just gives me goosebumps, just seeing them come in, throw their backpacks to the floor and celebrate. It’s really nice to watch. When you’ve finished your pilgrimage, it’s nice to just go and sit there and have a cold beer and just watch everybody do that. It’s really nice. In your book, I felt that your experience was quite different to mine, because I was solo, and I’m quite a solo person, so I wouldn’t say I hung out with people at all. And I got private accommodation, so I wasn’t in hostels and all that. But your Camino did seem like pretty people-based, pretty chatty, lots of relationships. How did people shape the route and how can others who might want to walk it meet people but also have time alone? Brad: A great place to meet people is always the albergues, the hostels. When I’ve gone on my own, I’ve stayed in albergues, specifically because I wanted to meet people, more than anything. And they are really economical as well. And just a cheeky little hint, there’s this really special albergue along the way in a little village called Granon. And it’s like a donativo, they call it, so you give a donation based upon what you can afford to pay. And everyone gets together. There’s about 40 pilgrims. They get together. They all make a meal together. Then they go to worship together in the church afterwards. The albergue is an annex to the church. So a really beautiful experience. I really recommend that as a place to meet people. But albergues are a great place to meet people along the way. Also in the cafes and bars along the way. That’s when you often encounter the quirky locals. The locals are very quirky, very helpful. Even if you don’t speak Spanish, it doesn’t matter, because they talk with their hands. They’ll still talk at you anyway, they won’t care if you talk Spanish or not. And then you’ll meet your fellow pilgrims as well. And that’s when you say, “How far have you walked today? Where are you going to? How are you feeling? You want some cream for your blisters?” All this kind of stuff. Everyone’s very helpful with each other along the way. So that’s a great place to meet people. And how does people shape my Camino? I guess, again, it falls back to energy, doesn’t it? You meet people that have got this lovely energy and sometimes you’re tired along the way and you might bump into someone and they’ve got a really engaging, uplifting conversation. And I found that when I got tired, I started talking to people that put an extra 10K in my boots or an extra bounce in my boots. And I guess you’d call me an extroverted introvert. And I think that probably describes me, because I love to be with people, but then I’ll just crash and burn and I can’t be with anyone for a while. I need to go and just sit in a corner and be quiet with myself. So I think the pilgrimage, the Camino really affords you to do both, to be honest. Because you can just go and tuck yourself away in a little cafe in a plaza when you’re finished walking, and journal. That’s what I did anyway. And from that point of view, it really does have something for everyone. The solo walker, as I think you prefer to do, Jo. But I know you found it hard to find that time alone the way, that time alone. Jo: Well, sometimes, when it was busy. But I wasn’t chatty, like you are. But you went on your own, you didn’t go with other people? Brad: Yeah, I went alone, all alone. I went all alone. For anybody, that’s a scary thing to do, because you don’t know where you’re gonna sleep the next night. And I didn’t plan anything. I just wanted it to be… Sometimes I just slept where I felt. I slept in a church tower one night, which was something I wouldn’t repeat, to be honest. The pigeons were very busy, that’s all I’ll say. But yeah, there’s definitely something for everybody. And there was one time where I just remember really wanting to walk alone, and there was a French gentleman. This was on my final day, my final walk into Santiago, and I felt really bad because I know he wanted to walk with me. But he didn’t speak English, I didn’t speak French, so it was really difficult and tiring to communicate. And in the end, I had to kind of get the message across that I wanted to walk alone. I felt really bad, but I wanted that last stretch into Santiago to be alone. Jo: Although that last stretch also, so certainly the very end bit, is in the city, so it’s quite weird, isn’t it? You’re like… It’s kind of a strange ending, because you were out there and then you’re in this city and there’s everyone going about their normal lives. Brad: Well, yes, a little bit of an anti-climax. Now, when you say people shaping your way, I just remember an old fella outside, really old man outside a cafe. The Spanish, they love to smoke, and there’s a guy smoking a cigar, and he just raised his cigar to me as I walked past him, and that really, really gave me a lift. I don’t know why, it really did. Jo: That’s nice that you remember that. Well then, let’s talk about the ending, because — You went with a purpose to make, you said, a drastic change, a dramatic change in your life. So what did happen as a result of that first Camino? Brad: Yeah, it’s more like what didn’t happen. To be honest with you, I changed everything. I dropped the business I was running. I just closed it. I could’ve sold it, but I was like, “You know what? I don’t care about the money.” I just didn’t want to do it anymore, so I closed that down. Changed jobs and yeah, I decided that I was gonna move to Spain, so I moved to Spain. My plan was never to write a book. I didn’t know I was a writer at the time. I’ve always written. I’ve always enjoyed writing, but I kept a journal and I was sending emails, because I was like, “I’m gonna get off social media.” I’ve found that social media drains my mental battery, and staying off it charges it. So, sadly as part of what we do, social media’s an integral part, and sometimes it uses you rather than you use it. But massive changes and I ended up writing a book. After I got back, I’d just kind of put together all of my journals and my Dictaphone commentaries and I sent it to friends and family at Christmas, just as a “Yeah, this is just a…” And so many of them got back to me and said, “This is so good. You should do something with this.” And I was like, “Eh, not sure.” But in the end I decided to do so and this little baby was born. And an alternate career was also born as well, so I’ve kind of got two careers that actually complement each other now, which is great. Jo: Which is the writing and your entertainment? Brad: Yeah, yeah, yeah. I’m one of those cringey entertainers, that’s me. Jo: I love that though. It’s so interesting, because to me — The way you talk about the Camino and being a spiritual seeker, and then an idea of you being in some nightclub doing entertainment, how do those two things go together? Brad: It’s really interesting because I don’t really drink alcohol these days. Because I live in Spain now, the odd beer, a cold beer in a lovely cafe, that’s nice. That’s about as much as I’ll drink. And in my industry, I’m always being like, “Push drinks,” you know? And I just have to turn them down. There was one time me and my wife did a gig a couple of weeks ago and the barmaid just came and put two shots in front of us and insisted we drink it. I was like, “Oh, do I have to? Oh.” And it just felt like poison. So it’s strange. They’re very two contrasting lifestyles, but in actual fact, they really complement each other, because I have all day to write and then I go to work in the evening, and it’s great. I’ve found my vocation, which is an alternate vocation, which is writing. And I love doing the entertaining as well. Really enjoy it. And I really feel like it was something I was born to do, you know? I’ve got this kind of bubbly personality. Some people might call it annoying. I don’t know. Jo: I think it’s charming that you do both. Do you sometimes, like if you’re in a club or something, do you sometimes see young men who were like you were, and you can’t really say anything because you’re so old and mature now? Brad: Oh, of course, yeah, of course. I look at them, I’m like, “Yeah, that’s me. That’s the annoying version of myself.” And in some ways it helps me to do the job, because I’m able to permit them, tolerate them in a way as if I was thinking, “Oh, I’m something special. I’m better than that.” At the end of the day, I’m just a PE teacher that ended up being a singer, an entertainer and a writer. And thankfully I make a living out of it, and I’m really grateful for that. I’ve just always been the cheeky chappy, the happy-go-lucky character, and like I say, some people might find that annoying, but that’s me. Jo: It’s also really important, because I know I’m quite a serious person. The point is — You can enjoy doing the Camino. You can be a happy, laughing pilgrim. You don’t have to be like a serious, super spiritual, “Oh, my life is so awful,” kind of… You know, sometimes it all gets a bit too serious. Brad: I think the Camino definitely has that element to it, and pilgrims, obviously they’re there to search, they’re there to seek, they’re there to find answers. So when they meet a character, some of them might meet a character like me and think, “Who is this idiot?” You know, like, “Just leave me alone.” And I don’t blame them for that. I might probably think the same, to be honest. But there should be a bit more of a fun element. Like for example, I’ve been on certain Camino forums and gone on there with the way I am, a bit jokey, and I’ve just been trolled by people. So I’m like, “I’m not going back on here.” And I haven’t since, to be honest with you. I think because I’d said about showering with your clothes. I said it’s a good way to clean your clothes. And then the people are on there saying, “You shouldn’t shower your clothes. You’re wasting water.” And I was like, “Oh, okay. I didn’t know that.” Jo: I would agree that showering with your clothes is the best way. I mean, that’s what you do. You put them under your feet and you wash yourself and then you stamp on them because the soap of the shampoo… I mean, that seems not like wasting water to me. Brad: Yeah, exactly. Well, maybe it uses less… You’d use the same amount of water doing it in a sink, wouldn’t you? So, I don’t know. To me, I’m killing two birds with one stone, you know? I got trolled for that. I got trolled by someone because they said I was putting stickers all along the Camino Portuguese. As if I would… Why would I do that? Jo: Maybe someone else did it on your behalf for your book or something. But you’ve done more Caminos since then? Tell us why, and also why the podcast? Like, you haven’t just let it go and moved on? Brad: Well, I think the podcast just came… The idea came to me when I was walking the Camino Portuguese a few years later. My wife is obsessed with the Camino more than I am. She absolutely loves it. You look around our house, there’s Camino memorabilia everywhere. We’ve got shelves, we’ve got fridge magnets, we’ve got paintings. You name it, they are everywhere. And so why I did just… I love the Camino, I love nature, I love exercise, I love physical challenge, so there’s that element to it. My wife loves it, so I’ve since walked the Camino Portuguese, the Camino Ingles, the Camino Finisterra again. So we’ve been back to the Camino a good few times since. I think there might be another one. Can’t remember off the top of… We were gonna walk the Camino Invierno this year, but in the end, we didn’t do it, but it’s definitely on the list. Jo: On the list. Brad: And we’ve also walked a lovely walk in England, which people don’t know about very much, but the Leeds to Liverpool canal walk, oh my Lord, that is amazing. And it’s so easy as well, because it’s flat all along the way. It’s just a canal. Jo: I love walking. I live near a canal, and it’s really easy because you just keep it on one side of you. Brad: Yeah, yeah. You never get lost. You never get lost. You just follow that body of water from Leeds to Liverpool, stunning walk. And so easy, you just literally hop off the canal, stay in some accommodation, hop straight back on it, it’s a really beautiful walk. And why the podcast? I mean, it just came to me. I was like, okay, one, it would be a good marketing tool for the book, and I just enjoy talking about the Camino and meeting other pilgrims. And in all honesty, I got to the point a few years ago, it was 2022, but I’m about to resurrect it, and I’d been let down by a few guests who said they were gonna come on and they didn’t. And I was thinking, “Is this a sign that I should stop it? Have I exhausted talking about practical elements of the Camino?” And I felt like I had, so I’m gonna be going on resurrecting it with yourself as one of the first interviews. Which is a real honor, so I’m really grateful for that. Jo: It was lovely. And it’s a different conversation to this one. Like, you were interviewing me about my pilgrimage, so it was quite different. And people can find that interview over there, hopefully by the time this goes out. Brad: Yeah, and your book is really interesting as well, because it’s not only a memoir, it’s also kind of like a bit of a self-help guide as well. And there’s also loads of practical tips for planning the Camino and training tips. Jo: Yeah, our books are really different, don’t you think? Brad: Yeah, yeah, yeah. Definitely, yeah. Jo: Your book is full of characters, and that is fantastic. Whereas on mine, because it was solo, I’m the only character pretty much. Brad: Yeah, well, my writing mentor kind of said to me… He’s always said to me, “Character squeeze, character squeeze, character squeeze, character squeeze.” And it was like, when I was thinking, “Wow, there’s so many people, I don’t even need to.” They’re dripping character. No need to squeeze them, you know? So that’s got to go in there. And the podcast is something I’m really excited to resurrect, to be honest with you, because it’s continued to grow in its listenership and its following. Even though I haven’t done anything for three years, I’m still getting messages regularly saying, “Oh, it was so inspirational, your podcast.” I think because for someone who’s never walked the Camino and someone that’s maybe a pilgrim looking to refine their routine, they’ve got a lot from it. And you’re going on there listening to people who have had such a good time on the Camino, and it gives people that haven’t walked it that motivation and that incentive to do it. Jo: Have you done a solo episode on there about the Finisterra? Brad: Mm, I don’t think so. Jo: Well, I’m gonna ask for one. I love the conversations, but the solo episodes I think sometimes with the host talking about that is really cool. Or maybe you could do it with your wife or something. Because I literally, and I only said to you a few weeks ago when we recorded my interview on your show, I said, “Oh, I have no interest in walking another Camino.” Like, as far as I was concerned, it’s done. Now you’ve given me the idea to walk that Finisterra, and I’m like, “Oh, okay.” Because I always had in my mind, ’cause Paulo Coelho went there at the end, probably Shirley did as well, it is what some people do for sort of the end of the world type moment, and I didn’t do it. So that, you’ve put that in my head now. Brad: That’s not a bad idea actually, because I know my wife would be more than happy to talk about it, and she always takes like, a thousand photos. Jo: Yeah, I would love that. That’s the episode I want to listen to, because now I’m thinking about it. But yes, your podcast is fantastic. This is the Books and Travel Podcast. We’ve obviously talked about our books, but what are a few more books you recommend about the Camino or pilgrimage in general? Brad: Well, there’s four Camino books that jump out of my mind. We’ve mentioned two of them already. And the other two, which would be Spanish Steps by Tim Moore. Very similar to mine, quite irreverent, kind of a humorous angle on it. He walked it with a donkey. Jo: What, leading the donkey? Brad: The donkey carried his stuff. He wanted to make it like a medieval or an ancient pilgrimage. And I felt sorry for the donkey, if I’m being honest with you. But maybe donkeys are just like dogs, they like to do that, you know? Be by a human’s side. So, I did take pity on the donkey a lot. But it is very funny, I have to say. And the writing’s brilliant. There’s another book called The Journey In-Between by Keith Foskett, that has some really lovely descriptive writing in there. And talking about walking, Bill Bryson, A Walk in the Woods is very, very funny as well. I don’t know if you’ve heard of that one, but really good book. I read it and I listened to it because I liked it that much. And my favorite book ever, which is similar to the Camino in a way, it’s called The Brazilian Adventure, and it’s by a guy called Peter Fleming, written in the 1930s. So it’s kind of written in Cholmondeley Warner style English, you know? It’s, “Rio de Janeiro is a lot like Reading, but with less people.” You know? And you have to permit the guy politically incorrect language, because it’s the 1930s, you know? Like, you have to just put that aside and say, “Okay, probably he wouldn’t write that if he was writing that in this day and age.” There’s a few things that you would read, you go, “Oh, should be writing that.” But fantastic writing. My God, he’s a vocab gymnast, that guy. Oh my God, the writing is incredible. So The Brazilian Adventure, and he’s trying to find… He’s going to virgin territory into Brazil, to look for a guy that he’s not sure if he exists or not still, in an area if he’s not sure if it exists or not either. So the whole thing is just a calamity the whole time, but the writing is incredible. And the adventure, you know, the beasts, the crocodiles, the snakes. All of this kind of stuff, it’s just amazing. And through the lens of someone who’s very understated, where these days, we have to overstate everything to get attention. But, “Oh, I saw a snake and it tried to kill me. I shot the bugger.” You know, stuff like this. It’s very funny. Jo: Oh, excellent. Oh, well, this has been fun. Where can people find you and everything you do online? Brad: My books are on Amazon. Just search for The Only Way Is West, and you’ll find it on there. It’s got 4.5 out of 5 stars, 1,500-plus reviews. So it’s reviewed quite well. And I’ve written another book, which is Not from Around Here, Memoirs of a Soft Southerner Up North which is about me being a Southerner living up North during the pandemic. And so just, I write funny memoirs basically. And you’ll find them all on Amazon. Jo: And the podcast? Brad: The podcast, you could just go onto wherever you listen to your podcasts and just type in Camino de Santiago pilgrims podcast. Camino de Santiago pilgrims podcast, and you’ll get 87 episodes of lots of Camino tips, tricks, and hacks. Jo: Brilliant. Thanks so much for your time, Brad. That was great. Brad: Thanks for having me. It’s been a pleasure. The post To The End Of The Earth: Walking Spain’s Camino de Santiago With Bradley Chermside appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 5/29/25 | ![]() The Geography of Belonging: Finding Home With Catriona Turner | What does home mean when you are always moving on? What does belonging mean when your address changes every few years? And how do we reconcile our evolving identities with the places we’ve left behind? Catriona Turner talks about her travels from Scotland to France, to Congo and Uganda, and back home again over 14 years, and how she has redefined what she calls home. For more episodes on home, check out my solo episode on Sanctuary, Retreat, Belonging: The Importance of Home in Difficult Times; and for more on Third Culture Kids, check out the interview on Djibouti with Rachel Pieh Jones. You can also find more about my thoughts on home in my memoir, Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways. Catriona Turner is the Scottish author of Nest, A Memoir of Home on the Move. Life in Kampala, Uganda – discovering an unexpectedly cosmopolitan city with thriving coffee and food scenes Experiencing the Republic of Congo – navigating life in Pointe-Noire, a Francophone oil city with strong French influences The challenges of living in transition – the struggle between temporary mindset and embracing the present moment Unpacking the loaded terms ‘expat’ and ‘immigrant’ — privilege, cultural integration, and identity The evolution of “home” – from a fixed geographical location to a multidimensional concept that travels with you How children experience third culture living Repatriation challenges – seeing your own culture through new eyes after years abroad Unexpected appreciations – discovering the beauty of Scotland through foreigners’ perspectives Book recommendations for understanding global living, going home, and repatriation You can find Catriona at CatrionaTurner.com and her book, Nest, on Amazon. Transcript of the interview: Jo: Hello Travelers. I am Jo Frances (J.F.) Penn, and today I’m here with Catriona Turner. Hi Katrina.Catriona: Hi. So happy to be here.Jo: It’s great to have you on the show. Catriona is the Scottish author of Nest, A Memoir of Home on the Move, which we are talking about today. Tell us a bit about why you left Scotland 14 plus years ago and some of the places that you’ve lived. Catriona: Yeah. Coming up for 16 years ago that we left in 2009 and that was because of my husband’s job. So we had met a couple years before and it was always kinda on the cards that his company might ask him to be globally mobile. So when the opportunity came up, we did, I had been teaching for 10 years and I was happy to kind of take a career break to move to Southern France for three years, because who wouldn’t? Jo: Yeah, for sure. Catriona: — on the company Dollar and off we went. We got married about the same time and 14 years later, we came back having, by then moved to Uganda and back to France and the Republic of Congo and Denmark, and then back to France. One more time in Paris before we came back, yeah. Coming up for two years ago now we’re back in Aberdeen, in the northeast of Scotland, which was where we left from. Jo: And with two kids. Catriona: Two kids that joined us along the way. Jo: Well, it’s interesting and I wanted to talk to you ’cause although we lived in different places, I left England in 2000 and returned in 2011. So I was away 11 years and no children so I understand the sort of being away longer, but let’s go back. ’cause I mean, depending on who’s listening, but the South of France, I mean obviously there’s the language, but I feel like — Congo and Uganda were probably a much bigger culture shock. So tell us about those countries. I mean, most people never have visited. What did you love about them and what was amazing? Catriona: Well, I mean, they’re two really different countries, so, Uganda in particular. So that was my first experience of like being out of Europe, living somewhere completely different. But really the quality of life there was incredible. In the end, we were only there for a year, or I was only there for a year, my husband was there a bit longer, so we didn’t fully take advantage of it but Kampala is this incredibly cosmopolitan city actually. It’s relatively very developed, great coffee scene, great food scene. There are people living there from all over the world because it’s like a real hub for the region. Kampala, well the time we were there, I mean, still relatively stable country compared to some of the countries around about it. So a lot of NGOs have a big base in that part of the world. , the World Bank, there’s like big organizations and big companies that are based in Kampala, so it’s a really lively city, relatively developed. We ate so well. I got really hooked on Ugandan coffee. I know you love coffee. Like East African people know East African coffee. They know Kenyan. They maybe know Rwandan/Ethiopian coffee of course. But Ugandan coffee is what I’m always searching for. Now it’s not exported as much. But yeah, I stopped breastfeeding at that time and got back into coffee in a big way. And the travel, of living, in Uganda, we were in the city but having gone from somebody who thought that safari would be something I would do, once in a lifetime, you know, something you would do when you retire to then living somewhere, you could go and do it on a weekend. And we did it on several weekends. It was just a little mini break, well a big mini break ’cause it was five hours of driving across, Jo: but it’s easier than me visiting you in Aberdeen from down here in Bath. Catriona: Well, yeah. Oh, definitely, But it was a shorter drive than that. And yeah, we had amazing Safari weekends well, that, Jo: I mean, that can, sounds pretty, pretty idyllic in Uganda, but obviously the Congo is more known for civil war and, not being a safe, stable country. How was it living in the Congo? Catriona: We were living in the Republic of Congo. So not the DRC, not the Democratic Republic of Congo, which is where there’s serious problems. Republic of Congo or what people often call Congo-Brazzaville is much more stable, for good or ill, I won’t get into the politics of the country, but it’s stable. And not as interesting, I would say to live in as Uganda where you can have easy travel. The tourism in Congo not as developed. We had a good life there, like in many ways, and people, I think a lot of people imagine living somewhere like that as being very confined to sort of compound living and my husband previously had worked in Nigeria on rotation, and that had been his experience, just kind of getting driven in and out of a compound to go to work as opposed to in Congo where we lived in an apartment complex owned by the company, but the town was really quiet. We could walk around, we could go to the beach, we could walk to the shops and restaurants and very French feeling to me, and I would tell I had a lot of French friends living there, and yeah, there’s a few English speaking people living there, but because the country is so largely French speaking, you really have to be able to speak French to live and work there. So most of my friends are French, and I would say to them, oh, it feels so French here. And they would say, no, it’s not, it’s Africa. But relatively, the French influence is still very strong. So we had French supermarkets, french restaurants, French patisseries. Jo: It’s an ex-French colony, right? Catriona: Yes. Jo: And look, I mean — Colonialism is a difficult topic, but I always feel like people just assume that it’s always a British colony, whereas of course, Sub-Saharan Africa, there’s French, there’s Portuguese, there’s German influence down there as well, wasn’t there? Catriona: Yeah. Yeah. We went to Namibia Jo: Very German. Catriona: Yeah. Yeah. I think probably most people wouldn’t realize how how vast of an area is considered francophone. Africa is so many countries that are still, where the main language or the official language is French, where the currency is still linked to the Franc. Still kind of linked to French economics. And it’s the franc that is the currency across a lot of African countries still, which is fascinating. Jo: And so, I mean obviously you had young kids as well, so — What were the challenges of living in these countries at that time for you? Catriona: The challenges of living in countries like that? Like, I’m moving all the time. I think that’s more the challenge. You know, we were well looked after and we were living in stable places on the whole Uganda that I had some personal challenges because at the time there was, in 2014, there was a big anti-gay anti homosexuality bill that was going through parliament. There was an anti pornography law that was going through Parliament that caused a lot of problems with, it became known as the Miniskirt Law because women were being targeted for dressing in a certain way. And so, there was instability, at least in the values and the misaligned values, I guess is how I would describe it when I was living there. And I was only there for a year, so I didn’t really have to think too deeply about it because I knew in the back of my mind, well, we’ll be leaving. And so I don’t have to think too deeply about this. You know, I have a baby and a toddler and I’ll just get on with things. Yeah. But in Congo is much more, it just stable from that point of view. But, the challenges for me were more that — It’s that challenge of feeling like you don’t have to engage too much because it’s temporary, but then you’re never really living your life in the moment because you’re thinking, ‘oh, I can leave.’ My next place, my next move will be something more. You know, I’ll do it right next time. So, that was the turning point that came for me eventually, was to realize that that was how I was living, that being in transition all the time. I still had to find a sense of living my life in the moment and not letting that temporary nature of it hold me back from doing things. Jo: It’s really interesting in the book, ’cause you used the word expat — short for expatriate — which I always find interesting. And we’ve talked on this show before about third culture [See Djibouti interview with Rachel Pieh Jones] and briefly when I, with my mom and brother lived in Malawi, also Sub-Saharan Africa back in the eighties, we would you say we were expats, but then when I lived in New Zealand for like seven years, and Australia for five years, I never used the word expat. And I was wondering what do these words kind of mean for you and like — When do we use the word expat or when do we use the term third culture compared to immigrant? These words are so difficult and expat in particular has some real connotations. Catriona: Oh, yeah, yeah. It’s heavy with connotation, that word. And to begin with, when I started writing and I was blogging and writing about this idea of living in transition and, I really completely avoided the word expat because I was writing about living in different countries and travel, and I thought that that was a serious thing that I was doing and that the connotations of expat of privilege and comfort and perhaps living in a bubble, I thought, well, I’m doing things differently. That’s not me. And as I wrote though about the particular experience of having the privilege and the challenges, I realized that there wasn’t really another word. That kind of encapsulated all that. And I started to embrace it because that way I was finding the people who could read what I was writing and connect with them. And increasingly now, I just use it as carefully as I can. I was a serial expat, and that’s the word, the phrase I would use for myself, my own experience, because I was never settling in one place. And in contrast to people who have to make a life for themselves in a new country, they have to integrate in some way, or they have to negotiate the terms of the host culture, the expectations that they have of what integration looks like, or, I couldn’t do that really, not in the same way I could experience a new culture in a new country, but I couldn’t really integrate. And so that in itself is a luxury of not having to negotiate that cultural negotiation. But it’s also a challenge because you don’t necessarily feel that you are finding your place in a new country. So that’s why the term expat resonates for me, for one of a better one, let’s say. And I think, it’s an ongoing conversation that, that people are having in the third culture space. Because, because of the connotations, because of , the racial overtones as well, you know, because some people, Jo: Is it mainly used for white people? Catriona: That’s definitely a perception that people have, and my experience is that it’s used. Well, I mean, it’s a technical term. It’s on paper. It’s a contractual thing, Jo: and as in you are not, you don’t have a right to live here. You are just here for this job or whatever. Yes. Temporary. You don’t really, I mean, you obviously have the rights that as according to you by that, and your husband’s contract was protecting your situation, but as soon as that was over, you were gone. Catriona: Right. And you’re not going through an immigration process. And if you went to that country’s government and said, actually, I want to immigrate here, then everything would change. Jo: oh, okay. That’s really interesting. ’cause I went to Australia and New Zealand on a visa and then, and then applied for citizenship in New Zealand and Australia. I was on a working visa. So it’s like that in itself. As you say, even a legal definition is interesting. Catriona: Yes. Yes. And, I think it’s really important to challenge these terms and question them. I think it’s really important for white people to call themselves immigrants when they’re immigrants, and I know lots of people from the global south who call themselves expats because they’re expats, and, you know, are claiming that term. Jo: I think that’s so important. And, well, my husband is a New Zealander, he’s an immigrant here in the UK. And my sister-in-law’s Canadian. She’s an immigrant, and my other sister-in-law is Nigerian. She’s an immigrant. So I agree. The words, words can be used for different people, but I think it’s interesting to talk about them, as you said, you used to avoid these words because they were difficult. I like talking about those. But let’s come to the word home since we’re talking about difficult words. Your book is Nest, A memoir of Home on the Move and you talk a lot in the book about what the hell is home anyway. And it was funny ’cause you said your husband will use the word home when returning to a hotel room like that you’ve never even been to. And I’m exactly the same, which I thought was quite funny, whereas you were uncomfortable with that. How did your idea of home shift over time? Catriona: I talked about how, when we first met, he would say, yeah, on holiday, shall we go home? meaning a hotel room. And I thought that was so strange. Home was like two places, the place where I grew up, and then the place where I had moved to and was living. It was a physical thing, a geographical thing. I had left my hometown and moved to Aberdeen for university and then chosen that as my home, like that had really become part of my identity that I had done that. And that was a place where I belonged and I felt it kind of belonged to me. And then so when we moved away for, as I thought at the time, three years, and I would say to people, oh, we’ll be going back home. You know, we’ll go home and, and that’s still a place that’s important to me and I’ll still belong there. And people would say to me, oh, you know what, no, give it five years. You change. You can’t go back. You can never go back. People would actually say that because talking about this idea of how the experience changes you, and actually I was so terrified of the idea that I would no longer have that identity of that place being home for me. That was one of the reasons why I really found it hard to, sort of fully embrace being in a particular place. I sort of held places a bit of a distance because I had this idea of home, but then I realized that I was living this temporary life. I was kind of always waiting for, waiting to the go to the next place or waiting to return. The kind of arrival fallacy of, you know, when we get there, that’ll be my life properly. If you’re doing that, as it turns out for two years here, three years there, and a year somewhere else, eventually it becomes a decade and that that is your life. I realized I had to feel at home anywhere. So I was kinda gradually learning that home could be with people, home could be many places, and home does feel like many places now but even more importantly, a sense of home inside me that I could take anywhere by reconnecting with things that were, in my core, things that were important to me, one of those turned out to be writing, so that I was coming kind of home to myself in a way. Now I’m back home, but when we moved to Paris in 2021, having lived in France twice before and having lived in Congo as well and living that sort of francophone lifestyle, returning to, even though I’d never lived in Paris before moving, there also felt like a homecoming because of the frenchness. So that home can be multitudes and it can be something we carry with us as well and I think, I hope that’s something that’s universal in my memoir because I do think, I actually think that almost all memoir, not biography, but memoir — The core of our memoir story is coming home to who you really are. Jo: Sometimes multiple times. Catriona; Yes. Well, definitely. I mean, having, having kind of gone through that one on a kind of large global scale, if you like, and then written that story, I realized that I can go back to other times in my life and and sort of see that I’ve told that, told myself that story before. Jo: And I wonder if what we mean is — when we use the term home — is comfort. Comfort or being comfortable. And so when we feel at home in ourselves, it’s now because we are comfortable in ourselves. And that before we felt somehow discombobulated in some way. And so that can happen in different places. Like where I am now, I was born in Somerset, in England, and I never ever thought I would return to Somerset. Bath is not where I was born, but you know, it’s quite a big county. But being in Bath where I am and I’d gone to school in Bristol and having traveled a lot myself, I also was like, this is kind of weird to be doing this. And yet it wasn’t home until the pandemic and then because we had to be here and I had to walk around and around and around, and then I was like, oh, maybe this is home. [Check out my solo episode: Sanctuary, Retreat, Belonging: The Importance of Home in Difficult Times] Catriona: Yes, there’s an element to which Denmark is really home for me as well because of the pandemic, we were there. We were there when and when it started and it really grounded, like literally grounded us. It was the only time we had, like in 2020 was the only year we ever spent like within the borders of one country from start to finish. We did a big road trip. Denmark was very relaxed during the pandemic and we did actually do a big road trip of the country that summer. Jo: That was gorgeous, a gorgeous summer. Catriona: Yeah, it was, it was such a summer. Last year I went back to Denmark for a visit and I was really overwhelmed actually, by the feeling of being back home. The place in particular where we had lived, but also in Copenhagen, which we’d visited a lot, and I have friends now, writer friends, and yeah, it also felt like going home and so I just say I’m going home all the time. A couple of weeks ago, I went back to the place where I grew up on the other side of Scotland for a visit, and that was home. And then I said, oh, we’ll go home now and home to Aberdeen. So, I mean, I was saying that to myself 30 years ago when I went to university. I had two homes and now yeah, I could be saying, I’m going home. And I did, in fact a couple of weeks ago, say that I, I heard myself say it to my kids. We were staying in a rental flat and I said, oh, should we go home? Jo: And you meant that and, well this is interesting because again — Having been a child in Africa, and your kids obviously grown up all over the place, do you feel that they have a very different view? Than you, or do you feel like perhaps you’ve moved towards them, what attitudes they’ve naturally grown up with, which is this moving around kind of sense, and that you’ve learnt to be that way as an adult, whereas maybe they’ve just grown up that way. Catriona: Yeah, it’s interesting. My older son just turned 14, so, they’re obviously in, still in transition. They’re becoming different versions of themselves all the time. And they really asked to come home. To come home. To come back here, which had never been home for them. We had always kind of imagined that we would come back for secondary school here. Jo: That’s why my mum came back too, so I could go to secondary school. Catriona: Yeah, I mean, I obviously grew up in the same town all my life and, and I, I wanted to give them an experience of that consistency. So they could decide for themselves, how that would be. But even a couple of years before we came back, they were saying, oh, when will we get to live in Scotland? And one of the reasons that they were able to say that I think is ’cause we had bought a house here while we were away, because before that they weren’t quite sure. Oh, okay, if when they were little they would say they were French ’cause they spoke French, or then they would might, they might say they were English ’cause they also spoke English. English. Jo: They’re so lucky. Do they know how lucky they are? Catriona: I feel that, I feel we tell ’em all the time. So they, yeah. They know it up here. I dunno if they know it in here. But they definitely know it. Jo: They might later on in their lives. I mean, they’re too young to really realize it. Well, let’s talk about you actually coming back to Aberdeen then — the challenge of repatriation. I saw on your Instagram you put some quotes, you said before that somebody said “you can never go back.” How is repatriation now you’re back, because of course Aberdeen is a very different city than you left and you are a different person too? Catriona: Yeah. I think it’s more the bigger changes in me than the place. Having kind of stepped away from the big changes, having stepped away from my own culture and then seeing it, coming out of the water as it were. There’s this metaphor, the story of the two little fish swimming along two young fish and then an older fish comes along and, and swims past and says, ‘Hey, kids, how’s the water,’ then swims away? And then the one fish says to the other, ‘what’s water?’ Because, yeah, that’s a good analogy for our culture. We don’t see it really until we’re either step away from it or we’re forced to. And so I’ve spent a long time kind of uncovering my Britishness and my Scottishness, the things that I always thought were normal, just normal default things. And then you move away and you discover that they’re just British and Scottish quirks. And then what you realize is you can kind of pick and choose from the things that you just were automatically doing and becoming. You can let go of things and you can take on different things and different influences from different cultures. You mentioned Third Culture earlier, which we didn’t really get into, but the idea of not being tied to one place. That’s a cultural part of me now as well. It’s the idea once you’ve moved abroad and lived abroad, you realize you can do anything actually. And then you get addicted to the idea of doing new things and adventure. There definitely was a time for about two years we were preparing to return. And I was all for it. I was really looking forward to being in one place for a while and not having to pack again, but then I was also thinking, well, you know, if they just offered us one more just for a couple of years, maybe we could do another adventure. So I think now I have much more of the mindset of I can kind of try anything, do anything. And I think sometimes that will make me stand out a little bit here, but that’s, that’s okay because the thing about midlife as well as you know, is that’s a coming home as well and realizing a different, a different way that all the decades of like fitting in with other people’s expectations of yourself, you don’t need to do that anymore. Jo: Be left behind. I mean it’s interesting, you mentioned there seeing your own culture from the outside. I also feel having been away 11 years. Yes, there’s things wrong with the UK and with England and with Scotland and there are always problems in every single country. But when I hear people moaning so much all the time about everything that’s wrong, I mean, that is a national pastime. Obviously moaning about stuff, but, I’m like, seriously — Until you live somewhere else, you don’t necessarily appreciate all the amazing things about your country. So what are the things that you are now like, oh yeah, this is great. This is so Scottish, or this is so British. Catriona: Yeah, it’s funny because, yeah, I had that this morning. Exactly. I got a Tesco delivery and the first thing was complaining about the weather and, and you were like — Jo: but look, I got a delivery! Catriona: Yes, exactly. And then, you know, what, what are you up to today? I said, oh, I got some work to do. Oh dear. I’m thinking, no, I love working. What are you talking about? What fascinated me living abroad and meeting people who had been to Scotland. Well, first of all, when you say you’re from Scotland, everyone knows what that means. It’s a brilliant thing to be able to say around the world that you’re Scottish. Everyone loves it. Everyone loves that. But so many people who I met who’d lived here. Like 99.9% of them loved living here, especially in Aberdeen, which surprised me to begin with. There were the few that just were like, no, I couldn’t cope with the weather which is fair enough. But everyone else absolutely loved it. And the reasons were the countryside. And Aberdeen is this very livable city. It has universities and has a lot of industry, but it’s a kind of small city as well. It’s very livable and you can get out to the Cairngorms within an hour. And realizing that people from other parts of the world don’t see that kind of rolling hills and green countryside, they don’t see the history and the culture. Yes. I was speaking to a Canadian friend the other day who absolutely loves the theater that we have and how accessible it is, and she said, it’s so cheap. And I thought, I don’t think it’s cheap, but like compared to a small town in Canada or a similar size of town in Canada, we have big theater companies that tour here. We have lots of local theater as well, so yeah, I appreciate all that. Where I live, I can walk pretty much everywhere I want to go, and I love that. Jo: I love the architecture! Catriona: Yeah. The architecture and the history of that. Aberdeen’s, the granite city. It’s all built of granite. So people talk about it being gray, but it’s not. It’s sparkles, it’s silver, and when the sun shines, which it does relatively actually quite a lot here. So I’m really enjoying all of that. I’ll tell you one little thing that most British people would not appreciate is the Royal Mail and the postal system. Yes. Which I suppose might not be what it used to be, but it’s still much more reliable, much more accessible than almost anywhere else. Well, anywhere else I’ve lived. And they put it through your door in this country. Like you would never realize it until you left. That is an absolute luxury. Nowhere else I’ve lived. Do you have a letter box in your front door and the postie comes and puts your mail right into your home? You don’t even have to step out your door. Jo: And now you’re saying that I’m remembering going to the post office with a box and everything when we were in Malawi? So that, yeah, so you had to go somewhere else. Catriona: But even in France and Denmark, the mailbox was at the end of the drive or the bottom of the building. You still had to kind of go get, collect it, get it. Jo: That’s probably true in a lot of America as well. I, I guess. I think so, but it’s interesting. Well, I think we could talk about this all day, but I did want to ask you, since this is the books and travel show. Apart from your own book Nest — What are a few books that you recommend either about home or expat life or third culture? Catriona: Well you said third culture, so I better reference Third Culture Kids, where the term came from. I think it’s Ruth Van Reken and David Pollock, who really described in detail the experience of this idea of children, particularly children growing up away from their home culture, not fully part of their host culture, therefore, part of a third culture, so that’s a really useful, it’s almost like a manual for helping kids grow up with that. Another memoir that I really love, by my friend Dina Honour, It’s a Lot to Unpack. She was a New Yorker who followed her English husband to move first to London and then across Europe, and she writes really, really insightfully about giving up identity as particularly for her as a New Yorker and as an independent woman to follow her husband’s career, and the implications of that. If you want some fiction, there’s this book, The Guilty Can’t Say Goodbye, which is a thriller, kind of domestic thriller by Mariam Navaid Ottimofiore who is a Pakistani German Italian writer and expat, very third culture. She’s from Pakistan. Her husband is German Italian, so she has at least one of those citizenships as well. Currently lives in Portugal, and so that’s a novel set in an around an international school in Portugal with women from very diverse backgrounds coming together and uncovering the secrets in their past. So if you like to read about, even if you like to learn about lifestyle through fiction, that’s a really good one as well. One more really useful book, um, particular about repatriation is called The Art of Coming Home by Craig Storti. Fantastic. I read that before we moved back and I found it really useful Jo: ’cause people just assume, oh, it’s gonna be fine when you’re just going back. But there’s so many challenges. I also felt, and it’s funny actually, I was just thinking as you were talking there, I think when we left London to move to Bath, that was actually quite a culture shock in itself. Having lived in London for a number of years and then moving basically more to the sticks that actually I was about six months of struggling and wanting to go back. And actually that was probably a form of repatriation in a way, into a different kind of life. You know what I mean? Maybe you got that when you moved, like from Kampala back to somewhere that wasn’t so cosmopolitan. Catriona: Yeah. Jo: It can happen. Right? Catriona: I, I mean, I think we’re all going through that. Well, most of us go through that at some point, and I actually wrote an essay recently about the culture shock I had when I first moved from one side of Scotland to the other. And the differences I was so aware of. Jo: You are writing another book, aren’t you? Catriona: Yeah. I’m very slowly working on a repatriation memoir, so it’s kind of in real times as it happens. I’m writing pieces about that, that hopefully will become, well, not hopefully, I’ll make it happen. Jo: It will will happen. But in the meantime, people can get your book Nest: A Memoir of Home on the Move. There it is. Where can people find the book and you and everything you do online? Catriona: My website is CatrionaTurner.com and on Instagram, I’m CatrionaTurnerBooks. And if you want to get a taster of the story of Nest, I actually did a TEDx talk back in November, and that’s available on YouTube. It’s called Find Your Main Character Energy. It’s about language and identity, but it kind of ended up being a bit of a the book in a nutshell. Jo: Brilliant. Well, thanks so much for your time, Catriona. That was great. Catriona: Well, thank you. Thank you so much for having me. It’s an honour. The post The Geography of Belonging: Finding Home With Catriona Turner appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 5/15/25 | ![]() Ancient Mysteries and Modern Travels. Egypt With Luke Richardson | Why does Egypt continue to fascinate curious travelers? What hidden chambers might lie beneath the pyramids of Giza? How does the duality of Egyptian mythology influence thriller writing? Join thriller authors J.F. Penn and Luke Richardson for a conversation that weaves together archaeological intrigue, travel insights, and the creative process behind crafting compelling adventures in one of history’s most enigmatic settings. Luke Richardson is the bestselling author of the Eden Black Archaeological Thrillers and the International Detective Thriller Series. Why Egypt continues to capture the imagination: Ancient myths, tombs, and timeless sites Modern Cairo and Garbage City The Oasis of Siwa The Pyramids of Giza, and recent archaeological finds about what might be underneath Travel tips for modern Egypt Recommended books You can find Luke at LukeRichardsonAuthor.com and his books on Amazon. You can also find his trip notes and pictures at LukeRichardsonAuthor.com/egypt If you enjoy thrillers inspired by and set in Egypt, check out The Giza Protocol by Luke Richardson and Ark of Blood by J.F. Penn. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello Travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with Luke Richardson. Hi Luke. Luke: Hello. Jo: I’m so excited to talk to you. Just for the listeners, Luke is the bestselling author of the Eden Black Archaeological Thrillers and the International Detective Thriller Series, and today we are talking about Egypt, which inspires locations in several of our books, Luke’s thriller, The Giza Protocol, and also my Ark of Blood. We share an enthusiasm for action adventure thrillers. Obviously, we both write them and this is a topic we like to geek out on. What is it about Egypt for you? When did this fascination start and why did you want to go? Luke: There’s so much about Egypt as a country, isn’t there, that just, it’s so evocative of the stories that we write, you know, there’s so much mysticism and so much magic there and, and it conjures up images from Hercule Poirot on the Nile solving murders to the glamor of Cleopatra, to the ambition of Rameses. And we are not the first writers to be captivated by this. This has happened from Shakespeare all the way forward through the romantic movements, people have been captivated by the magic of Egypt. But there’s also that mystery to it there. There’s things that people don’t know about Egypt. What were the pyramids for? How were they built? Of course, people say they’re tombs for the Pharaohs, but it’s far more interesting, I think, to consider some of the other theories about maps and power plants and really imaginative, fun stuff that makes our stories tick. Jo: Yeah. And it’s funny ’cause I was thinking about this in terms of why did I become obsessed with it? And you and I both have read a lot of the same books, you mentioned there that so many writers have done Egypt. And then of course I’m a little bit older than you, but Indiana Jones obviously and yet we still want to go and see it ourselves, I guess. And I remember when I was little, we went to Bristol Museum and there was a mummy there and we actually went back quite recently and it was a pretty crap mummy, to be honest. It was pretty bad. But as an 8-year-old, it made me think, what the hell? Who are these people? How is there a dead body here? Do you remember being interested in that macabre side and the Book of the Dead and hieroglyphics? Luke: Yeah, certainly. I think when I was maybe 12 or 14, The Mummy film, the first one, I think it, maybe it’s 1998 or 99 or something like this came out, and the whole thing about the mummification process, cutting the tongue out and pulling the brain out through the nose and all this grim stuff that just the kids just go wild for that. You’ve got a very sort of sick sense of humor, haven’t you, when you are of that age, and I remember that being fascinating as well. For sure. Jo: Yeah, and I had these hieroglyphic like activity books where I would try and draw the hieroglyphics and I, I really, I really did think I was gonna be like an archeologist, but then of course I went myself in the, I guess, more than a decade ago now. Thriller author Luke Richardson in Luxor, Egypt Tell us about your modern day trip. Luke: Yeah, so we went in 2000 and I have to remember now, 2003 in January, 2003, and I’d written the first draft of the book, I did it a bit backwards on this. I had written the book and I wanted to go to check if I got it right, and then it was with my editor at the time or my first group of readers. And then I took it back and then made all the changes about, no, it actually takes this length of time to walk from here to here or do this thing or that thing and, and sort of jiggled things around after going on the trip. But I knew for me it was really important. I was writing this book. I wanted it to be right. I wanted it to feel right. And for me, making that trip and I was fortunate enough to have the resources and have the time to be able to do that and incorporate that into my writing. Jo: Was it 2003, did you mean 2013? Luke: I meant 2023. Sorry, I’m getting completely confused. It was like two, three years ago! Jo: I was gonna say, how old were you?! Luke: It was 2 or 3 years ago, yeah. Jo: This is interesting because I went in, it must have been 2005, and one of the interesting things that we’re both obviously interested in is the pyramids. The Pyramids of Giza and when I went, there was still a really big distance between Cairo and the pyramids, but I imagine when you went, it was actually really close. Thriller author JFPenn in front of the pyramids of Giza, 2004 So tell us about that specific trip. Luke: Yeah, it’s, it’s Cairo, just sprawled. It’s an incredibly vast city that’s so noisy and polluted, and busy. I love places like that too, because it’s fun and it’s vibrant and there’s great markets and mosques and monasteries and temples. It’s a real sort of fusion of this African, Asian, with the European elements in there as well. It’s a really interesting city. And that’s featured in the book as well. Actually, I based part of it in this place called Manshiyat Nasser, which is the Garbage City they call it. And it’s become a little bit of an alternative tourist attraction. It’s on the hill or one of the hills in, in Cairo. And on the top of the hill there’s a monastery carved out of the rock. And you go inside and it’s this giant cave that seats about 600 people in this auditorium. And then you walk down the hill and you walk through the borough of the city where the people sort out the rubbish, they recycle Cairo’s rubbish. And on the ground floor of all these buildings, you’ve got people there sorting the the plastic forks and spoons into different trays and milk. Bottles from other bottles and glass for things to other things. And people coming in with donkeys and trucks laid them with this rubbish. And the thing that I loved about that is you walk through this place, and this is modern Egypt, right? This is the way life is in lots of places around the world. You walk through this place and there are people living this sort of simple life, doing the job that they do, but yet there are still hair salons and nail bars and tea shops and restaurants and all the stuff that we have in our towns is there too, just in a different way, you know? And I absolutely love that. It makes you think about your own existence. It helps you reflect on, I think, on some of the things that we hold important in our lives. Jo: And well, and in fact, even thinking about the ancient Egypt that’s inspired our modern thrillers as well, is that they have the same thing, you know, hair salons, and the like. I remember being fascinated by the little Egyptian glass jars that still you can find in the museums, and they were full of perfumes and all that kind of thing. That was just fascinating to me. And I was just thinking also, what’s different between our two trips almost 20 years apart. The other thing is when I went, I visited the Old Museum of Antiquities and it was crazy. I remember going in there and what was weird is it was crammed full. I mean, talk about the terrible mummies at Bristol Museum. This was mummies, mummies everywhere, like literally just hanging out and then everything had these tiny little handwritten notes on. It was a very strange experience. What kind of experience did you have with the museums? ’cause I think that has changed. Luke: Yes, it has. It is very different now. It’s this beautiful marble and chrome building. Really expansive, very sort of modern. It’s, it’s clearly had had a lot of investment in it. And you see that in the mummies and you can walk around and see them. They’re all arranged in their sort of family groups through the various eras of Egyptian history. But you’re right, it’s still, you look at it and you, you think that is a person. And I feel in our society, Europeans perhaps. Death is quite detached from us, isn’t it? It’s not something we see and experience in a visceral sense. We know about it. We know that it happens and we know people who have gone through it to put it in that sense, but we don’t often see them and actually seeing that person there and these are long dead people, you know, seeing that person there is is quite moving, isn’t it? Jo: And I guess the other thing we should talk about cliche, because this is the problem with a place like Egypt, I often find where like Venice is the same, right? People have this idea in their head and then it really might not be like that. Tell us about visiting like the pyramids. Everyone in their head has the pyramids. Tell us about that and the sphinx. What was that experience like? Luke: Yeah, it’s interesting, isn’t it, to think about that because you do have that sort of idea of what they would be like. And I think the thing that resonated with me was just the vastness of not just the pyramids themselves, but the plateau on which they are created. It’s absolutely, it, it, it’s, it’s massive. You think about it, you know, the size of something like Stonehenge or the Vatican. These things that we’ve seen, which are tiny in comparison to these giant blocks of human created stone that are some distance apart, and then the desert just sprawls out of sight on all directions. And that was one thing that resonated with me, or I remember from it, but I also quite like how you can get up close to them. You can stand next to that block and even that first level of block is out of my arms reach. And I like that you can be very tactile with that as a monument. Whereas in some places, in some monuments, you’re kept at a distance, aren’t you? Away from them. Jo: Well, that’s interesting ’cause I also have a picture standing on that first level— Luke: Oh, you wouldn’t get away with that now. Jo: Oh, really? Interesting. And of course you can’t go inside. I mean, I wanted to talk about this — as just in the last few days as we are recording this, there have been these new findings of potentially a vast complex of underground chambers and shafts extending nearly two kilometers. This 3D radar thing that they’re showing could revolutionize the understanding of ancient Egyptian engineering. Tell us a bit more about how you’ve woven that into your thriller and your thoughts on what the hell is going on with all that? Luke: Yeah, I know, and there’s always you, you use the word conspiracy theory there, which is an interesting one, isn’t it? And there’s always people that say, it’s this, it’s that, you know? There’d always be this back and forth between it. But ultimately, I love the fact, and I say this to people all the time, I get quite a lot of comments saying this isn’t true. We know it’s not true. And it might not be true. Okay? But my point is. Isn’t it fun to think that the conspiracies might be true? Isn’t it more fun to be open a little bit and go, there’s a possibility that this is true and this exists. And I really enjoy exploring that possibilities both in my writing and in the stuff I read and the conversations I have and those sorts of things as well. So yes, that’s my first thing. It would be fun to consider that it isn’t true. Now, here’s an interesting story. Have you heard of a guy called Edgar Casey? I don’t think so. He was a clairvoyant. He’s American. Never went to Egypt. He was a clairvoyant in, I want to say sort of the 1920s, but I might be wrong. And he used to go into a meditative state and predict stuff, and he predicted stuff like the war and the Wall Street crash and stuff like this. And he also predicted in one of these things he predicted that beneath the pyramids of Egypt was this massive library that contained all of the lost scripts from Atlantis or the Alexandria Library, and I just thought, that’s amazing, isn’t it? Now. Of course, it might not be true. He might have just made it up, but he said some things which did become true, and that’s one of the things I’ve played with on this story, the idea that that could be there and no one exactly knows, because most often digs and archeology on that site is not allowed to take place. Jo: And then of course you could say, well, they don’t let it happen because there is something there. You mentioned modern Cairo and how it’s not at all like how people would have ancient Egypt in their head. I mean, like you said, well, for a start it’s Muslim and in thinking interestingly about Egyptian gods. The mythology that is so rich and in The Valley of the Kings, the stories that are painted there, and the Book of the Dead and all that kind of thing. How did Egyptian mythology and the ancient religion come through for you? Luke: I play a lot with this idea in my story in quite a lot of my stories, actually, not just specifically this one, with that idea of duality that the Egyptians loved, you know, as above, so below. The ground representing the stars, the heaven representing the Earth, and mirroring each other. You know, the monuments that set up to supposedly mirror the constellations and the sphinx supposed to look at the constellation of Leo during the point at which it was there and the Nile that reflects the Milky Way and all of these different things that they talk about, the mirror image between the skies and the earth. I like that. And I think that’s particularly important or relevant in when we talk about ancient Egypt because you think about how clear the skies must have been. We have so many electric lights now, and cars and all these things that street lights and whatever that turn our skies, that bleach them, this orange that we see all the time. But in those days, it must have been so crisp that the night sky, you’d have seen so much that it would’ve been hard not to have been enchanted by what you saw and what you saw after dark. And that’s something I’ve really lent on heavily in the book. Jo: And then I guess a lot of the monuments do have these figures of gods. I was thinking then of Abu Simbel, which I went to visit in the desert towards like what would’ve been Nubia back then and just how, again, the size of it to stand there right by the Pharaoh’s feet. And of course that’s, although that was moved for the Lake Nasser, it still is orientated towards the sun, so the rays of the sun will hit the statue of the God at the back. Thriller author J.F.Penn at Abu Simbel, Egypt What are the other places that stick in your mind from your trip? Luke: We visited Luxor as well on that trip, but we started off taking a trip out to Siwa, which is an Oasis right out in the desert. It’s about 50 miles from Libya, in fact, and it makes its way onto a lot of countries Do not visit list, perhaps including ours. But I didn’t check. I make a habit of not checking because I feel like if I do know, I’ll be worried about going. I generally find, by the way, that places that are on do not visit lists are the best places to visit at the most. Interesting. Jo: That is not travel advice, everyone! Luke: Yes. Certainly not travel advice. So we visited Siwa, which is this Oasis in the middle of the Sahara, it’s an eight hour drive in on one road and an eight hour drive back on the same road. There’s only one place to go on along this road, and it’s just a fantastic mystical place. Thriller author Luke Richardson, Siwa, Egypt The Templars are said to have visited there. Alexander the Great is said to have made it that far. If you were traveling across the Sahara during any point before air travel, you’d have stopped there because it was the only place within three or 400 miles to get water and to have a meal. Because of that, it’s just a really fascinating mystical place. And I remember on one of the days, we hired a local guide and he drove us out to the start of the desert, and what I didn’t realize is that the oasis itself is probably a hundred feet lower than the surface of the desert, hence why it’s got the water. So we climbed up, we reached this giant wall of sand, literally like the end of the earth. It looked like it just absolutely vast ahead of us. And we scrambled up this wall of a wall of sand and sat on the edge to watch the sunset over the desert there, and I just sat there thinking about the enormity of it all. This body of sand stretches from where we are right the way over to Morocco at one side, right the way down to Sub-Saharan Africa at the other side, and thinking about how that has remained unchanged quite a long time, and how our lifespans don’t even compare to this thing that I’m witnessing now. It’s very powerful. Jo: Yeah. Well I think this is another sort of my obsessions as well, this Memento Mori — remember, you will die — and making the most of that time. And of course that sunrise, sunset over an oasis, the ancient Egyptians would’ve seen that too. So I think that that is lovely. And it’s interesting what we discover that changes our perspective. But I guess water is a really big deal. Obviously you mentioned there the desert, but also the oasis, the Nile is hugely important in Egypt, the dam and Lake Nasser and the coast. You went up to Alexandria I think as well. Talk a bit about how some of the other aspects of water played a part in your trip. Luke: Most of the people in Egypt, I think like 95% live within 50 miles of the the Nile because it’s the only part that’s green and and lush. And there’s obviously a couple of oases dotted around through the desert, but water really is the most powerful thing for them. And you can see it, it switches from night to day as you travel up the up the Nile Delta and then out into the desert. It just dries up instantly and it becomes this desert that stretches forever. And that’s an important thing to both the modern Egypt and I think the ancient ones as well, and that’s something that’s changed, I think. I don’t know exactly how much, but I know that when the dam was built in the 1950s or sixties, the Nile has become a lot smaller than what it was prior to that period, and that’s affected, obviously the way I know it used to actually run past the pyramids a lot closer to Giza, whereas now it’s about five or six miles away near the center of Cairo. Jo: The other thing that’s weird of course, is that, I dunno why we think this, but I think it’s because our maps have Egypt, and you think, oh logically the river must go south, but it doesn’t. Luke: Yeah, I think it’s one of the only major rivers that runs south to north, isn’t it? It’s quite unusual. I mean, there would be no logical reason why it would have to run the way of our maps. How convenient! Jo: But it’s interesting ’cause where you went, you went to Alexandria, right? Luke: MYeah, we started there. Jo: Which I haven’t been to, but of course that’s more like a delta with lots of little tributaries and all of that kind of stuff. But how was that? ’cause of course, again, Alexandria, you mentioned the library earlier, has a mythological status in people’s minds. What was Alexandria like? Luke: It wasn’t our favorite. It was noisy. It was busy. It was just an industrial sort of city that you’d expect. And there isn’t much left of the old things. The library obviously isn’t there. The Alexandria Lighthouse isn’t there. One of the famous wonders of the world that isn’t there? So after a couple of days of being in Alexandria, we moved down to get out of the city, but it’s a real snapshot of proper modern Egypt I feel. Jo: I did a story called The Dark Queen, which is based on the sunken city of Thonis Herakleion, which isn’t far off the coast. Luke: Oh, wow. Jo: I mean, that’s another thing, like a lot of this is underwater or under sand or buried or drowned, and I think that’s what’s so fascinating with that. But just coming back on modern Egypt. Because let’s just say this is the Books and Travel show. We hope people are going to go travel places. So people might have in their minds. You’ve mentioned noisy several times. Luke: Yeah. It is noisy. Jo: Yeah, it is noisy. It is very, very full of people. Obviously Cairo. I remember coming in the road was just jam packed. What are your tips for surviving a trip to modern Egypt? Luke: It really depends on who you are and what your travel experience is. We are quite, my wife and I are quite experienced travelers and we were happy to wander around on our own and ward off people who offered us things. And you get a bit of people shouting, buy this, take this, have this, and that’s fine. You just wave and get quite used to it. But if you are not, if that’s something that would affect you or you’ve got mobility issues or whatever, get a guide, get someone to drive you, that’s absolutely fine. And there are people that will do that. You can book through a tour operator or even you could go to a hotel and ask them to book it for you. There are loads of people that will help you see things. We tend not to do that because we find it’s a lens through which you see the thing, isn’t it? If you’ve got a guide, and whilst that’s nice. And that’s great. ’cause they will tell you a lot, they rush you past some things and they make you look at others and they stop you here and take that photo and whatever. So we tend to try and see it under our own steam, if at all possible. Jo: I went with a small group tour, so at the time I was a solo traveler. As a solo woman in the Middle East, being with trips, I feel safer that way. Yeah. I think as you said, it depends who you are, how experienced you are, but there are lots of trips to Egypt. What I would say is the small group tour is much better than the big coaches. I mean, you can turn up at the Valley of the Kings and there’s like massive coach parks stretching off into the distance. I agree with you though. What I don’t like is people telling me what I should be interested in. You know what I mean? Luke: Yeah, I think things have become a lot easier now with like ride hailing apps. Like they have Uber in Egypt. It’s a fantastic thing. Anywhere you wanna go, you call a taxi, you know it’s gonna be trusted. It’s all tracked by satellite and whatever. So perhaps if I’d have gone in when you were talking, what, two early two thousands? It would’ve been a lot more crazy trying to sort public transport and things like this. Jo: Yeah. And we went on the train actually, from Cairo to Luxor. It was the overnight train and I will say like, I found the food to be wonderful. What did you think of the food and any tips for people there? Luke: Yeah, I loved it. Breakfast was the best meal of the day. Even in the most basic hotel, they just bring trays and trays of sort of flatbreads and fava bean tahini type things, and fresh vegetables. And coffee. And coffee and, yeah. Oh, the coffee is Jo: very thick for everyone listening. Yes, it, the coffee is very thick Luke: and sweet. If you react badly to sugar, don’t have that, you know? Jo: Come back to Luxor because II remember that very well because it was one of the hottest days I’ve ever been in. And it was, frankly, it was pretty awful. But it is that the Temple of Karnak, isn’t it? It was in Indiana Jones, the really famous columns. Amazing place. But for me it was just the hottest, hottest, hottest, hottest day. How was that for you? Luke: We actually did a really good thing by going in January. Jo: Brilliant. Luke: Firstly, because England’s weather is rubbish in January. For anyone who’s never been to England in January don’t come. It’s a waste of time. In fact, in Luxor, we stayed in this really cool hostel and there were these Australian travelers there, a bit younger than us, mid twenties and they just had a month in Europe and they were really disappointed by how rainy and cold it was. I said, well, didn’t you look that up? Like a Google search would’ve told you that. Anyway, we went in January, so it was nice sort of 20 degrees Celsius. We knew we were gonna be out and about looking at things, spending days not in the shade. For that reason, chose that time. Jo: That is very sensible. I think I must have been there in June, June-ish and it was like 42 degrees Celsius. But Luxor was amazing and just beautiful. And then I was on a felucca going up the Nile, which was also cool. Did you go on any boats? Luke: No, unfortunately not. We didn’t get to do that at this time. We ran out of time when we got to Luxor, we didn’t make it to Abu Simbel either, which I’d have loved to have done, but that’s for another trip. Jo: Oh yeah, that was very memorable. You actually have to fly there, even from Luxor because it’s so far into the desert. Okay. Anything else you want to tell us about Egypt or about any aspects of the book? Luke: Well, one more bit of travel advice, which someone gave me a while ago, which I thought was genius, and I give this to everyone dependent wherever they’re going, but particularly in places like Egypt, and it sounds obvious when you think about it. Just don’t take anything valuable with you. If you’ve got nice jewelry or an expensive watch or anything like this. Leave it in your hotel room. And that’s not because, I’m not saying that because someone’s going to take it from you, but when you are in a place like this, it’s so, you feel much more comfortable knowing that you haven’t got something expensive on you. You can be much more free with yourself and with conversations. Not always having to watch over your bag or your stuff if you just don’t have it. It makes a lot of sense when you think about it in that way. Jo: My first thought is, what about my phone, which is also my camera? Luke: Yes, that’s true. That’s, that’s perhaps your one thing, your one thing that you have to take. Jo: I mean, Egypt is obviously like many countries. It’s certainly got a very rich group of people, but it’s also got poor people. People will try and sell you stuff, particularly at the tourist locations. And as British people, you feel like you don’t wanna be rude. Luke: You lose that quite quickly. I found within a couple of days. You just get on with it. Jo: Absolutely. So this is the Books and Travel show. Can you recommend a few books about Egypt or set in Egypt? Luke: Yes, yes. I’ve got three. The first one is not a book, but it’s an essay and it’s by a guy called Rolf Potts, who I’m sure you’ve heard of. Jo: Mm-hmm. Vagabonding. Famous. Luke: Yes. It’s not in that one, but it’s in his book. Marco Polo Didn’t Go There, and he talks about his first trip to Egypt and he talks about his anxiety not to see the pyramids because he fears that he’ll be disappointed by seeing something that he’s got so much expectation about. And in fact, in the essay, which is probably a few thousand words, he doesn’t even mention the pyramids, but he talks about how vibrant and interesting Cairo is. He talks about how he’s meeting really interesting characters there and staying in this sort of funky backpacker hostel and all of these sorts of things. And I like that. I like the idea that Egypt is so much more than the pyramids. The second one is by a guy called Stel Pavlou, and it’s called Decipher, and that’s an archaeological thriller, similar to ours, which plays on a good amount of the same sort of mysticism to mine about hidden vaults underneath the Giza Plateau. But they discover, and I love this, they discover a Hadron Collider underneath the Giza Plateau that’s been there for tens of thousands of years. It’s a great idea. Jo: Okay. I haven’t read that. I’m always shocked when there are things I haven’t read that are thrillers about Egypt! Luke: Yeah. There you go. And the third one is a guy that I think you know Sean McLachlan. Jo: Yes. And, Luke: and his Masked Man of Cairo Books. The Case of the Purloined Pyramid is the first one. It’s set in Cairo in 1919, I think this first one. The rest of the series goes into the 1920s, but it’s a particularly interesting time because it’s talking about Cairo evolving as opposed to what Cairo is like now and how Egypt’s fight for Independence showed on the streets and all of these things. It’s a really interesting book. Jo: Slso just tell us a bit more about The Giza Protocol and also your thriller series. Luke: Yes. So my thriller series follows the exploits of my heroine, uh, Eden Black, and she goes all around the world finding ancient relics, dodging ancient curses, and finding out about secret societies, these sorts of things. If you love Indiana Jones or Clive Cussler, Tomb Raider, or any books or films in that sort of world, I think you’ll absolutely love them. The first one is The Ark Files and The Giza Protocol, which we’re talking about today, is number two, the second one in the series. Jo: Fantastic. And yes, if you enjoy my ARKANE thrillers with Morgan Sierra and Ark of Blood is my third, but they can all be read as standalone. I think that’s the same for yours, isn’t it? Luke: Yeah, yeah, Jo: You can pretty much start anywhere and you’ll get the hang of it, but yes, both with the female main characters, which we love. Where can people find you and your books online? Luke: Fantastic. So I talk about the adventure stories behind my stories on my podcast, The Adventure Story Podcast. You find that wherever podcasts are the Adventure Story podcast, and as I say, if archeological adventures are your thing, search online for the Giza Protocol by me, Luke Richton. Jo: Brilliant. Thanks so much for your time, Luke. That was great. Luke: Thank you. The post Ancient Mysteries and Modern Travels. Egypt With Luke Richardson appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 5/8/25 | ![]() Walking Amongst The Dead: Graveyards, Cemeteries, And Ossuaries With J.F. Penn | “The meaning of life is that it stops.” — Franz Kafka I’ve always felt most grateful to be alive when I walk among the dead. That might sound strange, but bear with me! Step through a lychgate into a church yard or descend a narrow stone stair into a catacomb or ossuary, and the pace and the noise of the world falls away. In these quiet spaces—graveyards beside ancient churches, sprawling Victorian cemeteries, underground chambers decorated with bones—I consider the shortness of life, memento mori, remember you will die, and it puts life into perspective. I can hear my own heartbeat more clearly, and the stories begin to rise. Paris catacombs, Photo licensed from Canva In this episode, I’ll take you with me to a handful of places that have shaped some of my stories and travel memoir. If you’ve read my ARKANE thrillers or the Brooke & Daniel series, you’ll recognise many of the names. But whether you’re here for research, reverence, or simple curiosity, I hope you’ll find something to spark your imagination and, perhaps, shift your perspective on these places that so many stay away from. What’s the difference between a graveyard, a cemetery, and an ossuary? Why am I so fascinated with these places? Sedlec Ossuary, Kutná Hora, Czech Republic Paris Catacombs, France Kensal Green Cemetery, London, England Crossbones Graveyard, Southwark, London, England St Louis Cemetery No. 1, New Orleans, USA Capuchin Catacombs, Palermo, Sicily Archbishop’s cadaver tomb, Canterbury Cathedral, England Mass grave in the Dohány Street Synagogue, Budapest, Hungary Graveyard of St Mary and All Saints, Boxley, Kent First, some definitions. What’s the difference between a graveyard, a cemetery, and an ossuary? A graveyard is usually a burial ground attached to a church, whereas a cemetery is a stand-alone burial area, for example, found near a crematorium, or a public burial ground. An ossuary, from the Latin ‘ossos’ for bone, is a container or chamber specifically to hold bones. It can be as small as a box, or as large as a chapel. In Europe, there are many ossuaries where the bones are used as decoration. Why am I so fascinated with these places? The Latin phrase memento mori—remember, you will die—has never felt morbid to me. It makes me grateful that I am alive on this day, to have the life I do, to love the people I love, and to be able to write and create. Life is indeed short, and I want to make the most of it. I find myself drawn to these places not out of some macabre fascination but because they strip away illusion. In a world obsessed with preserving youth and denying mortality, there is something profoundly honest about these places that honour death. The dates etched in stone. The names that no one remembers anymore, even this of the wealthy who thought they were important in life. The weathered gravestones, some leaning or sunken so deep they’re practically swallowed by the ground. All these make visible the brief span of our lives. This clarity energises me. I’m 50 as I write this, definitely middle-aged. If I am lucky to have decades left, how will I spend them? What stories will I tell? What experiences will I have? What challenges will I face? This relationship with death might be unusual in the modern west, but for most generations, and for many cultures even right now, it is a completely normal part of life. As Franz Kafka said, “The meaning of life is that it stops.” Perhaps it is our modern sensibility to avoid discussing death that is the more unusual. I hope to change that a little today, so come with me on a journey of the dead. Sedlec Ossuary, Kutná Hora, Czech Republic It was a freezing winters day back in 2015 when we took the train from Prague to visit the Sedlec Ossuary, also known as the Bone Church. I’d already spent hours researching it online and used it in my ARKANE thriller, Crypt of Bone, so I knew what to expect, but even so, it really is a macabre place. You enter a low arch and enter the ossuary, where candlelight glints off thousands of bones arranged in different ways. Alternating skulls and femurs are strung like garlands between larger decorated sections, a chandelier of pelvises, skulls and long bones hangs down, a coat of arms made from smaller bones and vertebrae is nailed to one wall. Sedlec Ossuary, Kutna Hora. Photo by JFPenn It’s really quite a small place with human skeletal remains everywhere you look, estimated to be between 40,000 to 70,000 people. Back in the 13th century, a monk brought back earth from the Holy Land and sprinkled it on the land here, which made people want to be buried at Sedlec. With the Black Death and many wars, thousands more were interred, and later the Gothic church was built and the bones moved to accommodate more dead. In 1870, a local woodcarver, František Rint, organised the bones, arranging them into the artistic designs you can see today. He even signed his name in bone on one wall, with a flourish of femurs and rib bones. I’m not sure if they’re his own bones, but that would be fitting. You can get to Sedlec on a day trip from Prague, either independently by train, or there are day trips through GetYourGuide.com and other providers. Paris Catacombs, France Paris above ground is the city of light and romance; Paris below is the empire of death. You need a ticket and when you enter in your time slot, you walk down a spiral staircase into cool darkness, and then along tunnels lit with bulbs before finally entering the catacombs themselves, probably the most famous of ossuaries with over six million dead in the network of underground tunnels and ancient quarries. In the late 18th century, Paris faced a public health crisis as overflowing cemeteries threatened to contaminate the water supply. The city authorities decided to move the remains beneath the city, resulting in today’s catacombs. There are markers in each section to denote which cemetery the remains came from, and at the first entrance, there is a warning on the stone: ‘Arrête! C’est ici l’empire de la mort.’ (“Stop! This is the empire of death.) Bone arch in the Paris Catacombs, Photo by JFPenn The bones are mostly neatly stacked and arranged, creating what feels like an infinite corridor of skulls and femurs, all illuminated by dim, flickering lights. There are some sections made into designs of shields and even a heart of skulls. You need a ticket to enter The Paris Catacombs, situated near the Metro station of Denfert-Rochereau. There are lots of stairs and it’s quite a walk if you are not used to it. Book well in advance since they have limited time slots at www.catacombes.paris.fr The exit, with its gothic-themed gift shop, pops you out at a different place and I found myself quite disorientated as I emerged into the sun once more. Kensal Green Cemetery, London If you enjoy a peaceful walk around a beautiful park with ornate tombs and memorials, Kensal Green Cemetery in London is definitely worth a visit. You don’t need a ticket and it’s free to access. It was established in 1832, and is one of London’s Magnificent Seven cemeteries. These were conceived in the Victorian era as park-like burial grounds to alleviate overcrowded churchyards and combat health hazards. But it’s a world away from what we might build as a public burial ground today, with beautiful memorials, tombs above ground similar to Père Lachaise in Paris, and statues of angels, broken columns, Egyptian obelisks, and other ‘memento mori’ markers. The Victorians understood that grief needs physical expression, tangible places to visit, stones to touch. When I walked there, I was inspired to use it as a setting in my crime thriller, Delirium. Tomb at Kensal Green cemetery, London, Photo by J.F. Penn There are also many famous historical people buried there from industrial engineer Isambard Kingdom Brunel, to author of The Woman in White, Wilkie Collins, and scientist Charles Babbage, inventor of the Difference Engine, which led to the first computer. You can find out more information at www.kensalgreencemetery.com and you can walk to it easier from Kensal Green train station, which has Overground and Underground lines. Crossbones Graveyard, Southwark, London Crossbones Graveyard in Southwark, London, is quite different from the formal Victorian cemeteries. It’s not even an official burial ground, and there are no graves, but in many ways, it is far more poignant to visit. In the 1990s, during excavations for an extension of an Underground train line, archaeologists found 148 skeletons in an unconsecrated burial ground. These were the outcasts of society, the women known as ‘Winchester Geese,’ medieval sex workers licensed by the Bishop of Winchester, along with their illegitimate children, and other marginalised people. For centuries, it lay largely forgotten. It’s now a memorial site with ribbons and mementos tied to the gates in remembrance of the Outcast Dead. Crossbones graveyard gates, London. Photo by JFPenn It’s compelling because it represents hidden history, the stories of ordinary people, often women, who lived miserable lives only a few blocks from the wealthy in their palaces and cathedrals. It features in the opening of my crime thriller, Deviance, which features some of the modern day outcasts in Southwark, which similar to medieval London has the wealth and power of the Shard, right next to some of the poor and outcast of society. The entrance to the remembrance garden is on Redcross Way, a short walk from London Bridge or Southwark train stations. I recommend you visit the grandeur of Southwark Cathedral first and the ruins of Winchester Palace, before walking a few blocks to Crossbones. https://crossbones.org.uk/ St Louis Cemetery No. 1, New Orleans, USA I visited New Orleans in March 2017 after a train journey from Chicago, and I was in serious book research mode! Back in 2001, I’d been invited to come to the city for Mardi Gras and said I would come another time, that the city would surely still be there — and then in 2005, the floods poured in and the city was transformed. Of course, much of the French Quarter remains and so my experience was not so different, but it was an example of taking a place for granted, of not seizing the day, and when I finally made, I was determined to make the most of the city. St Louis Cemetery No 1, New Orleans. Photo by JFPenn Much of my experience is woven into my ARKANE thriller Valley of Dry Bones, which opens at St Louis No 1, when a storm opens up a previously undiscovered vault under the cemetery. I also weave in the St Louis Bible which is in the St Louis Cathedral on Jackson Square, and the Voodoo Museum, which is a must-visit, as well as the Louisiana bayou. I love the juxtaposition of Catholicism and Voodoo in the city, and the history of the French and the Spanish missions. Founded in 1789, St Louis No. 1 is the oldest surviving cemetery in the city, with its tombs above ground so as to survive the flooding. The tomb of Voodoo Queen Marie Laveau is in there, covered in lipstick X’s and colourful beads left by seekers of luck. A few rows away stands actor Nicolas Cage’s pyramid tomb, empty at the time of writing this. Nic Cage is one of my favourite actors from the 90s action movies I love — Con Air and Face Off are two of the best. “Put the bunny back in the box!” You have to enter on a guided tour, and there are some that focus on the voodoo side, while others have a wider focus. Find out more at cemeterytourneworleans.com You can read more about my experiences through the eyes of my ARKANE agents in Valley of Dry Bones. Capuchin Catacombs, Palermo, Sicily I haven’t been to these catacombs but Morgan and Jake head there in Crypt of Bone seeking the Codas Gigas, otherwise known as the Devil’s Bible. They’re on my list to visit, and they perhaps have more in common with the ancient Egyptians than the skeletal dead under Paris. The catacombs lie beneath a Capuchin monastery in the Sicilian capital of Palermo, and instead of neatly stacked bones arranged in macabre decorations, there are fully clothed mummified bodies arranged along the walls and corridors. Monks in their robes, elegantly dressed aristocrats, military officers in uniform, and entire families displayed together, preserved through mummification. Mummies in the Catacombs of the Capuchins in Palermo, Sicily. Photo licensed from BigStockPhoto From the 17th to 19th centuries thousands of people, wealthy enough to afford the process of mummification, were interred in these catacombs, able to be visited by their families and honoured after death. The website palermocatacombs.com goes into detail on this process: “Bodies were placed in a preparation room called the colatoio, where the internal organs were removed; in their place were added straw or bay leaves, in order to facilitate the process of dehydration. The bodies were placed in a supine position on grids made of terracotta tubes, so their bodily fluids could drain away and their flesh dessicate. The colatoio, the optimal environment for mummification, with drier air and very low humidity, were then shut off for close to a year. After which, the corpses were exposed to the air, washed with vinegar and dressed, often in clothes of their own choosing, before being inserted in the wall niches.” Some of the bodies are embalmed, including that of Rosalia Lombardo, a two-year-old girl who died in 1920, often called the Sleeping Beauty. The catacombs are located just a short drive or bus ride from central Palermo. Be aware that photography is prohibited out of respect for the deceased. You can find out more information at www.palermocatacombs.com Archbishop’s cadaver tomb, Canterbury Cathedral, England While not specifically a grave, I wanted to mention the cadaver tomb at Canterbury Cathedral. I always keep an eye out for these kinds of tombs, as they are so memento mori! Instead of a sculpture of the deceased as they were, full of life as if they were asleep in their finery, these tombs show the person as a cadaver, a clearly dead body. Some are even on two levels, like bunk beds, with the alive-looking human on the top, and the almost naked corpse underneath. Cadaver monument of Henry Chichele, Archbishop of Canterbury (died 1443), Canterbury Cathedral. Photo by JFPenn There is a gorgeous example of a cadaver tomb in Canterbury Cathedral, which I visited at the end of my pilgrimage on The Pilgrims’ Way. It’s for Archbishop Henry Chichele, a 15th-century prelate who founded All Souls College, Oxford, and commissioned the tomb for himself long before he died in 1443, so he could consider his future when he preached. On the top level he wears bright ceremonial robes, with the mitre on his head, his hands clasped in prayer. On the bottom level, he is a corpse in a loin-cloth, hair tonsured, bones showing through his skin. These kinds of tombs appeared in late-medieval Europe as the Black Death and a lot of wars sharpened awareness of mortality. But of course, they were expensive and only for the rich, and Chichele’s is one of the finest. A Latin inscription runs around the base: “I was pauper-born, then to primate raised, now I am cut down and served up for worms.” Memento mori, indeed. You can read more about Canterbury Cathedral in my memoir, Pilgrimage, Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways, and it also features in Tomb of Relics, when a relic from the shrine of Archbishop Thomas Becket, murdered in the cathedral in the 12th century, is stolen, and Morgan Sierra from the ARKANE secret British agency must find it. Mass grave in the Dohány Street Synagogue, Budapest, Hungary I love beautiful architecture and the Great Synagogue of Budapest in Dohány Street is gorgeous with its Moorish-striped brickwork, twin onion domes, and a huge rose window that scatters coloured light across the nave. Jewish mass grave at Dohany Street synagogue, Budapest. Photo by J.F.Penn But as with any Jewish sites in Europe, there is tragedy behind the beauty, and within the grounds of the synagogue is a mass grave. Twenty-four communal graves contain around 2,600 Jews who died of starvation, disease, or Arrow Cross Nazi bullets during 1944-45, when the synagogue marked the edge of the Budapest Ghetto. Jewish law forbids burials beside a house of prayer, but there was no time—or safety—to reach the Kozma Street cemetery. The dead had to be interred where they fell. At the courtyard’s far end stands Imre Varga’s haunting Tree of Life, a stainless-steel weeping willow whose 6,000 leaves each bear the name (or tattoo number) of a murdered Hungarian Jew—a living-metal kaddish against forgetting. Weeping willow tree, Dohany Street synagogue memorial garden, Budapest. Photo by J.F.Penn I wanted to talk about this site in particular because my father-in-law is Jewish and Hungarian and what was left of his family fled the country along with so many more refugees in the 50s. They ended up in New Zealand, where my husband, Jonathan was born, the child of two Jewish families who fled. Our trip in 2012 was the first time Jonathan had ever been. We knew it would be a harrowing trip as Budapest has seen so many atrocities over the years — you can also visit the Shoes on the Danube, in memory of those shot and pushed into the river, and the House of Terror, where so many disappeared. But the synagogue was particularly harrowing because three of the names on the mass grave matched his own, and if we had been there at that time, perhaps we too would have been interred beside them. We visited in 2012 when a right wing extremist party was rising once more marching at night with flaming torches, and demanding lists of Jews be drawn up so they could be identified. I wrote my thriller One Day in Budapest as part of my emotional response to the city and based around a modern right wing party bringing back such violence. The dedication in the front of the book reads, “Dedicated to the memory of those buried in the mass grave of Dohany Street Synagogue, Budapest.” You can find out more at www.greatsynagogue.hu/alap.html Graveyard of St Mary and All Saints, Boxley, Kent To close, I wanted to return to a more peaceful setting, a parish church graveyard similar to many in England, that I walked through on The Pilgrim’s Way. Here’s what I wrote in my memoir, Pilgrimage. “One morning on the Pilgrims’ Way, I walked into Boxley, a village on the outskirts of Maidstone in Kent. The autumn sun was low in the sky and cast a golden light over the gravestones as I arrived at the church of St Mary and All Saints, a place of worship for nearly 800 years. Graves in Boxley churchyard, Kent, England Photo by JFPenn Under the canopy of the ornate lychgate (the roofed gate-way to the churchyard) were benches for the faithful to rest, and on one sat a selection of pumpkins and squash, in shades of yellow, orange and green. A handwritten sign urged, “Please help yourself.” I wandered alone in the graveyard, one of my favourite things to do anywhere in the world. Most of the graves were so weathered that the text could no longer be read, a reminder that our names will also be forgotten one day. Several headstones had sunk deep into the ground, leaning to one side as if they felt the pull of the dark be-neath. Wild cyclamens in shades of violet grew beneath a sycamore tree, late flowers of autumn marking new life from the bones of the buried dead. One boundary wall was straddled by a huge beech tree, which must have started growing over it well before the World War II memorial that lay just on the other side. Our human-made barriers cannot hold nature for long. I sat in the silence of that peaceful churchyard for a while before walking on. You might find a sparse line or two about that church in a guidebook, but it sticks in my mind as a far more special place.” JFPenn in Boxley churchyard, walking The Pilgrims’ Way to Canterbury It might not be somewhere you go out of your way to visit, but many churchyards in England have the same kind of resonance. You can find more details at www.pilgrimswaychurches.org.uk/our-churches/boxley Tips for making the most of your trip if you want to visit any of these places Do your research. Before visiting, read up on the history of each site. Knowing why an ossuary exists or who built a particular crypt, or what you might see at a place, makes the experience far richer. But don’t get obsessed with research. It’s good to have an attitude of serendipity where you keep an eye out and follow your curiosity as you explore. Check opening times and tours. Many of these places have specific visiting hours or guided tours or ticketed entry. You need to book well in advance for some of them. Be respectful. Remember these are human remains or places where people honour the dead. Photography might be allowed (or not) depending on the site, so check the rules and always be discreet. Take it slowly. Walk slowly and allow the atmosphere to work on your senses and your imagination. Often, the hush and the shadows convey as much as the monuments themselves. Put the guidebook away once you’re there, and personally, I hate audio guides or anything that tells me what’s important. I prefer to look around and find what I am drawn to. Ask yourself questions and reflect. Most of us rush through life without considering our inevitable end, and walking amongst those who are already dead, whose names we mostly don’t even know, helps put life in perspective. Memento mori, remember you will die, so what can do you to make the most of your life now? Books about graveyards, cemeteries, ossuaries, and death culture I’ve mentioned many of my novels which feature the places in this article, but here are some more recommendations. Paul Koudounaris takes incredible photos and his books are a treasure trove of fascinating death culture. Try The Empire of Death: A Cultural History of Ossuaries and Charnel Houses. Specifically for cemeteries, I recommend 199 Cemeteries to See Before You Die by Loren Rhoads, who has been on the show talking about cemeteries, graveyards and ossuaries as well. I also enjoyed Death: A Graveside Companion by Joanna Ebenstein, who also runs the wonderful site, MorbidAnatomy.org. I also love From Here to Eternity: Traveling the World to Find the Good Death by Caitlin Doughty. You can find my books I mentioned as J.F. Penn at Amazon or your favourite online bookstore, or at my store, www.JFPennBooks.com. You can also find photos from my research trips on the blog at BooksAndTravel.page and on instagram.com/jfpennauthor. **** I would love to hear from you on this topic, or on anything that you find interesting from this episode or others. You can leave a comment, or email me jo@booksandtravel.page. Let me know about your thoughts on memento mori, any book recommendations, or your favourite graveyard, ossuary or cemetery. I look forward to hearing from you. Happy travels – and I’ll see you next time. The post Walking Amongst The Dead: Graveyards, Cemeteries, And Ossuaries With J.F. Penn appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 5/1/25 | ![]() Thin Places and Tidal Shores: Lindisfarne, Holy Island, With LK Wilde | What makes the tiny island of Lindisfarne a “thin place” where the spiritual and physical worlds seem to meet? How does living in such a close-knit community shape one’s identity? And what secrets lie beyond the tourist paths on this ancient sacred site? LK Wilde and J.F. Penn talk about their love of Lindisfarne.Laura is the award-winning author of historical fiction, romance, and uplifting feel-good fiction. Her novel Silver Darlings is set on the Northumberland Island of Lindisfarne, also known as Holy Island. Where is Lindisfarne and what makes it unique as a tidal island? Holy Island, the rich Celtic Christian heritage and Viking history What it’s like to grow up on a remote island with only 150 residents Lindisfarne as a “thin place” where spiritual experiences feel more accessible Natural wonders: sand dunes, seal colonies, and bird sanctuaries Essential safety tips for crossing the tidal causeway The fishing heritage that inspired Laura’s novel Silver Darlings Local delicacies: fish soup, fresh crab sandwiches and the potent monastic mead You can find Laura at LKWilde.com and her books on Amazon and other stores. Transcript Jo: Hello Travelers. I’m Jo Frances Penn, and today I’m here with LK Wilde. Welcome, Laura. Laura: Hello. Thank you for having me. Jo: It’s great to have you on. So little introduction. Laura is the award-winning author of historical fiction, romance, and uplifting feel-good fiction. Her novel Silver Darlings is set on the Northumberland Island of Lindisfarne, also known as Holy Island, here in England, which we are talking about today. So just to get us started. Where is Lindisfarne? How big is it? What makes it so special? Laura: It’s quite a famous place considering how small it is. It is off the coast of Northumberland, which for those who don’t know, it’s probably about halfway between Newcastle and Edinburgh. It’s really close to the Scottish border, and it’s a tidal island, so you can get across twice a day, there’s a road to drive across and it’s about eight or nine miles round, and there’s a population about 150. So you’ve got a very small village in one tiny corner of the island and then a big nature reserve. But it’s got quite an important historical significance considering when you look on a map, it’s a tiny little pinprick. Jo: It is really small. And so you said the eight or nine miles, just so people know, you can easily walk around that? Laura: You could. There’s not a path all the way around, so you’d have to do a bit of scrambling over rocks and things. But yes, you could definitely walk around it. Jo: As you said, really near the borders. And when I was there, only briefly, which we’ll come back to, but on that one side you are looking towards the coast of England. On the other side, what do you see looking off the other side? Stone cairns on the eastern coast of Lindisfarne Island Photo by JFPenn Laura: You can see the Farne Islands, which are a cluster of islands a bit further down the coast. And then a lot of sea. Jo: Exactly. And that’s the way the Vikings came, right? Laura: Yes. And I think you can still almost get that a bit in the accent. It’s quite unique. The accent on the island is a real mixture of Newcastle and Northeast and Scottish and they have their own words and things. I wonder how much influence from Scandinavian is in there too. Jo: That’s interesting. Do you speak that accent? Laura: No. I had to get a narrator to record the audiobook for me because I’ve tried, and when I went to school there, everyone used to say “Aye” instead of “Yes” when you did the register. And for me, with my very obvious Southern accent, it was so embarrassing. Jo: It’s great that you mention the accent because, for people listening who aren’t English or from the UK, it’s not that far. From where I am in Bath and you are in Cornwall, I mean, this is in our country and you can get there in a five or six hours train journey, I would think, and I was there and I also felt like an outsider with my accent. I didn’t really understand some of what people were saying, which really shocked me. I just wasn’t expecting that. Laura: No, it’s so different. People used to talk about a “muckle bari gaji,” which would mean a very attractive young man, but it’s just a whole set of words I’d never heard of. There’s quite a lot of examples like that. It makes it a very unique place, I think. Jo: I think that’s right. You said you went to school there, you lived there as a child. Tell us a bit about that. What do you remember from that time? Laura: So I moved there when I was 14 and I lived there till I was 18 and I was there with my younger sister and brother. My memories are in two categories, either extremely positive or extremely negative. I think with the passage of time, you tend to forget the boring moments in your life. But living there, there were no boring moments. It was either brilliant or terrible. And the good bits were amazing. The freedom of living somewhere like that. We’d come from a city, so there, we had our door open all the time. People would just come in and out as they wanted to. We could go off in the morning and my mom was fine with us coming back late at night and my brother was seven. So for him especially to have that freedom was really incredible. It’s for a relatively short period in my life. It’s probably the most significant group of years, I would say. Because it’s such a unique experience to live somewhere like that. Not just the remoteness, but everything that comes with island life. Jo: Well let’s get into that. So the freedom you said and the safety of being there, and I guess the natural side of things, but as a teenager, between the ages of 14 and 18, what were some of those negatives? Laura: Well, I think the main negative was when we weren’t on the island. There’s a primary school there and when we first arrived, all the national press came up because my brother was the only pupil in the school, and it was all in the papers that he was saving the island school. But for me and my sister, we would be picked up on a Monday morning outside our house with our suitcases and we’d be taken to a hostel in Berwick-upon-Tweed, the nearest town, and we would be there until the taxi came on Friday afternoon to take us home. So we effectively had to leave home. And it wasn’t like being in a boarding school where you’d have all that support. There were two wardens, but they had their own flats. You didn’t really see them. And it was a building that had been built for 30 to 40 kids. But by the time we were there, there were only five of us. So there were whole sections of this building that were shut off. And actually it was so bad that we were the last kids to be part of that setup. After us, they changed the system so kids would go to a local boarding school where they’d have all that support. Jo: Well, I think, I mean, really what you’re talking about, it sounds like the middle of nowhere. And that’s what’s so interesting because it is, Northumberland really does have a lot of remote areas, but it feels like you said Berwick-on-Tweed, it’s not that far to Edinburgh from there. So you weren’t in the middle of nowhere. But let’s, coming back to the island itself. So you mentioned island life. What does island life mean? Laura: I think it means very different things depending on why you are there. Which group you fall into. So there’s the religious community there and we were there because my dad was a church minister and he was sent there to – there was a church which had had no members anymore, and his job was to turn it into a visitor center. So we fell between these two groups where you had the religious community and then you had the everyday islanders who would do work in hospitality or fishing, or all sorts of other things. So I think within this one, very small community, people are living extremely different experiences. Ruins of Lindisfarne Priory Photo by JFPenn And as a teenager it was, we were removed from some of the politics within the community. The best times were in the holidays when other kids, like grandchildren of islanders would come and stay or holiday makers, and suddenly you’d have friends and you’d have people to hang around with, but it also meant the times that they weren’t there, we were with people of all ages. I think it gave us lots of skills in later life to be able to relate to people, not just our peers. Because we’d be going to these music groups with people in their sixties from all different backgrounds and things like that. So it is a very small community, but lots of different lifestyles within it. Jo: For your book, Silver Darlings, why did you want to revisit the island, and what community aspects did you bring in for that book? Laura: I wanted to revisit it. First of all, I started off with a memoir and writing about my experiences of living there as a teenager, but so much happened to our family. We went there as a what I considered a very strong family unit, and left as a broken family. My parents had separated, and so we all left separately, so I realized I couldn’t do anything with it. It was too personal. But I still wanted to capture that feeling of being a young person on the island. And then I started looking into the fishing heritage because the Celtic Christianity and everything is so famous and so many people go their own pilgrimage to experience that and the history. But there’s this whole period where the entire island was focused on fishing and everyone on the island was part of that community, and it was far more cohesive as a community than I think it probably is or certainly was when I was living there. And I really wanted to experience myself through these characters, what that side of it would’ve been like. And how all these, so I had people I knew in mind, like there was this lovely old fisherman called Eddie who was just a wonderful island character. And I had people like him in mind while I was telling this historical story. But I suppose it was a way as well of me revisiting this place that I loved so much that had been so important to me that I couldn’t tell through my own story, but I could inhabit these fictional characters and tell it through theirs. Jo: Yeah, the personal side of memoir is tough and I understand that. It’s interesting and, obviously we don’t need to get into why your family broke up, but one of the nightmares that I feel as someone who is an urban city girl, I mean, I love being in nature, but I want to know I’m coming back to the city. I like to be able to walk to a bookshop and some restaurants and coffee shops and all that. And when I was on the island just one night, I was like, this is fantastic, but oh my goodness. It’s so small and everyone would know your business and everybody would know everyone. And like you said, the positive is it’s safe and people look out for you, but the negative is really there’s no privacy. There’s no way of being different. A lot of people say island life is quite insular and people want to stop you from being different. And so to be different you have to leave. Is that something you recognize? Laura: Yeah, definitely. That feeling of lack of privacy. And I think because we had such an open house as well, there were people, like even when my parents went away for a week and I was there on my own, people would wander in and out of my house, and you’re never – everybody knows everything that’s going on. And as a teenager, sometimes you want to let loose a bit, but you can’t really because there’ll be someone there watching you. Jo: That’s interesting. Okay, so you mentioned the religious side of the community and the Celtic side. A lot of people won’t know the history, so maybe just — Tell us a bit about the religious history. Laura: So it’s a very famous site of Celtic Christianity. I think it was about 635 AD. King Oswald of Northumberland invited Aidan, St. Aidan now, and some other monks from the Scottish island of Iona to come and set up a monastery on the island. And it became an incredibly important Christian site for spreading Christianity throughout the kingdom of Northumberland. And then after, so Aiden became Bishop of the island, and then after him, St. Cuthbert became the bishop. And I think it was during St. Cuthbert’s time that the Lindisfarne Gospels were written, which are very famous illustrated, incredibly beautiful, unique pieces of artwork. And people came on pilgrimages and St. Cuthbert is still very much celebrated. The church that my dad was turning into visitor center was called St. Cuthbert’s. Looking out the small island where Cuthbert lived Lindisfarne Photo by JFPenn And there’s St. Cuthbert’s Island, you may have seen it, when you are near St. Mary’s church, you go down to the beach and there’s an island off the island. Jo: It’s got a little cross on, I think. Laura: So sometimes people will go there and sit at tide out on that tiny island and just contemplate. So it was a really important site and then the Vikings came and destroyed everything that had been there. And then later, they set up a priory on the island so that you can still see the remains of that. Now you can walk around the ruins of the priory. So it still has that legacy of being extremely important in the spread of Christianity. Jo: And the sacrifice of those monks who were raided, and it was one of the first documented Viking raids, was on the island. Laura: Yeah, it’s pretty interesting history and it’s kind of the first place you would land. You come over and you hit Lindisfarne and you would see what was a rich pilgrimage center and the monks had money and obviously you’re going to go raid it. That’s what you’re going to do. But yes, St. Cuthbert’s, the St Cuthbert’s way, which is part of the pilgrimage walk. Yeah. Fantastic walk from where he started in Melrose in Scotland. And for people who don’t know, his relic, part of his body is still in Durham Cathedral. Part of me thinks it should be on Lindisfarne, but it just wouldn’t cope with the number of visitors, I guess. Jo: No, I think it would be logistically tricky. Laura: I mean, it’s a miracle that they managed to get him and also the gospels out and down to Durham. Because the Vikings, it wasn’t just one raid. They kept coming back. So there was a lot lost – a lot of important historical things and money and property and all sorts. But to have saved St. Cuthbert and the gospels is quite remarkable. St Cuthbert’s Cave Photo by JFPenn Jo: Yeah. And you can go to a cave where supposedly his body rested overnight. And it’s interesting, of course, because we’re not Catholic anymore. This is not a Catholic country. And your dad would not have been Catholic. And the church now on Lindisfarne is not Catholic. And yet that’s where it all came from. I find it quite funny sometimes, this discussion of relics and the body of St. Cuthbert and all of that when it’s like, that’s not quite what the religion is anymore. So how do you think that was dealt with, this sort of Catholic history and the modern? There is a spiritual sense there now, isn’t there? I almost say it’s beyond Christian. It’s spiritual. Laura: I think it is. I think a lot of people coming there now come for a much broader spiritual feeling. And the Catholic side is still, there is a Catholic, a small Catholic church on the island. And there are big services and pilgrimages at Easter, for example, but I think the Catholic side of it is far less dominant. It’s far more about the spirituality and Celtic Christianity almost as a brand is perhaps the wrong word, but I think in recent years, Celtic Christianity and spirituality has really become far more popular outside of its Catholic origins, I think. And there is a feeling you get from – I think you mentioned ‘a thin place’ in Pilgrimage, didn’t you? And that would often be mentioned when I was living there. This is a thin place and we would have people come and stay with us who were extremely rational people who would never go in for anything otherworldly who would have experiences there or feel certain strong feelings that they’d never experienced anywhere else before. And whether it’s partly being cut off twice a day or whether it’s the history, I don’t know what it is, but there is something almost intangible, but you just feel it when you are there. It’s quite special. Jo: So do you have any feelings of that thin place? Are there any experiences that you would look back on as that, or did you get that sense? Laura: I think I got that through the natural beauty of it. So although I was raised in a city, I was always far happier in the countryside and it was when I would go off exploring and I would go on the North Shore and just walk and this long sandy beach and that’s when I would feel that sense of something special. Not when I was in a church or because actually often there were squabbles between the religious communities and there was a human side that wasn’t always that nice, but when I was out in nature and you get these huge, wide skies on the island, and that’s when I would feel it. And it definitely does something to you, I think, especially if you are on your own, and I would go off – I mean, I wasn’t a very typical teenager living on an island. But I would just go off for hours walking on my own or on my bike, and you feel this thin place, I suppose. Jo: And is that God, for you, was it God back then? Is it God now or is it something broader? Laura: I think back then it would’ve been far more straightforward for me than it would’ve been God. I think now, I really don’t know. I don’t really subscribe to organized religion these days, but I still, normally still feel – I still experience that spiritual feeling when I am somewhere beautiful. Or when I’m swimming in the sea, that’s a time I’ll get that kind of feeling that you can’t really name, but you feel surely there’s got to be a creator to have made somewhere so magical. Jo: Yeah. And it’s funny, obviously my book Pilgrimage being about these pilgrimages and yet not being a Christian and yet also a lot of the feelings the same as you. And one of the times I really felt it and I still get goosebumps even right now thinking about it when I crossed over to Lindisfarne, walking over the Sands and it really was one of the most spiritual moments I think, of my life. There was a sound and I didn’t know what it was, and then I realized it was the seals singing and there’s a lot of seals in that channel. And of course it’s a bird sanctuary, so there were so many birds and you’re following. And I had my back to the road. There is a road, but I had my back to the road and I was kind of trying to ignore it. But there, as you know, there are these white poles leading you across the sand to the island, and I just felt this, I think this timelessness of how many other feet have walked this, how many pilgrims, the monks. I mean there’s, well, at least 1800 years of history. But before that, there would’ve always been islanders, people living on that island. And so that was kind of a moment that it really hit me. Tell us a bit more about the nature of the island or any aspects of the nature reserve and all of that. Laura: I think what I love most about it is especially when the causeway’s open, the village will be packed. And the ruined priory will be packed. And there are people everywhere and you either you can walk to the castle and walk along, or you go down a little farm track and there’s nobody. And my favorite place would be to go to the sand dunes and there’s little pools among the sand dunes as well. But when I was on my own, you’ve got these massive expanses of sand dunes and then you climb and you’ve got these huge stretches of beach and you’ve got the seals and you’ve got all the birds. There’s a bird hide that you can go and just spent hours watching. You’ve got the coast all around, and then you’ve got these little pools and the nature reserve and the birds, and in a place where there’s quite a lot of people and chaos packed into one corner, just this wide expansion to walk and see seals, just sunbathing. Or just spend a time sitting on a sand dune and just watching all the birds go around you is really special. And it’s something that never grew old. I think sometimes you can live in a beautiful place and you stop seeing it, but I think there, you never stop seeing it. You are always aware that just down the end of a path, you’re gonna have this open space where you can just breathe and experience a bit of peace, I suppose. Jo: Yeah. And I think Northumberland also is one of the areas of dark sky. You know, the dark sky areas where you can actually see the stars without so much light pollution. When I was walking out that way and on that beach, looking out to sort of Norway, there’s lots of rock cairns. When I went, people had built rocks up in piles. And then as I was walking back I saw a murmuration of, I guess it was one of the swifts or something, and I always think when you see a murmuration, and for people listening, if you don’t know, it’s when all the birds kind of flock in patterns and they make patterns in the air. And when I’ve seen them and I’ve seen them, I saw them at Stonehenge as well. And that was again, in one of those moments of like, that’s incredible. It was like, okay, there’s definitely something, again, that thin place, and you feel just part of nature and it puts life in perspective when you just stop for a moment and you notice that you are part of this, you know, a human in nature. And the morning I got up and I had my coffee in a little flask and watched the seals in the water. And it’s so funny because I was only there for one night and I think about going back a lot and yet I’m kind of worried about going back because it was so perfect. That 24 hours or whatever it was that I was there. Have you been back? Has it changed your mind since? Laura: Yes. I didn’t go back for a very long time. I went, so when did I leave? I left in 2000. I did go back while I was at uni to stay with some friends once, but for a couple of nights, and then I didn’t go back again till 2008 when I had my son as a baby. But literally because so much happened there, it is quite a hard place to go back to. So I went back on the island, had a quick walk round and left again. And then it was last year I finally felt ready to properly go back again and I took – it was just me and my two sons and they were the ages me and my sister were when we moved there. And I took them up there and it was incredibly healing. Going there reminded me of all the things I loved about it. And seeing it through their eyes. So I’ve got a picture of them standing on top of these really tall sand dunes, just with their arms in the air cheering and seeing how much they loved it and hearing them say, “wow, this must have been an amazing place to live.” And it was really – I’m so pleased I did it. I mean, it was a beautiful, sunny day we went, we didn’t – we were meant to stay on the island and then there was a flood where we were staying, so we had to stay on the mainland. And I was quite pleased in a way, because we spent two days there, but we could retreat at the end of the day and I could just process all these things. And on the second day I went and actually saw some people I’d known while I was there and just felt at peace in this place and showed the boys where we used to live and showed them where my brother went to school. So I’m really pleased I did go back. Me and my sister are talking about going back together at some point, but it’s a very long way from Cornwall. Jo: It is. Yeah. Cornwall itself is very big compared to Lindisfarne! It is interesting, isn’t it? Revisiting these places that mean so much. I also feel like the situation I was in, which was I was recovering – it was the end of the pandemic. I was still sick. I was in a lot of pain and it was a real struggle. And so I did feel like, and so often the end of a pilgrimage is, there’s a real letdown because the journey is kind of the point. And yet when I crossed over, it just felt so magic. But let’s give some people some real practical tips because hopefully now everyone’s like, oh my goodness, I really wanna go to Lindisfarne. Let’s talk about the crossing and the practicalities. If people want to drive or they want to walk, what do they need to be aware of? Laura: You have to check the tide times. There are lots of places online that you can check when it’s safe to cross and absolutely do not risk it. As teenagers, one of our sports – word would spread that a car was stuck on the causeway, and we’d go down on our bikes and laugh. You don’t want that happening to you if you go, so be really careful to only cross when the internet or the sign by the side of the road tells you it’s safe to cross. Walker on the sands crossing away from Lindisfarne Photo by JFPenn There is a rescue tower. You can go up halfway if you do get stuck, but that is not for cars. Fun to go up and have a look, but you don’t want your car to be submerged and you’re waiting for the RNLI to come and get you. So make sure to check the tide times. And it’s worth being there, I think over a tide. Because it’s such a different experience. So if the tides work out that you can spend a few hours there with the tide in, that’s definitely worth doing. But be very careful crossing whether on foot or in a car. Jo: Yeah. I didn’t know whether I would be able to walk across, because the other thing is the weather, right? I mean, I was there and it was beautiful. I just had the most perfect crossing with the sun. Talk a bit about the mist and the rain and the weather up there. Laura: Oh, I have a memory. There was a year where I think it was May, and we knew that it was beautiful May weather everywhere else, but it was just misty, and it was misty every single day in May. My birthday’s in May, which is probably why I also remember it so clearly, and it gets really depressing when you go out of your house and everywhere else the sun is shining, but it’s cold. You can only see a couple of meters in front of you. It’s mentally very challenging, I think. Because you feel so cut off from the rest of the world. Jo: And you can’t see the coast. That’s the thing, I think that’s the mist is not just a light mist that disappears. It’s like you can’t actually see the land and that’s when you can get lost. And there are stories obviously, of people trying to walk across and then just ending up missing the poles, that kind of thing. And in fact a lot of people, when I said I was walking across, they said, oh no, don’t do that. It’s too dangerous. Laura: It’s quite – there’s some quick sand isn’t there? Or sinking sand. You have to be careful to stick to the right route. You have to stick to the route, and if it’s nice weather, you can see the route all the way across and you’re like, why is everyone going on about this? But of course, the mist, I think, so what I would say to people is, as you said as well, the tide moves every day. The tide times move every day. If people don’t know that it’s not the same time every single day, and so you really do have to be ready to cross and then come back. Also we should say it’s very small. You have to, if you want to stay, you have to book accommodation way in advance, right? Laura: Yeah. And another thing about crossing actually just to not alarm people, but if you are there and it looks safe to cross. But the tide time says it’s not, just don’t risk it because it comes so quickly. It looks like the road is clear and then it’ll just wash right across. Laura: But for staying there, you really have to book in advance. But for us it worked well staying – we stayed in Spittal, which is just outside Berwick-upon-Tweed. It’s about 10 miles away, the last time I went and actually that worked well. But I think if you can, if you’ve never been before. I think staying on the island is quite a unique experience and well worth doing if you can. Jo: Yeah, definitely. I would say it’s well worth it. And also if you just go across when everyone else does – when I walked off the sand, I only saw a couple of other people walking and I sat down to put my shoes on and then I walked along the road and around the corner and there’s like a coach park with hundreds of people streaming off the coaches, and I’m like there with my backpack and I’m like, whoa. Okay. So it can be quite a very touristy experience or a spiritual experience, I suppose. Laura: So much of that is how you time it, I think. Jo: Yes. When you’re there. Yeah, so I definitely think you have to do research. So what I did with the research was, because I wanted to walk across, I looked at the dates when I could walk across on the tide and book accommodation. And then I worked backwards from there to when I needed to start the pilgrimage. Dawn on Lindisfarne Holy Island Oct 2021 Photo by JFPenn Laura: That is very organized. Jo: But I mean, I think it’s really important. We should also just say something about the food, because I seriously had the best fish soup I’ve ever had in Berwick-upon-Tweed. Seriously. I’ve never had better, I guess some would call it chowder, but tell us about – you’ve mentioned the fishing, I suppose, but the fish is really good, isn’t it? Laura: Yeah. And there’s – well, I’m not sure, it probably depends on the time of year, but there always used to be plenty of places to get a fresh crab sandwich. Jo: Oh yes. I had one of those too. Laura: So that’s definitely worth trying. And there are hotels on the island where you can eat with plenty of fish on offer. And I’m assuming that they use – well, I worked in a hotel when I was there many years ago and they served a lot of lobster. Because lobster and crab are caught off the island. So, yeah, it’s definitely worth trying some of the local cuisine. And of course there’s the mead, the Lindisfarne mead. Jo: Oh. Tell us more about the mead. Laura: I think that comes from – that was a drink the monks had, I think, and it’s made from honey, but it’s very strong. So be careful. But you can sample it in the mead shop. It’s very strong alcohol and very sweet. So it’s not something I’d probably go for now because I don’t really like sweet things, but something I wouldn’t give to my teenage boys because they’d probably knock it back. Jo: Yeah. Tourist mead. Absolutely. But definitely visit the ruins of the priory there and the church. It’s a wonderful time. Well, I think we could talk about this forever, but this is the Books and Travel podcast. What are a few books about Lindisfarne or Northumberland that you recommend? Guest: Well, the first, I know not everyone will be seeing this on video, but I thought I would show, my husband bought this for me, which is the Lindisfarne Gospels. It’s a British Library guide and this is just gorgeous. It’s got beautiful images of the Lindisfarne Gospel, so that’s a really good one. Jo: And just on that, people can see, sometimes they can see the Lindisfarne Gospels at the British Library in London. But it’s all online as well. So if you’re like, oh, I’d like to see more detail, it is online. But that looks like a lovely book. Laura: They are exceptional. It’s definitely worth having a look. And then fiction wise, I’m absolutely obsessed with Ann Cleeves, who does the Vera and Shetland books, but her Vera series is all set in Northumberland. There is one on the island, I think it’s called The Rising Tide , but she manages to capture that open sky beauty of the county whilst also shining a light on what it’s like to live in one of the communities there and because often the seaside towns are quite poor. So I’d recommend any of her Vera series. And then these aren’t strictly books, but if you go on the Islandshire Archives, there’s information there about the fishing history of the island, which is so interesting. And there’s articles by, I think she’s called Katrina Porteous, who’s done this study of fishing and how the whole community was involved. And then my last recommendation would be the British Newspaper Archive where you can search a place going back hundreds of years and get a glimpse into what life was like there. And if you search Holy Island, there are reports of things like weddings where they have unique customs like jumping over a petting stone and they still do these today. Or the fishermen stand with their guns and the bride and groom walk through, and they shoot the guns in the air and that’s all reported. I think if you’re going to visit anywhere probably in the UK and you want a slice of what real life is like, it’s worth going on the British newspaper archive. Just select a random year, like 1953 or something and see what’s happening and have a look. [Note from Jo: I also have two books that feature Lindisfarne: Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways. One of my pilgrimages was the St Cuthbert’s Way which finishes on Lindisfarne Day of the Vikings, an ARKANE Thriller. When a Viking relic at the British Museum becomes the target of a neo-pagan cult, ARKANE agent Morgan Sierra finds herself trapped inside the museum with a group of ruthless extremists. The cult’s leader, a fierce Valkyrie, believes the artifact holds the power of the Viking gods—and she will stop at nothing to claim it. The modern day thriller includes flashbacks to the Viking raid on Lindisfarne, and the Lindisfarne Gospels. It is book 5 of my ARKANE series, but can also be read as a stand-alone book. You can read the ebook for free at JFPenn.com/free. Jo: Tell us a bit about Silver Darlings, if people would like to read that. Laura: Silver Darlings is really about two young people who grow up on the island in the early 1900s, and for separate reasons, they’re both forced to leave the island and they follow the herring trade down the east coast of England to Lowestoft. And they reach the time of the First World War and it’s about whether they can find each other and whether they can find their way back to the island. And it’s really about what does it mean to be home? What does home mean to you? And they both have very different ideas about whether the island is or isn’t home and why. It’s a historical romance, but I love social history and ordinary lives and the herring girls and how women had a bit of independence when it was quite hard to do that. Jo: I was going to finish, but I get obsessed with the idea of home because I also struggle with it. And you’ve talked about how much you love Lindisfarne, but you are now in Cornwall. Where is home for you? Laura: That’s a question I think about all the time, and I think I try and find the answer through my books. So my books are either set on Holy Island, in Norwich, where I was born, or in Cornwall or something. And I think through writing them, I’m trying to figure out where do I actually belong. I don’t really know. I mean, Cornwall’s where I’ve lived the longest now, but I know I’ll never be Cornish because you have to be about five generations in to be Cornish. Norfolk’s where I was born, where a lot of my family are from, but I haven’t lived there for over 20 years. And Holy Island is such a special place to me, but I don’t sound like I’m from there. I wasn’t born there. I almost don’t feel I have the right to call it home. So I suppose, I don’t know. I still haven’t figured out the answer to that. Jo: Nor me, although I’ve decided I am English. So perhaps you’re English too. Laura: Well, except my brother recently did a DNA test and it turns out we’re also quite Welsh, so just in case. Jo: To be fair, I’m also Scottish and Irish, but yeah, there we go. Where can people find you and your books online? Laura: So LKWilde.com. You can find out all about me and then I’m on social media. The usual Facebook, Instagram, TikTok. Just search LK Wilde and I will pop up everywhere. Jo: Brilliant. Well, thanks so much for your time, Laura. That was great. Laura: Thank you for having me. The post Thin Places and Tidal Shores: Lindisfarne, Holy Island, With LK Wilde appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 4/17/25 | ![]() Lochs And Legends. Scotland With Andy The Highlander | Experience the rugged beauty, ancient legends, and captivating history of Scotland with Andy the Highlander. From standing stones and whirlpools to myths and famous battles, Andy shares stories that bring the Scottish landscape alive. Discover why Scotland is more than tartans and bagpipes in this fascinating discussion about culture, heritage, and a passion for storytelling. In the introduction, I talk about my personal connection to Scotland (I am a quarter Scottish!), and how it inspired my monster horror, Catacomb, as well as featuring in Day of the Vikings, and the anatomical connection to Desecration. Andy the Highlander is the bestselling author of Lochs and Legends, A Scotland Man’s Guide to the Heart of Scotland, as well as an actor and tour guide. Show notes: Andy’s journey to becoming “Andy the Highlander” and his experiences on the TV series Outlander The allure of ancient standing stones, including Clava Cairns and Callanish Historical intrigue from Culloden to the Body Snatchers of Edinburgh Eerie encounters in places like Culross and Scotland’s many haunted sites Rugged islands, beautiful lochs, and the distinct regional flavors of Scottish whisky The rivalry of Scottish clans and football teams, and the “Outlander Effect” on tourism Recommendations for books, films, and practical tips for traveling in the Highlands You can find Andy at Highlander Tours and Lochs and Legends in all the usual places, or here on Amazon. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello everyone. I am thriller author J.F. Penn, and this is the Books and Travel Podcast. And today I’m here with Andy the Highlander, the bestselling author of Lochs and Legends, A Scotland Man’s Guide to the Heart of Scotland, as well as an actor and tour guide. So welcome to the show, Andy. Andy: Thank you for having me. Oh, it’s great to have you here. So first up — Why are you called Andy the Highlander? Andy: I became Andy the Highlander back in 2015. I was fortunate enough to film on the hit US TV drama Outlander. I was one of Jamie Fraser’s men back in 2015. I filmed about 35 days on the show, and I then did a video in my garden demonstrating how to wear the plaid, the Filmore—the Great Kilt—and it got 5.3 million views in the first 30 days. So that’s really where this journey of Andy the Highlander began. At the time I started investing in the swords, 18th-century clothing. My wife Anna thought I had lost the plot, and we had no idea this was going to become a business, but also very much who I am. I’m now more Andy the Highlander than I am old Andy. I don’t even know who he is anymore, to be honest. So yeah, it’s been some journey. Jo: Yeah, ’cause you have a tour guide company as well, right? That’s right. I run Highlander Tours, and I’m one of the busiest tour guides in the country, taking people from all over the world around Scotland. So that’s a very incredible job. Scotland is my office, and you know what they say: if you find something you love, then you’ll never work another day in your life. Jo: That is true. So I guess on this show, I’d like to do things that maybe people don’t know, that are a bit less obvious, and you definitely have some of those in this book. So many people listening—maybe a lot of Americans, for example—have family connection to Scotland, even if that’s generations ago and maybe they haven’t even visited, but — What are some of the historic places that resonate the most for you that are not necessarily obvious? Well, one of the more well-known ones is Culloden, the last pitched battle fought on British soil, but not far from there you’ve got Clava Cairns. These are 4,000-year-old burial chambers and standing stones, and they actually line up with the low-setting winter solstice on the 21st of December, and the sun’s rays go inside the chamber. This technology that people had 4,000 years ago—it’s quite an incredible feat of engineering. Like looking at the pyramids and stuff like that, it’s like, how did they know how to do this so perfectly? I think today we still don’t understand how they cut these stones so precisely. So that’s a magical place. Scotland is absolutely full of gems like that, and they carry deep historical significance. Jo: Mm. Well, the Highlander series starts in standing stones, doesn’t it? Andy: That’s right. So Outlander—Diana Gabaldon is from Flagstaff, Arizona originally. She lives in Scottsdale now, but she wrote the first books in the 1990s. It’s quite an interesting story actually. Diana watched an episode of Doctor Who, and there was a young, handsome Highlander called Jamie McCrimmon in the show, played by English actor Frazer Hines, who’s a friend of mine. So Diana sees this young, handsome Highlander—a man in a kilt—and she thinks, “Oh my, I like that.” So that’s what gave her the inspiration to go on and write Outlander. It’s historical fiction. Claire is a nurse during World War II and goes back to 1743, then touches these standing stones and goes back to the 18th century, and then they try and stop the Battle of Culloden happening. So it’s a fantastic story and, as we call it, the Outlander Effect. It’s a huge global audience. Jo: Oh yeah, I’ve read several of the books. There’s some good romance in there. But on rocks as well—’cause my brother actually lives in Edinburgh and did a short film, STONE HUNTERS, about lifting these rocks, sort of as a Scottish tradition of going around lifting stones instead of lifting other weights. Is that something you—oh, it just came up as you were talking about stones there. Andy: That’s quite interesting. So we say in Scotland, “Only leave your footsteps. Take photos, only leave your footsteps. What we don’t want is people lifting and building the little cairns, but what you’re talking about is something different and it’s really cool. There’s a big weightlifting community in Scotland. You’ve got the Dinnie Stones, for example, and this strongman Donald Dinnie carried these massive stones across the Potarch Bridge and back. I can’t remember the combined weight, but there’s a whole community in Scotland. I’ve actually got a friend—I think he calls himself “The Highland Granddad” or something on Instagram—but he goes around and sets up maybe four or five different-size stones, obviously starting with the lightest one and then finishing with the heaviest one. So I’m all for that. That’s pretty cool. Jo: So obviously the book is Lochs and Legends, so let’s talk about legends first. You mentioned kelpies, which I think is a fascinating one. So yeah, tell us about—oh, here we go, Kelpies. There you go. Tell us about the Kelpies Andy: So yeah, the Kelpies are one of my favorite myths, favorite legends. These ones here are actually the world’s largest equine sculptures. They’re 30 meters high—approximately a hundred feet—and they were done by Scottish artist Andy Scott. I was actually lucky enough to attend the 10-year anniversary last year. They represent two different things: it’s a mixture of Scotland’s industrial past—our Industrial Revolution here was 1760 to 1830—and the Clydesdale horses would pull the wagons and the barges along the canals. These big, heavy horses mixed with Flemish warhorses. So it’s a mixture of an industrial past, but also our folklore. Kelpies were mythical, shape-shifting horse spirits that would lure you to the water’s edge and drown you. This was a very real way to keep your children away from the water’s edge. Jo: It seems odd though to have horses and water drawing you into the water, right? Shouldn’t they be mermaids or something? Andy: That’s right. Yeah. Jo: What are some of the other darker elements of legend that fascinate you? Andy: You’ve got the Corryvreckan, which is a legendary whirlpool. My brother Ian used to do a lot of diving off the west coast of Scotland, so this whirlpool is between the Isle of Jura and Scarba, and it’s one of the most dangerous tidal whirlpools in the world. But there are also dark tales of the Celtic warrior Fingal, and you’ve got Fingal’s Cave as well. In the book, you’ve obviously got the Kelpies, but there are so many other legends in there as well: the Blue Men of the Minch, stories about cannibals and body snatchers as well. Oh yeah, loads of that. Jo: Well, let’s talk about the body snatchers, because if you go to Edinburgh, you’re gonna do the body snatcher thing, right? Or at least people like me want to do the body snatcher tour. Tell us about that. What about the body snatchers? Andy: Yeah, Edinburgh was once one of the foremost cities for anatomy, and people like Burke and Hare—as I’m sure you know—would initially sell fresh corpses to Robert Knox for his anatomy lectures, but that was too time-consuming and not profitable enough, so they thought, “Well, let’s just murder people instead.” I’ve got a fascination with visiting these old cemeteries, places like the Canongate Kirkyard or Greyfriars Kirkyard. I’ve had a couple of chilling experiences there—goosebumps on my arms. Jo: Well, I did one of those ghost tours around that area, and people take the equipment to try and sense things. So tell us what you felt there. What happened in the graveyard? Andy: Well, I did a tour a few years ago, and I was standing in front of George Mackenzie’s mausoleum. He was the man responsible for the persecution of the Covenanters—those who rose up against the signing of the covenant after the Battle of Bothwell Bridge. I’m standing in front of his mausoleum, and a few photos were taken. The first one was completely normal, but the second one had this green glow behind my head, and I will never ever stand there again. I was told later that green is a healing energy, but no. Why is Culross so chilling? Andy: I think one of the most chilling places—one of the most special places—in Scotland is the town of Culross, which is actually, I think, the first chapter of the book. It’s spelt R-O-S-S, but it’s pronounced “Coo-russ.” This was featured in Outlander as Cranesmuir, but it dates back to the sixth century. It was the birthplace of Saint Mungo, who’s the patron saint of Glasgow, and it was founded by Saint Serf. So in Culross you have the town hall, which dates back to 1626, and then a clock and the bell tower were added in 1783. But in Culross alone, during—for example—the witch trials, there were over 30 men and women tried for witchcraft in this town, and it’s said to be one of the most haunted towns in Scotland. I’ve got goosebumps right now talking about it again. I get goosebumps every single time I visit that place. And in the book I mention one particular story I’ll tell you quickly. It was about 15 years ago now: a mum and dad and their little girl visit Culross Palace, which dates back to 1597. The mum and dad are in the laird’s bedroom, and the little girl sneaks under the rope and into the strong room. Back then they never had banks; they had strong rooms to keep the important documents and the money inside the coffers, inside the safes. Anyway, the mum hears the little girl talking to someone. “Who are you talking to, sweetie?” “The man, Mummy.” Goosebumps again, right? She’s like, “What man?” I’ve got goosebumps all over. The mum looks in the strong room and there’s nobody there, and she says, “Come on, let’s go upstairs.” So they go upstairs into the Painted Chamber. As soon as they walk in, the little girl looks up at the wall to the painting of George Bruce with a funny collar, and she says, “That’s the man there, Mummy. That’s who I was talking to downstairs.” So that’s the first part of the story. I visited about five years ago with an Australian couple, and it was the day before Halloween, the day before the palace closed for the season. The staff had bay leaves stuck on the wall to ward off the evil spirits, ward off the witches. And the very second we walked up to the room and I said, “That’s George Bruce there, the man with a funny collar,” the bay leaves that the staff had pinned to the wall fell on the floor, and there was a little chair with a mannequin doll—white linen gown and a white linen hat. The hat flew across the room to the other side of the room. I’m standing looking at my clients, and the wife was like, “You guys did that?” I was like, “No, we didn’t.” So I ran downstairs to tell my friend Linda, one of the employees of the palace. Things like that…and since then I’ve had numerous things happen to me in that place. So yeah, I definitely recommend if you get a chance, you have to visit there. Jo: I haven’t been there. And well, I wondered—what do you think? I mean, obviously this is not a religious show or a particularly spiritual show, but I do wonder sometimes when these violent things happen—I mean, obviously I’m English, you’re Scottish, we’ve got some bloody history between our countries — When there is something violent that happens, something really wrong, or just something emotional, so you think there’s some kind of imprint left on the environment? Yeah, I think I definitely believe in something. They say when you visit these ancient places frequently, as I do—I visit old castles, old cemeteries, old graveyards late at night—they say these entities, these energies, follow you around. I have loads of different people on tour. I’ve been given pyrite, I’ve been given black obsidian. I’ve got so many little things in my wardrobe to protect me. So many people are interested in the same thing. But I do have a fascination, and of course there might be an explanation, as you know, for something like that hat flying across the room. I mean, there’s no explanation for that—it might be a creaky floorboard, or you know, there’s something. There’s definitely something there, I think. Jo: So in the book, you also mention a summer solstice at Callanish I—or maybe you pronounce that differently—and you said it was a spiritual feeling and a connection to the land, which sounds different to the stuff you’ve been talking about. What is at Callanish and what was that experience like? So Callanish standing stones are similar to Clava Cairns near Culloden, but they’re even older. They say they’re older than the pyramids of Egypt, so we’re talking 5,000 years old, and it’s just a very historical place. I was there on the summer solstice as the sun started to set, and it’s a kind of outer-body experience. There were people playing music, there were drummers there playing the drums slowly—boom, boom, boom—as the sun set. I felt so privileged to be there in this ancient site. We’re not sure why they built these places, but it’s just fascinating to me. I absolutely love visiting places like that. Jo: Well, what’s interesting—you mentioned there the drums, and of course in terms of sounds and music, people think about the bagpipes when they think of Scotland, and I wondered — Why do Scottish people play the bagpipes? Like what is it about the pipes? Andy: Well, they were classed as a weapon of war until fairly recently. Imagine you were the enemy, and in the distance you hear this drone of the bagpipe. It really stirs up the blood. But whether they came from Scotland or not is widely debated—some say China, some claim other countries—but it’s our sense of nationalism here, isn’t it? The sound of the bagpipes gives me goosebumps every single time, and even if you’re not from here, I have a lot of clients who come on tour and they don’t know why either. It just hits them, and they start crying and get very emotional. Lovely. Jo: Yeah, there’s definitely something about music that does that. I’ve been to the Edinburgh Tattoo, which is lots of pipes and bands and marching around, which is pretty good. But I wanted to come back to water. I mean, obviously the book is Lochs and Legends, so we’d better talk about some lochs. There are quite a few. What are lochs and which are your favourite? Andy: Yeah, on the front cover of the book you can see behind me—that’s actually Urquhart Castle, and the legends on Loch Ness date back to the sixth century. This is when St. Columba settled at Glen Urquhart, not far from where the castle is, and it’s the first record of the Loch Ness Monster. The first written record is from the seventh century. It’s obviously on a fault line as well—a very deep fault line. There’s more water in Loch Ness than all of the lakes in England and Wales combined, including the Lake District. So who knows what’s in there, if there’s a Nessie or not. But one of my favorites is probably Loch Lomond—the “Bonnie, Bonnie Banks” of Loch Lomond, like the song. My mom and dad, before they got married, spent a lot of time hill walking, and they joined the Youth Hostel Association. They didn’t have a lot of money back then, but Loch Lomond isn’t far from Glasgow at all. In fact, we are actually doing the West Highland Way with some friends in May, which is 97 miles approximately, from Glasgow right up to Fort William. We’re going to camp the whole way. My mom and dad, as I say, spent time there. My sister got married in the beautiful little town of Luss, so that’s a very special place close to my heart. Jo: And I guess staying with water—I mean, you mentioned the island of Jura. I’ve written about Iona. Tell us about those islands off the west coast. Why are they so special? Andy: The west coast of Scotland is just ruggedly beautiful. I’ve been lucky enough to see it from a boat. We used to have a lovely big Broom–type powerboat, 43 feet long. We could go anywhere. W e’ve been to Ireland on it, we’ve been to Fingal’s Cave, we’ve been to Staffa, Rum, Iona, Jura—absolutely stunning beauty. Some of these places you can’t access with a vehicle, so they’re just beautiful. You can anchor the boat and take the small tender to these isolated, remote beaches—truly special, steeped in legends, steeped in history, with the most outstanding scenery. Islands like Islay, for example—it’s often mispronounced. People say “EYE-lee,” but it’s “ILL-uh.” That’s obviously one of the main whisky areas in Scotland as well. If you like peaty, smoky whiskies, that’s the island for you. Jo Yes. We hadn’t even mentioned whisky, so you mentioned one there, but — Why is Scotch whisky so famous? Is it really super amazing, and where should people go if they want to try some? Andy: So remember, our whisky doesn’t have an “e” at the end of it—there’s no “e” in Scottish whisky. It’s very unique. Every whisky is different, whether it’s a blended whisky or whether it’s a single malt. There are different regions of Scotland: you’ve got Highland whisky, Lowland whisky, you’ve got Campbeltown— which is a whole separate region—you’ve got Skye, you’ve got whisky from the Isle of Skye as well, Speyside. There are smoky, peaty whiskies from Islay, or a nice Highland whisky, or a Speyside—it’s more of a caramel, vanilla, maybe citrusy, fruity flavor. So people often ask me what my favorite whisky is, and there is no definitive answer for that. It just depends what mood I’m in at the time. Jo: Yeah, I mean, I must say I’m not particularly a whisky person, but my husband is, so nice—he would enjoy those. In terms of—obviously you’ve mentioned the West Highland Way, and when…maybe just give people a sense of the size of things. So a lot of people might fly into Edinburgh or Glasgow, and then you say ‘the Highlands,’ and they might think, ‘Oh, I could just do a day trip,’ or whatever. So maybe just talk a bit about that, about the scale and what’s up there, up in the Highlands. Andy: Yeah, there are a lot of areas that are really unspoiled. The population of Scotland is only about 5.3 million people, so we’re a small country, but to give you an idea, many people will fly into Glasgow or Edinburgh. To get to the Highlands, you’re talking three or four hours. If you are coming, I’d recommend you plan your routes and make sure you spend at least a decent amount of time in each area. I mean, Edinburgh is the capital city, but Glasgow is actually the biggest population. As soon as you start heading towards the Highlands, you could arrive at one of these secluded Highland beaches, and it really looks like you could be anywhere in the world—you could be in the Caribbean until you dip your toes into the water. Then you know you’re not in the Caribbean. But sometimes you can arrive at these places and there’s nobody there. One of my favorite places as I head up to the Highlands is up past Loch Lomond, past the haunted Drovers Inn—the Drovers pub—and up past Glencoe. That’s one of my most favorite places in Scotland. You know, the Three Sisters mountains in Glencoe were formed about 480 million years ago when the two continents Avalonia and Laurentia collided. They say they used to be four times the height they are today, and the valley of Glencoe was carved during the Ice Age about 12,000 years ago. You’ve got the legends up there, you’ve got the Massacre of Glencoe—the 13th of February, 1692—the MacDonalds and the Campbells. There’s just so much history and just beautiful scenery. Jo: Yes, there’s still rivalry, isn’t there, in Scotland? Maybe talk a bit about—I made the mistake once: I flew into Glasgow, and I was in a taxi and I made the mistake of mentioning the wrong team. Tell us a bit about the historic rivalries. Andy: I mean, there’s clan rivalry, particularly between the MacDonalds and the Campbells. So I always, of course, stay neutral on these subjects, but I have people coming from Canada or from the States, and they get in the car and they’re like, “Listen, we are Campbells, we’re sorry.” And I’m like, “Listen, it’s more complicated than that. It wasn’t just the Campbells—that’s a very short, small part of the story.” So we’ve got that kind of banter. In fact, if you visit the Clachaig Inn in Glencoe, if you walk through the front door, there’s actually a sign at reception that says, “No Campbells or hawkers, no salesmen.” So take that with a pinch of salt. Then of course you’ve got the soccer rivalry, the football rivalry. You’ve got teams like Celtic and Rangers, and that’s to do with religion, and it is deep-rooted. But then we have the banter of rugby games, for example—I used to play rugby for Scotland under-18, and I just love going to a Scotland–England game of rugby. It’s very different; it’s very different from football, right? If you go to a football game, they want to hate each other, they want to kill each other, but rugby—you can be together and have a dram of whisky; it’s a gentleman’s sport. So yeah, it’s that old rivalry. Jo: Yeah, exactly. I mean, yes, we are watching on Netflix the Six Nations rugby thing, and of course Scotland and England always play each other. But let’s just come to Glasgow, because I feel like, again, Edinburgh—people go to Edinburgh and then they forget Glasgow. It was the European City of Culture a few years back, wasn’t it? And there’s lots of really interesting stuff in Glasgow. Tell us about Glasgow and some of the things people might want to see there. Andy: Yeah, Glasgow is often overlooked, but there are so many things you can do there, and a lot of them are free as well. I actually like to do the Glasgow Mural Trail. It’s a stunning art installation which starts at George Square—some of them have been knocked down since, and they update it quite often—but it takes you on a full tour of the city. It can take maybe four hours to do the whole thing. It takes you up past Strathclyde University, and there’s a big mural of a lady: she’s been crying, her nose is red, and she’s holding a little baby. That’s Mungo as a baby with his mother carrying him. Then you walk up to Glasgow Cathedral, which dates back to the 12th century, so it predates the whole city by hundreds of years. Across the road, you’ve got the oldest house in Glasgow. You’ve then got the Glasgow Necropolis up on the hill with some beautiful old gravestones. You’ve got the Kelvingrove Art Gallery and Museum, the Glasgow Transport Museum—there are so many things to do. You’ve got Pollok House, Pollok Country Park, the Burrell Collection. It’s a very cool city. Jo: Isn’t it Rennie Mackintosh as well? Maybe explain that to people. Yeah, Charles Rennie Mackintosh. The House for an Art Lover—that’s very beautiful if you like your Rennie Mackintosh. It was actually a friend of mine who lives in Kilmacolm who wrote a book about it. He was the guy in charge of designing The House for an Art Lover—Graham Roxburgh, his name is. One of the last times Lily, my co-writer, was in Scotland, I managed to get a little private tour with Graham, and he gave us both an autographed copy of his book. So really cool. Oh, cool. Yeah, people—a lot of people will recognize the Rennie Mackintosh types of designs, you see them on lots of things. This is the Books and Travel show, so apart from your own book, what are a couple of books you would recommend about Scotland or about Glasgow in general? One of my favorites has to be Kidnapped by Robert Louis Stevenson, and that’s one of my old favorites—I reread that fairly often. There’s one that I see in many of the gift shops here called Scottish Folk and Fairy Tales—that’s a good one. That’s by Gordon Jarvie, I think his name is. There’s another one called Beneath the Surface—that’s by Fiona Neill, and that’s a mystery set in the Highlands. I read that one recently as well. There are loads of great short stories you can get if you go around the bookshops, the Historic Environment Scotland sites, or the National Trust sites. Jo: I’m sure people can find your book all over the place, but I do also want to say, what is your favorite movie, since that would seem appropriate? Andy: Well, yes, I think it probably has to be Highlander. I don’t know if you know—they’re actually making a remake with Henry Cavill. Jo: No! They are? Oh my goodness, I didn’t know that. Andy: They are! It was my absolute favorite film growing up, with Christopher Lambert and Sean Connery, so maybe I’ve kind of morphed this whole Andy the Highlander thing from watching Highlander. You know: “From the dawn of time we came, moving silently down through the centuries, leading many secret lives, struggling to reach the time of the Gathering, where the few who remain will battle to the last,” you know? Absolutely brilliant. I always loved open spaces—mountains, rivers, waterfalls, beaches. Jo: Yes, so that’s fantastic. And of course there can be only one Andy the Highlander! There you go. Where can people find you and your books online? Andy: So the book has just been released in North America. You’ll find it in Barnes & Noble, and you’ll find it at Walmart and Target online. You’ll find it on Amazon. I’ve also done an audiobook as well, which you can get on Amazon. That was a no-brainer. HarperCollins asked me if I would like to do the audiobook, and it had to be me—it couldn’t be anybody else, you know? Some of the comments I have: “We can really hear your voice telling the story,” first of all through the book, but they love hearing the voice in the audiobook. Jo: Brilliant. Well, thanks so much for your time, Andy. That was great. My pleasure. Thank you so much for having me. The post Lochs And Legends. Scotland With Andy The Highlander appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 4/3/25 | ![]() Desert Storms and Superblooms: Death Valley With Steve Hall | What are the fascinating — and also dangerous — aspects of Death Valley National Park? How does visiting a stark desert landscape give us perspective about our place in the world? Steve Hall is a multi-award-winning documentary filmmaker and a seasoned adventure hiker renowned for his extensive explorations of Death Valley National Park. What’s special about Death Valley National Park? What are some of the iconic places to visit? The dangers of Death Valley Solo adventures and challenges Dark skies and star gazing Legends and history Conservation and visitor etiquette You can find Steve’s hiking videos of Death Valley and other places at YouTube.com/stevehallDV. The Death Valley National Park website has lots more info. You can find pictures and notes, as well as book recommendations on Death Valley here. You can find Death Valley, A Thriller, by J.F. Penn, here. Transcript of the interview Jo: Hello travelers. I’m thriller author, J.F. Penn, and today I’m here with Steve Hall. Hi Steve. Steve: Hi Jo. It’s great to be talking to you today. Jo: Yes, just a little introduction. Steve is a multi-award-winning documentary filmmaker and a seasoned adventure hiker renowned for his extensive explorations of Death Valley National Park, which we’re talking about today. Let’s start with the basics. Where is Death Valley in the world and what drew you to it initially? Steve: Great questions. You know, it’s great to be talking with you about Death Valley National Park—of course, my favorite national park to visit. Death Valley is part of the Northern Mojave Desert, and it’s located right along the California–Nevada border. It’s kind of situated in between Las Vegas to the east and the Sierra Nevada mountains off to the west. It is the largest national park in the lower 48 states. It actually has the great size of 3.4 million million acres, and it’s 140 miles in length, going from the bottom of the park all the way up to the top in the north. So it’s quite expansive. Death Valley National Park, Photo by J.F. Penn Well, it kind of started for me back in 1997 when I was with a group of friends on the way to the Grand Canyon. As we finished up our trip there, we had a couple of extra days on our way home. So I noticed on a map all these kind of scary-sounding names within Death Valley—locations such as the Devil’s Golf Course, the Devil’s Cornfield, the Funeral Mountains, Badwater—kind of all scary, foreboding-sounding places. I told my friends, “Why don’t we stop there? We have a little extra time and see what Death Valley is all about.” And that’s what we did. We drove through the park and actually had a kind of scary experience right when we first crossed the park boundaries. My very first memory of crossing into the park was seeing an injured motorcyclist on the dirt just off the road. I guess he had taken a turn too fast or something, but he flew off his bike and was injured, and paramedics were attending to him. So that was my introduction to the park—seeing somebody badly injured. But on that first trip, I visited some of the famous tourist destinations such as Badwater, Artist Palette, Zabriskie Point, and Devil’s Golf Course. So that kind of gave me a little taster or teaser of the park. Those are the same kinds of destinations that first-time park visitors are sent to. Let’s just get a bit into what it looks like because you mentioned a few things there, like the Devil’s Golf Course. I went to Badwater. I went to the Artist Palette in my day trip when I visited. You also mentioned the Grand Canyon. So I feel like even Americans or anyone in the world who knows a little bit about America has heard of the Grand Canyon, has seen pictures of the Grand Canyon. In their minds, when they say “National Park in America,” that’s kind of what people have in their mind, I think, because that’s the most famous one. What is different about Death Valley and those places that we mentioned? Why are they so evocative? Steve: Well, anytime somebody thinks about American national parks—like what you mentioned—they might think about the big famous ones such as Yosemite, the Grand Canyon, Yellowstone. Those have sights that are just so famous. When you walk out to the Grand Canyon for the first time and look at that sweeping vista, it’s so overwhelming and it’s captured well in photographs. The same thing with Yosemite, with the majestic waterfalls and Half Dome. When it comes to Death Valley, people might think of a bleak, lifeless desert, so it might not be the first destination that comes to their mind when they’re thinking about visiting a US national park. Well, tell us what it looks like. Like the Artist’s Palette, for example. Why is it called the Artist’s Palette, and what makes it special? Steve: Well, that is a very interesting and neat place to check out and explore. Artists’ Palette, Death Valley. Photo by JFPenn It’s along a place that’s known as Artist Drive, which is a one-way loop road that comes off of Badwater Road. Artist Palette itself has some very colorful hills. It is basically what the name implies. You drive up to it, you get out and take a look, and you’re surrounded by these colorful badlands. Some of the minerals and different forces have created a variety of colors on display. It really does have just about every color you can imagine. You look out and there are all these little canyons going in different directions, and there are hills that you can scramble up. Of course, it’s a photographer’s dream. Artist Palette has been featured in, for instance, a music video by the group Oasis—their video “Who Feels Love?” was filmed partly in Death Valley, and Artist Palette was one of the locations that they chose. It’s a very famous spot. Jo: Yeah, and really beautiful in different lights. I imagine you’ve obviously visited at different times of day. I feel like I was only there for about 10 minutes, but even then you can get all kinds of different shades in the rocks, as you said. Let’s talk about Badwater Basin and, I guess, the salty areas. Talk about those salt flats down there, and I guess why it’s also called Death Valley, because the day I was there, it was winter—it was November—and it was still damn hot. Steve: Yeah, so Badwater itself is probably Death Valley’s most famous destination. Around the Badwater Basin, there are some 200 square miles of salt flats. What makes it very special is that it’s the lowest spot in North America at minus 282 feet—282 feet below sea level. Badwater actually got its name because there was a surveyor in past times who brought his mule out and was in the area and led his mule up to the Badwater pool, which is a spring-fed little pool of water on the ground. The mule rejected it and refused to drink the salty water. So that’s why it got the name Badwater. Badwater Basin Death Valley Photo by JFPenn Visiting it is a unique experience, especially for first-timers, because you can go out there and stand at that special spot, get your picture next to the sign, and you can also look up at the hillside nearby and see a sea level sign. You can visualize in your mind just how far underneath the ocean you would be if you were at sea level right there. There’s also an endemic snail that lives only at that location at Badwater, so that’s really special too. And if you look across the salt flats, across the valley, you can see the Panamint Range. The highest summit there in the Panamints, as well as all of Death Valley, is Telescope Peak at 11,049 feet. That’s quite a contrast—standing at minus 282 and looking up at 11,049 feet. Another aspect to Badwater is that sometimes during flooding, that salt basin fills with water. This happened just a year ago and forms Lake Manly, and then you’ll find, as it goes viral, people out there kayaking and floating on the lake. And isn’t that after the floods when it flowers? Steve: Yes. In thinking about wildflowers in Death Valley, you need several distinct rain events. If you just get one light period of rain—and keep in mind Death Valley is the hottest, driest, and lowest, meaning it gets less than two inches of annual rainfall—you’re not going to get a good wildflower season. But if you get several periods of rain spread out among several months, then you’re going to get a good bloom. In fact, you could get a “super bloom.” I remember being there for the last big super bloom in 2016, and I think before that it was 2005. We just had vast fields of desert gold covering the landscape—an overwhelming amount of flowers, beauty beyond what you could imagine. Jo: Yes. I mean, I only went for a day trip, so you only get a certain glimpse in a day. Of course, you’ve been hiking there for years. But let’s get into why also, I guess, it’s so dangerous. There are tourist trips—it doesn’t have to be a dangerous place to visit—but — What are some of the dangers of the valley? Steve: There’s really a lot of dangers in Death Valley. In fact, I received an email from a hiker one time, and he mentioned that Death Valley is one of the most dangerous places on Earth to hike. I would definitely agree with that. It’s so important to be prepared and to know what you’re getting into out there. The first thing that people often think about when it comes to dangers is the heat. Sure enough, in the springtime, especially in the summer but also lingering into the fall, you have the extreme hot days. You have days when you shouldn’t even be out there hiking, but if the heat seems to be at a manageable level, it’s all about bringing enough water with you, enough sunscreen, knowing your body’s limitations, hiking early in the morning before it gets too hot—things like that. Other dangers include flash floods. There are occasional flash floods that will sweep down canyons and wipe out park roads, which creates a whole different hazard. And then the wind can even be a hazard. There can be severe windstorms that come up. In fact, the wind can sometimes kick up really bad dust storms and sandstorms into the air. That’s caused by strong winds picking up the dust and sand off the ground and pushing it forward like a wall toward people. I had a couple of experiences not too long ago where I was coming out of a hike to a place called The Crack. I looked off to my right, to the northwest, and saw what looked like a wall of dust coming toward me. It was scary. Fortunately, we were just getting back to my truck, so I said, “We better get there quickly and get in.” Right as we got to the truck, it swept over us. The wind came first, then all the dust, and we lost our visibility. I was glad we were inside, so our clothes and my eyes weren’t filled with dust. Another experience: My parents own an RV or trailer, and they were parked at the Stovepipe Wells campground one day. My dad looked out the window of the trailer and could see a giant wall of dust and sand heading toward Stovepipe Wells. My parents got out and went to hide near the general store, and sure enough, the dust storm came through, rattled the trailer, and wreaked havoc on that whole area. He said afterward it took him a whole year to get all of the dust and sand out of the trailer and for it to work normally again—for the windows to be able to pop out and slide like they’re supposed to. It was quite a crazy situation. Jo: Wow. You are reading my novel Death Valley, and I put in this big dust storm. When I wrote it, I read about these storms and I thought, “Is this really—could this really happen?” I know it’s terrible, but I’m grateful that you’ve said this is actually possible. And these storms, like you say, can just take everything out in their path, right? Steve: Yeah, and in fact—obviously we can’t get into spoilers—but I love how you brought the storm into your novel. It reminded me that with climate change, scary things like that could actually happen. Climate change has already had a bad impact upon the park. Again, hopefully nothing like what I’ve been reading in your novel actually happens, but there certainly is the potential for that. We’ve seen an increase in flash flooding that has caused road closure for many months at a time, with sections of the park closed off. We’ve also seen trees dying off, such as bristlecone pines, because they’re not getting the moisture and they’re getting too much heat. We’ve seen an increase in long, hot summers and higher temperatures going through the park, which makes it hard on wildlife that are already on the edge of survival, pushing them even further. Well then, with all this danger, how come you have this film Last Chance Solo, where you went off on your own and solo? What draws you to this kind of solo adventure? We are definitely not recommending anyone do this, but you obviously love it. So talk a bit about solo adventure. What are the rewards and the risks of solo adventure? Steve: Yeah, so solo hiking and backpacking is not really my favorite thing to do. I have a core group of friends who I enjoy backpacking and hiking with out in Death Valley—such as Michelle, who’s one of my best friends—but not everyone is always available. A majority of my friends here at home, outside of the park, are not interested in the great challenges that are presented. So that’s what can lead me to go solo. But going solo does create some difficult challenges. For one thing, you’re out there all alone, so if you get injured or hurt, it’s going to be more difficult to get out of there, to get help, and to make it through. Also, it can just be lonely out there, going for days on end hiking. It’s definitely not as fun. You referenced my film Last Chance Solo, which was the very first feature film I ever attempted to do in Death Valley. It documents me doing six days of solo backpacking and hiking in the Last Chance Range. I believe when I started that out, I had to carry five and a half gallons of water because water sources are not always available in Death Valley. You’re not always going to find a spring or a source of water, so to do some of these routes, you’re going to need to do heavy water carries and bring them with you. As far as why it can be difficult to get others to hike with you in Death Valley—well, it’s hard. There are very few trails in the park. You’re mostly creating your own routes as you go through peaks and canyons. There’s not a lot of established trails or routes. And of course, not a lot of people want to carry a lot of water. Then there’s terrain obstacles that you have to deal with—like rock climbs. I had one friend named Curtis who, every five years, comes with me to the park to do hiking. But he tells me then, after he goes, “Well, you fooled me again. Maybe I’ll come back with you in another five years when I forget how difficult this is.” Jo: Yes, I mean, I’ve done multi-day solo backpacking, but where I’ve stayed somewhere reasonable at night with shelter, and there’ve been shops on the way. That is not what happens in Death Valley. I mean, there is a little—it’s not a town, is it? Like you said, there’s a campground, there’s the visitor center, but it’s not like you can stop off and find water anywhere. You do have to go a ways. So another thing about the visitor center when I got there was I noticed there’s a plaque saying this is a Dark Skies area. Tell us about that. What is a Dark Sky park and why is that so special, and how cool is it at night? Steve: It’s quite amazing. Dark Sky International certified Death Valley National Park as the third official Dark Sky National Park in the United States. A lot of work went into helping that happen. Actually, they were given the Gold Tier, which is the highest standard, the highest rating you can get for a national park. So it truly is a Dark Sky Park. How that comes about and what it’s all about is negating as much light pollution as possible. You think about light pollution coming in from nearby cities, such as Las Vegas—it’s the closest one to Death Valley. You can’t really do anything about that, but Death Valley is far enough away that city light doesn’t have much of an impact, especially the farther north you go. That’s just where you start—how far away the park is from cities. Then you have to think about the artificial lighting that is on buildings, on signs, shining around the villages you referenced, which are Furnace Creek and Stovepipe Wells. A lot of work had to go into changing out all those lights that were just shining indiscriminately—brightening up the area. Instead, new lights were installed that used less electricity and were angled downward to light up a path so people could walk safely, or to light up signs or buildings but without blinding people’s eyes. That’s what made it a successful Dark Sky Park—putting all the effort into that and getting certified. You mentioned the Dark Sky Festival, which actually took place last week. I was there in Death Valley for the Dark Sky Festival, actually working at the Farm Creek Visitor Center, and then I hosted a telescope in the evening at what was known as the Star Party, where we had 25 to 30 telescopes out. We took in—I think it was 2,300 visitors—over the course of two days, who could look through our telescopes and hear a ranger-guided program. The Dark Sky Festival is a very special event. There’s so much going on. There were auditorium programs, there was an exploration fair with booths for learning about things related to the sky and the stars, with scientists sharing information and things you could learn from. There were astrophotography meetups. There’s an incredibly talented photographer named Stephanie Lamar that lives and works in Death Valley and actually does wedding, engagement, and family photos, but she volunteered her time to lead groups out to the Mesquite flats—or to the Mesquite sand dunes and Harmony Borax—to help them learn astrophotography. Then there were talks going on by scientists out at park locations such as Ubehebe Crater, Badwater, Golden Canyon, various spots to teach people things. And then, of course, the grand finale was the Star Party, which I mentioned, where we had all the telescopes out. On Friday night, I shared the Andromeda Galaxy with everybody, and on Saturday night, the Orion Nebula. It was just a fantastic event, organized and put together by my friend Matt, who works there in the park. Jo: Mm, amazing. If people haven’t been to any of these dark-sky locations—they are around the world—but as you said, how much you can see the stars compared to what you see if you’re in the city is just totally different, isn’t it? I mean, I’ve been in a place in Western Australia, and I’ll never forget it. It was like, this is a completely different experience to living in a city and looking up at the sky. Steve: Yeah, it’s totally different. There’s just no comparison. Just seeing the awe and wonder on some of the visitors’ faces as they look up at the sky—at one point there was a ranger looking at some of the constellations with a laser pointer and even reading poetry out there under the stars. It is just a totally different experience compared to going out where I live here in Sonoma, in California, and trying to look up. When I go out to Death Valley, I feel like I can see ten to a hundred times more stars. Jo: In my thriller Death Valley, I have ruins under the luxury eco-hotel, and you said there might be a legend that echoes this theme. Tell us about the Lost City. Steve: Yeah, you know, there’s this interesting story I came across. I do a lot of hiking and backpacking into undocumented areas of Death Valley to try to make discoveries. Of course, when I say “make discoveries,” I don’t mean I’m the first person to ever find these things, because we have Native Americans, miners, and who knows who else hiking off the grid, but I just try to go out into areas that people haven’t seen or heard of before and share things. I went into this place called Trellis Canyon, which was just mentioned in passing in a guidebook, but there was only one sentence—no other information about it—just to see what was there. I hiked in there, went home, and published a report about my hike and shared photos, because I did have the largest website on Death Valley hiking in the world, which is now only available to park staff. That’s where I was sharing my hiking adventures at that time. I started getting emails from people who identified themselves as a group of lawyers, doctors, adventure and thrill seekers who wanted more information about Trellis Canyon. As I gathered more details, I found out that this group believes there is a lost city of gold underneath the Panamint Mountains, and that the access point to get into the lost city of gold—where there’s supposedly tons of treasure, gold artifacts, as well as giant mummies preserved in underground caverns—they believe the entrance is through a cave in Trellis Canyon. The interesting thing was they had spotted some “scorpions” on Google Earth above Trellis Canyon. Sure enough, I went on Google Earth, and I could see these two matching scorpions that were covering the landscape. As you’re following along on Google Earth, you see these two scorpions, and they do look out of place, admittedly. Anyway, the scorpions later disappeared from Google Earth, and this group felt that was a conspiracy to hide the entrance to the lost city of gold. Sure enough, I pushed the date back and it basically showed the satellite imagery had updated, and that’s why the scorpions were still visible but only at an earlier version of Google Earth. So anyway, these people went out, backpacked, and some of them had never done it before. They tried to get into the lost city, but they never did find it. I do hear of them going back from time to time to continue searching for it. Jo: I love it. I think that’s brilliant. Now, that might be a myth, but there is evidence, as you said, of mining, and also you mentioned the Native American people. Talk a bit more about the Native American people and also the mining in Death Valley Steve: Well, yeah, that’s a good thing to talk about because when we look at human history, we can say it starts with the Timbisha Shoshone. They’ve inhabited the Death Valley region for some 1,000-plus years, so they’ve been there a long time. Then, of course, in modern times, miners came in and tourists came in, and the Timbisha Shoshone found themselves displaced. They seemed to have endured quite a bit of mistreatment and loss of the areas they wanted to live in for about 65 years. But then, in the year 2000, there was the Timbisha Homeland Act that was signed into law, and that gave them back a portion of their ancestral homeland and some of their rights. Hopefully things continue to move positively for them. Then, of course, we might think about mining in Death Valley. That got started in the late 1850s, as far as records can show, and picked up in the successive decades. There was gold, there was silver, there was borax, talc, salt—those were some of the things that were mined in Death Valley. Some good examples of that: Keane Wonder Mine is a really neat place to visit—that’s where you might find that gold was mined. There’s Panamint City, which was famous for the silver that was mined there. There’s Harmony Borax, which is where what’s called “white gold” was mined, and white gold is borax. That proved to be a very successful mining operation and brought a lot of Death Valley history with 20-mule-team wagons hauling out refined borax from 1883 to 1889 on a journey that went over 165 miles to get that borax hauled out of Death Valley. Modern tourism, of course, got started as people began taking an interest in the valley. It was established as a national monument in 1933, and then a national park in 1994. Jo: Mm, yeah. I guess with the indigenous people there, there’s climate change, but you also want people to visit, you want people to appreciate the beauty, and also bring their tourist dollars. So where’s the balance? How can the average tourist visit and have a good time in the park but also respect the people and the land? Steve: Yeah, that’s a great question. I’m glad you brought that up, because it’s so important for visitors to be aware as they come into Death Valley National Park. I think it kind of starts just as you come in, to make sure to pay your entrance fees to provide that financial support to the park and not try to dodge it. Also, just becoming familiar with basic park regulations—which I like to call common-sense things—such as not driving off park roads. For instance, if somebody drives off a park road onto a playa or lake bed or the salt flats, that leaves tire tracks that won’t be worn away for decades, and it also damages the habitat, the life in that soil. So there’s that. It’s just basic things like camping only where you’re supposed to, in designated sites, not leaving graffiti, not picking wildflowers, not collecting rocks or artifacts and taking them home, but leaving them in place for future visitors. Leaving no trace when you’re hiking or backpacking—so not leaving any garbage or anything behind. Also not feeding the wild animals or birds. We haven’t touched on those very much, but protecting them by leaving them to care for themselves naturally. There’s something kind of important going on right now nationally where park employees in Death Valley, as well as other national parks, are being fired for no reason. There’s a downsizing effort underway, and this isn’t coming from within Death Valley but from higher sources. That’s something we really can’t have. In my opinion, we’re underfunded and understaffed in Death Valley, and it hurts the park now and in the long term to not have enough people to properly take care of it. That’s something people can hopefully counteract by writing letters and making phone calls. But yeah, we definitely need our park employees. Jo: Hmm, absolutely. Tell people where they can find your films and what else they can find on your YouTube channel. Steve: Starting in about the year 2020, I shifted gears from doing written hiking reports on my website to actually filming my adventures because I found it more interesting. I have a couple of Death Valley series on my YouTube channel, which is youtube.com/steveHallDV. I have my Death Valley Adventure films, which I’ve currently filmed six of. Those are basically three-plus-day backpacking adventures into locations that very few people have ever been to or seen—really super special places that park visitors don’t usually go to. Those often involve heavy water carries for those three days, because there’s often not water available. Those are quite exciting. It’s quite a privilege to be able to showcase some of these amazing spots that people don’t get to see. Then I have my Death Valley Discovery series, which currently stands at 20 episodes, where I’m going out to places that I, park staff, other hikers, or friends discovered. Again, using the term “discovery” a little lightly, because we don’t claim to be the first people to ever walk through these areas, but we’re the first to publish reports and document them. So that’s what those two series of videos cover. I also hike in places such as the South Pacific and the Arctic on my channel. Jo: Yeah, and it’s a fantastic resource, so go and check that out everyone. Well, thanks so much for your time, Steve. That was great. Steve: Yeah, it was really nice talking with you. I really enjoyed talking with you about Death Valley, and I’ve enjoyed reading your novel, and I’m sure so many people are going to love that. The post Desert Storms and Superblooms: Death Valley With Steve Hall appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 3/20/25 | ![]() Curiosity, Reinvention, And Inspiration: The Return Of Books and Travel | Welcome back to the Books and Travel Podcast! In this episode, I explore why I’m restarting the show, how travel has shaped my writing, and the deeper reasons we journey—both physically and through books. From revisiting my first episode to discussing reinvention, curiosity, and the meaning of travel, this is a fresh start filled with inspiration for readers, writers, and adventurers alike. Why I’m restarting the podcast – Revisiting my first episode on The Three Trips That Changed My Life and the theme of reinvention. Turning 50 and creative confidence – How my journey as a writer led to this fresh start. Books that came from the podcast – Pilgrimage (travel memoir) & Writing the Shadow (creativity & darkness). The ocean metaphor – Light & dark sides of travel, inspired by The Three Trips That Changed My Life. The meaning of travel – Emily Thomas on experiencing otherness. Curiosity – Steve Brock on using travel as a learning lab. Finding beauty close to home – Brianna Madia on redefining what travel means. Travel inspiring fiction – Layton Green on researching thrillers through travel. How place shapes storytelling – Roz Morris on writing from past experiences. Gothic travel, cemeteries, and memento mori – Loren Rhoads on being “life-obsessed” rather than death-obsessed. What’s coming next for the show You can find my books at JFPennBooks.com and see more of my photos on Instagram @jfpennauthor Curiosity, Reinvention, and Inspiration: The Return of Books and Travel Hello travelers, I’m Jo Frances Penn and yes, the podcast is back! I’ve missed talking to other writers about travel and the places that inspire us and many of you have told me that you enjoy the show — so I’m excited to be back, and I already have lots of new guests lined up for interviews about fascinating places as well as the deeper side of travel, and of course, book recommendations! As this is the first episode for a while, I’m doing a solo episode with some clips from other guests where I’ll go through why I originally started this podcast and why I’m now restarting the show, thoughts on why we travel, reinvention, curiosity, different perspectives on places, especially when we are outsiders, as well as finding beauty closer to home, and of course, memento mori. I would love to know your thoughts on the show, or about a particular episode, and I would love to see photos of where you’re listening. Right, let’s get into it. Six years ago, in February 2019, I released the first episode of this podcast in a solo show entitled Lake Malawi, Jerusalem, and Blue Water Sailing to Vanuatu. The Three Trips That Changed My Life — and I’m going to play the opening clip as it relates to why I am restarting the show again now. “This show is all about reinvention, which is also part of what travel means to me. When I think about what I want to do with my life for the next 10 years — I like to think about the 10 year span because if we commit to doing things for 10 years, amazing stuff happens that we may never have expected. So when I think about my life, the main thing that stays the same is books and travel. These are the things I come back to again and again. The things I truly, truly love. I’m also fascinated by the inner and outer journeys that both books and travel can bring — a change in perspective, an empathy. Perhaps an entirely new direction in your life because of something you’ve read or somewhere you’ve been or something you’ve experienced. If you know what I mean, then I hope that you are going to enjoy this podcast. I’m also going to write two books from this material over time. I have been thinking about a travel memoir for many years, and also I’ve talked about what is a working title, The Shadow Book, which is very much about creating from the dark side of ourselves. I’ve wanted to write these books for many years. They’ve been bubbling away, and yet I have not made time for those to emerge. So partly this podcast is me giving time to these books. I don’t know what the memoir is or what the Shadow book is at the moment, but I know that by creating this material this way, I will be able to tap into things that I have not tapped into before, and that in itself is quite exciting. I’m also a little scared because it will mean being very transparent, being open about things I haven’t shared necessarily before. I might have written about in a fictionalised way, but you might never know what’s true and what’s not true. So I will be talking about those things on this show over time.” Click here to listen or read the whole episode with pictures It’s fascinating to revisit that first episode now because I feel like — Reinvention is at the heart of why I’ve started the show again. As this goes out, I am about to turn 50. I’ve been a professional full-time author since 2011, I’ve written almost fifty books and short stories across multiple genres as J.F. Penn and Joanna Penn, and I finally feel like I have the creative confidence to step in a new direction. The two books I mentioned that I wanted to write in that clip are now out in the world. Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways is my midlife travel memoir, written mostly over the pandemic years when I did multi-day walks that kept me sane and helped me find my way again in difficult times. JF Penn with Pilgrimage book It was also my first Kickstarter campaign and my first beautiful hardback book with color photos of my travels. You can find several episodes about pilgrimage in the backlist including my thoughts from the Camino de Santiago and an excerpt from the audiobook, which I narrated. My Shadow book came soon after, the full title is Writing the Shadow: Turn Your Inner Darkness Into Words — as by writing the memoir, I was able to tap into the more personal side of my writing. That process released a lot of blocks for me, so if you’re writing a memoir, then I hope you persist, as it’s one of the hardest and also one of the most rewarding genres to write. Both of those books scared me in the writing process, and both of them contain vulnerabilities I haven’t shared anywhere else — they changed my writing, taking it into deeper waters, which is part of my aim with conversations in this show. Which brings me back to the metaphor of the ocean which I use on the podcast logo and which characterises the content of the podcast and also the articles I post on BooksAndTravel.page. Here’s another snippet from that first episode which expands on this, From Lake Malawi, Jerusalem, and Blue Water Sailing to Vanuatu. The Three Trips That Changed My Life. “I have a metaphor, which is the ocean, and the ocean is going to definitely come into many of these episodes — But I want to do two aspects in this show. First of all, the dappled light of turquoise shallows, and I want you to picture that in your mind. You are safe. You are maybe just paddling. You’ve got your feet in, you’re in the sun, you’ve got a cocktail in your hand or a fruit juice or whatever you like to drink, and sparkling water, wine. You are enjoying the simple joys of a new place. And so I will be talking about my travels and also interviewing authors around the places that inspire our writing, and we will talk about food and drink and the lighter side of travel, which, will help you explore. We’ll also be looking at what books you might like to read about places, so that will be the lighter side of travel, but I also want to explore what I’m calling the dark midnight depths, and that to me is — That edge of challenge and a pull to the deep, and some mystery, and the things that are a little bit darker around travel. It’s not all sweetness and light. It’s not all cocktails and tapas. We go to travel and we go to books for that challenge, for a change, for deeper meaning. So I want to explore, perhaps what is the most important exploration of all, which is the inner transformation, the inner journey.” *** So why do we travel, whether it’s in person or in our minds through books and listening to people on podcasts like this, and in movies and films and photos and social media? In an interview on the meaning of travel, philosopher Emily Thomas gave her thoughts: “For me, traveling is all about experiencing otherness. It’s all about going to places that are new and unfamiliar and trying to figure out how to make sense of them, how to map them onto the world that you do know. My best travel experiences have actually been ones where I have gone to some place where I haven’t understood anything around me, not the language, not what’s going on in the street, not the social cues, and I have very slowly, by reading and talking to people, let it come to put the pieces together and come to understand the place.” *** One of reasons I travel is curiosity. It certainly drives me in terms of research around the books I want to write and the stories I want to tell. So much so that I want to write a book on curiosity at some point, so I hope that will spill out of this show in some way, as Pilgrimage and the Shadow book did last time. In an interview on Curiosity, Wonder, and Serendipity, I talked to Steve Brock about Hidden Travel, and I asked him how can people tap into their curiosity? “Well, it starts with knowing what it is that you actually love, and believe it or not, most human beings don’t know what it is that they really deeply, truly love. We are so keyed into distractions that we don’t really know what our deep passions are. One of the ways to do that is to think of a trip as a learning laboratory, so you have this opportunity to explore your interest. I talked to one person who has a friend she loves rollercoasters, and so she plans all of her trips around amusement parks around the world. And you think, okay, well that’s a nice little hobby. But the fun thing about that is that she has connected now with this entire community of rollercoaster aficionados, and she has found her tribe, if you will. And so part of it has led to not just new places and destinations, but that curiosity has grown into relationships that she really treasures, and she has some great friends as a result of that. One thing I think it’s important for people to remember is that curiosity is not the same for everybody, nor is any single person curious about everything. I may be curious about, for example, history type of things, as you are, you’re curious about cemeteries. Know what it is that you’re curious about. Use your trip as a way to explore that curiosity because it gives you the freedom to practice things you would not do at home. I may take a cooking class on a trip that I would never take at home, or I may explore a new type of physical activity like kayaking on a trip that I just wouldn’t do at home. Use the freedom that you have there from the routine to not only spark that curiosity, but to pursue that curiosity.” *** I certainly pursue my curiosity for the seeds of my stories and all my books as J.F. Penn have been inspired by my travels or places I’ve read about. My ARKANE thrillers are truly international in scope from the burning ghats of Varanasi, India in the first scene in my first thriller, Stone of Fire, to Vienna, Nuremberg and Washington DC in Spear of Destiny, the most recent adventure. My Mapwalker fantasy adventures were inspired by an antique map shop here in my city of Bath when I wondered what might happen if I could walk through the ancient map into a world off the edge of our own — might I find the places written off our maps somehow, and the people and the creatures that end up there? My Brooke & Daniel crime thrillers are based in modern day London and resonate with the history of the city. My standalone stories are all over the shop — from Death Valley set in California, to Seahenge on the Norfolk coast, to New Zealand for Risen Gods, and the biodynamic vineyards of Somerset for Blood Vintage. Everywhere I go I find places and people and artifacts and myths that spark story, and part of this show is about talking to authors who also experience the same thing. In Catnip for a Novelist, I talked to thriller and fantasy author Layton Green about how he uses his travels in book research. I love talking to Layton as his Dominic Grey thrillers are similar to my ARKANE stories, and we’ve written about some of the same places, even though we are very different people. “I will plan my books around where I want to travel, but of course if the narrative takes me elsewhere, I’ll follow the narrative. But usually they intertwine really closely and you can always work a place into the plot that you haven’t been before that you want to go. But a lot of my novels, as I’m getting into the plot and writing the story, things will come up or places will come up that I want to visit and I’ll just decide, okay, it’s on. That’s gonna be where I’m going and that’s part of the story. I’ve found that for me the best way is to take notes. As I travel, I take some pictures, but I never look at them for writing. I will take my little Moleskine notebook and my pen and definitely the best part of my job is, I’ll just go to a place and I’ll walk around and I’ll record my thoughts and impressions, and that I have found leads to my best writing. I think a hallmark of my writing is that I try to stay as true as possible, especially when it comes to setting. And the only caveat to that is the old parable of the blind men touching an elephant, where they’ll each touch a different part of the elephant, so they’ll come away with a vastly different conception of what an elephant is. I think it’s a little bit like that with travel. Take Zimbabwe for example. I’ve been very pleased to know that people from Zimbabwe have liked my book and the descriptions of it. But it’s probably written more for people that have not been to Zimbabwe or have only been a little bit. I’ve had plenty of books where I’ve had locals tell me that isn’t how this place is, and I’m thinking, actually it is. It was just my perception of it. “What I wrote about was true in its own way.” *** I love that phrase — “what I wrote about was true in its own way.” This applies to both fiction and memoir and anything that is fixed in time, because everything changes and we change, too. That’s part of why I love these conversations, because everyone has a different perspective and we get to dip in and just for a little while, try to experience something in a different way. In a conversation with literary fiction author Roz Morris about Travels without Sense of Direction, she talks about how she didn’t even know how much place affected her stories until writing her memoir. “I hadn’t realized how much actually until I wrote Not Quite Lost because I went back through a diary that I’d kept and — I found the seeds of my novels in that diary from travels I’d done 20 years before — I actually wrote the novels and I hadn’t realized how far those experiences and, and the impressions they’d given me. I hadn’t realized how far they’d stayed with me and so that’s quite a revelation. I found that my novel Life Form Three, which is set in an unspecified time in the future. All the countryside has gone except there is one country estate that’s been preserved because it belonged to somebody and it has trees and valleys and hills and a ruined house in a wood, and there’s nowhere else left like that in the entire country. And that came from the travels I’d written about in that diary and had forgotten about, so environment really inspires me. When you’re with horses, they make you very aware of the environment. I noticed the different colors of grass changing all the time and leaf buds and things like that. And a horse makes you very aware of it because a horse experiences the environment in a very different way. It can hear things you don’t even know are there. It notices smells and sounds that you don’t know are there. It makes you very aware of your environment. And I thought one day as I was riding on an old path and I thought under this path are probably the footprints of other people and other people on horses maybe. And it just made me feel there was a huge story about buried things and things that had gone and it was the horse that made me realize that we have this connection to nature. And then I thought, what if you wrote about a place where all that had nearly gone, and horses are like a conduit back to it.” *** I love that Roz talks there about being on a horse as a different way to experience a place. I’m allergic to horses, so I am never going to write from that perspective, but it’s good to consider how you can have an experience of travel without having to cross the world to some far off place. You can always see places near you with new eyes, which we all learned about in the pandemic when we couldn’t go so far. In an interview with Brianna Madia we talked about The Unexpected Road to an Unconventional Life and she talked about — Finding beautiful places close to home and looking at things in a new way. “I think that we get comfortable, and especially now with social media, we look online and we think that travel has to be a week holiday in a tropical place, or you have to be taking a selfie on an airplane in order to be traveling. And there were so many beautiful places that I could have easily gotten to over the weekend, back back in Connecticut. And I’m embarrassed at how little I explored where I actually grew up. And I think a lot of people feel that way. You just tend to fall into this routine of like, oh, I’ve probably seen it all. I think that that’s another reason that I’ve fallen so in love with the desert is I just know it’s such a classic example of a landscape where it’s impossible to have seen it all. You can always look and find something new and I wish I had applied that thinking to the place that I grew up because I believe there’s beautiful things everywhere.” *** We all find different things beautiful, and — One of my endless fascinations is with aspects of gothic and death culture — gothic architecture, graveyards, ossuaries, crypts, dark travel, ruins. I am basically like Wednesday from The Addams Family, except I don’t dress that way. I’m a vanilla goth. But while some people think these interests are morbid, others see memento mori — remember you will die — as a way to live harder, to live more in the present, and to make the most of every day. In my interview with Loren Rhoads about cemeteries and graveyards, we discussed being Life Obsessed, and talked about our favourite places to visit — “I don’t think it’s morbid at all. Somebody will accuse me of being death obsessed and for me, it’s the opposite. I am life obsessed. I know we’ve just got a certain number of days, so why wouldn’t you spend it out in the sunshine? Listening to birdsong and looking at beautiful art. What have you got to do with your life that’s better than that? I don’t know. I just don’t see cemeteries as morbid at all. I think it’s beautiful that we remember people. There are all these amazing stories in the cemetery that you can learn with a tour guide is the best way. But even just walking around and looking at the stones and reading the lovely old names and trying to make guesses about the iconography and their days of birth and death. It’s a way of connecting with the past that looking at architecture doesn’t do for me. Don’t let a day pass because you have a gift to bring to the world.” *** I love that attitude of being life-obsessed, and part of what I love about life is traveling and reading, which brings me back to why I am rebooting this show, and why I already have interviews planned with different guests and also some solo episodes coming too. I’m planning to release a new episode every second week, and you can also have a listen to the backlist. There are 92 episodes, most interviews around a book or a place or a mode of travel, or a philosophy, and others are solo shows where I talk about places I’ve lived and the places that have inspired my books. Every episode is evergreen so you can listen at any time, there’s nothing time-sensitive. I hope that you can escape virtually and enjoy traveling away even in your mind, and of course, there are book recommendations in every episode. There’s a transcript and photos and links for each episode all linked at BooksAndTravel.page/listen You can find my books and short stories at JFPennBooks.com and also on the usual stores. I also narrate some of my stories now, and most are available in audio format on all the major platforms. I’d love to hear what you think about the show, as well as any questions or book recommendations or ideas for future episodes, and send me pictures of where you’re listening and you can also follow me on Instagram @jfpennauthor. Happy travels — and I’ll see you next time! The post Curiosity, Reinvention, And Inspiration: The Return Of Books and Travel appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 1/27/23 | ![]() The Call To Pilgrimage, Resilience, And Embracing Challenge With J.F. Penn | Why is resilience such an important part of pilgrimage? How can embracing the challenge of the way help in daily life? Why do we need to heed the call to pilgrimage before it’s too late? I’m Jo Frances Penn and in this episode, I share some clips from podcast interviews I’ve done around my new book, Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways. Thanks to Travel Writing World with Jeremy Bassetti, Into the Woods with Holly Worton, and Sacred Steps with Kevin Donahue, podcasts you will enjoy as listeners to this show. As this goes out, Pilgrimage is available now in a special limited edition signed hardback, as well as a paperback, ebook, audiobook narrated by me, large print edition, and a workbook. In this episode, I talk about: Which were the three ancient ways I walked and why they’re interesting even if you’re not religious What I learned along the way The three types of energy you need at the different stages How pilgrimage reminds us we are animals, and how it gives a much-needed perspective on life. In this first clip from the Travel Writing World podcast with Jeremy Bassetti, I talk about the specific pilgrimages I walked and why they’re interesting, even if you’re not religious. Jeremy Bassetti: The book is called Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways. What were the three pilgrimage routes that you took during your walking adventures? Jo Frances Penn: So, I did the Pilgrims’ Way first, which is from Southwark Cathedral in London to Canterbury Cathedral in the southeast of England. And that’s the route of The Canterbury Tales, which I’m sure people have heard of, medieval tales by Geoffrey Chaucer and it was about visiting the shrine of Thomas Becket who was martyred under Henry II. And it was the pandemic and it was also the 850-year anniversary of the Becket martyrdom. So that kind of helped me decide to do that one. I couldn’t go and do the Camino during the pandemic because of course we couldn’t travel. And also, I’d highly recommend it as an easy route for a first multi-day solo. JFPenn on the sand crossing to Lindisfarne Then the second one was the St Cuthbert’s Way from Melrose in Scotland to Lindisfarne, Holy Island on the northeast coast of England. And St. Cuthbert was a medieval monk and a bishop. And, I wrote about Lindisfarne in my thriller Day of the Vikings, so I really wanted to do that and that was a spectacular route. I highly recommend the Cuthbert’s. Then finally there was the Camino, a goal I’ve had for several decades, and I did the Camino de Santiago Portuguese Coastal route from Porto in Portugal, up to Santiago De Compostela. I feel like the Camino is quite mythical for many people and certainly for me. And when I had COVID the year before, in 2021, and I was really sick and I realized that maybe one day I would not be able to walk — obviously at some point none of us will be able to walk, right, we will be dead! — and I thought, well, if I don’t do this now, maybe I’ll never do it. And I have said I wanted to do it for many years and now I’ve got to do it. So I committed and I’m so glad I did that route finally, and it really enabled me to finish the book, but yes, those were the three. Jeremy Bassetti: So I mean, these three pilgrimage routes that you mentioned here, that you went on, all have religious connotations, but you mentioned in the book that you are more secular-minded. How have you come to understand the act of pilgrimage from this secular position or perspective? Jo Frances Penn: Well, I am not a Christian, although I have a chapter in the book about my faith history. Many of us have this faith history by midlife, you know, an experience of finding God and losing him again or whatever that means to the individual. But I’m certainly spiritual. I consider myself spiritual and I mean, you talk about genius loci, the spirit of the place. And I absolutely have had moments of connection with whatever we want to call it, the universe or God if you want, in different places. And certainly did on these routes too. So while I am secular — as in I don’t adhere to a particular religion — I absolutely respect people of faith. I have a master’s degree in Theology, and pretty much all my fiction is based on religion and I love religious places. What is wonderful about these pilgrimage routes, these ancient ways, is that people have walked these particular routes in Europe for a thousand years, and that’s what gives them a lot of resonance. It also means they’re packed full of amazing churches and cathedrals and beautiful architecture. And I love architecture. I’m a super fan of architecture. So I guess the pilgrimage aspect is both the walking from here to here, the historical side of it, and the beautiful places along the way. Canterbury Cathedral Ceiling Photo by JFPenn My discussion with Jeremy continues into why walking is healing and why pilgrimage in particular can heal deeper wounds of the soul, how the gifts of pilgrimage come with hindsight, why we travel, and how to figure out what kind of travel book to write. You can listen to the rest of the episode on Travel Writing World on your favorite podcast app. Jeremy also has interviews with travel writers like Pico Iyer, Colin Thubron, and many more on his show, or check out his website TravelWritingWorld.com In this next section, I’m interviewed by Holly Worton on her Into The Woods Podcast, which is fantastic for solo adventures, pushing your comfort zone in the outdoors and in life, and generally has lots of interviews with people about all kinds of travel. In this clip, we talk about what I learned from pilgrimage including the aspect of memento mori, and then the three types of energy involved in a pilgrimage. *** Holly Worton: What did you learn from your pilgrimages? What did you get out of them? Because I know you’d said that you walked them during very challenging times, which of course the entire world was going through Jo Frances Penn: Yes, well, I think the biggest thing was resilience. And again, I mean, you talk about this with the solo adventures and or anything that pushes your comfort zone. So, for example, I’ve done a lot of walking holidays with tour companies like Exodus, and I’m reasonably fit. So the walking aspect is one thing, but doing it alone is difficult. And in fact, you recommended the NNAS navigation course. Holly: Yes, of course. Jo: I went on one of those. Because I was like, ‘I don’t know how to read a map.’ Well, I did in Girl Guides, but you know, it’s been a long time. So I re-skilled. And then it was facing up to the fears around being alone or getting lost, which I did — and getting sick. I didn’t get sick on the walks but of course, the fear of sickness while walking during the beginning of the pandemic, particularly when none of us had got it yet. We were very afraid, even though now we know there was hardly any round at that time, but it kind of emerged. Walking in pain was a challenge. So on the Camino, I had pretty bad blisters the second week and you have to get up every morning and you’re like, ‘I really don’t want to walk on these feet,’ but I’m going to do it anyway. So yes, I think this gift of structure, the boundaries, the resilience of learning new things. Just the escape from daily life is also really important and that perspective that we talked about. And then the other thing that I always think about a lot is the memento mori idea of, “remember, you will die,” but in a positive way, as in life is short, so make the most of it. I think it’s much more obvious on pilgrimage routes because for example, if you go to Southwark Cathedral in London, at the start of the Pilgrim’s Way, that has been a church for a thousand years, and then you get to Canterbury and again, it’s been there since medieval times. You walk through these places and you realize how many other people have been here or the people who built those sculptures. And what’s interesting at Southwark and Canterbury, and you rarely see such things, but there are these two cadaver tombs. That’s what they’re called. The tombs have a cadaver on. Normally if you see a medieval tomb or any kind of tomb, there’s maybe a knight lying on the top in full armor or a noble person with all their robes, and they look like a living human lying down on a bed or something. Cadaver monument of Henry Chichele, Archbishop of Canterbury (died 1443), Canterbury Cathedral. Photo by JFPenn But both Southwark and Canterbury have these cadaver tombs where the figure on the top is a dead body. And this is very rare. In Canterbury it’s even more unusual because it’s like bunk beds. The Archbishop built this while he was alive, so he could look at it every time he preached. On the bottom level is him as a cadaver naked except for a little shroud. Then on the bunk bed above is him dressed in his full archbishop’s finery. Obviously, it’s meant to teach you that it doesn’t matter what you are in life. One day you will just be this dead body and you will turn to dust. And I find this invigorating and it helps me live every day better because I know I’m going to die. And it was weird on the Camino because it was the second or third day of my Camino when Queen Elizabeth II died. And so I walked the route, and that whole week the TVs were full of her life. So often we look at ourselves in the mirror and we might see a picture of us as younger people and be like, oh, you know, I’m getting old, or whatever. But there are pictures of the Queen her entire life, and they were all on TV, so you could actually see this woman’s life from child to middle age to death. And it was that memento mori idea again that we remember as we walk and to make the most of these things while we’re alive. Because one day I will not be able to walk the Camino or another pilgrimage. So do the things you want to do while you still can — but in a positive way! Graves in Boxley churchyard, Kent, England Photo by JFPenn Holly Worton: So in your book, you talk about the three stages of a pilgrimage, and I really like this perspective. So what are they? Jo Frances Penn: The first one is starting energy, which is turning it from a dream into a goal. So it took me like 20 years to actually book the Camino, 25 years or whatever. So it’s the organization, it’s booking time off, it’s training, it’s getting past those fears and obstacles. It’s figuring out all the practical stuff because you think, oh yes, I’ll just be walking and I’ll have my spiritual moments, but there’s a hell of a lot of practical stuff to actually get it going. So starting energy is everything up to the night before and then pushing through energy is once you are actually on the route. It’s ‘I really want to give up because I’m in pain’ or I’m actually injured, or I’m really, really bored with wearing the same clothes and washing them every day and the same food, the same bread, you know, whatever. Holly: It’s the other challenges along the way, like the Camino you mentioned being busy — Jo: Yes, those last few days are busy and I was annoyed at other pilgrims, I was like, I am so annoyed that this pilgrim is playing music. Or I’m annoyed that there are literally a hundred pilgrims ahead of me. I can see them all on the path, and I do not like this. And that was a challenge in itself because whereas the Cuthbert’s, for example, I was alone on a hill in a storm. And that’s a completely different challenge. But that pushing through energy is, “I am going to finish. I can do this, I will get through this. I just need to put one foot in front of the other and keep going.” JFPenn in rain on the final full day of the St Cuthbert’s Way So that’s the pushing through energy that gets you to the end. And then the finishing energy is that return, and the reflection and learning the lessons. Maybe it’s printing the pictures that you did or taking your journal and turning it into something else, facing the questions that you thought of while you were on the walk. Because when you get home, what happens is you put your clothes in the wash. That’s like one of the first things that you do. You get all the crap out of your backpack and you give your partner a cuddle and you cuddle your pets and then you log onto your email and you start all the backlog of stuff you need to catch up on and paying bills, and it’s very easy to just get back and get on with life. But you need that finishing energy to review what happened because the gifts of pilgrimage take some time. It’s so weird because I thought I would write three guidebooks like you have your guidebooks, your reflective books, and yet this book, it just wouldn’t come. I couldn’t figure it out. And then when I finished my Camino, I finally understood what the pattern was and what I learned from all three routes. So the subtitle is Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways. And I almost feel like I couldn’t have learned those lessons without all three of them. And I say in the book, if you don’t feel that there are any gifts from your pilgrimage, then perhaps you haven’t walked enough. Maybe you need to go on another pilgrimage. I thought I could change my life with a weekend walk but no, it took longer than I expected. *** You can listen to the rest of the episode on the Into The Woods Podcast on your favorite podcast app — and Holly and I talk about why pilgrimage is different to other long-distance walks, some of the interesting historical and spiritual aspects, how we both remember reading Paulo Coelho’s Pilgrimage book back in the 90s, how we both enjoy the feeling of insignificance, why we have to revisit the memories of our trips or they fade away, and much more. Holly’s show is one I personally listen to and I think you’ll enjoy the range of her interviews. She also has guidebooks to solo walking routes like The Ridgeway and more, and she has been on this podcast before in episode 42 about solo walking — In fact, my discussions with Holly about her adventures and her books helped inspire my own, so definitely check out her show. J.F. Penn with Kevin Donahue on Sacred Steps Podcast talking about pilgrimage In this final clip, I talk to Kevin Donahue on the Sacred Steps Podcast which is all about pilgrimage, and Kevin has had some fantastic guests on to talk about lots of different routes, and he’s also been on this show in episode 86 talking about his pilgrimages. We almost met in person as we crossed the sands to Lindisfarne just days apart, but we never quite made it, so it was lovely to talk again. You can listen as a podcast or watch the interview on YouTube. In this segment, we talk about how pilgrimage reminds us we are animals, and how it gives a much-needed perspective on life. *** Kevin: How has this series of walks and these journeys influenced or impacted your sense of spirituality? Jo Frances Penn: There’s a book in the Bible that I really like, Ecclesiastes. It’s one of my favorite books in the Bible. And I have a Master’s in Theology even though I’m not a Christian anymore. But there’s a quote that I actually put into the book, “As for humans, God tests them so they might know they are animals.” And I just love that quote because that to me is something I need to remember. My animal body is what walks a pilgrimage. And my spiritual mind and my intellectual mind are part of my physical body. And I feel like so much sometimes, like you and I, we are not physically in the same space. We can see each other, but we’re connecting with our minds across this virtual space. And yet, pilgrimage is such a physical journey. JFPenn on the Camino out of Arcade And also I was going through the female experience of midlife, hormonal changes, which have a very animal effect. You are just completely out of control. You are like, what the hell is happening to me? And I have no control over this. And then like we mentioned, the tides and all these transient things and the idea of memento mori. So when I walked the Camino Portuguese, Queen Elizabeth II died in the UK and as I walked every day that week, her pictures were on all the TVs that you walked past in the cafes and stuff. So they showed her whole life, the beautiful young woman who ascended the throne across the challenges of midlife to her old age, her husband dying, and her dying. And it was like, I’m not a queen, but I’m another woman. And I see this woman’s life and it will all end, and to me that is so important to remember for my spiritual side. It’s a sense of being part of this wonderful world and this amazing universe, whether you believe God created it or not. The sense of being an animal walking across the face of the world and nothing else matters. Like that’s the thing. Nothing else matters. Now, of course, everything matters. Your family matters. My husband matters. My cats matter, my work matters. But when you are walking a pilgrimage and you have that simple life — and the gratitude. I am so grateful for this cold beer or this shade of this tree or the hot shower when I’m really sweaty and it’s gross and I just want a shower or the painkillers. I’m so grateful for the pharmaceutical industry, for my blister plasters and my painkillers, and my Albarino wine and like all those things. It’s that perspective. That’s what it comes down to. Being able to hold onto that perspective when everything feels overwhelming and you’re just like, what is the point? And then you realize this is the point. The point is being an animal in the world. *** I hope you found those clips interesting, and you can listen to the complete episodes on the podcast feeds for Travel Writing World with Jeremy Bassetti, Into the Woods with Holly Worton, and Sacred Steps with Kevin Donahue. Pilgrimage is available now in a special limited edition signed hardback, as well as a paperback, ebook, audiobook narrated by me, large print edition, and a workbook. Happy travels until next time. Pin on Pinterest The post The Call To Pilgrimage, Resilience, And Embracing Challenge With J.F. Penn appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 1/8/23 | ![]() Pilgrimage: The Perspective Of History And Glimpses Of The Divine | How can walking in the path of history put life in perspective? How can you find a glimpse of the divine in unexpected places? In this episode, I share two chapters from my book, Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways. You can buy the audiobook, as well as the special edition hardback, paperback and ebook, at www.JFPenn.com/pilgrimage Walking in the path of history puts life in perspective “Nothing ever is, everything is becoming… All things are passing and nothing abides.” —Heraclitus On each of my three pilgrimages, I encountered places where I was aware of walking through history, where there was a sense of life being but a brief flash of light across the span of time. My passing on each route was momentary, but pilgrims have walked the same ways for hundreds of years and will continue to walk for generations to come. Southwark Cathedral Nave, London. Photo by JFPenn The three historic cathedrals are must-visit locations — Southwark Cathedral and Canterbury Cathedral on the Pilgrims’ Way, and the Cathedral of Santiago de Compostela at the end of the Camino. Each has their splendours, and it’s worth allowing extra time to visit them. In the same way, the ruined abbey of Lindisfarne and its associated church are insights into history — but these are all obvious highlights. Here are some other places where I felt a historical perspective. Mosaic mural on the Old Kent Road, London, England The first day’s walk on the Pilgrims’ Way from Southwark Cathedral is through gritty, urban sprawl along a main road, dense with traffic. It might not look like much, but this is the Old Kent Road, originally built by the Romans, linking London to the coast near Dover, and later renamed Watling Street by the Anglo-Saxons. At a busy corner with Peckham Park Road, under the overhanging porch of the Everlasting Arms Ministry, lies a gigantic thousand-square-foot mosaic mural. The History of Old Kent Road by Adam Kossowski has separate panels, each portraying an era of history. The foundation of the city by Romans in their togas surrounded by soldiers with military standards, then medieval London with Chaucer’s pilgrims heading for Canterbury and a quote from the poem. King Henry V rides in triumph along the road after the battle of Agincourt, followed by the rebellion of Jack Cade against the government. King Charles II reclaims the throne in the next panel, and then modern London emerges with its British ‘bobby’ policeman, Pearly Kings and Queens with their mother-of-pearl button suits, and the factories of the city with modern cars driving along. The mural encapsulates two thousand years of history and yet most pass by without realising that the stones they drive over or walk along have witnessed such historical events. Historic mural on Pilgrims Way Photo by JFPenn The artist himself represents another aspect of modern history. Adam Kossowski was Polish and arrived in the UK as a refugee from the Soviet labour camps in 1943. As well as this mural, he created many other artistic works, including the History of the Carmelites of Aylesford, at the abbey, which also lies on the Pilgrims’ Way and where he was buried after his death in 1986. Lesnes Abbey, London, England The ruins of twelfth-century Lesnes Abbey (pronounced ‘lane’) lie on the Pilgrims’ Way in an ancient woodland in east London. Founded in 1178 by the Chief Justiciar to Henry II, it may have been part of a penance to atone for the murder of Archbishop Thomas Becket. After the Dissolution of the Monasteries in the sixteenth century, the abbey fell into ruin and was eventually lost to farmland before being restored in modern times. The ruins now feature much-appreciated public toilets and a cafe along the Green Chain Walk that forms part of the Pilgrims’ Way. There is a memorial of three triple archways that overlook the ruins, and an ancient mulberry tree with the skyscrapers of the city of London framed on the horizon. The mulberry tree represents patience, as it will not bud until there is no danger of frost. Its red berries also represent sacrifice, as depicted by Shakespeare’s forbidden lovers Pyramis and Thisbe, who died under a mulberry bush, their blood staining the berries red. Lesnes Abbey Ruins, London. Photo by JFPenn Lesnes Abbey is a place of ancient nature and medieval faith against a backdrop of modern London. Well worth a visit. The cadaver tombs of Southwark and Canterbury Cathedrals, England There are unusual cadaver tombs in both Southwark and Canterbury Cathedral, at the beginning and the end of the Pilgrims’ Way. These are rare depictions of the deceased as corpses as opposed to the grand effigies usually sitting above the tombs of nobility. The Southwark cadaver is the medieval tomb of Thomas Cure, who died in 1588, the same year as the Spanish Armada, during the reign of Elizabeth I. Its skeletal frame is weathered by time, its face disintegrated. It’s clearly a dead body, partially wrapped in a shroud, a simple representation of the inevitability of death. Medieval cadaver tomb, Southwark Cathedral, London. Photo by JFPenn The Canterbury cadaver tomb is on an entirely different scale in terms of grandeur. The tomb of Archbishop Henry Chichele, who died in 1443, has two levels, one showing the effigy of the deceased man in full ecclesiastical robes and, underneath, the cadaver stripped of all its finery, lying naked except for a shroud. It’s surrounded by an ornately decorated arch with figures from church history. A tour guide told me that the archbishop had the tomb built many years before his death so he could look at it every day and contemplate his end. Cadaver monument of Henry Chichele, Archbishop of Canterbury (died 1443), Canterbury Cathedral. Photo by JFPenn St Cuthbert’s Cave, Northumberland, England This natural sandstone cave lies within a National Trust reserve on the final day’s walk towards Lindisfarne, Holy Island. The cave has a wide mouth and is ringed by a wood of Scots pine. According to legend, the monks fleeing from a medieval Viking invasion stopped in the cave with the remains of St Cuthbert. It doesn’t really matter if his body lay there over a thousand years ago. The cave is clearly a natural shelter from the dark and cold and wild weather, and humans certainly rested and slept here over millennia. There is fire damage and graffiti, both old and new, evidence of people making their mark across time. On my approach to the cave, an adder with its distinctive zig-zag markings crossed the path in front of me. A protected species, the adder is the UK’s only venomous snake, but they are secretive creatures and rarely seen. I had never seen one in the wild before, and it was a precious moment. St Cuthbert’s Cave Photo by JFPenn As I sat on a rock in the rain eating my lunch, there was a sense of being part of an ancient environment. If I slept in the cave in the dark of night, perhaps I might hear the crackle of ancient flames and the whisper of the long-dead. Memento mori — Remember, you will die While walking an ancient route like the Camino de Santiago helps the pilgrim to reflect on mortality, it is almost impossible to comprehend a thousand years of pilgrims walking ahead and many more coming behind. But while I walked in September 2022, I had a vivid reminder of memento mori — remember, you will die — as Queen Elizabeth II died at the age of ninety-six on the second day of my pilgrimage. Snippets of her life punctuated each following day of my Camino on TV in coffee bars and glimpses of newspapers, and I couldn’t help but read some of the UK media coverage online when resting at the end of the day. It was strange to walk outside of my country during such a historically significant week. I remember seeing newly carved statues of the Queen and Prince Philip mounted outside the cathedral in Canterbury on my first pilgrimage in October 2020. The stone was paler than the other sculptures of historic monarchs. The features weren’t yet weathered — and of course, both were still alive then. There was a sense of standing next to living history, as another generation passed, and now they are both gone. I am not an ardent royalist by any means, but the Queen was a constant across my life, as she was for many people in the UK and around the world. As I walked my Camino, the news was full of pictures of her as a young woman, then middle-aged going through the trials of life, then an old woman at her husband’s funeral, and in her final days, standing bent over and smiling as she welcomed the new Prime Minister. The span of an extraordinary life against the backdrop of history. Her life passed by, as will mine and yours. Even a Queen cannot hold back the end. I walked into Santiago de Compostela on the day of her funeral and, as I rested in my hotel that afternoon, I watched her coffin being lowered into the vault at Windsor Castle. It was a fitting end to my pilgrimage and underscored the sense that something must die for change to happen — new life will emerge from the ashes of the old. Graves in Boxley churchyard, Kent, England Photo by JFPenn Questions: What aspects of history form part of your pilgrimage route? Which are you interested in visiting? Sometimes it is the unexpected places that mean the most. How can you keep an open mind so serendipity may alight at other times? How can ‘memento mori’ help you put life into perspective? A glimpse of the divine in sacred places “All such sites are regarded as thin places, set apart from the world, moving to a different drum, and possessed of an innately special atmosphere because of their connection to another, higher dimension.” —Peter Stanford, Pilgrimage: Journeys of Meaning The paths and final destinations of great pilgrimage routes have been imbued with so much meaning over centuries, they call both to those who believe and those who don’t follow a particular faith. The depth of history and belief of the faithful over generations impart a deeper resonance to certain places where the veil is thin, and you are closer to God, or a sense of the divine. Your pilgrimage will have moments of spiritual meaning if you are open to them, although, of course, they may come at unexpected times. Here are some moments where I glimpsed the divine while walking these ancient ways. Crayford Ness, near Dartford, England I was exhausted as I emerged from the Thames Path Walkway and passed through the gritty, urban sprawl of Erith in East London. I’d already walked around thirty-eight kilometres that day, and I still had several more to walk before I reached my hotel in Dartford. It was October, and dusk was fast approaching. I took a wrong turn and found myself alongside a busy dual carriageway, the noise of so many cars jolting me back into the modern world. I considered getting a bus or even a taxi to carry me through the last few kilometres, but I had promised myself I would walk every step of my pilgrimage and this was only the first day. As I trudged on through an industrial estate echoing with the rumble of cranes hauling heavy equipment, the screech of trucks, and the shouts of workers, I wondered what the hell I was doing there. But then the path opened out onto a flood plain where horses grazed on common land, and the way ahead ran alongside the river once more. This was Erith Saltings, an ancient salt marsh, part of the Thames estuary that can’t be built upon as the tide may wash it away. The remains of an ancient fossilised forest dating back to Neolithic times over five thousand years ago lie partially submerged beneath the water, and on the opposite bank lies the Rainham Marshes Nature Reserve. Oyster catchers waded in the shallows, and a regal heron rested on a solitary spar emerging from the water. But this is no pristine wilderness. The path runs alongside a recycling centre, with the stink of waste coming from huge sorting bins filled with all kinds of discarded human detritus. I turned my back on the industrial centre and looked out over the salt marsh, as a flock of Canada geese flew overhead, calling to one another in the dusk. With the warbling trill of skylarks and the whistle of the wind off the river, I stood in a moment out of time. The ancient forest buried beneath the waters once echoed with birdsong, and, after human civilisation has passed away, the birds will sing on. Whether it was the juxtaposition of such ugliness alongside natural beauty, or the timelessness of the fossilised forest with the ephemeral sound of birdsong — or just my exhaustion — I stepped into a thin place there. After a time, a metallic crash jolted me back to the present. I turned to see an urban fox waiting by the side of the industrial centre, an inquisitive look on his face as I passed by. My pack seemed lighter as I walked the rest of the way along the River Darent into Dartford, grateful that I had not skipped this part of the journey. Evensong at Canterbury Cathedral, England It was dark outside when I entered the cathedral, my final destination on the Pilgrims’ Way. With my mask in place, I walked to my solitary chair in the nave, directed by a similarly masked attendant who made sure all present followed pandemic rules. There were a few other people there, all separated by several metres, the space around us cold in the autumn evening. The choir entered in a line, walking across the nave in robes of purple, all of them masked. They arranged themselves on the steps in front of the quire screen, physically distanced, before removing their face coverings. They sang psalms in Latin, their voices soaring high into the vault above, harmonising together even as they stood so far apart. This cathedral was built for the glory of God and these men sang for Him too, but also surely for the sheer joy of human voices coming together in song at a time of so much separation. Ancient stone, ancient words, ancient faith — and the transience of each note disappearing into silence once more. I stayed for the service, but it was the practice before that truly moved me, and those minutes almost alone in the cathedral nave that freed my spirit. A fitting end to my Pilgrims’ Way. Cloisters, Canterbury Cathedral. Photo by JFPenn Walking across the sands to Lindisfarne, Holy Island I rose before the dawn on the final morning of my pilgrimage on the St Cuthbert’s Way. I stood at a farm gate looking east into the rising sun, next to a field of curious alpacas and chickens quietly clucking in their roost. As the darkness lifted, the castle on Lindisfarne stood in silhouette against bars of coral clouds, shot through with luminous yellow and pink as the sun rose above the horizon. The end was so close now. I was relieved because my muscles ached and I wanted to stop and rest and not walk another day, but I was also sad that the journey was almost over. I wanted to finish the path, but also to keep going. Yet there is nothing beyond Lindisfarne, only the North Sea, and I would reach the furthest point that day. The clearing sky indicated that the weather would be fine for my crossing of the sands, but I still felt some trepidation. The tidal website warned it was only safe to cross with a guide, and there were tales of walkers lost to the sea in the fog, or cars stranded on the causeway as water reclaimed the land. But I had prepared, and I knew it was safe to cross. All that remained was to step off onto the sands that the sea left behind. As the sky turned pale blue, I returned to the farm to retrieve my pack, hefting it onto my shoulders for the last time. It was only a few kilometres from the farm to the edge of the causeway. I walked with Dave and Keith, pilgrims I had met a few days back after getting lost on the boggy moor. On the way down, Keith and I discovered we had both studied theology and read many of the same books. Whereas I had turned my degree into the basis of my thrillers, he had spent a life of service as a social worker, supporting those with mental health issues. We disagreed on matters of faith, but there was a spark of intellectual connection. Pilgrimage encourages the discussion of such deeper matters and I fleetingly wished we could carry on our debate. But we were soon at the edge of South Low, where the tide had turned and the waters were receding. Several enormous concrete blocks lay just before the causeway, anti-tank sea defences from World War II. There were signs warning of unexploded ordnance in the area as well as quicksand, and more warnings of what could happen if the tide cut you off. It was hard to imagine the military swarming over this area, now a National Nature Reserve, protected for the biodiversity of life within its shifting sands and tidal waters. A series of marker poles stretched across the sand to Lindisfarne, interspersed by two wooden refuges on stilts for those who could not beat the tide. The sky was pale blue and clouds scudded high above, and I could see all the way to Holy Island. It was safe to cross. JFPenn on the sand crossing to Lindisfarne I rolled my walking trousers up above my knees. Walking barefoot was the traditional way to cross, but I had blisters and raw patches on my feet, so I wore my walking shoes with waterproof socks. I grasped my poles to steady myself — then stepped off the causeway onto the sand. I wanted to walk the final stretch alone, so after taking photos with Keith and Dave, I let them stride ahead. The sand was initially firm underfoot as I followed the path of tall wooden poles towards Holy Island. I skirted around deeper pools of water, stepping over the wiggly casts of lugworms and the footprints of wader birds. Gulls flew overhead, their calls piercing the air. There were patches of grass in places and channels of deeper water to navigate, with sections of sucking mud which I clambered through, using my walking poles to gain a more even footing. I almost lost one shoe in the mud, and it was certainly a more challenging walk than I expected. Less a stroll across firm sand, and more an adventure to reach the final destination. The lower parts of the wooden guide poles were covered with barnacles and bladder wrack seaweed, surrounded by winkle shells and long strands of sea grass. Crabs scuttled in the shallow water, trying to sink away from the light. The upper parts of the poles that lay above the tide were stark white, reflecting the morning sun, and I could imagine pilgrims spotting them with relief on a foggy crossing. I stopped halfway across and turned my back on the causeway, looking south across the water to Bamburgh Castle in the distance. A mournful sound pierced the air, a low moan like a chill wind sweeping through ruins. The call of grey seals out on the sand flats, singing as they have for generations of pilgrims. I was just one more in a long line stretching back through history, and my footsteps would wash away with the tide like all who walked here before me. The crossing took about ninety minutes, with time enough to navigate slowly around the mud and deeper water channels. I finally clambered up the bank on the other side and sat on a bench, looking back at the mainland as I changed into dry shoes. Walker on the sands crossing away from Lindisfarne Photo by JFPenn As with my arrival at Canterbury Cathedral a year ago, there was no fanfare, no one cheering the finish line of my pilgrimage. Only a quiet sense of satisfaction that I had accomplished what I set out to do. After one last look back at the crossing, I walked into Lindisfarne village. After days of solitude, it was a shock to find hundreds of day-trippers pouring out of coaches and cars, streaming over the causeway while it was open during the narrow tidal window. Throngs of tourists rammed into ice cream shops, artists’ studios, and cafes, spilling out into the narrow streets. While I ate a local crab sandwich in front of the Lindisfarne Mead shop, I wondered what St Cuthbert would have made of the modern Holy Island. There was a frenetic energy about the place as day-trippers rushed to see everything before hurrying back to escape the incoming tide. Some people glanced sideways at me, in a very judgmental English way, as if they didn’t appreciate my muddy pack and dishevelled appearance. It was strange to re-enter the real world again. I hoisted my pack back on and walked to the ruined abbey while it was still open and then visited the parish church of St Mary the Virgin. A full-sized statue of monks carrying the coffin of St Cuthbert stood inside, and I felt more of a connection with those medieval walkers than the modern religious tourists filling the aisles. As the island emptied, I walked east to Lindisfarne Castle along the shore. Tourists ran in the opposite direction to catch their buses and I was grateful I’d booked a night on the island when it became quiet once more. I walked until I reached the coast, where cairns of balanced stones stood overlooking the rough waters of the North Sea. The lands beyond were those of Norway and Denmark, and this was the way the Vikings arrived in the eighth century, bringing violence to the abbey and causing the monks to scatter. Coffee at dawn on Lindisfarne Island Photo by JFPenn I wrote about Lindisfarne in my novella Day of the Vikings, a modern-day thriller set against the history of invasion and a supernatural power called down from the ancients. Now finally there in person, I sensed a different power. One that emanated from the island and the tide. There was a part of me that wanted to stay there, to sink into island life, and allow the tide to cut off my access to the wider world. As I walked back from the castle, a murmuration of starlings swooped above the wetlands. As they soared in unison, forming and reforming different shapes in the twilight, I remembered seeing the same thing at Stonehenge a decade ago. Another place where the veil is thin, a glimpse into a timeless realm where I am just another pilgrim in another sunset. Questions: Where have you experienced this sense of the divine or felt that the veil is thin? How can you remain open to the spiritual aspects of pilgrimage without expectation of such moments? Pilgrimage is available now: www.JFPenn.com/pilgrimage Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways by J.F. Penn The post Pilgrimage: The Perspective Of History And Glimpses Of The Divine appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 11/30/22 | ![]() The Meaning of Travel With Emily Thomas | In this wide-ranging interview, Emily Thomas talks about the importance of perspective and time in travel writing, how sublime moments of pleasurable terror make travel so interesting, how to overcome fears both real and imaginary, as well as the ethics of doom tourism, and how VR (virtual reality) might change how we travel in future. Dr. Emily Thomas is an associate professor in philosophy at Durham University in England. She’s also the author of several books, including The Meaning of Travel: Philosophers Abroad. Traveling is about experiencing otherness, going to places that are new and unfamiliar and trying to figure out how to make sense of them Sublime moments in travel as a kind of pleasurable terror Tackling fears, both real and imagined Research before a trip, and arriving in Malawi, Africa How do travel books blur the line between fiction and nonfiction, and why is this so important to address stereotypes “There is no view from nowhere.” Perspective in travel writing Maps as processes, and how they change over time. The importance of knowing ‘when’ a book was written and the perspective of the writer. Doom tourism How VR (virtual reality) might improve aspects of travel, and what we want to keep as in-person experiences Recommended travel books You can find Emily at www.EmilyThomasWrites.co.uk and on Twitter @emilytwrites Shareable and header image generated by Jo Frances Penn on Midjourney. Transcript of interview (lightly edited) Jo Frances Penn Dr. Emily Thomas is an associate professor in philosophy at Durham University in England. She’s also the author of several books, including The Meaning of Travel: Philosophers Abroad, which we’re talking about today. So welcome, Emily. Emily Thomas Hello. It’s a pleasure to be here. Jo Frances Penn I’m excited to talk about this topic. What drew you to write a book about travel and philosophy, since one seems quite internal, and the other one quite external? Emily Thomas That’s right. So I have been a professional philosopher for more than 10 years, but far longer than that I have been a backpacker. So I did buckets of traveling when I was younger. And at some point, when I was writing about philosophy, I began wondering, does philosophy have anything to say about travel? Is there some way that I can bring these two parts of my life together, and I started doing some research. And to my delight, I found that philosophy has lots to say about travel. And that was how the book was born. Jo Frances Penn What does travel mean to you? Emily Thomas For me, traveling is all about experiencing otherness. It’s all about going to places that are new and unfamiliar. And trying to figure out how to make sense of them, how to map them on to the world that you do know. My best travel experiences have actually been ones where I have gone to some place where I haven’t understood anything around me. Not not the language, not what’s going on in the street, not the social cues and I have very slowly, by reading and talking to people, come to put the pieces together and come to understand the place. Jo Frances Penn That’s interesting. So you have otherness and the new and the unfamiliar. Does that mean that for you, traveling say within England, doesn’t count as travel? Emily Thomas There are definitely places within England that I don’t know at all and might give me that travel unfamiliarity experience. But you’re right, I think that to be really immersed in the unknown for me, I’m going to have to go farther afield than that. Jo Frances Penn Absolutely. So you have this chapter on sublime tourism, which is so often the special moments we remember, rather than all the difficulties around it. Tell us a bit more about some of your own sublime moments in travel. Emily Thomas So I should explain that I use the word sublime in a technical way, to mean a very specific kind of feeling that was picked out by 18th-century Irish philosopher Edmund Burke. When you have a sublime feeling, it’s a kind of pleasurable terror. So it’s the kind of enjoyable fear that you get from standing close to a waterfall, but not too close. You can feel the spray on your face, but you’re not actually afraid of falling over. And I had definitely had a lot of those kinds of moments whilst traveling that often because I’ve done almost all my traveling by myself, just rocking up in a new place that I find really terrifying. And also really exciting on the other. I think the first time I really powerfully experienced that. I was 18. And I spent a couple of months wandering around China, the very first time I arrived in a big new city, and I stepped out of the hotel room, just not understanding anything that was going on around me it was really scary, but also exhilarating. Forbidden City, Beijing. Photo licensed from BigStockPhoto Jo Frances Penn That’s really interesting that you call it that ‘pleasurable terror.’ And in the book, you also quote Camus, “what gives the value to travel is fear.” And it’s interesting. You talk there about terror, you’re using the word fear in the book. What are some of the fears that you’ve had to face? When have they been real? When have they been imagined? Emily Thomas Some of the fears, I think, are very reasonable to have and they are not pleasurable. So for example, walking through a city by yourself where you’re conscious that it’s not very safe, that the crime rates are very high, and you’re afraid of being attacked or mugged. That’s not fun. They are not imagined fears either. But I think there are other fears are more exciting. And in a pleasurable way. I might have a fear that if I walk into a city I don’t know very well. I’m going to get lost. Well, actually, really, what’s the worst that’s going to happen? You know, I get lost it and I ended up asking for directions in a coffee shop or something. The feeling of oh, maybe I could be lost. That’s quite nice. Have I personally been in some scrapes? I have. What especially springs to mind when people ask me that question. I was once in a taxi in Zimbabwe that caught fire, and the driver refused to pull over. It was just there was smoke, I mean, we could see flames on the bonnet. And he was like, no, it’ll be fine, like we don’t have to stop the car. Jo Frances Penn Oh, wow. Okay. So you’ve talked about solo travel, and fear of being attacked, specifically as a solo woman. I mean, that can happen if one is just in London late at night or in Newcastle late at night or something. I mean, that doesn’t have to be a foreign fear. But if it’s in a foreign country, it feels like things will just be more difficult, even like asking someone where the bathroom is, like when I traveled in India, that can be a moment of fear. How can we overcome some of these fears in order to travel to new places? Emily Thomas I’ve recently been reading about stoicism, which is a particular kind of philosophy dating back to Roman times. And one of the suggestions they have is that when you’re afraid of something, you should actually sit down in your mind and work through what could possibly happen. Like what is the worst case scenario? And how would you deal with that, if that comes up. And I personally get scared by the unknown. So the idea of landing in a new place that I find quite scary, I find it scary, because I have no idea what to expect when I’m there. But if I actually really go back and start thinking, Okay, this is where I want to go. And okay, and this is how taxis or whatever it might work here. The more knowledge that I have about the place that I find that the fear goes away. It’s like horror movies, right? You know, the unseen monster or ghost is always much scarier than when you actually see the ridiculous special effects that the producer has drummed up for your movie entertainment delight, Jo Frances Penn Which is why you don’t often see the monster — then the actual fear is like, Oh, right. It’s just another vampire. Emily Thomas Yeah, exactly. Right. Jo Frances Penn That’s really interesting that you say that in terms of a guidebook, for example. So let’s put that under the category of research. You can research a place and for me, it’s like I often I will research lots of places, but then I just concentrate on getting off the plane to the first night’s accommodation. And even if I’m doing more free-range travel, I will have a first night’s accommodation booked. And also as a solo woman traveler, I will make sure the plane arrives at a time of day that is appropriate. I had a terrible experience arriving at 2 am in Tel Aviv, Israel, back in the early 90s. And the war with Iraq was going on. And it was honestly one of the scariest times. I was in a new city. I don’t know what the hell I’m doing. I was before the internet, etc. So you’ve just arrived in Malawi in Africa, which I have talked about on the show in episode 1 because I went to school there. Jo Frances Penn in Malawi in the early 1980s How has this research and discovery process worked with Malawi? Emily Thomas One thing that makes this trip a bit different for me is that I’m actually living here for a few months. So rather than traveling around moving on every night or two, that I’m actually settling in. It was quite similar in some ways, I had the first couple of nights’ accommodation booked, but then I had to go out and look at apartments to set myself up. And now it’s a case of really trying to understand how basic things work. So things I was not expecting include there are many power cuts every day. And so it is not a good idea, for example, if you are working as I am to let your laptop go very low on battery, because otherwise when the next power cut comes you might run out of battery quite quickly. So really, really basic things about how to live here is what I’m now trying to get to grips with. Jo Frances Penn I think money is something really interesting because before the pandemic, one would turn up in various countries and you might have been able to get some local currency or you just take US dollars or another currency that people accept. But what I’ve discovered is post-pandemic, even really out-of-the-way places take mobile payments or digital payments. And of course, Africa has a lot of mobile payments. So how’s the money working? I know it’s very practical, but money is a big deal, right? Emily Thomas It is a really big deal. And you’re absolutely right. I’m making payments via mobile phone payments, which is not something I have ever done before in the UK. I’ve had to download the correct apps and figure out how it works. And part of the issue is that people want to avoid the government taking a slice out of certain payment apps. So they always want you to use their particular payment app, but the government takes less money. It has been a learning curve. And I definitely find post-COVID people want to handle objects less, including notes and coins. That is a big deal. And so electronic payments are hugely on the rise. Jo Frances Penn Another thing you talk about in the book — obviously, you’re a professional philosopher, which sounds just amazing — is about truth with a little t. And then truth with a capital T. You say in the book that “travel books often blur the line between fiction and nonfiction.” What are your thoughts on the truth of travel books/guides/memoir, especially if we’re using them to research places before we go? Emily Thomas Which we are doing all the time. Okay, so what I mean by this is, so with nonfiction writing, we tend to think of it as being very factual, you know, the temperature was 32 degrees today, and this place lives at a certain longitude and latitude. But travel books, even though they are within the nonfiction genre, actually, they are using many, many devices from fiction. They are using metaphor or hyperbole, that kind of thing. Travel books often have a plot, where they will start you off at one point in time and then the author backtracks a little bit to kind of give a bit more context. And then we move forwards in time again. And all these devices borrow from fiction, they obviously serve to make the travel book much more readable, but they also begin blurring the line. And I think one of the important consequences of that is that we get more and more of the author’s own perspective, as they are experiencing the place and writing the book. If we were to have this list of facts, temperature and longitude, that there’s very little of the author in that, that when we begin to have the author saying, ‘Oh, I saw a hippopotamus in person for the first time and its skin was like this, and its teeth were like this,’ that we’re really starting to get the author’s window on to the world. And then that becomes quite non-factual. And that’s part of writing a good story. But it’s also part of what makes travel writing a bit unusual as a nonfiction genre. Jo Frances Penn So often, books can be written from a romantic point of view, or a way to try and perhaps make the author seem a certain way. And of course, we understand that writing is also editing. So you don’t put in a lot of the stuff that happened because it doesn’t fit whatever overarching narrative you have. I have a particular place in mind, which is Venice. [Note from Jo: Check out my solo episode: Myth and Reality: Beauty and Decay in Venice.] St Marks Basilica, Venice. Photo by J.F.Penn I’ve been to Venice three times. And the third time was by far the best. But when I went the first time, I feel like all the writing I’ve ever read on Venice, it was just completely wrong. In my experience, I got there, it was flooded. I’ve never read a book about the flooding, and how much it stank of the sewers, and how overcrowded it was, and those huge tourist ships, and it really impacted my experience. How should we approach reading travel fiction or just travel books in general? Do we just have to take them with a pinch of salt? Emily Thomas Yes, we absolutely have to take them with a pinch of salt. I think travel books are always written with the author’s particular vision in mind. When you arrive, you may well have a very different outlook on that. And you’re certainly right. Venice is one of those places that has been so heavily romanticized that in a way, it’s difficult to see how the reality can live up to those romantic images of it. And I mean it historically, if we go back before the 17th century into medieval travel, travel writing was absolutely chock full of lies, you know, people describe going to the Middle East and encountering dragons or great whales that come off out of the sea, and they’re sort of wandering around on the local coasts. And the Mandeville Travels describes meeting people with the heads of dogs. A lot of this is coming from the idea that whatever is unknown, we can somehow fill in the gaps. And there’s less of that today, partly because the world is more known, but it’s not entirely gone, and our brains are still filling in gaps. Jo Frances Penn Absolutely. And I wonder, I mean again, Malawi — if people don’t know it’s in southeast Africa, but landlocked — and Africa is one of these continents that I feel travel writing has impacted, I would say negatively, because so many popular-cited travel books are old. And they see Africa — which of course, is not monolithic, it’s very diverse — but many show Africa in a way that perhaps it was 40 years ago, but so much has changed in the last decade in terms of what’s happening in Africa. How can we write responsibly about places to change stereotypes, or when we read, question those stereotypes? Emily Thomas That’s a really great question. I would start by saying travel books are about places, but they are also always about time. So it is always about the author’s experience of traveling to Malawi in 1970, or 2020, or wherever it might be. When we are all reading travel books, we must bear in mind the date that they were published, that’s going to have a big impact on how we approach them. Of course, I’m a historian of philosophy, so I’m going to stress the importance of dates. With regards to changing stereotypes or leaving us to question them, I think that good writers should be conscious of stereotypes as they are writing and flag them up. That seems like something that the best travel writers do, actually, they approach people as individuals, and if there are stereotypes, they are mentioning them in order to deconstruct them. Jo Frances Penn Well, then I have another challenge for you because you said that travel is about otherness. And when we are ‘Other,’ I feel like we almost see things that people who live in a country don’t see. Like when I go to America and I walk into a grocery store, I’m just ‘how are there 10 fridges full of different sodas?’ It’s a tiny thing, but I notice that and an American would not notice that. And so when we are commenting on other places as we travel, I also worry in this time when we need more diverse voices, can you and I as white English women write about Malawi? And how does that compare to a Malawian author writing about Malawi? Emily Thomas If I were to read two books, one written by a white English woman and one written by a Malawian author that I would 100% be looking to the Malawi author as the authoritative tome, but I don’t think that means that we shouldn’t do it. You can only ever write from your perspective. All writing is written from a perspective, and that’s the same whether it’s me writing about Malawi, or someone from Blantyre going to the UK and writing about England. There is no view from nowhere. The trick is to write from your perspective, being conscious that you are writing from a perspective. So if I were to go to the US and write about how staggered I am by the sheer number of soda fridges, I should be overt about that, of course, be honest, I find this astonishing, because I’m from the UK, if I was from somewhere else, maybe I wouldn’t. Jo Frances Penn It’s funny, isn’t it? And I mean, I feel the same way. I think we have to write from whatever perspective we have. Let’s talk about maps, because I love that you start actually start the book with chapters on that. I love maps, I’ve got a map of the world here in front of me on my wall. It is something that I find really important, and I’ve even written a fantasy trilogy about walking through maps. Detail of the Mappa Mundi Hereford cathedral Photo by JFPenn You question in the book, “Are maps things or processes?” What do you mean by that? Emily Thomas In philosophy, we draw a distinction between things that are static, so chairs, teacups, trees, versus things that are dynamic and continually changing processes, like thunderstorms, or running rivers. And what I find fascinating about maps, or one of the many things I find fascinating about them, is that I always assumed that a map was a static thing. You know, it’s something that you hold in your hand and you look at it much like a teapot, and that’s the end of it. But there are some philosophers who’ve argued that actually maps are much closer to processes. And in defense of this view, they asked us to consider things like Google Maps. So Google Maps are being continually updated, as are all these online mapping software. And then the question is, does that mean that there’s a new map that’s coming into existence? Like once every second or so? Or is it rather, it’s the same map that’s continually changing? And when you begin to think of maps, like that, I can then begin to think of other maps, perhaps written on paper, but also continually being updated. So famously during the Second World War in London, there are some maps in the British Museum that were updated as buildings were bombed. So as buildings were removed, people would change the map to reflect the new reality. Jo Frances Penn I was just looking at the wall on my wall. It’s an older Mercator projection. And Malawi’s still labeled as Nyasaland, which was its previous name. And of course, that’s what’s so weird, isn’t it? You can look at a map, even like Europe’s changed a lot. I mean, Europe’s changing right? Now we have a war on, who knows where that will end up — but it’s like these countries appear and disappear, and borders move. I’ve got this map on my wall. It looks static, and yet borders move all the time. You say in the book, “maps are objects of power.” So what do we need to keep in mind in terms of who drew the map, and in terms of power shifts over time? Emily Thomas So maps are always trying to tell us things. And they can tell us things in quite subtle ways. So, for example, whatever is placed at the center of the map is given a feeling of geopolitical force. In historical maps, perhaps that was Jerusalem, or Athens, and today, if you look at world maps produced in Europe, Europe is usually at the center of the map. If you look at world maps produced by China, or the US, those countries will be at the center of the map. And that’s telling you a lot about how the map maker sees the world. And what maps do and don’t represent, and also tells you a lot about the social power that the map maker is outlining. So whether they are including castles or churches or huts belonging to peasants or not, that tells you about what they’re trying to do. There are some really striking examples of maps being used to persuade people about where the lines of power lie in the world. So for example, historically, you can see lots of maps of the same place with borders drawn differently, and that’s because the map maker is trying to convince you that here is where the border is, my country is really at this is an even today, depending on where you are in the world. If you access Google Maps, the borders will shift depending on your local country’s attitude towards disputed territories — Jo Frances Penn — which is just crazy. I don’t think I knew that before I read that in your book. I was like, okay, that’s weird. But I mean, why would it be any different because, for example, we travel to New Zealand a lot, because my husband’s a New Zealander, so we have family there. And when we look at prices for flights here in the UK, we get a completely different price than if we’re in New Zealand, even if we’re booking London to Auckland, for example. Loads of things change when your physical location is known to advertisers. But it’s kind of disturbing, in a way, isn’t it? The way that borders shift? I mean, again, on the map I’m looking at there is absolutely no way it reflects the actual size of the countries. The African continent has often made much smaller, hasn’t it? Emily Thomas Absolutely. Which is this famous problem with Mercator projection, that it makes the southern countries smaller in the northern ones, the ones closer to the center of the map, and Europe is subtly pushed towards the center of the map. It makes them bigger. And there are various projections that seek to address these concerns. And when you see the size of Africa represented, as it really is proportionate to Europe, and North America, it’s quite a shock because it is in fact, a gigantic continent. And it’s not this smaller, sort of squeezed thing that you get on the Mercator projection. Jo Frances Penn Absolutely. So there’s so many things I want to talk to you about, but I want to come to Doom Tourism. You have a chapter on Doom tourism and which incorporates things like dark tourism to outfits for example, or but also places like the Maldives that might disappear or will disappear with climate change. Tell us about Doom Tourism? Should we travel at all? Or should we all just stay home? Emily Thomas In principle, I don’t think there’s anything wrong with doing tourism or dark tourism. So the idea of going to see a place before it’s destroyed because it’s doomed in some way. I think why not? That sounds fine to me. You know, you can imagine there’s a rainbow outside your door, someone’s calling to you, come and look at it before it’s gone. That just seems absolutely fine. Where it gets ethically tricky is when we are traveling to places and the very act of traveling is contributing to the doom of the place in question. That’s a really classic example is glaciers or underwater coral reefs. So when we visit a glacier, in addition to the CO2 that we may spend getting there, trampling all over the glacier can be harmful to it in various ways. If the ice is degrading anyway, then people walking all over it can hasten that. The same with visiting coral reefs, you know, there are many articles on the internet ’10 places you should visit before they die off due to climate change.’ And lots of coral reefs are on the list. But again, the very act of visiting the reefs can damage them, and then it starts to feel unethical to visit these doomed places. Union Glacier in Antarctica. Photo Licensed from BigStockPhoto Jo Frances Penn Yeah, and that’s why this idea of virtual reality or augmented reality could be great for travel. So I have scuba dived on the Barrier Reef and in Western Australia as well on Ningaloo Reef. And I learned later about how suncream on your skin can contribute to things. And yet, I remember those scuba diving in those places very vividly. They are highlights in my memory. But I absolutely think that VR scuba diving is what I want to do. I haven’t dived for about a decade, like I’m really not that interested anymore in all the gear and all the boat sickness and all of that. So, to me, a brilliant thing would be virtual reality scuba diving to go see the coral reefs. But taking that further, what do you think of the future of travel in terms of virtual reality? Emily Thomas I think there’s going to be a lot more VR travel, if for exactly these kinds of reasons. Travel can often be difficult and scary and really inconvenient — and expensive. And I think VR offers us a really safe, cheap alternative. I think lots and lots of people are going to turn to VR for travel, I really do, and I think as VR improves, the more that that will happen. And I find that quite exciting, in part because we can travel to real world places that have been reproduced in VR, but also because we can travel to imaginary worlds that are going to be created for our enjoyment. And I’m looking forward to that as well. I think that will be that will be great. Honestly, that said, for me, part of the value of travel lies in the difficulty and the fear and the inconvenience. And I don’t see myself wanting to give that up. I think rather I want to do both. Jo Frances Penn I agree with you. And I almost split it into two. For example, I went to the Egyptian pyramids back in the early 2000s. And when I see pictures now, it seems a hell of a lot more touristy. And if you go and see the pyramids, it’s the sound and light show, there’s 1000s of people and coaches, and it’s not like the movies, you know. But with a VR tour, I could see the pyramids up close, I could potentially go inside the pyramids, which you cannot do in real life. And that to me is a very touristy experience that would be better off in VR. But walking around the souk in Cairo, for example, or Alexandria, that is not the same. So there’s the experiential thing versus the famous monument thing. Emily Thomas Oh, I like that. I think you’re absolutely right. I think the two can complement each other in that way. I also think there will be a lot of people who would opt for the VR Cairo souk. In addition, it partly because it’s hot, it’s expensive and people are bumping into you. And I think COVID is going to have a big impact on how a lot of people continue to travel. Moving forward, it’s all just going to feel safer. I have also been to the pyramids a little bit later than you, before the light show but post the tourism era. And what I was astonished by was the way that if you stood in precisely the right spot, you could take a photograph just with the pyramids against the background of sand. But if you turned in any other direction, the tourist carnival, the shops. It’s a strange experience. Jo Frances Penn Petra is another place or Angkor Wat, there are so many places where we want to see, not because they’re on ‘lists,’ but because they really are special places. And yet, sometimes you get there and they’re not special, like Venice, a lot of Venice would be better in VR. If you’re listening in Venice, sorry about that! But I mean, it’s so full of tourists. But then we come back to truth with a little t as in, if I make a VR experience of the Cairo souk, for example, I could walk through and record it with a special camera. And that is my experience. But again, we’ve just captured it at one moment in time, or we could then edit it to make it seem more romantic or to fit some stereotype. Will VR again recreate this incorrect version of reality? Emily Thomas Or at the very least it will be a bastion of reality told from someone else’s perspective. I think that that’s absolutely right. Because even if it it’s based on real camera footage, it’s what the camera person chooses to focus on. Are they looking at the vegetables or the jewelry? What they’re panning over? Are they focusing more on the older people or the younger people? All of this is going to be told from a person’s perspective? And if you visited yourself, you would absolutely have a different one. So yeah, it will always be indirect in that sense that there are some VR experiences you can have now where I understand you literally pay a guide to wear a VR helmet or transmit things back to you. And then by telephone, you tell them, could you turn left here, I want to look more at this. So that seems like more that you’d have more control over what you’re seeing, at least in that way. Jo Frances Penn So many interesting things and lots we could talk about, but we’re almost out of time. What are a few books that you recommend either just travel books or philosophy? Emily Thomas My favorite travel book is quite old now, but if you haven’t read it, I highly recommend it. It’s Eric Newby’s 1958, A Short Walk in the Hindu Kush. He’s wandering around the mountains of Afghanistan, getting himself into various scrapes. It’s really, really funny. And it’s also very thoughtful. I think that’s great. From a philosophy and travel perspective, my book is in fact, the only book on the philosophy of travel. But if you want to take a related but different angle, that Alain de Botton’s The Art of Travel. He explores the way that various artists and novelists have thought about travel. And that’s also a great read, Jo Frances Penn While there are similarities with De Botton, I definitely like yours better. We’ve talked about the themes, I guess, that you bring out in the book. I’m definitely someone who is romantic about travel, and clearly you are too. Travel means a lot to us, and so we naturally come at this with a positive and romantic view of everything. But it’s funny, I’ve also just come back from that walking the Camino de Santiago, the Portuguese route. I’ve been reading Camino books for over two decades — and I’m just writing my own, obviously — but I feel this responsibility to say some things that I don’t feel enough people say about how like busy the route is, and all of this kind of thing. So I’m pretty obsessed with the ‘truth’ of travel writing at the moment, so I think your book really helped. Emily Thomas Thank you. I’m glad. Jo Frances Penn Brilliant. Where can people find you and your book online? Emily Thomas Thank you. So I am on Twitter @emilytwrites. If you want to check out some of my other popular writings, you can look at my website, which is www.EmilyThomasWrites.co.uk. Jo Frances Penn Fantastic. Thanks so much for your time, Emily, that was great. Emily Thomas This has been brilliant. Thank you very much. The post The Meaning of Travel With Emily Thomas appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 11/3/22 | ![]() Untethered. A Woman’s Search For Self On The Edge Of India With C.L. Stambush | How can we adopt an untethered attitude to life, especially when it comes to expectations of travel? C.L. Stambush talks about how her experience of motor-cycling around India taught her more about herself, and how she brings that to her daily life. We also talk about connecting with people across cultural and language barriers, when taking risks is worth it, and how we need to keep pushing the boundaries of our comfort zone to live a more expansive life. C.L. Stambush is an award-winning writer, journalist, editor and author of Untethered: A Woman’s Search for Self on the Edge of India. Show notes Taking risks and discovering that life improves because of it Riding alone on a motorcycle around India Breaking down barriers when we travel to different cultures Getting over our fears around traveling If we are not pushing forward, are we sliding backward? Cultivating an untethered state of mind Recommended travel books You can find C.L. Stambush at clstambush.com Header and shareable image generated by Jo Frances Penn on Midjourney and edited on DALL-E. Transcript of the interview Joanna: C.L. Stambush is an award-winning writer, journalist, editor, and author of Untethered: A Woman’s Search for Self on the Edge of India. Welcome, Connie. Connie: Thank you. I’m excited to be here, Jo. Joanna: This is such an interesting topic. You traveled around the edge of India by motorcycle back in the late 90s. Why did you choose that trip in particular, what led to that happening, especially back then, when it really wasn’t so common? Connie: That journey was a long time in the coming. I would date it all the way back to when I was in kindergarten or first grade when I was very shy kid and I just hugged the wall and kept one shoulder to the wall at all times. But as I became aware of what I was doing, I didn’t like this aspect of myself. I felt like I was really losing out on engaging in life, because I just kind of watched it from the sidelines. So over the years, I wanted to become braver and put myself in situations like forcing myself to stay up and watch scary movies or get past this very scary stuffed bear in the museum alone, and just kept pushing myself farther and farther. By the time I got to India, which is in itself a very long, convoluted story, I was working for a pharmaceutical company, and they were downsizing. I never imagined that I would leave the United States. And I literally had this overnight revelation where I just woke up the next morning and said, I quit. I sold everything that I had, I bought a backpack, flipped a coin, bought a one-way ticket, landed in Germany, and kind of went, ‘Oh, I didn’t really have a plan or anything as to what I would do.’ From there, I progressed on through Europe and then Eastern Europe and then the Middle East. I wound up working in India as an editor for a wire service, the women’s feature service and then when that contract ended, I decided I was ready to leave Delhi but I was not ready to leave India. CL Stambush with her bike in India, Photo copyright CL Stambush I didn’t want to see India on India’s public transportation. So the motorcycle seemed the most obvious thing for me to do, because everybody had a Royal Enfield Bullet. You have this wonderful bump, bump, bump sound. And it just called out to me. So I decided, I’m just going to do this. Joanna: We’re going to go back into the book, but I just have to ask as a child, you decided to become braver and force yourself to try these things. And then, like you said, you quit, you sold everything. There’s definitely something in your personality that makes decisions quickly, and then does these difficult things. But of course, this book is set back in the 90s. But that’s not the end of your story. How has this attitude to travel and taking risks impacted your life since then? Connie: I think that it has allowed me to take even greater risks than I probably wouldn’t have. When I came back, I decided I wanted to get a master’s degree. And so again, I just up and left what I had going on here and went to New York and got a degree from Sarah Lawrence College, in creative nonfiction writing, and then came back. So it has given me the freedom to understand that the world will keep going and keep getting better for you if you just keep trying the things that you want to do, but are a little hesitant to do anyway. Nothing comes to a crashing end when you try something new. Usually, it works out better. Joanna: I like that. Let’s step into the book. Now, I’ve been to India a number of times. And of course, much of India is ancient as well. And there are some really beautiful places. What are some of the most memorable places that still stand out for you even all these years later, either because of beauty or an emotional or spiritual resonance? Connie: I had lived in India for over three years by the time I took this journey, so I had traveled to various places. And then when I did this travel journey, I was basically on the edge so not necessarily in some of India’s most famous places. But during my time in India, the places that stand out to me would be the desert. I’ve always drawn to the desert, Jai Samir, and then also the mountains and South India because it’s just so much lusher and greener down there. In terms of the things that stand out to me, it’s not really places, but people. I met just so many amazing people while I was there, even people I didn’t necessarily have a conversation with or engage with, just people who were friendly. First of all, as a woman alone, riding a motorcycle, I didn’t really look like a woman, I looked like a Westerner. I had full gear on, I had a motorcycle helmet on. And they couldn’t really tell that I was a woman. But at one point, it was early on in my journey, and I was riding along the highway, and in front of me was this overloaded truck with all these women that had gathered from a field where they were out working, and were being taken back home again. They were very listless and just sort of worn out from working in the hot fields all day. One of them began to watch me. And as she watched me, she became more intent as to try to figure out who I was, then she began to nudge a woman next to her. And soon, they’re all looking at me. And smiling really big, because there’s the recognition that this is a woman doing something that women just don’t do in India, which is one being on a motorcycle at that time, as well as traveling alone. And then it was just great. They just all smiled and waved, and it was just really uplifting. CLStambush with her bike Photo copyright CL Stambush There were many experiences where I ran into women. There was another time when I got stopped at a train station, and there was no train on the track, but the barriers were down. And the minute I stopped as a foreigner, the men would sort of begin to crush in on me because of the space or the lack of space that we have between the US culture and the Indian culture. And so they got quite close to me and kind of closed in on me. And it was very hot and I began to take off my gear a little bit at a time. And the minute they noticed that I was a woman, they didn’t know what to do with me at that point. So they all just kind of stepped back. But this gave an opportunity for these tribal women who had been standing at a far-off distance with some of their sheep flock. They had been watching, but there had been no opportunity for them, so when the men moved away, the women just moved in. They wanted to feel my hair and compare it to their hair, and feel my skin and compare it to their skin. And I felt like at that point, because I was quite lonely on the road – and this was even still, within the first month or so of my journey – that it was just really a lovely experience to feel that I wasn’t so alone because riding a motorcycle as a woman alone in India, I felt very much like an outlier. And to have these women come up and tell me, we get you. You’re different. We’re different. It was just a very beautiful connecting moment for me, Joanna: It’s one of the things, isn’t it, with travel there that you feel there are always people who can help. I was cycling in India and I came off my bike. It was after the monsoon rains. And I came off my bike in this tiny village and cut my knee and I was in shock. I was on the ground; I was crying my eyes out. And like you say all these women came out and brought water and tried to help me and we didn’t share the language. They obviously didn’t speak English, but I just remember everyone was so kind. There’s that human connection, even if you’re a very, very different person from a different culture, right? Connie: I agree. I think that’s what travel really does is it breaks down all these assumptions that we have in our mind when we’re back in our own culture. We’re back in our own hometown, we’re back in our own familiar settings. But when we’re out, all that is just stripped away. And it’s just people connecting to people, which I think is the most beautiful thing. Joanna: You mentioned there about being a woman alone. And that example with personal space. I felt that too and it can feel quite claustrophobic. It can be quite scary. What fears did you face along the way? You must have gone through some really difficult times and how did you overcome them? Connie: I think by then I had become a much stronger person, obviously, than the person I started out as a child. I had been working very, very hard and very long to become braver. But it is a scary thing to be out there on your own. I found that when I was not in threatening situations, but just in situations, I would use my height to create a larger presence for myself in a space. As a woman alone, I found that to be an effective thing just to stand taller, to feel broader in just in the normal space of walking down the street. I didn’t have a lot of scary experiences, but I had some I have, for instance, I believe that all the gear really made me stand out and made me, like I said earlier, a very other type person. But there was a time when these children came up to me, and they wanted to shake hands. And I wasn’t very obliging, and they were very fun, but they just kept on and then this little old man came along, and they pushed him into me. They had become rather menacing. I don’t know what they wanted, but they weren’t just happy children any longer so they pushed the little old man into me. I got very, very angry, not at the children so much, but at the kind of cultural circumstances are allowed this and all these men then crowded in on me. I ended up slapping one of them, and ended up chasing him down an alleyway, which was a very scary experience because I had become somebody quite other than anything that I knew at all. And it wasn’t until I tripped and fell that I came to my senses. CL Stambush journey around India. Image copyright CL Stambush. Joanna: Wow, that seems that’s quite extreme to find yourself in that situation. It’s like you learn these lessons to make yourself less afraid. But I’m certainly listening going, I would not cycle around India alone, I wouldn’t do that. And I know a lot of people listening would feel the same. But there are lots of things that we can be scared of that stop us in life, even if those things are smaller than the journey you did. What are some of the ways that you might encourage people listening to, some people would say, Oh, I’m not I couldn’t even travel to India. from the US. Or I’ve met people in the US, say in New York, and someone would say to me, “Oh, you’ve been to New Orleans? I’ve never been there. I just couldn’t do that. I couldn’t.” And I’m like, it’s in your country? How have you not traveled that far? How can people get over the fears of things being different? Connie: I think that’s a great question. I would hear people when I lived in the downtown section of my hometown, I would have people tell me, “I would never live down there, I won’t even go down there. I don’t think that’s safe.” So I really think it starts in our mind, what we think of someplace. And maybe these are places we don’t even know. We have to begin to educate ourselves on what those places are and who those people are. And I just feel like in my experience, when I’m in a place that I don’t know that it’s the people that make me feel welcome there. I find people everywhere make me feel welcome, when I go to these places, whether you go to New Orleans, or to India. I get that riding a motorcycle is certainly not for everyone. And it’s not even for the majority. But going outside of your comfort zone is something that we can do in small ways. Even if it’s just like a small thing, like, oh, I would never feel comfortable eating in a restaurant by myself, well, that’s a kind of a small thing that we can do. And we can get used to that. When we get used to that, we find that there’s nothing really bad happening to us. We just perceive that something bad would happen, or we would feel not comfortable there. But then when we experience it, we understand that it is okay. And that inches you along, I think, to try different things. It’s not a big leap. I didn’t go from living in Evansville, Indiana, to riding a motorcycle. There were so many little incremental steps along the way that you just keep elevating to the next level. Joanna: I agree with this pushing out of the comfort zone, and particularly during the pandemic, I really felt that my comfort zone shrank and we all were so trapped in our areas. I will walk the same paths around and around. It took quite a lot for even someone like me, and I’ve traveled a lot, I’ve lived all over the world, to push myself back out there again. Is that something that happened to you? Have you found that just incrementally you’ve been able to keep pushing this comfort zone out? Connie: I think that when you stop doing it, then when you try to start doing it again, it gets harder, you’ve kind of lost some ground, don’t you? Once you’re in the groove of keep pushing yourself out there, then it gets more and more comfortable when you stop doing that. You stall a little bit and you’ve got a little bit of a restart to get going. Again, I think that’s pretty usual for most people. Joanna: I almost feel like if you don’t keep pushing outwards, it shrinks you and shrinks you and shrinks you and that’s why a lot of older people I feel as you get older and obviously maybe you don’t want to travel so much in your 80s for example, but I feel like if you don’t push it, then it will kind of come closer to you and shrink you. I felt personally that my life shrunk a lot more in the pandemic, and part of this podcast was really just keeping my own horizons expanding. Connie: I think you’re right. I think if you’re not moving forward, then you could be sliding backward. And I think having that awareness of who you want to be and where you want to be and the type of person you want to be, and keep pushing yourself out that way. My mom’s a great example of somebody who does the things she knows she needs to do, even though she would rather not do them. Forces herself to go out, and she’s in her 90s now, so she forces herself to go out, to do things just to keep engaged with other people when it would be easier just to not go out. So maybe I get that from her. Joanna: I think you’re right. And also, the wonderful thing about travel is that you’re meeting people in real life. Whereas I feel like a lot of the media, a lot of social media, we get the wrong idea. And we might find things that reinforce stereotypes, or that are completely wrong half the time. So it’s almost like going to these places and challenging what we think we know often makes us see that we didn’t know it after all, especially in a huge place like India, which is so diverse. Connie: Yes. And I think that’s very good. There’s a line I think that the Buddha said is, “Don’t believe everything you think”, and I really try to remember that because that is so true. When we think we know something, and then we meet the thing that we think we understand, we usually find out okay, I was completely wrong, at least in my experience. Joanna: What were you wrong about on that motorcycle trip? Connie: Oh, I don’t know that I was wrong so much about anything on the motorcycle trip because I sort of took it moment by moment. I tried to get through. I had no experience riding a motorcycle, I had taken a one-week course in Indiana. So there were 12 motorcycles in an empty parking lot, which does not at all prepare you to be on a motorcycle in India, where there are billions of vehicles on the road. My neighbor had given me really great advice. He said ‘just practice stopping.’ That was his advice. So when I got back when I got the motorcycle in India I took it slow and got used to it and got comfortable with it and then took it out on the road. I didn’t have these big objectives to meet each day. In the beginning, I could not ride very far at all. A couple of hours and I was aching very much and it was very hot and it was very hard and roads could be very dangerous and there would be traffic coming at you and not necessarily staying on their side of the road. But the longer I did it, the more miles I got underneath me the more comfortable I got with it all. Joanna: You named the motorcycle Kali, a goddess I also identify with. I wrote about Kali in a thriller of mine, Destroyer of Worlds. But a lot of people listening might not know anything about Kali. Tell us more about Kali and why you chose that name for your bike. Connie: She is the most badass Goddess that there is. I think there are about 33 recognized gods and goddesses and something like 330 million additional ones that not everybody agrees on. But she’s one of the main Hindu goddesses and she is half benevolent and half warrior but all the images of her are very fierce. Goddess Kali. Photo by Raja Ravi Varma, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons And why I chose her is because one of the things that she’s known for is revealing our true selves. In a quest to discover who I was, she seemed to not only be the right goddess to have as a partner with me, but the right one to help me on this particular journey, which I’m trying to identify who I really am and who I really want to be. Joanna: You say fierce, but most of the images of Kali are holding a decapitated head and there’s all these hands and it’s basically death and multiple arms and pretty, pretty scary. That’s a more extreme version. When you told people along the way were they surprised that you even chose this goddess? Connie: No, they didn’t seem surprised. I had Kali stenciled on this side of the tank in Hindi. So people recognized it. And one day I was in a hotel and the hotel clerk gave me a note from a traveler who had seen me arrive on this motorcycle. This just comes back to people who are just so helpful and so encouraging along the way. They had seen me ride in on the motorcycle and left me a note telling me, “To the rider of Kali, I wish you all the best of luck in your journey.” Joanna: That’s lovely. How did religion or spirituality play a part in your journey other than just the name of the bike? And did you visit any particular temples along the way, because there was an underlying theme that wasn’t there? Connie: Yes. So in order to navigate around this large country on its own, I decided that, as a woman trying to find out who she was, trying to put together the type of person I wanted to be, that I would visit the Kali temples. Now the Kali temples – there are 52 and or 51, depending on which version you read – contain these pieces of the Goddess Kali that fell to Earth. And then these Shakti Peetha temples sprang up, so they are power temples. Each one of these temples has a piece of the goddess. So my plan was to visit each of the temples and reassemble Kali as I went along the way. But I discovered that I really didn’t enjoy visiting the temples. And when that discovery came to my mind, I realized that I had created that as almost a crutch for myself, and that I no longer needed that. Joanna: It’s interesting, because I do feel like having a deeper meaning, and or having a framework for a journey, in the way that you did there, is better than just saying, “I’m just going to motorcycle all the way around India.” I almost feel like even though you changed what you wanted, it did start you out with a direction that was more than just get on the road. Do you think that plan helped you? Connie: Oh, absolutely. Yes. I think what it taught me was what I took away when I felt like I no longer needed to find because, for one reason, they were very difficult to find. I had a map, I had locations, but people didn’t always agree on which was a Shakti Peetha temple and which wasn’t. So it became increasingly difficult to discover the actual temple. Now, I knew that I wanted to make it to the end and reached the Kali temple for the Kali Puja, and I managed to do that. But it certainly did give me that kind of understanding that I needed this in the beginning. And then when I realized, hey, I don’t really need this, that felt like a growth for me. That was what Kali was doing for me because she is the goddess of rebirth. Joanna: Sometimes the search for self involves something dying in order for something new to be reborn. And Kali is definitely the goddess of death. I like that. When I heard the title of your book, Untethered, I knew I wanted to talk to you because I have also got Untethered as a title or draft title for a book, which I’ve had around for a while it might be around for as long as yours was. What does ‘untethered’ mean to you? Connie: That’s a great question. I feel like because I felt as a child bound and tied to and stuck to this wall that that being untethered was both a physical and but more a psychological undertaking. So I wasn’t physically scared any longer or attached to this wall. But being untethered for me is really a state of mind, the way you look at things. I saw myself much younger and even as a teen very attached to certain things. But as I became untethered, I became unburdened by the things that I thought I believed, I felt like that they, in the end, were weighing me down as well. Joanna: Was that also about the USA? Because I feel that a lot of Americans who’ve traveled a lot or who end up as living as expats in other countries, they are trying to untether themselves from what being American is. Is that something that you were trying to untether from and how have you come back? Connie: I don’t think I was trying to untether from being an American. I think that when I was out in the world, I felt like I needed to be a representative of a good American. I met a lot of travelers who were Americans who would have Canadian flags on their backpacks and things like that, but I always felt like it was it was up to me to show the world that the way that they see Americans isn’t necessarily true, through my own actions. Being untethered is really the way you look at your life, whether you see yourself tied down or you see yourself as free. I think it really became a state of mind for me. Joanna: When you returned to the USA and like you said, you studied a Masters in quite a traditional industry now, the publishing industry in writing. Have you retained that sense of being untethered, even as you’ve gone back home? Connie: I think it’s the constant moment-by-moment, where you keep asking yourself, “Is what I’m doing now, or about to do, taking me to where I want to be?” As far as the state of mind, if you don’t pay attention any longer to what you’re doing, you can slide into being back where you are a person that you didn’t want to be. So for me, it’s just a constant moment by moment of trying to figure out, will thinking this way, free me or enslave me? Joanna: What’s an example of that? Connie: Oh, I imagine in American politics, or just seeing people as what we think that they are, rather than seeing them for who they are. Everybody’s got the good and the bad in them. Joanna: So you mean looking at other people in terms of an untethered attitude? I guess I thought it was more about living your life with a certain amount of freedom in terms of I don’t know, for example, not buying a house would be an untethered way of living. Connie: Yes, I still do not own a house. And I think you’re right. I recently was looking at buying houses and thought again, no, that is like an anchor for me. So you’re right, that would be an untethered way of living. But I also think it’s not just the physical tethering to the ground. I feel grounded now that I’m back in the United States, but I don’t feel tied down. I feel like I have the freedom to do the things that I want to do. Because the trip taught me that I’m – in fact, all the travel taught me that – that I can pick the time in which I want to do them now. Joanna: This is something I ponder about a lot. Because up until the pandemic, I didn’t feel like I had a home. And that didn’t matter. Because I like this idea of being untethered. And I can find it, I can make it home wherever I am in the world, right? We’ve lived all over the place. Maybe home is the people that you love, things like that. But I’m starting to change my mind about the concept of home. I have bought a house in a community and I almost feel like I’m putting down roots. That’s kind of scary for someone like me, who wants the freedom to be untethered. What do you think about the word home and putting down roots? Are those things that you think about or want? Connie: They are and like you, Jo, I feel like I could make a home anywhere. But I have been thinking about if I did make a home, what would that home be? I would want a small home so that I wouldn’t feel as anchored by it. I have gotten rid of a lot of possessions. The more I’m in one place, the more I gather. So I tried to keep an eye and a mind on exactly how I can keep letting things go, keep untethering myself from the physical world like that. I think it’s nice to think about nesting, it’s nice to be in your home and have your things around you. It’s hard to be on the road for a long period. I was on the road for five months, with nothing more than would fit into the couple of bags on a motorcycle. That is a very stripped-down way of living. Joanna: It’s very tiring, isn’t it? I had [ digital nomad Nora Dunn ] on the show recently, and she said the work of travel, which is finding somewhere to sleep that night and getting the money right. And in India, finding water that you can drink. There’s work associated with active travel. Connie: There really is. And it’s on a level that we don’t think about when we’re in our own environment, the things that we take for granted. But when you’re out in the world, and you’re really stripped down of all those securities, you do have to work at finding those sorts of basic things again. Joanna: That’s also quite nice in our local environment is to try and look at things with the eyes of a traveler, and figure out what would be difficult if someone comes to our country. When I first went back to the USA after the pandemic, a country that I’ve been traveling to for decades, I felt like a stranger for the first time in a long time. I saw some weird things about America that I hadn’t really noticed before. Do you notice things with the eyes of a traveler now? Connie: I hope so. I hope that I’m still keeping that fresh in myself. I try not to walk the same path. I’m always trying to shake it up. I try to go down alleys because they’re very overlooked pathways in our city but you get a completely different perspective when you go down an alley, then you go down the front of a street. So I constantly try to push myself to change it up so that I can keep seeing things fresh and new. I do think that is the danger to fall back into not questioning things, to not asking why is it that way? Or how can I see this differently? Or how would this person see this? Because it’s easy to become complacent like that. Joanna: And then it turns into a sort of jaded, take-it-for-granted attitude, which is why I think people sometimes are unhappy is because they’re not looking at things with new eyes and trying new things. Connie: That’s very true. Yeah, that’s a good point. I also think people, they just believe what they think. And they don’t even know why they think that way. Joanna: And that questioning can really help. The subtitle of the book is ‘A woman’s search for self on the edge of India.’ Did you find yourself? Or are you still looking? Connie: As I alluded to, earlier, I became someone that I did not expect that I would be. I would have never predicted that kind of behavior and myself. And it came as sort of a combination of many things. I was feeling very tired, the heat of it, the emotional isolation of it – that became very stressful and heavy for me. And then when I was in this situation, I really just felt like I cracked and went over the edge. And then I literally went over an edge when I chased someone. And that is not at all who I am. But I think it showed me that I have the potential to be people I don’t know. I can be good or bad. Joanna: When you take these trips, when you travel in a certain way with this openness, it often doesn’t end up the way you expected or the way you planned. And if it did, I guess it would just be a holiday. Connie: Yeah, and I think we can take that even to our hometown, own town roots too. Because if we have these expectations of people just in our everyday lives, that often doesn’t turn out the way we expected or wanted either. So if we just keep an open mind, and then open our heart and that mindful presence in each moment without putting expectations on things. That’s where the disappointment comes when we expect something to go one way, but it doesn’t. Joanna: That’s fantastic. So this is the books and travel show. Apart from your own book, what are some books that you recommend about travel in India or just travel in general? Connie: Oh, there are so many good books out there, so many written by women that really helped me even understand the kind of story that I wanted to tell. One of the first ones that comes to mind is Robyn Davidson’s Tracks. A woman who solo trekked across 1700 miles of the Australian outback. She’s this woman who decides she’s going to get these camels, and she’s never handled camels ever, and then take them across this huge journey. So I thought that was very inspiring to see women doing things that women aren’t really expected to do. The other one would be Cheryl Strayed’s Wild: Lost and Found On the Pacific Crest Trail. I thought that was a great book to really understand what it was like for her, again, to do something that she wasn’t really experienced or trained or skilled to actually do. But she learned and she grew into that as she went. As far as being in India, one of my favorites is Hindoo Holiday, which is a very old book by J.R. Ackerley. I think it was published in 1932. But it’s very funny. It takes you into the day-to-day life of someone living and working in India, in New Delhi, I think, maybe not in New Delhi, but in India. And then the other one would be William Dalrymple, City of Djinns, which is about his year of living in Delhi. Again, there are all sorts of characters that he meets and culture clashes, where his own culture and his own expectations are really turned upside down when he’s in a different situation. And then how do you deal with that? Joanna: All fantastic books. Where can people find you and your book online? Connie: My book is just about everywhere. It is, of course, on Amazon and is in Barnes and Noble. If you’re anywhere in the world, if you wanted to have your local bookstore order it, they can order it through Ingram Spark’s global distribution. There is a paperback there is an ebook. And hopefully, by the end of the year, there will be an audiobook of it as well. My website is www.clstambush.com. Joanna: Fantastic. Thanks so much for your time, Connie. That was great Connie: Thank you so much. I enjoyed talking with you. The post Untethered. A Woman’s Search For Self On The Edge Of India With C.L. Stambush appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 10/19/22 | ![]() A Pilgrim In The Path Of History. Solo Walking The Camino De Santiago Portuguese Coastal Route With J.F. Penn | In September 2022, I walked the Camino de Santiago along the Portuguese Coastal route. It was around 300 kilometers from Porto in Portugal north along the coast and then inland to Santiago de Compostela, Spain, which took 14 days of back-to-back walking. I walked alone and carried my pack with everything in it, and I organized my accommodation through Macs Adventure so I knew where I was sleeping every night. I’ve posted a day by day breakdown of the route and my gear list separately, and in this episode, I go through some of my lessons and thoughts from the Way. JFPenn at Farolim de Felgueiras lighthouse, Porto Show notes How walking in the path of history puts life in perspective If you’ve lost direction in life, pilgrimage can help Pilgrimage proves you can do hard things, and that knowledge helps back in your daily life A fusion of sacred and secular The Camino is an industry — and it always has been Your Camino, your way. Practical considerations and tips. Why I needed these last years of walking alone across a seasonal change in my life You’ll find additional reflections and tips in Pilgrimage: Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways, out now at jfpenn.com/pilgrimage. (1) Walking in the path of history puts life in perspective The cathedral at Santiago de Compostela is almost a thousand years old, and pilgrims have been walking there since medieval times from all over Europe. I started in Porto, Portugal, with its historic center and cathedral on the banks of the river Douro. The route heads north along the coastline past Roman fish-salting vats, and at Matasinhos, there is a sculpture of women wailing as they look out to wrecked boats on the horizon where their fishermen husbands lie beneath the waves. Life retains a familiar rhythm through the ages and some aspects of being human never change. Matasinhos Camino office with statue of grieving fisherwives, Photo by JFPenn Walking every day shrinks life down to its basic elements. Eat, sleep, walk. You appreciate the simple things — shelter from the rain and wind, a hot shower after a long day, painkillers and blister plasters, coffee in the first few hours of the day, or a cold beer when the sun is high, local bread and olive oil when you’re hungry, an encouraging smile from another pilgrim. Once you step away and see how other people live, and experience being uncomfortable, or in pain, somewhere you can’t control your environment, it’s easier to be grateful for what you have and what you will return to. It’s easy to take these comforts for granted until we lose them, even temporarily. I travel partly because it helps me see how insignificant I am on the face of the world, and walking intensifies this feeling as it is so slow. When I look at a map at the end of the day, I see I have only crossed a tiny part of a tiny area in a little corner of the world. I can only move at my pace, which for me is what English walkers call ‘bimbling,’ a relaxed gait, stopping regularly for photos, notes, or coffee when available. When at home, the daily grind of life makes everything feel important and urgent. It’s easy to get stressed about a deadline or the emails that pile up, or the jobs that always need doing. Perspective narrows, even as we worry about the bigger things we can’t control — the economy, war, disease. When on pilgrimage, I am just another human walking on the face of the world, a tiny speck in the grand scheme of things, a flash of light, gone so quickly. The waves of the Atlantic will continue to crash on the shores after my footsteps are washed away. The Cathedral of Santiago de Compostela will welcome more pilgrims after I have gone, the same words of the Mass will be spoken by the next generation. I am comforted by my insignificance, and I can return with a perspective on what is truly important. While walking an ancient route like the Camino helps you reflect on mortality, it is almost impossible to comprehend a thousand years of pilgrims walking ahead and many more coming behind. But while I walked, I had a more vivid reminder of memento mori — remember, you will die — as Queen Elizabeth II died. Each day of my Camino was punctuated by snippets of her life on TV in coffee bars and glimpses of newspapers, and I couldn’t help but read the UK papers online when resting at the end of the day. Bom Caminho sign Walking out of Vila Praia de Ancora Photo by JFPenn It was strange to walk outside of my country during such a historically significant week. I remember seeing newly carved statues of the Queen and Prince Philip mounted outside the cathedral in Canterbury on my first pilgrimage in October 2020. The stone was paler than the other sculptures of historic monarchs. The features weren’t weathered — and of course, both were still alive. There was a sense of standing next to living history, as another generation passed, and now they are both gone. I am not an ardent royalist by any means, but the Queen was a constant across my life as she was for many Brits. As I walked, the news was full of pictures of her as a young woman, then middle-aged going through the trials of life, then an old woman at her husband’s funeral, and in her final days, standing bent over and smiling as she welcomed the new Prime Minister, Liz Truss. The span of an extraordinary life against the backdrop of history, much of which I remember over the last 35 years at least. Her life passed by, as will mine and yours. Even a Queen cannot hold back the end. I walked into Santiago de Compostela on the day of the funeral and I watched her coffin lowered into the vault at Windsor Castle as I rested in my hotel that afternoon. It was a fitting end to my pilgrimage and underscored the sense that something must die for change to happen, and new life can emerge from the ashes of the old. (2) If you’ve lost direction in life, pilgrimage can help A pilgrimage is a clear task with a clear direction. You have a starting point and a destination and if you follow the way-markers and the guide book, you have a route to get there. You might get lost for a short time, but if you keep going, you will reach the end. Once you are on the trail, whatever that might be, the pilgrim’s day is much the same. Wake up, wash and get dressed. Check feet, tape and plaster blisters as best you can before putting on socks and walking shoes/boots. Take painkillers if you need to. Pack your bag. Eat breakfast, or pick up some food to take for the day. Walk, maybe alone, maybe with others. Stop for coffee/food/beer depending on the time of day and facilities en route. Walk. Rest. Walk. Arrive at accommodation. Shower while washing sweaty, smelly clothes. Hang clothes to dry. Check feet and dress blisters. Take painkillers if you need to. Eat dinner, maybe alone, maybe with others. Rest and sleep. JFPenn near Labruges Portugal This daily repetition is a blessing of pilgrimage, as it simplifies life to its basics. You have no purpose but to get up and walk, and if you make it to your destination for the night, you have achieved your goal. The daily difficulties of normal life fade as you deal with the immediate issues of pain and hunger and exhaustion. You sleep satisfied, and tomorrow you get up and do it again. Pilgrimage creates clear boundaries, and that can be a great comfort in difficult times. (3) Pilgrimage proves you can do hard things, and that knowledge helps back in your daily life You need ‘starting energy’ to plan and organize your trip, to turn it from a dream or a goal into reality. Many people fall at this first hurdle and you need to overcome obstacles and fears to get even as far as the starting point. You need to book time away from normal life and since most of the Camino routes are a physical challenge, you also need to train in preparation. I’ve been wanting to walk a Camino for more than twenty years, and I only found my ‘starting energy’ since the pandemic put the brevity of life into perspective. I know how it feels to say ‘some day,’ but that day will never come unless you make a decision, book a route or a flight, and commit. Once you begin, you need ‘pushing through’ energy, especially on the days when you’re tired and in pain and emotionally broken and you just want to give up. I woke up on the eighth day of my Camino in the village of Oia, Spain. A hurricane had blown in the night before, cutting the power to the village as I lay in bed listening to the violence of the wind and rain. When I woke, it was still dark and rain pounded down outside. As I taped my feet and plastered my blisters, I wondered what the hell I was doing. I did not want to walk out into the storm, especially when every step was painful. I still had seven more days of walking to get to Santiago de Compostela, and given the state of my feet, it would only get harder. But pilgrimage is not a holiday. It is meant to be a challenge — and part of the challenge is not giving up. A long-distance walk is a test of stamina. Each day might be a manageable distance in itself, and nothing too challenging for a single day’s walking, but day after day — especially on the stones of the Portuguese route — the fatigue and pain compound. Stony back streets at Carreco Photo by JFPenn It’s easy to give up on the Camino, as you can call a taxi at most accommodation and other places along the route each day. Many people choose to skip a stage and take transport to their next hotel, so the temptation is always there — and if you truly need help, then, of course, you must take it. But I know the difference between the ‘normal’ pain of long-distance walking and acute ‘something is definitely wrong’ pain. At times like these, when the struggle is more mental than physical, I write in my journal. Some might pray, but I find solace and answers in writing. I moan a lot and list all the things that hurt and why I want to stop and give up and go home. Then I write about why I am walking and why I should continue. I know this pain is temporary and it will fade, but the pride in finishing will be mine for the rest of my life. I write my affirmations over and over again: I am strong. I can do hard things. I will finish. That morning in Oia, I took some painkillers, put on my rain gear, and headed out into the storm. JFPenn walking out of Oia in the rain This ‘pushing through’ energy will get you to your destination and help you overcome obstacles along the way. Then you need ‘finishing energy’ to return home and reflect on the experience, to bring the lessons of the Camino to the rest of your life. It’s too easy to arrive home, put your pack away and your clothes in the wash, then catch up on the inevitable life admin and everything you’ve missed. By the time your blisters have healed, you may have already forgotten the lessons of the Way, and finishing energy is needed to find the gold and incorporate it into your life. It might be re-reading your journal, or going through your photos and printing those that still resonate. It might be taking action on a decision you made on your walk. Don’t just slip back into life as if nothing has changed. The gifts of pilgrimage take time to emerge so allow space for them. This episode is part of my finishing energy and I’m also writing a book on pilgrimage, which includes lessons from the Pilgrims’ Way and the St Cuthbert’s Way in addition to the Camino. It will be out in 2023, so depending on when you’re listening, check out www.JFPenn.com/pilgrimage for links. (4) A fusion of sacred and secular A pilgrimage is a journey to a place of meaning. The Camino was originally for Christians who walked to the relics of St James to atone for their sin, or to ask for healing or intercession with God, but it is more of a secular experience these days. It certainly was for me, although, of course, if you are a person of faith, you will experience it differently. I talked to many pilgrims on the Way and not a single one said they were walking for reasons of faith. Many had thought about the Camino for years and saw it more as a physical challenge, or a chance to get away and make a change in their lives. A surprising number had walked parts of it before and returned to try alternative routes and experience the camaraderie of the Camino once again. Burning sinners in Colexiata de Santa María de Baiona Photo by JFPenn There were elements of the sacred along the route if you looked for them. Roadside shrines to the Virgin Mary saving sinners from burning boats, and later, shrines to St James, sometimes just a carving on a rock, and other times, full-size sculptures and chapels. There were plenty of churches along the Way, but the convoy of pilgrims stopping to get their Credentials stamped made them crowded and noisy. I found more moments of peace in graveyards along the Way than sitting in the nave of any of the churches. Santiago de Compostela itself is a busy city with a thriving tourist center and pilgrims are just one type of visitor. The cathedral is packed full at every Mass, of which there are several each day, and there is nowhere to find silence if you crave it as I do. The cathedral’s imposing Baroque architecture and the relics of St James in the crypt are a necessary part of the end of the Camino, but I felt more of a spiritual insight in the nearby Monasterio de San Martin Pinario, which was completely empty when I visited. The church was also a cemetery for the Benedictine community, their bodies laid under the stones of the nave, so the living could remember them and reflect on the inevitability of their own fate. Cathedral of Santiago de Compostela Altar Photo by JFPenn I found the Camino more of a physical journey than a spiritual one, partly because it was busy, so there was little time to walk alone and think as I did on the St Cuthbert’s Way. At the end of a day’s walk, it was about washing off the sweat and changing smelly clothes, attending to seeping blisters and spraying antiseptic on open wounds, resting swollen aching feet, finding food, and sleeping. The needs of the physical self overwhelmed the spiritual, but then we are embodied souls. The physical is how we experience life, even an occasional glimpse of the divine. (5) The Camino is an industry — and it always has been The Camino de Santiago has waxed and waned in popularity and now several hundred thousand walk the different routes every year. It is not a wilderness walk unless you choose the early stages of the Via de la Plata, which are far less developed. There will be people, sometimes lots of them, and there were moments on the Way where I was literally part of a long line of pilgrims. Many only walk the last 100km, which you need to complete to get the Compostela, so those last few days in particular are really busy. The pilgrim industry starts with getting the Credential, which you can buy at many of the starting points and also online before you go. You have to get stamps along the Way from churches and hostels, hotels and restaurants, and inevitably, this results in queues even in out-of-the-way places. There are pilgrim menus at cafes, often very good value, and if you stay at albergues, there are even organized opportunities for socializing with other pilgrims. Pilgrim Credential with stamps, Photo by JFPenn There are two possible attitudes to this industry. You can resent the intrusion of so many people and the overt commercialism, and pine for a solo, spiritual pilgrimage — or you can embrace it and join in wholeheartedly. I did the latter and considered it part of supporting the local businesses that play an important part in the Camino experience. I appreciated comfortable accommodation, pharmacies, and supermarkets, as well as coffee shops, restaurants, and bars along the Way. However, I did stop in some sections to let waves of chattering pilgrims pass, and I relished moments of quiet walking when I didn’t see another person for a while, mainly when I left before sunrise a few mornings. My favorite day’s walk was Baiona to Vigo, or at least the first 20km of it. The main Camino route went through the hills, but there was a slightly longer alternate route following the coast north. I chose the coastal route, which was barely way-marked, but by keeping the sea on my left, it was easy enough to navigate along paths and boardwalks. I left Baiona in the dark and walked north as the dawn broke over the coastal wetlands. Wading birds picked their way through the shallows and finches darted between bushes on the shore. The path followed alongside almost deserted beaches. It was a cool autumnal weekday morning, so there were just a few dog walkers on the sand. There were heavy clouds overhead, and the wind blew rain in later that day. I saw a few pilgrims but mostly I walked alone, happy to have taken the alternative route, to step out of the stream of pilgrims even just for a day. Clouds gathering over the beaches heading north to Vigo Photo by JFPenn (6) Your Camino, your way When people say they have “walked the Camino,” it can mean many things, and if you want to walk (or cycle), it’s important to consider what you want your Camino experience to be. We all have different definitions of challenge, and also different capabilities at different times in our lives. There are various Camino routes you can choose depending on how much time you have and how far you want to walk. You have to walk 100 kilometers to be eligible for the Compostela, but the longest route, the Via de la Plata, is nearly 1000 kilometers. The Frances is nearly 800 kilometers and is the most popular and busy route, but there are also short routes like the Ingles if you have limited time, or you can do the final stage of the longer routes. There are many companies who can organize and book accommodation for you, or you can walk independently and stay in hostels/albergues along the way. You can carry your own pack or get luggage transfer and carry a day pack. The time of year will also affect your experience, so you can see how the challenge can vary depending on these practical elements. JFPenn with backpack for the Camino Portuguese Coastal route. While I originally wanted to walk the Frances route, made famous by countless books and the film The Way, I couldn’t be away from my business for the time needed to complete it. I decided on the Portuguese Coastal route, still a challenge at 14 days of back-to-back walking, and considered much quieter than the Frances. I carried my own pack and walked the whole route. I booked through Macs Adventure and had a private room each night in hotels or B&Bs. I like to know where I’m sleeping every night, and I didn’t want to deal with shared bathrooms and snoring. Those were my choices, and they shaped my Camino. Many people, including pilgrims in their 70s, overtook me during the day carrying day packs, and certainly, getting luggage transferred is a good way to make walking easier. Every pilgrim is different, and it is easy to end up comparing situations. You might pass a tired and limping pilgrim one day, only to end up like that yourself another day. You might wish your pack was lighter, or you might judge others for ‘only’ walking five days instead of a longer route, or you might judge yourself for not being fit enough, or for not looking after your feet and getting blisters, or for carrying too much stuff. But no pilgrim is ‘better’ than another. We all have different reasons to walk, and different challenges along the Way. Keep your eyes on your own path. Practical considerations and tips In terms of training, I regularly walk 20km with a day pack and I also do weight training, so I have strong legs and no issues with my knees or back. This was my third multi-day solo pilgrimage walk, but it was also much longer than anything I have done before. I knew I could do six days back-to-back walking in bad weather, but on reflection, 14 days was difficult, even though there were some shorter days in the middle. I should have scheduled a rest day and certainly recommend one if you are carrying your own gear for weeks at a time. I’ve done plenty of long walks without getting blisters in the same walking shoes, but after one long, hot and sweaty day walking on rocky uneven ground, I started getting sore spots and they compounded into blisters over subsequent days. I ended up taping my feet and hobbling the last few days, but the many pharmacies along the way are used to pilgrims, and you’ll find painkillers and blister plasters front and center in them all. Camino arrow in eucalyptus forest on a hot day’s walking, Photo by JFPenn I’ve listed my gear in a separate article, and I was pleased with my Osprey Sirrus 36-litre backpack. I didn’t get any bruising on my hips and no back pain, so it wasn’t too heavy at around 8kg (plus water during the day). I made the mistake of a heavy pack on the St Cuthbert’s Way and paid the price! I was also grateful for my walking poles (LEKI Womens Micro Vario Carbon Trekking Poles), as the Portuguese route is rocky and uneven in places, plus they helped this tired and wobbly pilgrim keep going in difficult times! During the day, I took pictures and wrote little notes in my phone, and then every morning, I woke early and wrote up the notes from the day before. If you want to reflect on your experience later, definitely keep notes and take photos as you walk. On a multi-day trip, the days blend together as the routine of pilgrimage shifts the passing of time in some strange way. Schedule time before you leave to prepare, both practically and also to shift out of your busy normal life into ‘pilgrim time,’ which is a slower, more reflective pacer. You’ll also need to schedule time when you return to ease back into things. Have at least a day in Santiago de Compostela to look around and attend mass, but also keep your schedule clear back home. I was exhausted and needed to rest the first few days, but also I found I couldn’t just jump back into busy work and meetings and noise. I needed some reflection time before ramping up to full speed. I’m writing this a month after returning, which has given me some space to reflect, and my blisters are all healed too. Eating well in Santiago de Compostela Photo by JFPenn (7) I needed these last years of walking alone across a seasonal change in my life I did my first solo multi-day pilgrimage, the Pilgrims’ Way in October 2020 between pandemic lockdowns, which I talked about in episode 50: This too shall pass. I walked the St Cuthbert’s Way alone in October 2021 when I was still recovering from Covid, and I have walked alone for many days in training. I love my husband, Jonathan. He is my best friend and we walk together a lot — but I needed those times to walk alone. The pandemic lockdowns made me feel like a bird bashing its wings against the bars of a cage as I talked about in my lessons from the Pilgrims’ Way. I walked myself into submission over that time and the pilgrimage helped calm my anger and frustration and grief at everything going on in the world and my inability to change it. These last two years have also been a time of change physically and emotionally. I’m 47 as I record this and I’m still in the hormonal rollercoaster of midlife which has impacted my sleep and mental health and, compounded by the pandemic, has made the last few years pretty tough. I had terrible insomnia for most of it but am grateful that has now been fixed by HRT patches, which have been truly life-changing for me. HRT is not for everyone, but I recommend reading Menopausing by Davina McCall if you or anyone you love is struggling through this phase. These long walks have given me so much during difficult times. I am goal-orientated and completing a pilgrimage route is a clear physical goal that you can tick off and feel a sense of accomplishment in finishing. I walked alone and proved to myself that I can do hard things, that I can walk through pain, that I can walk in all weathers, that I can deal with things going wrong and I can cope with my fears along the way. I have proved to myself that I am resilient and that has felt like an important thing to prove at this time of my life. JFPenn arriving at cathedral of Santiago de Compostela 19 Sept 2022 Many people walk pilgrimage at a time of change — out of a need to reset, or change jobs, or recover from grief, or find an answer to a question. The Camino alone was not about changing my life and in fact, it made me realise how grateful I am for what I have in my creative business and happy marriage. But the three pilgrimage routes together over the last two years have certainly been a path of change through a rocky period in my life, and in the world in general. It feels like the end of one season and the beginning of another. Perhaps that’s just one of the gifts of middle age, but regardless, walking the Camino was the completion of a life goal and it closed one chapter so I can begin another. You can find more reflections in my book, Pilgrimage, which combines aspects of the emotional and spiritual journey with practical tips which will hopefully help you if you are considering such a trip. You can find more details at jfpenn.com/pilgrimage. I’d love to know what you think about this episode, or hear about your experiences from your own pilgrimage, or if you’d like to ask any questions, please leave a comment, or tweet me @thecreativepenn. Buen Camino! Compostela Joanna Penn, Sept 2022 The post A Pilgrim In The Path Of History. Solo Walking The Camino De Santiago Portuguese Coastal Route With J.F. Penn appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 10/6/22 | ![]() Shaping The World In Profound And Unexpected Ways. Bolivia With Shafik Meghji | From the silver mines of empire to lithium mining under gigantic salt flats, Bolivia has played a significant part in history and is now shaping the future of green technology. Shafik Meghji talks about the diversity of the country from its landscape to its people and religious ceremonies, as well as recommended places to visit, and books to read. Shafik Meghji is an award-winning travel writer, journalist, and author, specializing in Latin America and South Asia. He has co-authored more than 40 guidebooks. His latest book is Crossed Off the Map: Travels in Bolivia. Show notes Bolivia’s geographical diversity and recommended places to visit, including the largest salt flats in the world The unexpected ways Bolivia has influenced and shaped the world Indigenous culture and architecture Festivals and other religious and cultural events, including the dance of the devils and the witches’ market Balancing the desire to travel with environmental responsibility Recommended books about Bolivia You can find Shafik Meghji at ShafikMeghji.com Transcript of the interview Joanna: Shafik Meghji is an award winning travel writer, journalist, and author, specializing in Latin America and South Asia. He has co-authored more than 40 guidebooks. His latest book is Crossed Off the Map: Travels in Bolivia. Welcome, Shafik. Shafik: Thanks, Jo. It’s a pleasure to be chatting to you. Looking forward to talking about all things Bolivia. Joanna: Let’s start with the basics, just in case people don’t know. Where is Bolivia? And what are some of its unique characteristics in terms of geography and climate? Shafik: Partly, as the title of my book alludes to, a lot of people who aren’t familiar with South America or Bolivia specifically, would find it difficult to place. It’s essentially right in the heart of South America. It’s bounded by five different countries; Brazil, and Argentina, Peru, Paraguay, and Chile. It’s incredibly geographically and climatically diverse, so it’s landlocked, but apart from the sea, it has the world’s largest salt flat, it has massive payotes due to the Lake Titicaca, which I’m sure lots of people have heard of. It has some of the highest mountains on earth, of course, the Andes, it’s got part of the Panama Canal, which is the world’s largest tropical wetland, which he shares with Brazil, around a third of it lies within the Amazon basin. There are foothills and there are low-lands. There’s desert-like landscapes, this huge metropolis, like cities is incredibly diverse, and the climate ranges from absolutely freezing to sweltering. And you can sometimes experience both of those in the same day. Uyuni Salt Flat, Bolivia. Photo by Samuel Scrimshaw on Unsplash Joanna: How brilliant. We’re going to come back to some of these places. How did you come to travel so much to Bolivia? And what’s your personal link there? Shafik: I think like a lot of places and destinations that people come to love, it was really just by chance, it was a bit of an accident. I started off my career as a news desk sports journalist, and then slowly got fed up with that and resigned, and went backpacking around India, and then around South America. I was really at that point, just in the highlights, I wanted to go to Rio for Carnival, and I had a wonderful time there. Joanna: Of course. Shafik: Of course, it’s impossible not to and really I only planned to spend a few weeks there and ended up spending a couple of months. But after that I’ve managed to drag myself away and I wanted to hike the Inca Trail to Machu Picchu, The Classic Gringo Trail stuff. But at the time I couldn’t afford to fly and the cheapest way was to travel overland from Brazil to Peru, through Bolivia. And so I planned to do that and didn’t really think too much about it. I didn’t really know much about the country. But as soon as I crossed the border, I got hooked, I ended up travelling to the Salar de Uyuni, an otherworldly landscape, the world’s largest salt flat. I visited the world’s richest silver mine, I traveled into the Amazon and explored the most biodiverse National Park on Earth. I went to some of the highest cities in the world, well over 4000 meters. During that time, I really started to learn a bit more about the cultures, the peoples, the history, and I realized that this country that most people, including myself, before visiting would have had trouble placing on a map has actually influenced and helped even to shape the world in profound and unexpected ways. And that really led to kind of a lifelong love of the place. So I later returned as a travel writer to co-author The Rough Guide to Bolivia. And that gave me a great excuse and an opportunity to visit virtually every part of the country. In doing so, I met so many fascinating people who were generous enough to share their stories. And I learned about the history of the country. I learned about how, really, it feels like the future has arrived in Bolivia. It stands on the front line of so many touchstone issues, like climate, emergency, populism, and so on. And that all was brought together in my book Crossed Off the Map. Joanna: I want to return something you said, that Bolivia has influenced and shaped the world in unexpected ways. I bet everyone’s listening is as surprised about that, because probably we don’t know. What are some of the ways that Bolivia has shaped the world? Shafik: I’ll tell you the story that really first gave me an insight into this aspect of Bolivia’s history, and it was a visit to a place called Potosi, which today most people outside the country don’t really know too much about it, may not have heard of it before. Potosi is the second highest city on Earth. It’s high up in the Altiplano, which is a high plane between two branches of the Andes. It’s a city and above it, well, is a mountain called Cerro Rico and that was home about 500 years ago to the richest silver mine in history. During the Spanish colonial period, so much silver was pulled out of these mines that they said that according to legend you could build a solid over railway track all the way from Bolivia to Madrid, and still have enough leftover for a solid silver engine divide on top. This silver changed the world. It connected up Europe, and Latin America, and Africa, and Asia, together for the first time. The silver was shipped to Europe, which helped to fund the Industrial Revolution, and various wars and conflicts. It traveled over to Asia to Manila on these huge galleons. And there, it was traded for Chinese-made goods. Detail of 16-Pound Silver Bar, probably from Mines of Potosi – 16th Century. Adam Jones from Kelowna, BC, Canada, CC BY-SA 2.0 via Wikimedia Commons The silver from Potosi helped to fund the Great Wall of China, for example. And it also played a role in destabilizing various dynasties. It became such a significant place for hundreds of years. And it became synonymous with great wealth in ‘Don Quixote,’ there’s a phrase ‘worth a potosi,’ which means worth a fortune, which would have been commonly understood at that time, now is obviously drifted out. It’s also the source of that quirky things such as ‘pieces of eight’. This pirate phrase is actually based on some of the silver currency that came out of Potosi. When I visited, I didn’t know anything about this. But I ended up going into these mines, which are centuries old, now they call them rat runs, they’re very claustrophobic and simultaneously thousands of meters above sea level, and hundreds of meters underground, and you’re crawling on your stomach. And then there’s all these poisonous dusts around. There was arsenic dust everywhere when I visited. It’s a very unsettling place. And you see the miners who still work there now the silver has largely long gone. But many miners still work there hoping to strike it rich in very, very difficult conditions. It’s incredibly intense experience. That started to give me an idea and an interest in the history. And then the more I read, and the more I learned, and the more I spoke to people in the city, I realized what an influence of this city, once on of the richest and biggest on Earth, but now forgotten, that had on the rest of the world. It’s stories like that, that helped to spur me to write the book, because I thought these are just fantastic stories. And they deserve to be better known beyond Bolivia’s borders. Joanna: Wow, that is so interesting. When you look into history, and you realize how far things travel, it’s incredible. What you’re talking about there is essentially pillaged out of Bolivia and taken across the world. I wonder how much of our silver that we look at here even in England is from there. I presume it doesn’t have a mark. Once things are made into things we wouldn’t know, would we, how far the silver has gone? Shafik: Absolutely. People listening to this podcast will have silver, they got old heirlooms, family heirlooms perhaps, or things that are made a few 100 years ago, they may well have something made from Potosi silver. And I should say at this point that, of course, all of this wealth came at a great cost. It was borne by the indigenous peoples of the Andes. And it was also born by enslaved Africans who were trafficked over to labor in the mines, and in the smelting plants and so on. But definitely Potosi silver, people will have seen it, and some people may have it in their possession without knowing it. One other side kind of quirky thing from that is that the dollar sign one of the most recognizable symbols today, the origin of that also kind of drifts back to Potosi. Potosi’s initials, used to be stamped on the silver coins that were made in the Royal Mint, which is now a fascinating Museum in Potosi. And they were shipped around the world. The PTSI over one another vaguely resembles the dollar sign. And that was how that particular symbol developed. Joanna: Wow. That’s so interesting. Coming back to the indigenous people, because the history of the world is a history of conquest. But there are I think, based on looking at your book, there are still aspects that the indigenous people still play a part in the culture. What aspects of Bolivia now are based around the indigenous people? Shafik: Well, this is one of the aspects of Bolivian society that really fascinates me and also, I think, is really of interest to the increasing numbers of travelers and tourists that make it out there. Huge numbers of Bolivians have indigenous heritage. And there’s an incredible range of indigenous cultural groups across the country with often very different beliefs, and practices, and cultural makeups, and so on. And really, over the last 20 years or so, often many centuries of repression and violence and so on. Some of those things are starting to be collected in Bolivia. Bolivia, about 20 years ago had the first indigenous president in South American history Juan Evo Morales. And although his legacy is mixed, shall we say, one of the things that it led to was a real flourishing of indigenous identity, and pride, and representation. If you travel in Bolivia today, or any part of Bolivia, from the hot and sweaty east and low-lands, all the way up into the Amazon or to the high-altitude cities of the Andes, you will see indigenous culture thriving in a way that you may not see in many neighboring countries such as Chile, or Argentina, or Brazil. Bolivian girl with baby Llama in Isla del sol, Bolivia. Photo by Alex Azabache on Unsplash And of course, these indigenous cultures are fused with European influences. And also African influences, as I mentioned, huge numbers of enslaved Africans were trafficked to Bolivia, and elsewhere in South America, of course, during the colonial period. All of these are fused together. I’m sure we’ll talk about some of the festivals and celebrations later in this talk, but you really see some of those, this fusion of ideas and this blend and this mixture of influences coming together in events like that. Joanna: Tell us about these now. And you’ve mentioned that wherever you travel, you can find this. Are there specific places that people can go to and attend one of these festivals or places where the architecture might be resonant? Shafik: Absolutely. It’s always better to be specific with these kinds of things. I’ll pick a couple in terms of festivals and religious celebrations. Carnival in Bolivia, and carnival’s celebrated across Bolivia. But the most famous one is in a city called Oruro, which is an old tin mining city in the Andean region, and it can be a kind of melancholy place for much of the year. But during Carnival, late February, early March, it becomes a riot of activity. As I mentioned the celebrations blend indigenous African and European influences, their parades and street parties. The highlight is the Diablada, which is the dance of the devils. And essentially, that’s a snaking procession of dancers in devilish masks, clanging brass bands coming up behind them, and there is figures representing Lucifer and Archangel Michael, everyone’s in absolutely outlandish costumes. Despite the Christian veneer behind things, you really see the indigenous origins of the beliefs coming to the fore. Lucifer, as is often said, to represent the Andean god of the underworld. You can go along and as people might expect from carnivals around the world, there’s copious eating, and drinking, and dancing, and merrymaking, and so on. But the Oruro Carnival is an absolutely fascinating thing to really experience. There’s lots of historic architecture. There are ruins dating back to pre-Inca civilizations, there’s lots and lots of Spanish colonial architecture in cities like Sucre. But the architecture I’m often most interested in, is in a place called El Alto. Now El Alto is not too familiar for people outside of South America is the highest city on Earth. It’s just above La Paz, which is the de facto capital. And it’s really it’s developed, it’s one of the fastest growing cities in South America. It’s developed massively over the last 40 years or so. Huge numbers of indigenous migration, predominantly people from the Aymara and indigenous group who have fled droughts and it’s often caused by the climate crisis, which is having a huge impact in the Andes, but also economic crises and political crises and so on. They flocked to this city and it’s become a real hotbed of Aymara culture and identity. And one of the ways that you see this expressed is in the architecture, and over the last couple of decades, something called cholets have developed. These are multipurpose, incredibly colorful, bright buildings that double up as shops as entertainment spaces for weddings or birthday parties, and so on, which play a big role in Aymara culture, and there’s often some housing as well, and including for the owner, often a chalet, which is part of the portmanteau word. But the look of these buildings is incredibly eye-catching. You’ll have some that resemble characters for Marvel movies, you’ll have some that represent…there’s one that has been designed to look like Optimus Prime, a character from transformers. They have Technicolor, lots of glass and mirrors and all manner of colors, and they blend both kind of modern touches with indigenous Andean symbols. It’s a real clash of influences. A cholet in El Alto, Bolivia Photo by Tasmita Gz Wikimedia CC The last time I visited, I had a wonderful guide, and she described it as firecracker architecture. I certainly can’t do any better than that. But I really advise the audience to stick it into Google after you’ve listened to this and have a look, because they’re absolutely fascinating but also they’ve got a great story behind them, too. Joanna: That’s great. I always like to find pictures for the show notes. So hopefully I’ll have some, if people want to go look at the show notes. But I want to come back, lots of things to come back on. You mentioned this thin Christian veneer. I like that phrase a lot. When I was having a look at your book and about a cities that it seems that death culture and occult things are more common. You mentioned the devil dancing, but La Paz has this unusual cemetery and there’s a witch market. Tell us what is underneath this thin Christian veneer that you mentioned? Shafik: It’s something that if you visit a city like La Paz, it’ll immediately become obvious to you just as you wander the streets. Let’s start off with the cemetery. It’s the Cementerio General, the general cemetery, the biggest in La Paz. But essentially, it’s a mini city, I think it’s roughly about 1.5 square miles. So huge really, kind of dates back to the early 1800s. And they’re really compact, too. So they’re all stacked on top of each other, almost like shelves, and space is of an essence. La Paz is in a valley high up in the mountains, very, very steep sides. But the buildings are absolutely crammed in there, there’s not a lot of space. So that’s reflected in something like the cemetery. I believe that remains had to be cremated after about 10 years and moved to a smaller space. So you’re often only temporarily in a slot in the cemetery. But if you walk round, it feels like you’re in a mini-city of the dead within the larger city of La Paz. Actually, just to go very briefly off tangent, you’ll find this similar things in other South American cities, even in places like Buenos Aires, the famous Recoleta cemetery, huge, huge places, and they’re right in the middle of the cities. They’re more of an urban field than often our graveyards and cemeteries are, say in the UK. But often when I’m traveling to research articles, or to collect books, I always pay a visit to the cemetery because I think they offer an incredible insight into the history, the place just the names, the causes of death and that kind of thing. It offers an insight into the culture and the history. Something that’s much more on the tourist trail than that though, is the Witches’ Market, which is in the heart of the tourist, their backpacker area. And essentially, although it’s called the Witches’ Market, that’s actually a kind of a Spanish colonial term is women, predominantly indigenous women known locally as chifleras. Witchcraft market, La Paz, Bolivia. Photo licensed from BigStockPhoto It’s a cross between a healer, a counselor, a doctor, a medicine woman, it doesn’t have the kind of the pejorative sense the witch is often used that for in an English language point of view. But their stalls are absolutely incredible to look around. Often they have all manner of amulets and potions and the thing that really strikes newcomers the most are the llama fetuses which are dried… Joanna: Oh. Shafik: …and, yeah, and hung up above the door. And you often have to duck under them to get into these tiny shops. And they’re really like almost as big as a broom cupboard is that kind of thing. The Ilama fetuses feature very heavily in traditional central Andean traditions. For example, if you’re buying a new house, or you’re building a new house, you will often bury Ilama fetus beneath the surface, beneath the foundations, and that’s supposed to bring you luck. Joanna: It’s like a rabbit’s foot here in the UK. People carry a rabbit’s foot for luck. We don’t now, but it’s one of these lucky charm type things. Shafik: Exactly. And actually, it’s a really good example to bring up because often if you’re coming from UK, you come from Europe, this seems crazy and outlandish and ‘very exotic.’ But, actually, when you interrogate some of our own beliefs, often actually there are similarities with them. I should say the llama fetuses are stillbirth, they’re stillborn. So that’s how they come about. Across the Andean part of Bolivia, you’ll see llamas and alpacas play a huge part in the culture both as food, and transport, and for cultural reasons. The so called Witches’ Market rather, offers a fascinating insight into these beliefs which live in beliefs, really. And particularly if you speak some Spanish, then you can have a chat with some of the chiflera, who normally if you buy something, will be happy to talk. Joanna: You mentioned that this so called Witches’ Market is in the tourist area, and you said earlier about The Gringo Trail and this backpacker route and it comes down to one of the difficulties that I think you do tackle in your book, which is that yes, we want to travel. We are people who like to travel. But there’s also the climate crisis that you mentioned. Are we changing culture through backpacking and all of this? How can we balance this as people who want to travel but also want to be more responsible? Shafik: I think this is a key question for really for travel writers, but all of us who travel and go on holiday at the moment. First of all, if you’re in the UK, you’ve got to fly to Bolivia, which obviously has a huge carbon imprint. Putting that to one side, there are lots of ways that while you’re there, that you can actually have a positive impact on local communities, and particularly local communities that are bearing the brunt of the climate crisis. There are lots of really good community-run and indigenous-run tourism agencies. And also lodges give you a really good practical example, there’s a logical Chalalan, which is Parque Nacional Madidi Amazon, is run by an indigenous community. And it’s helped to both empower that community and also help to preserve some of the most biodiverse rainforest on Earth. So I think if you’re there, there’s ways to have a positive impact. Obviously, try and avoid internal flights, as tempting as that can be. But also be aware that the way you spend your money, you’re obviously having an impact on the local cultures, as well. The Witches’ Market, which obviously we’re just talking about, is aimed at local people, originally, but it has become more touristy in recent years. And you can generally see that some aspects of it are played up. It’s a difficult balancing act, because also tourists spending money is a key source of income for these people as well. So I think, definitely look for independent places to stay in, look for locally and, ideally, indigenous-ran tourism organizations to go with travel agencies, and really try and minimize your carbon impact once you’re there, which is taking public transport, avoiding flights. And also, if you visit reserves, not just in the Amazon, but also places like the Salar de Uyuni, which is the world’s largest salt flat, the tourism gives local people an economic incentive to help conserve these often very threatened ecosystems. So it’s a thorny issue, that there’s not easy answers to it. But there are certainly ways to minimize the negative impact you have, and in certain areas have a positive impact when you visit. Salar De Uyuni View From Isla Incahuasi, Photo licensed from BigStockPhoto Joanna: You’ve mentioned this salt flat several times. And part of me is like, “Okay, that sounds great.” And then part of me just has this view in my mind that, “I would never want to visit a salt flat.” What is it about this salt flat that makes it so amazing? Shafik: On the surface, it doesn’t sound super appealing. But if you imagine an incredibly flat blindingly white, the brightest place I’ve ever been, expanse, surrounded by volcanoes, and mountains, and dotted with these islands of giant cacti. It’s a really otherworldly landscape. And I just said it’s the biggest in the world is roughly the size of Jamaica. That’s how big this salt flat is. This is only one of several salt flats in southwestern Bolivia. But you can explore on detours and the surface of the salt flat, are covered by…they look like giant fish scales, kind of hexagonal shapes. And you can play lots of tricks with perspective, while you’re there. It’s a hallucinatory landscape. It really is. It feels like stepping onto another planet. And there’s a nearby reserve as well, which is even higher altitude. And there they’ve got mineral stained lakes. So there’s a green lake. There’s a red lake as well, dotted with flamingos. There’s this surreal stones that have been sculpted by the very high winds there. There’s areas that look like lunar landscapes. Salt flat really doesn’t do this area justice, the Salar de Uyuni and the neighboring Eduardo Alvaroa Reserve, are really almost as close as you can get to stepping onto another planet as you can on Earth. Joanna: Yeah, that’s kind of crazy. Is that the place where they did some of these fastest cars racing across the what looks like a desert? Is that on the salt flats or is that in America? I’m trying to remember. Shafik: The time trials, I think, they do on salt flats in the U.S., but they do very much have in the Salar de Uyuni as well. In fact, the Paris Dakar Rally, which confusingly now is often over in South America has been held on the salt flats in the past, and in fact, there’s other sporting events as well. There’s an ultramarathon that goes across it as well, which is challenging to put it mildly because you’re 3600 meters above sea level. The altitude is really testing. And it’s an incredibly remote area yet is linked by train or a town on the edge is linked by train from some of the bigger cities, but you just have to travel across by Toyota Land Cruisers. You often have this landscape to yourself. This is dotted with small communities that rely on salt trading, which has been an industry in this area for millennia. Quinoa farmers, llama herders. But, yeah, it’s a fascinating place to visit. Also it has more modern challenges. It’s a big area for smuggling, both for cars and for drugs, because it’s very close to the Chilean border. And the terrain is very, very difficult to manage. So an awful lot of cars and drugs crisscross over the border. Also interestingly, this is another area where Bolivia will help to shape or certainly will impact the wider world over the years to come. Beneath the surface of the salt flat, and the surface of the salt, there’s kind of like a briny fluid, which is very rich in lithium. Lithium is the lightest metal on earth. The fact that we’re able to do this recording is thanks to the lithium battery in our laptops. Lithium is essential for electric vehicles. It’s used in solar panels. It’s an absolutely vital material, or metal, for our transition to a hopefully fairly soon to a lower carbon global economy. According to some estimates, roughly 50% of the world’s lithium supplies lie in, what’s called The Lithium Triangle, which is in this part of Bolivia, and also in neighboring Argentina, and Chile. At the moment, if you’re traveling for so long with all these natural wonders, and these things like salt traders, which seem to have been around forever, you will also find these grids of tennis court-sized pools of turquoise water or turquoise liquid. These are the fledgling lithium programs with the brine being pumped up. And funnily enough, recently, I think over the last couple of months, Bolivia has actually started to produce its first electric cars within the country as well, taking advantage of its lithium reserves. So all in all, the Salar de Uyuni is an incredibly diverse, it’s an interesting place to explore, particularly at the moment. Joanna: I used to work for a mining company in Australia, and you see the landscape quite dramatically changed when mining wealth is found. So I can imagine that that will change quite a lot over the coming years. So that’s really interesting. A quick question before we talk about books. You’ve mentioned the altitude a number of times and I do know someone who came to Bolivia and got sick with altitude sickness. Is that a problem with altitude and any recommendations for the altitude-related issues? Shafik: Yes, it’s absolutely something to be aware of. If you’re visiting the Western Andean side of Bolivia, most of it is very high attitude. So if you’re flying to La Paz, you’re flying to the world’s highest international airport, which is well over 4000 meters. If you’ve got the time, the best way to avoid it is to fly into sea level, you’re as close as you can at sea level to another city, and then slowly make your way up, pausing every 500 or 1000 meters. So you adapt. However, that’s not a luxury that everyone has. So if you do fly into La Paz, really take it easy for the first few days until you’ve started to acclimatized. Get lots of sleep, drink lots of water, avoid alcohol, and definitely don’t overdo it. Even when you adapt, you’ll still feel tired, you’ll get exhausted quickly. I always think of it as a bit of an insight into the aging process kind of speeded up, because even just climbing a flight of stairs will feel like scaling Everest. Definitely take it easy, but be aware of these symptoms as well. And unless you’ve got a serious attack of it, in which you should go to hospital, the best approach is to descend. Even within La Paz, there’s various park places either in the city or nearby that are lower altitude. So if you’re struggling, descend. Joanna: Yeah, good tip. So we’re always out of time. And this is the Books and Travel podcast. What are some of your recommended books about or set in Bolivia? Shafik: One of the things, it’s a real shame the very few Bolivian authors are translated into English and beyond academic books, very few English language authors write about the country which is one of the reasons that I wrote Crossed Off the Map to help fill this in, but there are definitely a few other books that I would recommend. The first one is The Bolivia Reader, which is Duke University Press, and it’s got several editors. It features an incredible range of extracts of writing about Bolivia, mainly from Bolivian authors. You have pieces by the former President Evo Morales, who was the first indigenous president in South America, but also by people like Che Guevara, who died in Bolivia. And also conquistadores like Pedro Cieza de León, who provides one of the earliest written accounts of Bolivia. So the book ranges from ancient stories and poetries, and legends, to fiction, and contemporary journalism. As I say, I particularly found it useful and interesting to read the early accounts from the 16th century. One of the other books I’d recommend is 1491: The Americas Before Columbus, by Charles C. Mann, and that examines the indigenous societies across the Americas, including in what is now Bolivia, prior to the arrival of the Europeans. It was particularly interesting on the ancient cultures of the Llanos de Moxos, which is a part of the Bolivian Amazon. These ancient societies built thousands and thousands, tens of thousands of earthworks structures, including even pyramids in some of the most challenging environments imaginable. It’s an incredibly insightful book. And actually, it was a huge inspiration for Crossed Off the Map. Also in the Bolivian Amazon, which is the reason that is often overlooked, so I always like to emphasize it is a book called Lost in the Jungle by a guy called Yossi Ghinsberg. People might be familiar with it because he was turned into a film a few years ago called ‘Jungle,’ with Daniel Radcliffe. It’s an adventurous tale of survival in the Bolivian Amazon. Essentially, Yossi Ginsburg was a Israeli backpacker who went off on a expedition into the rainforest inevitably goes wrong, and he ends up lost and alone. But he survived. He went to great odds, despite being menaced by wild animals, not having any food, and so on. He was eventually rescued by indigenous communities, and wrote a very interesting and exciting book about it. There’s also a coda to that book because it really helped to encourage interest in the Bolivian Amazon amongst backpackers. Initially, Israeli backpackers, but then, backpackers from the UK, Europe, and beyond. And it helped to turn a place called Rurrenabaque into a hub of eco-tourism. So it’s had an interest in afterlife, as well. But I think those three books will give you a bit of an insight into Bolivia’s history, and also its contemporary life. Joanna: Brilliant. Where can people find you and your books online? Shafik: Right, if you can spell up my name, I’m easy to find. It’s shafikmeghji.com. And then that’s the same for my twitter and Instagram handles and Crossed Off the Map: Travels in Bolivia is available from all good bookshops. Joanna: Brilliant. Well, thanks so much for your time, Shafik. That was great. Shafik: Oh, my absolute pleasure, Jo. Thanks for having me on. The post Shaping The World In Profound And Unexpected Ways. Bolivia With Shafik Meghji appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
| 8/26/22 | ![]() Sacred Steps. Pilgrimage With Kevin Donahue | How is pilgrimage different from just a long walk? Why do we feel a calling to pilgrimage even when not religious? How does pilgrimage connect us to our physicality, and simplify life so we find some perspective? Kevin Donahue talks about some of his ‘sacred steps’ on various pilgrimage routes across Europe. Kevin Donahue began walking pilgrimage routes in 2019 and hosts the ‘Sacred Steps Podcast,’ where he discusses pilgrimage with fellow pilgrims. He’s currently writing a book, Sacred Steps: A Pilgrim’s Journal, out in 2023. Show notes How is pilgrimage different from a long walk? Why pilgrimage resonates even to those who are not religious Highlights of Kevin’s pilgrimage, including the crossing to Holy Island, Lindisfarne The challenges of pilgrimage — and the gifts that only emerge later Tips for the Camino Portuguese route — wear shoes with thicker soles for the cobblestones! Recommended books on pilgrimage You can find Kevin Donahue at SacredStepsPodcast.com and on Instagram @kevincdonahue You can listen to my interview on Kevin’s podcast about my pilgrimage to Canterbury here. My book, Pilgrimage, Lessons Learned from Solo Walking Three Ancient Ways, is out now Transcript of the interview Jo: Kevin Donahue began walking pilgrimage routes in 2019, and hosts the Sacred Steps Podcast, where he discusses pilgrimage with fellow pilgrims. He’s currently writing a book, Sacred Steps: A Pilgrim’s Journal, out in 2023. Welcome, Kevin. Kevin: Thanks, Jo. It’s great to be on. I appreciate getting a chance to talk with you today. Jo: I’ve been on your show discussing my pilgrimage and you talk about pilgrimage a lot. And so, this is fascinating, but let’s start with a definition. What is pilgrimage? How is it different from a long walk? Kevin: That’s a great question, Jo, and I think this is something that’s really a bit intimidating for people when they hear the word ‘pilgrimage.’ I didn’t really know what that meant to me as a walker at first. I went to the Webster’s children’s dictionary, because, for me, if Webster could explain it to a child, surely that could be something I would understand. And the dictionary said, look at pilgrimage and then look at pilgrim, a person who travels to a holy place as an act of religious devotion. That made a lot of sense to me. Because when you think about devotion, that gets into intention and purpose. And if you’re walking with this intent, versus a long walk, which you and I have both actually done a lot of, Jo, but pilgrimage is as much about the journey as it is the destination. I think it’s those moments of greater awareness, either about ourselves or, to some degree, maybe our faith or our world, or how we interact and engage with the world around us, that really makes pilgrimage so rewarding. And it’s that spirit of each step of the journey having significance, rather than just the beginning or the end. It’s the full process, I think, that makes pilgrimage much different than just a long walk. Jo: That’s really interesting. We’ll come back to some of those aspects, but I noticed that you call yourself a ‘reluctant pilgrim’ on your website. Where does this reluctance come from, and what happened in your life to get you over that? Kevin: I’ve had the opportunity in the United States to do some of our national scenic trails, and we have some great ones. I’ve walked along the Appalachian Trail, haven’t finished the whole thing just yet, the Florida National Scenic Trail. I’ve walked out in the western United States. And like you said, those are long walks. I had always wanted to do the Camino de Santiago in Spain. And I made the decision, but as it grew closer, I really didn’t understand the concept of pilgrimage and how it related to me. So, I jokingly said I was a very reluctant pilgrim, because I didn’t set out to be a pilgrim or to go on pilgrimage. I wanted to have this bucket list experience, this life-affirming socialization, walking in the footsteps of history, where people had trod for a thousand-plus years. And that seemed really like a great, great walk for me. It’s those other elements that intervened throughout the process that really reconnected me in some ways to my faith, because I was, I think what we would call ‘lapsed but listening,’ where you can be someone who maybe follows Christ as a Christian, but not necessarily follows the orthodoxy and teachings maybe of a Christian church or denomination. Being on that walk and going through some of the places that I got to experience, which, I think that’s the great part about pilgrimage, you come and engage with these different places and people, that really, I think you said, what was it that sparked? I think for me, that’s what maybe pushed me over the edge a little bit and changed my long walk into a pilgrimage. And I think it’s something that happens for each person very individually, and perhaps quite a bit differently. Jo: It’s interesting because as we talked about before, I’m not a Christian, but I would say I’m a seeker and I find moments of connection with the divine, I suppose, or the universe. But I definitely do not follow a Christian religion, or any particular religion. It’s interesting because you started off by defining a sort of traveling to a holy place as an act of religious devotion, and that pilgrimage is going to these holy places. And I always feel like even if we don’t adhere to a particular religion, there’s something about pilgrimage that touches a part of every person’s soul, if they have any form of kind of spiritual seeking. And so, it’s not just that it has to be a Christian faith or any kind of, because the pilgrimage is obviously in every religion. What do you think about pilgrimage transcending religion in a way? Kevin: Oh, you are spot on, Jo. There’s a great organization in the UK, the British Pilgrimage Trust, and their mantra is that they want to enliven pilgrimage for people of all faiths and none. I think that’s such a powerful mission statement. Because it speaks to so much of what these special places have meant in our lives collectively, for centuries and millennia. We look across the UK and there are these sacred places that we know had such great value to our ancestors. One of the obvious ones that stands out for U.S. tourists is Stonehenge. Or up the road in Avebury, Woodhenge. And you say to yourself, ‘I’m standing in a place where people have journeyed here for centuries.’ And, to your point, that’s obviously not a Christian church. There’s no cross and steeple. But clearly, people have held that space in high regard. And it might have been something where people had journeyed from a great distance to come to be in this space. I think we can all recognize that there are these places where we feel a greater sense of purpose or a greater sense of connectivity, whether that’s with something spiritual, or whether it’s with our own self-identity and feeling of self-worth. I think pilgrimage does mean something different to everyone, but I think it has meaning to everyone. And, again, I think that’s a bit about what separates pilgrimage from a long journey is that it’s the process of making that trip that has significance to the person that’s undertaking it. Jo: Absolutely. And that resonance with faith in whatever over the generations, and a resonance with that emotional connection and people of faith in a particular place, I almost feel leave an imprint that, and that’s almost what we feel. You can feel that it’s God touching you, and it may be that, but you can also feel that it’s connection to people across millennia. I remember being at Stonehenge once, and there weren’t many people there. It was winter. It was freezing cold, and there was a murmuration of swallows or swifts or the murmuration when the birds flock in shapes above Stonehenge. And I was standing there going, ‘This has to be some kind of divine experience.’ It was a crazy kind of experience, and feeling like I was connecting to this sort of deep Earth power, whatever it was. Like you say, there are places where we feel that connection with people across time, I suppose. Kevin: We’ve talked about that a little bit on my podcast, the ‘Sacred Steps Podcast.’ My guests are not formally Christians. I’ve had the opportunity to talk to people of no faith, and people who are Buddhist and people who are Muslim. These journeys have great weight and significance for people. You can go into a space, and it might be a church. We’ve talked about, Jo, you love the architecture and the devotion that people have made into creating these spaces, and the beauty that resonates with them. And you can be in a space that man has made, a church or what have you, and you can feel a significance that is not necessarily tied to a particular orthodoxy. Pilgrim Kevin Donahue at St Peters Basilica Rome Photo by Kevin Donahue I think whether you’re going to these ancient sites, whether you’re journeying to…and there are a lot of places where our different faith practices hold in high regard. Their wells and their caves and their springs, but natural places that you find out in the landscape. Also, these sometimes grand shrines that man has made in practice of faith. Being in these spaces, to your point, you sometimes feel like that’s a very special space, and you’ve arrived at just the right moment. Jo: Absolutely. Let’s talk about some of the various pilgrim routes that you’ve done, because you’ve done some bits of quite a lot of different ones. You and I almost met in person on the Cuthbert’s Way, but you were ahead of me going over to Lindisfarne. Why did you decide to approach pilgrimage in a patchwork, as opposed to walking the whole length of one? Kevin: Great question, Jo. It’s more a product of necessity than intent. Let’s circle back to that definition of what makes pilgrimage unique. The importance of the journey itself, step by step. Surely, then, one of the elements of pilgrimage is that it is not defined by just a singular starting point or a singular endpoint, although most frequently, we’re all walking to one spot. 1,000 years ago, a pilgrim would have begun their journey at their door, and walked towards this particular holy place or this particular significant location. And now, we kind of leave our homes and we jump on the train or we get on the airplane and we journey off to this starting point. We’re a bit constrained, at least I know I am, by how much time we can devote to that journey. So, it’s time away from family. I have a teenage son, and there’s an investment of time factor. And then also, how much time you can take away from work or what have you. As a career person in the United States, we get a certain amount of vacation time. I’ve always been trying to balance, I think, the purpose of my journey. Why do I want to do this walk? Versus what can I commit fully to the pilgrimage? For me, sometimes it’s only been a week or a couple of weeks that I can be away. And some of these walks are intimidatingly long. You and I have talked about the Camino de Santiago, from St. James, a walk like that’s five or six weeks, and you say, ‘Well, wow, I can’t devote that.’ Kevin Donahue’s pilgrim backpack in Canterbury. Photo by Kevin Donahue But I’ve come to learn, and a good friend of mine, English author, Andy Bull, wrote a book called Pilgrim Pathways where he looks at weekend walks, getting into these special spaces, where you’re only devoting a small amount of time because that’s what you have available. For me, and I want to talk to you a little bit about where I’ve been, but in some instances, it’s been more of a product of what time can I devote to this pilgrimage has defined in some ways the length that I’ve been able to walk. I’ve had to start in some places that had significance for me, that maybe weren’t at the ‘starting gate.’ So, that’s been an interesting part of it. Jo: I think this is so important, because humanity just makes up rules for things. And it’s like, there’s a measurement of everything that we do. Clearly, the pilgrimage where someone walks for six months from Canterbury to Jerusalem is far more holy than you (!), who only walked for a week or… Kevin: I would think it would be. Jo: As you said, it’s about the intention, it’s about the purpose. If it’s an act of religious devotion, and you walk to your local church on a Sunday. They say on the Camino, don’t they? ‘Walk your own Camino.’ There shouldn’t be judgment or self-judgment around what we did. It’s funny, isn’t it? We always just impose these rules on things. Kevin: My self-judgment was on full display the day after I arrived in Santiago de Compostela on the Camino de Santiago. You make these walks, and I had done not a long distance. I had done about 100 miles. I walked the Camino Portuguese section, up through Spain. I was feeling quite proud of myself. I had done this long walk and I had walked along further than some. I was pretty proud of that. There was some ego there. And there was this lady in the cathedral, and she must have been, I don’t know, 80 years old, 80-plus years old, and she had her walking stick. She was going from the pew straight up to the front of the church. And it was, from my perspective, it looked to be everything she could do to make that walk. And here I was feeling so proud of myself, in my younger condition, that I had walked 100 miles or whatever. And here she was making a walk that was every bit as meaningful to her, and probably every bit as challenging as mine had been to me. I had to check my ego a little bit, because how we define a pilgrim and how we define that distance of pilgrimage, to your point, we put a lot of rules and a lot of vanity around it. It’s more about what someone gets out of it than what I judge they’ve put into it. Jo: Absolutely. And I feel like I certainly found my ego broken down by some of the walking I’ve done. Kevin: Oh my goodness. Jo, you’re an ultra walker. You would lap me a hundred times over. Jo: Tell us what are some of the highlights, some of the places that are memorable to you that you visited on your various pilgrimages? Kevin: I’ve had the opportunity over the course of the last few years, COVID willing and health willing, to make a few of these walks. I mentioned I did the Camino Portuguese. I started in Vila Nova de Cerveira, and walked to Santiago de Compostela. Cathedral at Santiago de Compostela Photo by Kevin Donahue That was my first time doing a pilgrimage walk. Everything was a new experience, and it’s like you go to a museum for the first time, and everything you see is the most fascinating thing. And then you move over four feet and you’re like, ‘Oh, now this is now the most fascinating thing.’ Everything I saw and experienced was so fresh and new. I came up to the UK, and I walked a route that you did as well, from London to Canterbury, and the English Pilgrims’ Way. And I did a bit of a different route than you did, because I wanted to be in Rochester. I walked along the Thames Way and then walked over to Rochester, to be in Rochester Cathedral. Being in the cathedral in Rochester was very important to me, because the patron saint of adopted children is celebrated there. Having an adopted son, I wanted to pay homage and pay respects in Rochester Cathedral. So that was very special to me. Arriving in Canterbury was wonderful because, and you saw this too, Jo. You get into this grand cathedral, and you suggested to me not to miss Evensong. That was a really special experience for me, with the choir in the background. I was going on to Dover, to begin the Via Francigena. And that night, another pilgrim was arriving. She had walked the old way from Southampton. Caroline is her name. The two of us were there and we were receiving a blessing. That night, Caroline’s walk was ending, and mine was going on. I had intended, but for those darn ferries in Dover, I had intended to go on into France and such. And so, my walk was continuing. She gave me a coin, a clay coin, that she had been given, and it had a shell sculpted into the coin and she had carried it with her. It had been given first by a vicar and then to a pilgrim, and the pilgrim had given it to Caroline. And Caroline had given it to me, and now I was carrying it on. I ended up this year, I was in Italy, and I walked a section of the Via Francigena in Italy and I carried that same pilgrim coin with me to St. Peter’s in Rome. I was able to give it to a pilgrim who was walking on from Rome to Jerusalem. It was so special to see that this sort of connectivity between people and purposes was continuing on with his journey to Jerusalem. As you said, you and I both had the opportunity to go to Lindisfarne, the Holy Island, and walk across the sands to Holy Island. To me, that was probably one of the most special moments. I will never forget the storm that happened the night before, because, whew, Northumbria, there’s some storms, and that was a big one. Between the wind, the gusts, and the rain, I was really nervous about getting to walk the next morning. But walking across the receding tides, the north sea, and you see these poles that mark the high route of the sands. And since the time of St. Aidan and St. Cuthbert, people have made their way to Lindisfarne. Following in their footsteps was really incredibly powerful for me. I’ll never forget walking to Holy Island. Pilgrim Kevin Donahue about to cross the sands to Lindisfarne Holy Island Photo by Kevin Donahue Jo: I’m so glad you mentioned that one. It’s funny, isn’t it, because there are these incredibly grand cathedrals, obviously you mentioned Santiago de Compostela and Canterbury, and I felt it too. And as you were speaking there, I was remembering my own crossing, and yet it is just your feet in the sand and the water. When I was there, it was a really sunny morning, and the seals were singing, which was just the oddest sound. I couldn’t really see many people, and there’s nobody waiting there, the same as finishing any pilgrimage. There’s no one waiting, going, ‘Wow, you’re amazing. You’ve reached the pinnacle of your journey.’ It’s these, you mentioned earlier, these moments of greater awareness, where we’re so aware of our place on the Earth, physically and spiritually, and part of this great tradition, as you say, and almost just much more in touch with our physical bodies than I feel we are in normal life. Kevin: Oh, my goodness. Jo: You know what I mean? Especially with that crossing. Did you do it barefoot? Kevin: I did it barefoot. It was a visceral experience. You take your shoes off and you pull up your pants legs and you make your way out. Your feet first touch the seawater. And even the receding sea was covering…it hits your toes and it stings them. The water temperature is in the high 50s, and mid-50s. And it’s just, it’s like daggers. Then it covers your feet. And then all of a sudden, your body adapts to it a little bit, and you’re walking out through the sands, and you kind of feel the sands and you touch these wooden beams, these wooden poles, that are ragged from rising tides and sea air, and the storms that roll in off the coast. You make your way from one to the next to the next. Walker on the sands crossing away from Lindisfarne Photo by JFPenn It’s the bottom of the sea floor. So it’s not uniform. You go through these areas where all of a sudden now that stinging water is making its way up my leg and towards my knee. And then you get to a point where it’s a little higher. All of a sudden there’s grasses and such, sea grasses that may be growing there. And there’s a part that even protrudes above the tide most times. And it’s this sucking mud. Jo: There’s a lot of mud! Kevin: And you disappear. I disappeared past my knee, whew, right down into the mud. I’m walking and I’ve got my sticks and I’m trying to sort of maneuver my leg out of the mud, back up to make the next step. And it’s, fup, fup, fup, through the mud, and I look over and there’s this wellie that’s sitting there, stuck in the mud, where clearly somebody had just literally walked out of their boot, trying to make their way across. But it’s not a very long section of the walk. It’s maybe, what, Jo? A mile and a half maybe. It’s a short distance. Jo: Yes. You can do it in an hour, really. An hour and a half, maybe. Kevin: Yeah. Maybe 90 minutes at the most, and given the conditions. But, like you, I was alone out there. I like how you said the seals were singing and the birds are flying over, and you have to do it at low tide, which means, in many instances, you’re doing it in the very early morning. For me, this was October, and it was maybe 7:00 in the morning, and the sun was just rising out over the sea to the east. I’ve been to the Vatican and St. Peters. I’ve been to the crypts and the Scavi. I’ve been to the tomb of St. James the Apostle. And as you said, standing in Canterbury and the beautiful cathedrals at Westminster and throughout England. I don’t know what tops walking to Holy Island across the sea. That was a really special walk, and I’ll never forget the connectivity, like you said, that I felt in those moments. Jo: I agree. We should also mention if people are going to do it, that it’s quite a shock to then walk into the little town on the island. Kevin: Oh, absolutely. Jo: Because you’ll come off the beach, and there’s cars coming on because the tide is down. And then you walk around the corner, and I was in shock at a coachload of literally American tourists, just arrived. Kevin: Everyone’s on holiday, right? And here you are with your rucksack. Jo: Suddenly, it’s mad. It’s bonkers. I stayed overnight. You have to book it, obviously. It’s a very small island. But the mass of tourists, they all leave again when the tide comes in, because it is a tidal island. By staying overnight, the atmosphere got a lot more holy again. But while all the people are there in their coaches, it can be a little bonkers. A really interesting place, right? Dawn on Lindisfarne Holy Island Oct 2021 Photo by JFPenn Kevin: Absolutely. From low tide to low tide, it’s a holiday market kind of atmosphere. Everyone’s there, they’re doing their tourist shops, and they’re eating and dropping in the pubs and going to the Lindisfarne Abbey, which is beautifully maintained. And there’s a bit of a fake castle there on the island, which is a bit of a tourist attraction. There’s sort of an artist element, where people are coming to paint or take photographs, and just walk and explore. But then, once you get to that midway point of the tide, maybe 3:00 in the afternoon or 4:00 in the afternoon, the whole island vacates, and it’s just the local residents and those people who are staying overnight. I agree with you 100%. I stayed overnight, in a wonderful inn, and the storytelling with the locals, and the opportunity to be with people. A few are on holiday, but a few who were also there to see the Abbey, and were treating it as more of a spiritual destination. You have the island to yourself. I know there’s always this conflict with over-tourism, but to have it to yourself was really special. Definitely stay the night if you can at Lindisfarne. It was wonderful. It’s easy to catch the train up to Berwick, and then you can get a cab over if you’re just going for a bit, if you aren’t walking the way of St. Cuthbert. I definitely recommend a spot if you haven’t been before. Jo: For sure. I think pilgrimage has to have its challenges, right? It’s not easy, and the challenges can be physical. They can be spiritual, personal. What were some of your greatest challenges that you’ve experienced during your pilgrimages? Kevin: Oh, my goodness. On my very first one, I had spent two years reading, and really trying to understand what the pilgrimage experience was like. Because, to your point, I was a backpacker, and I had done walks, and so I understood how to be a backpacker. I invested a lot of my preparation into understanding the culture and the camaraderie of pilgrims on the Camino. What I didn’t know to prepare for, or maybe I overlooked, or maybe no one warned me at all, was walking the Portuguese, a lot of the roads, a lot of the paths that you walk on are cobblestones. As I was walking through these portions of Portugal, you’d go on a cobblestone road for a long stretch, a couple of miles, and then you would go off onto a hard rock stretch and then back onto the cobblestones. It really did a number on my feet. I ended up with what’s called stone bruises on the bottom sole of your feet. Normally, if you have stone bruises, you would want to rest. Jo: Yeah, stop! Kevin: Because it’s a bruise on the underside, the sole of your foot. If you’re trying to walk, maybe you can wobble back on your heels, but you certainly can’t go very far very fast. So, I had these stone bruises, and I battled with the stone bruises and just trying to find enough padding, batting that I could put under my foot, between my foot and my shoe, that I could continue my Camino. Because after so many years of preparing, I didn’t want it to be cut short. I really didn’t want to sacrifice anything that I was looking forward to. So, I had a three or four-day pretty intense battle with the bottom of my feet. What I learned was that you have to understand exactly where you’re going to be walking, and I didn’t have the right shoes for it. I had my regular walking shoes that I would walk through dirt paths or sand paths and very light underfoot, and a very lightweight type of shoe. I didn’t have a very rugged undersole. That was a great learning for me. And now ever since, I don’t want to promote any brands, but I’ll tell you that I wear a shoe with a little more rugged undersole, which has been great for me. Jo: Can you tell us the brand? Because I’m walking that route. Kevin: Yes. I now wear, pretty much everywhere I go, a max cushioning shoe from Altra, called the ‘Altra Olympus.’ They make that in a men’s and women’s model. And there are a lot of max cushioning shoes, and they’re not for everyone because it’s like having two insoles in your shoe. If you’re a runner or a distance walker, you might feel like you’ve got a little less connectivity to the terrain. [Imogen Clark mentioned the same issue on the Camino Portuguese, and she recommended HOKA SpeedGoat which also have the thicker sole.] But if you’re walking with a backpack, on what I came to term as ‘hobblestones,’ that was exactly what you needed and what you wanted. As far as the physicality, this past year, when I was walking through Italy, it’s so darn hot in Europe right now. I was just there, and I walked in May and in June, and the closer you get, it was just so hot, and many places in walking the Via Francigena, especially as you get closer to Rome, the path is an old one. Poppies on the Via Francigena Photo by Kevin Donahue You follow the route of Archbishop Sigeric, who was receiving his papers, if you will, from the Pope in Rome, and then recorded his route back to Canterbury. So, that is the official route from Canterbury to Rome. But as you walk, the towns have moved. Over time, where there used to be maybe less distance from place to place, because of the wars and Punic Wars and things that have all taken place over this time, you end up with cities that used to be there that aren’t there. And so, you’ve got some longer distances just out in the heat. That was very tough. But the one thing I had no idea of, and you probably know this, Jo, it seems like, because of these battles and the different Papal States that have taken place throughout Italy, almost every little town and city in Italy is on top of a hill. As a walker, you walk 12, 15, 18, 20 miles throughout the day in this heat. Then at the end of the day, your reward is that you get to go up this just crazy hill to reach the top of the city where you’re going to be sleeping that night, or where you have the opportunity to get dinner. That was very, very challenging mentally for me because you’re so tired, and it was hot, and you were exhausted from the day. And then you’ve got this big hill push at the end, which sometimes was 400, 600 big, big meters up at the end, over short runs, that really were super challenging. And if there’s one thing I could change, I would flatten that part of Italy. Jo: It’s interesting because these physical challenges, it is hard. We do put ourselves through this. And, I mean, either it’s really hot, or I remember my last day walking into Canterbury, it rained so hard for so long. I’d put in a really big day, and everything was so, so wet. And it feels like the gifts of pilgrimage don’t show up at the time. Kevin: No. There are no trumpets that are sounding as you’re walking. Jo: As you’re doing it. But I find that the gifts of pilgrimage come later. When you have time to reflect on the journey and you’re not just thinking about how much pain you’re in or how hungry you are, or how hot you are. What are some of the gifts of pilgrimage that have emerged for you later in the process? Kevin: I do think, in some ways, the physicality of it is an important part of the process. Because pilgrimage in and of itself is such a simple life. You eat, you walk, you pray, if you’re so inclined, and then you sleep. Walk, sleep. A very simple life. And you just have with you what’s on your backpack, what you’re carrying. So, you have very few possessions. But as you go, the physicality, what I found, and you and I talked about this on our podcast together, it quiets the mind, but you become in this state where your body becomes a little numb physically, and you’re no longer aware of you stepped on a rock or whatnot, or you did this or that. It’s just sort of you get into this process of walking. It opens the mind, I think, a bit to everything else around, and what you can see in these natural places. And the engagement that you have with the things around you. To answer your question, the things that show up beyond the journey often do come later. For me, I think, well, I’ve had the opportunity to have a deeper connection to understand a bit better what’s important to me, and what I consider to be important faith practices that don’t necessarily involve a physical church. I’ve become, I think, a little more compassionate for other people. My own awareness of my own sufferings and my own shortcomings, especially when you’re walking, and you’re just physically, you say to yourself, ‘I don’t know if I can take one more step,’ it gives me great empathy for people who are going through something in their lives, physically, emotionally, spiritually. I can definitely put myself in their shoes, and have a greater understanding of their challenges than I ever could before. I think it’s made me a better father in some ways, because I’m more accepting of my own shortcomings. We tend to build ourselves up a bit. At least I do. I had a very large ego, and I think pilgrimage has been a very humbling experience for me to recognize that you think to yourself, ‘Oh, well, tomorrow’s an easy day.’ And turns out that easy day that you thought was going to be so easy, it rained. Jo: I don’t think it’s ever an easy day, is there? Kevin: No, there’s really not, but every day is unique and every day is special. I don’t know that I’ve always had an appreciation for that. Lastly, I think I’m more aware of the intent that people have had in their own creations. You would go to a museum and you see something that has been painted, and obviously, it’s a masterpiece, and we all recognize the talent and the dedication it would take to do that. But just walking through a small town, a small village, and seeing the very ordinary church that had been constructed, and the less ornate paintings on its walls, that, when that was finished, the whole town must have gathered. The whole church must have gathered and celebrated this more plain, less ornate, less celebrated fresco if you will, and what it meant to them. I think it’s given me a greater sense of understanding of the intent that people have behind what they do, not judging so much the, what I’m looking at, but what must have gone into it and what it must have meant to the people who were there in those moments. Jo: That’s fantastic. Of course, this is the ‘Books and Travel Podcast.’ What are some of your favorite books about pilgrimage or particular walking things? Kevin: I have a few that I’ve finished recently, finished in the last year, that I think are just great. Carolyn Gillespie. Just finished a book called Pilgrim that is a great story of the Camino Frances. Carolyn was a headmaster in a boarding school in England. Scottish lady. And as her children grew and went to university, she ended her professional career. As an empty nester, now is finding herself without children, where children have been such a huge part of her life, both with the school and her own children. And walk the Camino Frances to give herself the headspace to kind of understand who she might be now. It’s a great book. It’s called Pilgrim by Cary Gillespie. And another one that I just love, it’s so empowering, is a book by an Australian author Claude Tranchant and Claude…her name is a giveaway, is a French lady, and she walked, at age 64, by herself, alone, from Vezelay to Santiago de Compostela. Claude was not a walker, and had no sense of navigation, and she got lost. Literally, she got lost, and spent some nights in the middle of France, just in nowhere on the side of the road, sleeping on the road. This little older lady made this journey, and it’s so empowering to me, because there’s a lot of backstory of the things that Claude had put first, ahead of her own self in her life. The Camino showed her what she was truly capable of and what strength she had within. I just love Claude Tranchant’s book. Boots to Bliss is the name of it. And then for people who are thinking about walking, I mentioned it before, but especially in the UK, Andy’s book, Andy Bull’s book, Pilgrim Pathways, is a great pickup, because it’s written in a way that anybody could walk. It’s in England, Scotland and Wales. There are 20 short walks, anywhere from a single day to two to three days. A lot of these are sections of longer walks. For example, we talked about the St. Cuthbert’s Way. Andy outlines a section of that, Northern Saints Walk, that you can make, and he shows you how to extend it. But it’s got all the routes, it’s got all the photos, and you can download the GPS routes if you want, and just put it into your OS Maps, and then all of a sudden, you’re a walker. You’re on these pilgrimages. I just love it. I think it makes what is special to me, walking to these sacred places, so accessible for everyone. So, those are three good ones. Now, there are a lot of Camino books. And I hope to write one myself. I’m almost finished. So, hopefully, I’ll have that for you soon too, Jo. Jo: Fantastic. You’re writing Sacred Steps: A Pilgrimage Journal. Is that right? Kevin: Yes. My first book, Sacred Steps: A Pilgrimage Journal really looks at this intersection of history and faith. The book takes these places that you and I know have been the footpaths of pilgrims for hundreds and now thousands of years, and looks at the historical context as I find myself in some of these places. It’s really a look at the historical and the modern aspect of pilgrimage along five of these routes that I’ve walked. I don’t think I’ve told anybody this, but I got a little Jo Frances Penn envy when you and I were talking, and you told me, ‘Be careful, because one book could lead to two.’ Jo: Indeed. Kevin: I’ve also started working on a fiction, a book, The Pilgrims’ Table, which is actually based loosely upon the stories that I’ve experienced and the stories that have been shared on the podcast, where people have encountered really unique and touching experiences throughout their journeys. I’m looking forward to getting that book. It’s a lot of fun to write fiction, because I’ve never done it before. There’s a lot less fact-checking happening in fiction books, which is great. But it captures that essence of travel as well, and being in these spaces that we all love, and finding something new in discovery, and the things that, unless you go, and you’re in these places, you really just don’t have an appreciation for. The way they smell, the way this flower dances in the morning light, and the way that the road looks when it’s wet from the rain. I think that’s one of the things we love about travel. Especially for me, slow travel, these walks, when you get to experience places and people and cultures in a way that you never would have on the train or on the plane, or even just motoring by on the highway. That’s become something I’m really so grateful for with these long walks, with these pilgrimage journeys. Jo: Fantastic. Where can people find you, and your podcast, and your blog online? Kevin: Thanks, Jo. The ‘Sacred Steps Podcast’ is available on all of your podcast apps. So, join us. Jo Frances Penn’s episode is on there as well, from season two, so you can grab that one. We’re almost finished recording season three, and getting ready to look to recording season four. So, very excited about that. The companion websites, sacredstepspodcast.com, sacredstepsbook.com, and then, slowly but surely, thepilgrimstable.com. Jo: Brilliant. Thanks so much for your time, Kevin. That was great. Kevin: Jo, it’s delightful to talk to you. I can’t wait to hear more about your upcoming journeys and where you’re going, because the way you have made these spaces come alive, both in your books and on these podcast, is really, truly special. So, thanks for doing it, Jo. The post Sacred Steps. Pilgrimage With Kevin Donahue appeared first on Books And Travel. | — | ||||||
Showing 25 of 110
Sponsor Intelligence
Sign in to see which brands sponsor this podcast, their ad offers, and promo codes.
Chart Positions
3 placements across 3 markets.
Chart Positions
3 placements across 3 markets.
